DotNetNuke 6.0.

0 SuperUser Manual

Introduction
This manual has been written for DotNetNuke Professional Edition 6.0+, and DNN Community Edition 6.0+. It provides instructions on how to set-up, create and maintain one or more web sites using DNN. This manual is written to assist users of all levels with using, building and maintaining DNN sites. Note: SuperUser level topics are only included in the SuperUser manual. About DotNetNuke DotNetNuke (DNN) is an open source Portal and Content Management Framework, based on Microsoft's .NET technology. DNN offers a robust, extensible and fully functional framework for the development of a broad range of commercial portal applications. DNN is a world leading open source portal and content management framework, adopted by thousands of organizations worldwide. Typically, portals provide a single web front-end to the many applications within an organization. For example, it may present critical information from the HR, Finance, Marketing, and Customer Service all from one web site. Connected back-end systems also provide businesses with the opportunity to combine information and more easily assist. About DotNetNuke Corp DotNetNuke Corp. (or DNN Corp.) is the creator of DotNetNuke®, the most widely adopted framework for building web sites and web applications on Microsoft ASP.NET. Using DotNetNuke, businesses can quickly develop and deploy interactive, dynamic public web sites, intranets, extranets, and web applications. DNN Corp. provides this framework in both "Community" and "Professional" editions. Founded in 2006, DNN Corp. is privately held. Our mission is to create entrepreneurial opportunities around the world by providing a superior open source web application framework that cultivates a passionate developer community as well as a prosperous commercial ecosystem. For more information, visit http://www.dotnetnuke.com/About/Overview/tabid/822/Default.aspx

Content Overview
A summary of the chapters of this manual and what you will find in each section. 1. Introduction: Provides a brief introduction of DotNetNuke. 2. Installation Wizard: Installing DotNetNuke using the Installation Wizard. 3. Managing Your User Account: How to create and manage user accounts and subscribe to members services. This section is relevant to all users who have a user account to a DNN site. This section also details additional tools typically available to users such as tagging, syndicating and printing content. Note: Administrators manage visitor registration under Admin > Site Settings. See "Enabling/Disabling User Registration" 4. Working with the DNN Control Panel: Overview of the DNN Control Panel which enables authorized users to add and manage site content and perform common tasks. The Control Panel includes the Admin Console which enables Administrators to perform site administration tasks, and the Host Console which enables SuperUsers to perform host level administration tasks for one or more portals. 5. About the Host Console: Lists all of the functionality available on the Host Console page and provides links to tutorials on using each function. 6. Configuring Your Host Settings: This section covers the basic, advanced setting required to configure the Host portal; proxy and SMTP settings for this installation; default settings for additional portals 7. Additional Host Tools: All other Host level tools. In addition to details on using Professional Edition only features. 8. Creating and Managing Portals: How to create additional portals within this installation as well as modify the default hosting settings for individual portals. 9. Installing and Allocating Modules: How to install additional modules and make them available on one or more portals. 10. About the Admin Console: Lists all of the functionality available on the Admin Console page and provides links to tutorials on using each function. 11. Configuring Your Site Settings: This section the basic and advanced site settings required for a portal and details how to quickly build a site using the Site Wizard. 12. Building Your Portal: This section covers the main settings required to set up your portal (site settings) and shows how to quickly build a site using the Site Wizard. It details how to build a site by adding pages and modules as well as common tasks such as managing files using the File Manager. Finally, this section details how to configure content staging (Only available in DotNetNuke Enterprise Edition) and upload staged content.

13. Common Tools: This section details how to use tools which are commonly used throughout DNN. The controls covered in this section are the Link control, the Editor control, the Pager control and the Calendar control. This section also includes the list of replacement tokens. 14. Managing Module Content: This section provides in depth topics on using each of the modules included with DNN. 15. Advanced Site Management: This section provides information on how to add additional functionality to your portal. It consists of these sub-sections:
l

Application Health: Tools to optimize the performance of your portal Extensions: Provides information for Administrators and Module Editors on using the Extension module to view details of the available extensions, as well as how to enable the various authentication (login) methods. Logs: Overview of the Site Log and Log Viewer modules. Multi Language Sites: Enable multiple languages on your site and undertake translations into multiple languages. Recycle Bin: Restore and manage deleted pages and modules Search Optimization: Details four tools (modules) which help you optimize searches both within your site and on search engines. Users and Roles: Adding and managing registered users; restricting access to pages and/or modules using security roles; and imitating user's experience.

l

l

l

l

l

l

16. Managing Site Design: The basics of setting site wide, page and module design using skins (page design) and containers (module design). It consists of these sub-sections:
l

Skin Designer: The Skin Designer module enables Administrators to set container and skin token values. Skins: The Skins module enables Administrators to manage skins and containers which have been installed

l

DotNetNuke 6.0.0 SuperUser Manual Introduction Content Overview Installation Wizard
About the Installation Wizard Using the Auto Method of the Installation Wizard Using the Typical Method of the Installation Wizard Using the Custom Method of the Installation Wizard Creating a Custom Installation Setup

1 2 3 80
80 81 84 92 104

Managing Your User Account
Logging In and Out
Logging into a Site Logging Out of a Site Remembering Login Credentials Retrieving your Password Troubleshooting. Login Failed, Remember That Passwords are Case Sensitive Troubleshooting. Retrieving Password Failed

105
105
105 106 106 107 108 108

Managing Your Profile
Changing your Password Managing your Profile Photo Managing your User Credentials Managing your User Profile Unregistering your User Account

109
109 110 111 112 115

Signing Up for a User Account
Signing up as a Registered User Signing up as a Registered User with a Security Code

116
116 117

Subscribing to Member Services
Subscribing to a Member Service Subscribing to a Service with an RSVP Code Subscribing to a Service with an RSVP Link Unsubscribing from a Member Service

119
119 119 120 121

Working with Content
Minimizing and Maximizing Content Printing Content Subscribing to Syndicated Content Tagging Page Content

121
121 122 122 124

Working With The DNN Control Panel
About the DNN Control Panels Overview of the RibbonBar Control Panel
The Admin Console The Host Console The Modules Console The Pages Console The Tools Console

125
125 125
125 125 126 126 128

Setting the RibbonBar Mode Viewing the RibbonBar Management Menus Overview of the Iconbar Control Panel
Page Functions Section Module Insertion Section Common Tasks Section Console Quick Links

129 131 132
132 133 133 133

Setting the IconBar Mode Maximizing/Minimizing the IconBar

133 134

About The Host Console Configuring Your Host Settings
About the Host Settings Page Uploading a Skin and/or Container Testing Outgoing Email Settings Clearing the DNN Cache Restarting the Application Viewing the DNN Version Upgrade Log Modifying Maximum File Upload Size Basic Settings
Configuration Viewing Configuration Details Viewing Configuration Details Checking for and Downloading DNN Framework Upgrades Updating Site to Current .NET Framework Host Details Setting the Host Portal Setting the Host Details Setting the Fallback Skin Doctype Enabling Remember Me on Login Control Appearance Enabling/Disabling DNN Copyright Credits Enabling/Disabling Custom Error Messages

135 138
138 138 139 140 141 142 143 144
144 144 146 147 149 150 150 151 152 152 153 153 154

Enabling/Disabling Custom Module CSS Classes Setting the Host Skin and Container Setting the Host Edit Skin and Container Payment Settings Setting the Payment Processor for Portal Hosting Setting Child Portal Hosting Fee Enabling/Disabling Anonymous Demo Signup

155 155 156 157 157 158 159

Advanced Settings
Friendly URL Settings Enabling/Disabling Use Friendly URL's Adding a New Friendly URL Rule Editing a Friendly URL Rule Deleting a Friendly URL Rule Proxy Settings Setting the Web Request Timeout Period SMTP Server Settings Setting the SMTP Server and Port Performance Settings Setting Page State Persistence Setting the Module Caching Method Setting the Caching Period for all Portals Overview of Authenticated Cacheability Setting Authenticated Cacheability Setting Content Compression Enabling/Disabling the Whitespace Filter

161
161 161 161 162 163 163 163 164 164 165 165 165 165 166 167 167 168

Compression Settings Setting Excluded Paths Setting the Whitespace Filter JQuery Settings Setting the JQuery Settings

168 168 169 169 169

Other Settings
Request Filter Settings Configuring the Request Filter Enabling/Disabling Request Filter Settings Adding a Request Filter Editing a Request Filter Deleting a Request Filter Other Settings Setting the Default Control Panel Configuring Site Log Settings for all Portals Enabling/Disabling Users Online Setting the Users Online Time Setting the Auto-Unlock Time for User Accounts Managing Allowable File Extensions Enabling/Disabling the Scheduler Disabling/Enabling Event Log Buffer Setting the Online Help URL Enabling/Disabling Online Module Help Enabling/Disabling Auto-Sync of the File System Enabling/Disabling Content Localization

170
170 170 171 171 173 173 174 174 176 177 178 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185

Additional Host Tools
Configuration Manager
About the Configuration Manager Page Modifying Configuration Files Modifying Maximum Request Length Sending Emails without the SMTP Server Merging Configuration Scripts Sending Emails without the SMTP Server

187
187
187 187 188 190 192 196

Dashboard
Viewing Dashboard Information

198
198

Extensions
About the Host Extensions Page Viewing Detailed Module Usage Information Installing Available Extensions Buying More Extensions Fetching List of Purchased Extensions Installing an Extension Using the Install Extension Wizard Uninstalling an Extension Creating a Module from an Existing Control Creating a Module from a Manifest Creating a New Extension Creating a New Module Creating a Module Package Module Defintions and Controls

204
204 205 207 207 208 209 210 210 211 211 212 214 215 221

Adding a New Module Definition Editing a Module Definition Deleting a Module Definition Importing a Module Definition Adding a Module Control Editing a Module Control Deleting a Module Control Managing Extension Settings Managing Authentication System Settings Editing Module Package Settings Enabling/Disabling Premium Module Assigning/Unassigning Premium Modules to Portals Editing Module Extension Settings Edit Core Language Settings Editing Language Files Editing Package Settings for Extensions

221 222 222 223 224 225 226 226 226 227 230 230 231 232 233 233

Lists
About the Lists Page Adding a Parent List Adding a Child List Adding a List Entry Editing a List Entry Deleting a List Entry Deleting a List

234
234 235 237 238 240 241 241

Schedule

242

About the Schedule Page Viewing Schedule History (All Tasks) Viewing Schedule Status Viewing Task History Enabling/Disabling Scheduled Tasks Running a Task Adding an Item to the Schedule Editing a Scheduled Task Deleting a Scheduled Task

242 242 243 245 246 247 248 249 250

SQL
About the SQL Page Executing an SQL Script Uploading and Executing an SQL File

251
251 252 254

Professional Features
Overview of Professional Features Automatically activate your DNN Professional Licenses Manually activate your DNN Professional Licenses Requesting an Extended Trial License Activating an Extended Trial License Deleting a License HTML Editor Manager About the HTML Editor Manager Setting the RadEditor Provider Adding New Editor Configurations Configuring The Editor Provider for Everyone

255
255 256 258 262 262 263 264 264 264 265 267

Overview of the Editor Configuration Settings Editing Editor Configurations Deleting Editor Configurations SharePoint Connector Overview of the SharePoint Connector Module Enabling Full Trust for SharePoint Connector Managing Roles Security for SharePoint Connector Installing SharePoint Connector Enabling SharePoint Breadcrumbs Setting the Synchronization Schedule Synchronizing Files

268 279 280 281 281 282 283 287 293 293 294

Creating And Managing Portals
About the Portals Page Viewing any Portal Switching Sites Adding a Parent Portal Adding a Child Portal Editing Portal Host Settings Setting SSL Settings for a Single Portal Adding Premium Modules to a Portal Adding All Premium Modules to a Portal Removing One or More Premium Modules from a Portal Removing All Premium Modules from a Portal Exporting a Portal Template Uploading a Portal Template to a new DNN Installation

298
298 299 299 300 302 304 306 307 307 308 308 309 310

Deleting Expired Portals Deleting a Portal Portal Aliases
Configuring Portal Alias Settings Adding a Portal Alias Editing a Portal Alias Deleting a Portal Alias

311 311 312
312 313 314 314

Installing And Allocating Modules
Installing and Allocating Modules

316
316

About The Admin Console Configuring Your Site Settings
About the Site Settings Page Basic Settings
Site Details Configuring your Site Details Site Marketing Submitting your Site to Search Engines Submitting your Site Map URL to Google Signing up for AdWords Enabling/Disabling Banner Advertising Appearance Setting the Site Logo Setting the Body Background Setting the Favicon Enabling/Disabling Skin Widgets Setting the Default Portal Skin and Container

317 320
320 322
322 322 324 324 325 326 326 327 327 328 328 329 330

Setting the Edit Skin and Container

330

Advanced Settings
Page Management Enabling/Disabling a Splash Page Setting the Home Page Enabling a Custom Login Page Restoring the Default Login Page Setting a Custom Registration Page Restoring the Default Registration Page Setting a Custom User Profile Page Restoring the Default User Profile Page Setting the Search Results Page Viewing the Home Directory Security Settings Enabling/Disabling User Registration Setting the Primary Administrator Setting the Portal TimeZone Payment Settings Setting the Payment Processor Usability Settings Enabling/Disabling Inline Editing Enabling/Disabling Inline Editing Hiding System Folders Configuring the Control Panel Options Portal Alias, SSL Settings and Host Settings

331
331 331 332 333 334 335 335 336 337 337 338 338 338 339 340 341 341 342 342 343 345 345 346

Stylesheet Editor
About the Stylesheet Editor Editing the Stylesheet Restoring the Default Stylesheet

346
346 347 348

Building Your Portal
Quick Start to Building a Portal Key Concepts
About Pages Adding and Managing Pages About Modules Role Based Access

350
350 350
350 350 351 352

About the Site Wizard Module Using the Site Wizard Pages
About Pages Viewing Any Page Adding A New Page Visible to Administrators only using the RibbonBar Adding a New Page via the Site Settings Page Updating Current Page Moving Page Location (IconBar) Copying a Page Copying Design to Children Pages Using the Ribbonbar Using the Iconbar Editing Page Settings

353 353 359
359 359 359 360 362 363 363 365 365 366 366

Copying Permissions to Descendant Pages Using the RibbonBar Using the Iconbar Exporting a Page Importing a New Page Replacing the Current Page with a Page Template (Import Page) Deleting a Page Page Settings Page Details Settings for New Pages Page Details Settings for Existing Pages Setting Page Permissions About Page Permissions Professional Edition Permissions Community Edition Permissions Advanced Settings for New Pages Advanced Settings for Existing Pages Localization Settings for New Pages

367 367 368 368 369 371 372 373 373 375 377 381 381 382 383 387 391

Modules
About Modules Module Actions Menu Opening the Module Actions Menu Function of Menu Icons Adding a New Module (RibbonBar) Adding an Existing Module (RibbonBar) Adding an Existing Module (Iconbar)

392
392 393 393 395 399 402 403

Editing Module Title Inline Adding Module Content Editing Module Content Deleting Module Content Deleting a Module Module Settings About Module Settings Module Settings Configuring Basic Module Settings Configuring Advanced Module Settings Viewing Added To Pages Module Settings Permissions About Module Permissions Setting Module Permissions Page Settings Configuring Basic Page Settings for Modules Configuring Cache Settings for a Module Configuring Advanced Page Settings for a Module

404 406 406 407 408 408 408 409 409 410 415 415 415 417 419 419 423 424

Content Staging
About the Content Staging Module Creating a Staging Portal Configuring Content Staging Pairing Your Portals Publishing Staged Content

425
425 425 426 426 428

Common Tools

431

Working with the Calendar
Default Calendar Module Calendar

431
431 432

File Upload About the Pager Replacement Tokens Upload New Extension Package Editor
About the Editor Adding Basic Text using Editor Adding Rich Text Using The Editor Pasting HTML Content Viewing Content in Design or HTML View RadEditor About the RadEditor Modifying Editor Size Viewing Word and Character Count DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider About the DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider Toolbars Main Toolbar Check Spelling Insert Toolbar Dropdown Toolbar Formatting Toolbar

434 434 434 436 436
436 437 438 439 440 441 441 443 444 445 445 446 446 447 448 449 450

Content Toolbar Managing Images and Media Using the Resource Manager Inserting a Document Setting Document Properties Inserting Flash Inserting Media Inserting Images Editing an Image Working with the Image Editor Creating an Image Map Setting Image Properties Editing an Image Map Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying Managing Links and Anchors Adding an Email Link Adding a Page Link Adding an Anchor Link Adding a URL Link Linking to a Portal Page Viewing Link Tracking Report Working with the RADCalendar Selecting a Date Editing an Email or URL Link Editing a Portal Page Link

451 452 452 454 455 456 458 460 461 462 463 465 468 469 470 470 471 473 474 475 476 478 478 480 480

Deleting a Link Adding an Anchor Editing an Anchor Deleting an Anchor Managing Tables Inserting a Table Editing a Table Setting Table Properties Showing/Hiding Table Border Setting Cell Properties Setting Table Accessibility Using the Table Wizard Setting the Table Design Deleting a Table Managing Templates Inserting a Template Saving a Template TelerikEditorProvider Overview of the TelerikEditorProvider Toolbars Actions Toolbar Check Spelling Color and CSS Toolbar Content Toolbar Fonts and Font Size Toolbar

480 481 481 482 482 482 483 484 486 487 491 494 494 496 496 496 497 498 498 499 499 500 501 502 503

Formatting Toolbar Paragraph Toolbar Formatting Code Block Resources Toolbar Tables and Tools Toolbar General Tools Formatting Toolbar Formatting Code Block Resources Toolbar Tables and Tools Toolbar Managing Images and Media Using the Resource Manager Inserting a Document Setting Document Properties Inserting Flash Inserting Media Inserting Images Editing an Image Working with the Image Editor Creating an Image Map Setting Image Properties Editing an Image Map Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying Managing Links and Anchors Adding an Email Link

503 504 504 506 507 509 509 510 512 513 515 515 517 518 518 520 521 522 523 524 526 527 528 529 529

Adding a Page Link Adding an Anchor Link Adding a URL Link Viewing Link Tracking Report Working with the RADCalendar Selecting a Date Editing a Link Deleting a Link Adding an Anchor Editing an Anchor Deleting an Anchor Managing Tables Inserting a Table Editing a Table Setting Table Properties Showing/Hiding Table Border Setting Cell Properties Setting Table Accessibility Using the Table Wizard Setting the Table Design Using the Style Builder Deleting a Table Managing Templates Inserting a Template Saving a Template

530 532 533 533 535 536 537 537 538 538 539 539 539 541 542 544 545 547 548 549 550 551 552 552 553

Link Control
About the Link Control Module Editors Setting a File Link Uploading and Linking to a File Setting a Page Link Setting a URL Link Selecting an Existing URL Link Adding a User Profile Link Setting No Link Setting a Link to Open in the Same Web Browser Window Setting a Link to Open in a New Web Browser Window Enabling/Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks About the Link Log Enabling the Link Log Disabling the Link Log Troubleshooting: Restricted File Type Warning Message Administrators Deleting a URL from the Links URL List

555
555 556 556 557 558 559 559 560 561 562 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 568

Managing Module Content
Managing Module Content Account Login
About the Account Login Module All Users Logging in with a Verification Code

569
569 570
570 571 571

Logging in with a Security Code Logging in with LiveID Logging in with a Verification Code and a Security Code Administrators Editing the Password Reminder Email Enabling a Custom Login Page Restoring the Default Login Page Setting Account Login Module as Visible to Unauthenticated Users Only Troubleshooting: Cannot Access the Login Page (Friendly URL's Disabled) Troubleshooting: Cannot Access the Login Page (Friendly URL's Enabled)

572 573 576 578 578 579 580 581 581 581

Announcements
About the Announcements Module Module Editors Adding an Announcement Editing an Announcement Modifying the Announcement Publish Date Deleting an Announcement Settings Setting Announcement History By Days Setting the Description Length for Search and RSS Setting the Default View for Announcements Loading the Default Template Modifying the Announcement Templates

582
582 583 583 586 586 587 587 587 587 588 588 589

Banners
About the Banners Module

591
591

Module Editors About Banner Types Displaying a Banner Editing Banner Options Displaying Banners Horizontally Displaying Banners Vertically Setting Banner Spacing Setting the Banner Border Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying

592 592 595 596 596 597 597 599 601

Blog
About the Blog Module Configuration Laying out the Blog Modules Enabling Users to Create Blogs Enabling Bloggers Blog Management Rights Adding a Blog Module Part Configuring Blog Tag Settings Modifying Recent Comments Template Creating a Personal Blog Page Blog Categories Adding Blog Categories Editing Blog Categories Deleting Blog Categories Blog Module Options Configuring Basic Settings for the Blog Module

603
603 605 605 605 608 608 609 610 611 612 612 613 614 615 615

Configuring Blog Comment Settings Configuring Blog Search Engine Optimization Settings Configuring RSS Settings for Blogs Windows Live Writer Settings Loading Additional Blog Files to the Web browser Configuring Advanced Settings for the Blog Module Migrating Child Blogs Comment Settings Managing Comment Avatars All Users Viewing All Recent Entries Viewing Blog Entries by Tags Viewing Blog Entries for a Month Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog Searching Blogs Viewing Blog Comments Viewing Recent Comments Adding a Blog Comment (Authenticated Users) Adding a Blog Comment (Unauthenticated Users) Editing Your Comments Deleting Your Comments Adding Social Bookmarks Bloggers Blogging

617 622 622 623 624 625 626 627 627 628 628 629 629 630 630 631 632 633 635 637 639 641 641 642 642

Viewing Your Blog Adding an Advanced Blog Entry Adding a Basic Blog Entry Editing a Blog Entry Publishing a Blog Entry Unpublishing a Blog Entry Deleting a Blog Entry Creating Your Blog Creating a Parent Blog (Create My Blog) Creating a Child Blog Managing Your Blog Editing Blog Title and Description Enabling/Disabling Blog Syndication Integrating With Twitter Managing Blog Comment Options Managing Trackback Options Regenerating Blog Permalinks Setting Blog Date, Time and Culture Options Setting Blog Visibility (Public or Private) Setting a Bloggers Identity Setting MetaWeblog Options Managing Comments Approving a Blog Comment Editing a Blog Comment Deleting a Blog Comment

642 643 648 650 652 654 657 659 659 661 663 663 664 665 666 668 668 669 670 671 672 673 673 674 674

Deleting all Unapproved Comments SuperUsers Troubleshooting: Incorrect Blog By Month Results

675 676 676

Chat
About the Chat Module Chat Members Chatting in the Chat Room Formatting your Chat Message Settings Setting Chat Permissions Setting Chat Formatting and Styles Setting Chat Room Speed and History

676
676 677 677 678 680 680 682 683

Commerce
About the Commerce Module Configuring the Commerce Module Purchasing a Product Product Display Shopping Cart Billing & Shipping Review & Payment Order Completion FAQ's Control Panel Commerce Control Panel - Dashboard Commerce Control Panel - Orders

684
684 685 688 688 688 689 691 693 693 698 698 699

Commerce Control Panel - Products Commerce Control Panel - Discounts Commerce Control Panel - Customers Configuring Module Options & Settings

703 709 711 712

Console
About The Console Module Settings Configuring Console Settings

716
716 717 717

Document Library
About the Document Library Module Configuration Creating a Library from Scratch (Adding a Parent Folder) Adding the Parent Category to Library Importing a Library Contributors Managing Categories Adding a Sub-Category Editing Category Settings Deleting a Category Configuring General Settings for Categories Configuring Security Settings for Categories Managing Documents Adding a Document Editing a Document Deleting a Document

719
719 720 720 722 724 727 727 727 728 729 730 732 732 732 736 738

Downloading a Document Re-Submitting a Document Viewing Statistics Enabling Document Tracking Managing Document Tracking Adding a Document Version Managing Document Version Info Viewing Media Viewing Media Managing Folders Adding a Sub-Folder Editing Folder Settings Deleting a Folder Configuring General Settings for Folders Configuring Security Settings for Folders Setting User Security for Folders Moderation Moderating Uploaded Files Deleting Unmoderated Files Moderation Filter Options Settings Configuring Local Settings - Document Grid Configuring Local Settings - Navigation Tree Configuring Global Settings Open-Document Module Styles

740 741 742 744 745 745 748 749 750 750 750 752 752 753 755 756 758 758 759 761 762 762 766 771 775

Documents
About the Documents Module All Users Viewing a Document Downloading a Document Module Editors Adding a Document Editing a Document Changing the Document Owner Deleting a Document Troubleshooting: Security Permissions Warning Troubleshooting: The File Been Deleted Settings Enabling/Disabling the Categories List Setting the Default Folder for Documents Enabling/Disabling the Title Link Setting the Visibility of Document Columns Setting the Order of Document Columns Enabling Manual Document Sorting Adding Document Sorting by Column Name Enabling/Disabling Users to Sort Documents Administrators Formatting the Documents Module SuperUsers Adding Document Categories

777
777 779 779 779 780 780 782 782 783 784 786 787 787 788 789 790 791 793 794 795 796 796 796 796

Events
About the Events Module Configuration Configuring the Events Module All Users Changing the Event View Navigating to Events (Month View) Navigating to Events (Week View) Viewing Event Details (List View) Viewing Event Details (Month View) Viewing Event Details (Week View) Exporting an Event to your Desktop Requesting Event Reminder Subscribing to New Event Notifications Viewing Enrolled Users Enrolling for a Free Event Enrolling for a Paid Event Viewing Your Event Enrollments Canceling an Event Enrollment Module Editors Adding an Event Editing an Event Copying an Existing Event as a New Event Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Image

796
796 798 798 798 798 800 801 802 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 810 811 812 813 813 816 819 821 822

Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events Copying an Existing Event Series as a New Event Series Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment Enrolling User to an Event Managing Existing User Enrollments Deleting an Event or Event Series Global Category Editor Adding Event Categories Editing Event Categories Deleting Event Categories Global Location Editor Adding Event Locations Editing Event Locations Deleting Event Locations Moderator About Moderating Events and Enrollments Approving All Moderated Enrollments Approving All Moderated Events Approving Moderated Enrollments Approving Moderated Events Denying All Moderated Enrollments Denying All Moderated Events Denying Moderated Enrollments Denying Moderated Events Editing and Approving a Moderated Event

825 826 829 831 832 832 834 834 835 836 836 836 837 837 838 838 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846

Moderating Multiple Enrollments Moderating Multiple Events Edit Settings Configuring Event General Settings Configuring Event Look and Feel Settings Configuring Detail View Settings Configuring Event Month View Settings Configuring Week View Settings Configuring the Event List Settings Configuring the Event Email Settings Configuring Event Reminder Settings Configuring the Enrollment Settings Configuring Moderation Settings Configuring the SubCalendar Settings Configuring Custom Field Settings Configuring Tooltip Settings Configuring RSS Settings Configuring Calendar Export Settings Configuring Template Settings Troubleshooting: Unable to Add New Events to the Events Module Settings Setting Unique Event Permissions SuperUsers Troubleshooting: Event Notifications Not Sending Troubleshooting: Cannot Add New Events

846 847 848 848 850 852 852 854 854 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 862 863 864 865 865 865 866 866 866

FAQ
About the FAQs Module All Users Viewing an FAQ Answer Module Editors Adding an FAQ Editing an FAQ Deleting an FAQ Adding an FAQ Category Editing an FAQ Category Deleting an FAQ Category Settings Setting the Default Sorting Order of FAQ's Editing the FAQ Templates FAQ Token List

866
866 867 867 868 868 869 870 870 871 872 872 872 873 875

Feed Explorer
About the Feed Explorer Module Settings Displaying DNN Solutions in the Feed Explorer Displaying News in the Feed Explorer Displaying Custom OPML using a Custom URL or File Displaying Custom OPML using Custom Text Setting the Feed Explorer Theme

875
875 876 876 878 879 880 881

Feedback
About the Feedback Module

882
882

Configuration Configuring the Feedback Module All Users Sending Feedback Feedback Comments Settings Configuring Comments View Settings Displaying Feedback for all Categories Configuring Comments View Settings Displaying Feedback for a Single Category Displaying/Hiding Feedback Email Displaying/Hiding Feedback Name Displaying/Hiding Feedback Subject About the Feedback Comments Module Manage Feedback Lists Adding Feedback Categories Adding Feedback Categories with Email Values Editing Feedback Categories Re-ordering Feedback Categories Activating/Deactivating Feedback Categories Deleting Feedback Categories Adding Feedback Subjects Editing Feedback Subjects Re-ordering Feedback Subjects Activating/Deactivating Feedback Subjects

884 884 884 884 887 887 887 888 888 891 891 892 893 894 895 895 896 896 897 898 898 899 900 900 901

Deleting Feedback Subjects Moderate Feedback Posts Moderating Pending Feedback Posts Reclassifying Moderated Feedback Settings Setting Feedback Permissions Configuring Email Addresses and Options Settings Configuring Feedback Category Settings Configuring Form and Fields Settings Configuring Submission and Security Settings Configuring Moderation and Feedback Management Settings SuperUsers Troubleshooting: Feedback Doesn't Send

902 902 902 904 905 905 906 907 908 910 911 913 913

File Manager
About the File Manager Module Getting Familiar with the File Manager Module All Users Navigating to and Selecting Folders Synchronizing Folders Navigating to Files Filtering Files Refreshing All Files within a Folder Reordering Files Downloading a File Module Editors

913
913 915 918 918 919 919 920 921 922 922 923

Overview of Folder Types Adding an Amazon S3 Folder Type Adding a Windows Azure Folder Type Folder Editors Uploading Files Unzipping Compressed Files Synchronizing Files within a Folder Selecting Files Copying Files Moving Files Deleting a File Deleting Multiple Files Adding a New Folder Deleting a Folder Renaming a File Setting the Read Only Property of a File Setting the Hidden Property of a File Setting the Archiving and Indexing Property of a File Administrators Overview of Folder Security Settings Community Edition Permissions Professional Edition Permissions Assigning Folder Permissions by Role Assigning Folder Permissions to a User Removing Folder Permissions 923 924 926 928 928 929 931 932 933 935 936 937 938 940 940 941 942 944 945 945 945 946 947 947 948 .

Form And List About the Form And List Module Configuration Advanced Column Options Advanced Calculated Column Options Advanced Currency Column Options Advanced Date and Time Column Options Advanced Date Column Options Advanced Decimal Column Options Advanced Download Column Options Advanced Email Column Options Advanced Image Column Options Advanced Integer Column Options Advanced Look-Up Column Options Advanced Rich Text (Html) Column Options Advanced Separator Column Options Advanced Text Column Options Advanced Time Column Options Advanced True/False Column Options Advanced URL Column Options Advanced User Profile Link Column Options Column Settings Configuring Image Column Settings Configuring URL Column Settings Configuring User Profile Link Settings 948 948 950 950 950 952 954 956 958 961 962 964 966 967 968 970 971 973 974 975 977 978 978 979 980 .

Email Settings Setting Email Settings Form Settings Configuring Form Settings List Settings Editing Current XSL Script Editing the XSLT of a Self-Made Stylesheet Generating a New XSL Transformation for a self made stylesheet Rendering a List using built-in Stylesheets Rendering a List using Self Made Stylesheets Rendering a List using the Default Grid Table Setting List Search and Filter Options Setting List Sorting Options Creating a Form Creating a List Applying a Template Re-ordering List or Form Columns Editing List or Form Columns Deleting List or Form Columns Configuring a Form Configuring a List Saving Configuration As Default Resetting to the Default Configuration All Users Re-ordering List Records 980 980 983 983 985 985 987 989 995 998 998 999 1000 1002 1004 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1012 1014 1014 1014 1014 .

Form Editors Viewing Form Records Editing Form Records List Editors Overview of Data Types Adding a List Record Adding a List Record when a Security Code is Required Editing a List Record Showing All Data as XML Deleting a List Record Deleting All List Records Settings Enabling/Disabling CAPTCHA for Anonymous Users Enabling/Disabling Entry of Markup Code Scripts Hiding/Displaying System Fields Negating Unique Column Permissions for Administrators Saving a Template Setting Form Permissions Setting List Permissions Enabling/Disabling Users to Only Manage Their Own Records Setting Maximum Records Per User 1015 1015 1015 1016 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1021 1022 1022 1024 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1030 1031 Forum About the Forum Module All Users Go to Forum Home Page 1032 1032 1033 1033 .

Navigating to Forums & Forum Groups Go to a Forum Group Go to a Forum Navigating Using Breadcrumbs Navigating Threads Searching One or More Forums Searching a Single Forum Viewing any Post Viewing Latest Posts Filtering Threads from a Single Forum Viewing a Forum as an RSS Feed Downloading a Post Attachment Forum Members Viewing your Posts Adding a Forum Post (Basic) Adding a Forum Post (Advanced) Editing your Forum Posts Quoting a Post Replying to a Post Reporting a Post Deleting a Forum Post Viewing your Threads Adding a Bookmark to a Thread Rating a Thread Moving a Thread 1034 1034 1034 1035 1036 1037 1039 1040 1041 1041 1042 1044 1045 1045 1046 1049 1051 1052 1055 1056 1059 1061 1062 1063 1064 .

Splitting a Thread Setting Thread Status Editing your Forum Profile Editing your Forum Signature Editing your Forum Settings Manage Notifications Managing Forum Bookmarks Forum Moderators Navigating to the Moderator Post Queue Approving a Post Approving and Editing a Post Approving and Replying to a Post Approving and Splitting a Post awaiting Moderation Deleting a Post awaiting Moderation Managing Reported Posts Viewing Banned Users Viewing Reported Users Forum Administrators Content Enabling/Disabling Word Filtering Adding a Filtered Word Editing Filtered Words Filtering Filter Words Deleting a Filtered Word Managing Rating of Threads 1065 1067 1068 1068 1069 1070 1070 1071 1071 1072 1073 1075 1077 1078 1080 1081 1081 1082 1082 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 .

Managing Forum User Ranking Managing Popular Thread Status Control Panel Configuring General Forum Settings Configuring the Forum Community Management Settings Enabling/Disabling Attachments Managing RSS Feeds Configuring the Forum Search Engine Optimization Email Managing Email Settings Managing Email Templates Viewing Email Subscribers Report Forums Adding a Forum Group Editing a Forum Group Re-Ordering Forum Groups Deleting a Forum Group Adding a Forum Editing a Forum Enabling/Disabling a Forum Re-ordering Forums Setting Forum Email Setting Forum Options Setting Forum Permissions Loading Existing Forum Permissions 1088 1089 1090 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1095 1096 1098 1099 1099 1100 1101 1101 1102 1105 1105 1106 1107 1108 1110 1112 .

Deleting a Forum Users Searching Forum User Accounts Editing any Forum User's Profile Editing any Forum User's Signature Configuring System Avatars Enabling User Avatars Editing Global User Settings Configuring the Default Forum User Interface Overview of the Forum Administration Page Navigating to the Forum Admin Page Settings Setting Additional Forum Permissions Setting a Single or Aggregated Forum Group Default Forum 1114 1115 1115 1117 1118 1120 1121 1123 1124 1125 1127 1128 1128 1129 1130 Gallery About the Gallery Module All Users Setting Gallery View Sorting Gallery Files Opening Albums Opening the Album Menu Opening the File Menu Viewing and Manipulating an Image Viewing Image Slideshow 1131 1131 1132 1132 1134 1135 1137 1139 1141 1143 .

Viewing Exif Metadata Downloading a File Viewing File Ratings Rating Files Configuration Configuring Admin Settings Configuring Display Settings Configuring Feature Settings Configuring Private Gallery Gallery Themes Module Editors Adding a Parent Album Adding a Sub-Album Editing Albums Deleting a Sub-Album Adding a File to an Album Adding a Watermark Editing File Details Editing Image Properties Synchronizing Album Files Refresh Gallery Deleting a File from an Album 1145 1147 1149 1151 1153 1153 1154 1157 1159 1161 1167 1167 1168 1170 1171 1172 1174 1175 1177 1180 1182 1183 Help About the Help Module Configuration 1185 1185 1186 .

Configuring the Help Module All Users Viewing a Tutorial Searching for a Tutorial Module Editors Adding a Tutorial Editing a Tutorial Changing Tutorial Categories Re-ordering Tutorials Re-ordering Tutorials Alphabetically Deleting a Tutorial Troubleshooting: Categories Not Displayed on the Edit Tutorials Page Settings Importing Help Data Help Category Module Editors Adding the First Category Adding a Child Category Adding a Sibling Category Editing Category Details Managing the Visibility of a Category Re-ordering Categories on the Same Level Changing the Parent of a Category Changing a Child Category to a Parent Category Deleting a Category 1186 1187 1187 1188 1188 1188 1190 1191 1192 1192 1193 1194 1195 1195 1197 1197 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 .

HTML About the HTML Module Module Editors Adding/Editing Text Inline Adding Content to HTML Module Adding Replacement Tokens Previewing Editor Content Viewing Previous Versions of Content Managing My Workflow Tasks Publishing a Draft Rolling Back Content Administrators Deleting a Content Version Enabling/Disabling Inline Editor Settings Enabling/Disabling Token Replacement Setting a Workflow Setting a Workflow as Default for Site 1206 1206 1207 1207 1208 1209 1211 1212 1214 1214 1214 1215 1215 1216 1217 1217 1217 1218 HTML Pro About the HTML Pro Module Module Editors Adding/Editing Text Inline Adding Basic Text and HTML Adding Content to HTML Pro Module Adding Rich Text 1219 1219 1220 1220 1221 1222 1223 .

Pasting HTML Content Adding Replacement Tokens Previewing Editor Content Viewing Previous Versions of Content Managing My Workflow Tasks Approving Content Approving or Rejecting Content Locking/UnLocking HTML Pro Module Content Publishing a Draft Rolling Back Content Administrators Setting Maximum Version History Configuring Admin Workflow Settings Adding a Workflow Adding a Workflow State Editing a Workflow State Activating/Deactivating a Workflow Deleting a Content Version Settings Enabling/Disabling Token Replacement Setting a Workflow 1224 1226 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1236 1237 1239 1240 1243 1244 1245 1245 1245 1246 IFrame About the IFrame Module Module Editors Displaying an External URL in an IFrame 1248 1248 1249 1249 .

Displaying an Internal File in an IFrame Displaying a Site Page in an IFrame Editing an IFrame Adding QueryString Parameters Editing QueryString Parameters Deleting a QueryString Parameter Administrators Troubleshooting: IFrame Redirects To Source web site 1252 1255 1258 1259 1261 1262 1263 1263 Links About the Links Module All Users Viewing a Link Description set as an Info Link Module Editors Adding a Link Editing a Link displayed Horizontally or Vertically Editing a Link in a Drop-Down List Deleting a Link displayed Horizontally or Vertically Deleting a Link displayed in a Drop-Down List Settings Displaying Links in a Drop-Down List Displaying Links Vertically Displaying Links Horizontally Displaying the Description as a Link Setting Wrapping or No Wrapping for Links Displaying an Icon beside Links 1264 1264 1265 1265 1265 1265 1267 1268 1268 1269 1270 1270 1270 1271 1271 1272 1272 .

Map About the Map Module Module Editors Getting Started with the Map Module Design/Architecture Setting the Standard Interface Configuring the Directory Settings Configuring the Positional Settings Configuring the Time Lapse Settings Configuring the Geo Locator Settings Setting a User/Membership Map Setting Standard Data Points Managing Map Data Adding External Data Sources Adding Custom Queries 1273 1273 1274 1274 1277 1277 1281 1284 1285 1286 1287 1287 1288 1290 1294 Marketplace About the Marketplace Module Working with the Marketplace Module 1296 1296 1297 Media About the Media Module Configuring The Media Module Module Editors Displaying an Image with an optional Link Displaying Video and Flash Displaying a Sound File 1300 1300 1301 1301 1301 1305 1309 .

Displaying Embedded Code Displaying Media using OEmbed Link Editing Media Options Troubleshooting: Restricted File Type Warning Message 1309 1311 1312 1312 Messaging About the Messaging Module Module Editors Viewing a Message Composing a Message Replying to a Message Editing/Sending a Draft Message Deleting a Message Settings Setting Messaging Template Settings 1313 1313 1313 1313 1314 1315 1317 1318 1319 1319 My Modules About the My Modules Module 1320 1320 News Feeds (RSS) About the News Feeds (RSS) Module Module Editors Adding News Feeds Adding News Feeds from Syndicated Modules Editing News Feeds Refreshing the Feed Cache Deleting News Feeds Settings 1321 1321 1322 1322 1326 1328 1328 1329 1329 .

Setting Default News Caching Configuring News Retry Settings Setting News Layout Setting the Number and Details of News Items Configuring Feed Retrieval Settings 1329 1330 1331 1335 1336 Newsletters About the Newsletters Module Sending a Basic Newsletter Sending a Personalized Newsletter without Tokens Sending a Newsletter with Tokens Sending a Newsletter to a Relay Service Sending Newsletters in a User's Preferred Language The Bulk Email Report 1337 1337 1340 1343 1344 1347 1348 1350 Pages (Tabs) About the Pages (Tabs) module Page Editors Viewing any Page (Pages Module) Editing Page Settings using the Pages Module Editing Page Settings via the Pages Module Deleting a Page (Pages Module) Hiding/Showing a Page in Site Navigation Enabling/Disabling Page Link (Pages Module) Administrators Adding One or More Pages (Pages Module) Moving Page Position in Menu 1351 1351 1353 1353 1354 1360 1361 1362 1364 1366 1366 1369 .

Net Data Source Setting the Microsoft SQL Server Data Source 1371 1371 1372 1372 1373 1374 1377 1378 1379 1380 1382 1382 1382 1382 1383 1383 1384 1385 1385 1387 1387 1389 1391 .SuperUsers Managing Host Tabs 1370 1370 Reports About the Reports Module Settings About the Data Source Settings Warning Message Configuring Display and Caching Settings Configuring the Chart Visualizer Settings Configuring the Grid Visualizer Settings Configuring the HTML Template Visualizer Settings Configuring the XSL Transformation Visualizer Settings Configuring the Microsoft Report Viewer Visualizer Settings Special Note Regarding Caching SuperUsers Overview of Data Sources About Parameterized Queries Managing Reports Module Add-Ins Installing the Chart Visualizer Installing the Microsoft Report Viewer Visualizer Installing the UDT Data Source Working with the User Defined Table Module Data Source Setting Converter Settings Setting the DNN Data Source Setting the Generic ADO.

More Details on the Testing and Showing Source Options Viewing Built-In Components Sample Report: Charting Users in Roles Sample Report: Counting Users In Each Role CSS Formatting Troubleshooting: Upgrading Yellow Warning 1393 1394 1395 1396 1399 1399 Repository About the Repository Module All Users Searching for an Item Filtering Items by Category Sorting Items Viewing an Item Image Viewing Comments Viewing Item Ratings Downloading a File Adding Comments to an Item Rating an Item Configuration Configuring the Repository Module (Default Settings) Contributors Uploading a File (Default and Nifty Skins) Uploading a Business Card Uploading a Directory Listing Uploading a File Listing 1400 1400 1403 1403 1404 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1411 1412 1412 1415 1417 1419 .

Uploading a File (Nifty Toggle Skin) Uploading a Portfolio Listing Uploading a Slide Image Uploading a Video Listing Uploading an Article Editing an Item Deleting an Item Troubleshooting: Restricted File Type Warning Message Moderators Overview of the Repository Moderator Role Approving an Item Editing and Approving an Item Rejecting an Item Settings Setting the Repository Design Adding a Repository Category Editing Repository Categories Reordering Repository Categories Enabling/Disabling the All Items Category Deleting a Repository Category Adding Attributes Editing Attributes Deleting Attributes Setting Repository Role Access Setting the Repository Skin 1420 1423 1425 1427 1429 1431 1431 1434 1434 1434 1435 1436 1437 1439 1439 1442 1442 1443 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1450 .

Administrators Editing Item Comments Deleting Item Comments SuperUsers Setting the Folders to Store Repository Files Skin Designs Overview of the Articles Repository Overview of the Blog Repository Overview of the Business Card Repository Overview of the Default and Nifty Repositories Overview of the Directory Repository Overview of the File List Repository Overview of the Nifty Toggle Repository Overview of the Nifty Video Repository Overview of the Portfolio Repository Overview of the Repository Dashboard Module Overview of the Slides Repository Repository Dashboard Displaying Repository Categories Displaying the Latest or Top Items Overview of the Repository Dashboard Module 1451 1451 1454 1454 1454 1455 1455 1456 1457 1458 1460 1461 1462 1463 1465 1466 1467 1468 1468 1469 1470 Search Input About the Search Input Module All Users Performing a search using the Search Input module 1471 1471 1471 1471 .

Settings Configuring the Search Input Module Designing the Search Input Module 1472 1472 1472 Search Results About the Search Results Module Settings Configuring the Search Results Module 1473 1473 1474 1474 Store About the Store Module Suite Important Information About Roles Configuration Configuring the Store Modules Important Information About Roles Working with Product Images Templating and Design Guide Customers Viewing Products Viewing Product Details Viewing Product Reviews Adding a Product Review Buying a Product Now Adding a Product to the Cart Viewing Products in your Cart Managing Products in your Cart Proceeding to the Checkout 1475 1475 1478 1482 1482 1486 1490 1491 1491 1491 1492 1493 1494 1496 1497 1498 1500 1501 .

Order Review Completing Checkout .Atos Payment Completing Checkout .Authorize.Completing Checkout .Managing Contact Addresses Completing Checkout .PayPal Payment Canceling an Order Viewing your Order History Downloading Virtual Products Catalog Managers Categories Adding a Product Category Editing a Product Category Deleting a Product Category Managing Product Category Archiving Products Adding a Product Adding a Virtual Product Editing a Product Deleting a Product Managing Featured Products Managing Product Archiving Managing Special Offer Pricing on Products (Store Admin Only) Reviews Filtering Product Reviews 1501 1503 1504 1504 1505 1506 1508 1509 1509 1510 1510 1510 1512 1512 1514 1515 1515 1521 1526 1526 1527 1529 1531 1532 1532 .Email Payment Completing Checkout .Net Payment Completing Checkout .

Approving Product Reviews Editing Product Reviews Unapproving Product Reviews Deleting Product Reviews Category Managers Adding a Product Category (Category Manager) Editing a Parent Category (Category Manager) Deleting a Parent Category (Category Manager) Order Managers Viewing a Customer Order Filtering Customer Orders Modifying Order Status Canceling Customer Orders Product Managers Adding a Product (Product Manager) Editing a Product Setting Special Offer Pricing on Products Managing Products (Product Manager) Settings Catalog Settings Managing Store Catalog General Settings Managing Category Product Settings Managing Search Settings Managing Sort Settings Managing Product Details Settings 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1537 1537 1538 1538 1538 1539 1540 1542 1543 1543 1543 1544 1545 1546 1546 1546 1553 1555 1556 1557 .

Managing Also Bought Product Settings Managing New Product Settings Managing Featured Product Settings Managing Popular Product Settings Menu Settings Managing Category Menu Settings Store Administrators Shipping Settings Adding Shipping Rates Editing a Shipping Rate Deleting a Shipping Rate Tax Settings Disabling Taxation on Orders Managing Taxation on Orders Setting Store Info Configuring Atos as the Payment Gateway Configuring Authorize.Net as the Payment Gateway Enabling/Disabling Authorize.Net Test Mode Setting the Store Gateway as Email Only Configuring PayPal as the Payment Gateway Provider Enabling/Disabling PayPal Sandbox 1558 1559 1561 1562 1564 1564 1565 1565 1565 1566 1567 1567 1567 1568 1568 1572 1572 1573 1574 1574 1576 Survey About the Survey Module All Users Submitting Survey Response 1577 1577 1578 1578 .

Viewing Survey Results Module Editors Adding a Question Editing a Survey Question Deleting a Survey Question Settings Setting Survey Closing Date Setting the Maximum Graph Width Setting Vote Tracking Setting Survey Results as Public or Private Modifying the Survey Result Template List of the Survey Template Tokens Exporting Survey Results Data Clearing Survey Results Data 1579 1580 1580 1582 1582 1583 1583 1584 1586 1587 1588 1589 1589 1590 Users Online About the Users Online Module Settings Setting the Member Details 1591 1591 1592 1592 Vendors About the Vendors Module All Users Changing the Records per Page Filtering Vendors by Company Name Filtering Vendors by Unauthorized Vendors Searching Vendors by Company Name 1593 1593 1594 1594 1594 1595 1595 .

Searching Vendors by Email Viewing All Vendor Accounts Module Editors Affiliate Accounts About Vendor Affiliate Accounts Adding an Affiliate Referral Account Editing an Affiliate Referral Account Deleting an Affiliate Referral Account Sending Notification of Affiliate Referral Account Vendor Accounts Adding a New Vendor Editing/Adding Vendor Account Details Authorizing/Unauthorizing a Vendor Account Deleting a Vendor Account Deleting all Unauthorized Vendors Vendor Banners Adding an Image Banner to a Vendor Adding a Text Banner to a Vendor Adding a Script Banner to a Vendor Editing a Vendor Banner Deleting a Vendor Banner Viewing the Clicks and Views for a Banner Emailing Banner Status to Vendor 1596 1597 1598 1598 1598 1598 1599 1600 1600 1600 1600 1602 1605 1605 1606 1607 1607 1610 1613 1614 1615 1615 1616 View Profile About the View Profile Module 1616 1616 .

Whats New About the What's New Module 1617 1617 Wiki About the Wiki Module Configuration Configuring Wiki Editing Permissions Configuring Notification Settings Enabling Comments on All Wiki Pages Allowing Wiki Comments for Individual Pages Enabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages Disabling Comments on Individual Wiki Pages Enabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages Disabling Ratings on All Wiki Pages Allowing Wiki Ratings for Individual Pages Enabling Ratings for an Existing Wiki Page Disabling Ratings on Individual Wiki Pages All Users Go to Wiki Home Navigating the Wiki Viewing all Wiki Pages Locating Wiki Topics without Pages Searching the Wiki Viewing Comments Viewing Ratings Viewing Recent Changes 1619 1619 1620 1620 1621 1623 1624 1625 1628 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1634 1634 1635 1635 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 .

Viewing Topic History Adding a Comment Adding a Rating Module Editors Adding a Wiki Page Adding Content to a Topic Editing a Wiki Page Restoring Previous Version Deleting a Wiki Page Deleting a Comment 1640 1641 1643 1645 1645 1647 1648 1648 1649 1650 XML About the XML/XSL Module Module Editors Enabling/Disabling XML Search Indexing Adding a Basic XML/XSL Transformation Adding an XML/XSL Transformation (All Settings) Enabling/Disabling XML Search Indexing Clearing/Disabling Required Querystring Parameter/Value Pair Clearing XML Search Index Deleting a Querystring Parameter Deleting a XSL Parameter Editing a Querystring Parameter Editing a XSL Parameter Enabling/Disabling XML Search Indexing Setting the Required Querystring Parameter/ Value Pair 1651 1651 1652 1652 1653 1655 1656 1657 1657 1658 1658 1658 1659 1659 1660 .

Setting XML Rendering Output 1660 Advanced Site Management Advanced Site Management Application Health File Integrity Checker About the File Integrity Checker Module Working with the File Integrity Checker Module Health Monitoring About the Health Monitoring Module Configuring Health Monitoring Viewing the Health Logs Security Center About the Security Center Module Web Server Manager About the Web Server Manager Module Managing Cache Items Managing Your Web Server Setting the Default Caching Provider Viewing Memory Usage Information 1662 1662 1662 1662 1662 1662 1663 1663 1663 1664 1665 1665 1665 1665 1666 1667 1668 1668 Extensions About the Extensions Module All Users Viewing Extension Information Module Editors Enabling/Disabling DNN Active Directory Authentication 1669 1669 1671 1671 1674 1674 .

Enabling/Disabling LiveID Authentication Enabling/Disabling the Default DNN Authentication Settings Viewing the Extension Settings and Package Setting of a Container Package Viewing the Extension Settings and Package Setting of a Skin Package Viewing Package Settings for all Extension Types Administrators Setting Permissions to Deploy a Module 1675 1677 1679 1682 1684 1685 1685 Logs Log Viewer About the Log Viewer Module All Users Enabling/Disabling Event Log Color Coding Filtering Events by any Event Type Setting Records Per Page Viewing Event Details Module Editors Sending Exceptions by Email SuperUsers Viewing Logged Events for any Portal Adding a Logged Event Clearing the Event Log Delete Selected Exceptions Editing Log Settings Enabling/Disabling a Logged Event Site Log 1687 1687 1687 1688 1688 1690 1691 1691 1692 1692 1694 1694 1694 1695 1696 1697 1697 1698 .

About the Site Log Module Troubleshooting: Site Log History Has Been Disabled Viewing a Site Report Site Log Reports Affiliate Referrals Detailed Site Log Page Popularity Page Views By Day Of Week Page Views By Day Page Views By Hour Page Views By Month Site Referrals User Agents User Frequency User Registrations By Country User Registrations By Date 1698 1698 1699 1700 1700 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1706 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 Multi Language Sites Content Localization About Content Localization Viewing a Site in the Default Language Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language Adding a New Page (Default Language) Adding a Module to all Languages Setting a Page as Ready for Translation Adding Modules to a Secondary Language Only 1711 1711 1711 1711 1712 1713 1713 1714 1715 .

Translating a Page Translating a Page (Admin) Setting a Page as Translated Publishing a Secondary Language Page Adding a Module to all Languages Adding Modules to a Secondary Language Only Editing the Content of Shared Modules Editing (Translating) Localized Module Content Modifying Module Localization Status Delete Modules from Secondary Language Languages About the Languages Module All Users Setting the Default Site Language Editors Enabling Browser Language Detection Enabling/Disabling a Language Enabling/Disabling a Language Enabling Browser Language Detection Setting Fallback Languages Setting Language Files as Pending Translation Editing Portal Language Files Deleting a Resource File Enabling Localized Content Creating Localized Pages for a Language 1715 1716 1718 1719 1719 1720 1720 1720 1721 1722 1722 1722 1723 1723 1724 1724 1725 1726 1727 1727 1729 1730 1732 1734 1738 .

Setting Translator Roles Activating/Deactiving a Language Publishing Localized Content Manage Settings Configuring the Portal Language Settings SuperUsers Adding a New Language Installing a Language Pack Editing Language Files Editing Time Zones Verifying Resource Files Creating an Authentication System Language Pack Creating a Core Language Pack Creating a Full Language Pack Creating a Module Language Pack Creating a Provider Language Pack Language Files Overview of the Type of Language Files Example: Adding/Editing the Login Message Example: Editing Privacy and Terms of Use Statements Email Messages Affiliate Notification Email Message Banner Notification Email Message Bulk Email Confirmation Email Message Password Reminder Email Message 1740 1742 1743 1743 1743 1744 1744 1746 1747 1749 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1758 1758 1760 1762 1762 1762 1762 1763 .

Portal Signup Email Message Profile Updated Email Message Retrieve Password Instructions Role Assignment Email Message Role Unassignment Email Message SMTP Configuration Test Email Message User Registration Administrator Email Message User Registration Private Email Message User Registration Public Email Message User Registration Verified Email Message User Unregister Email Message Vendor Registration Administrator Email Message Vendor Registration Email Message Error Messages The Default 403_3 Error Message The Default 404 Error Message Portal Messages License Text Portal Privacy Text Portal Terms Text User Lockout Email Message 1763 1764 1764 1765 1766 1767 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1771 1772 1773 1773 1773 1774 1774 1775 1777 1782 Recycle Bin About the Recycle Bin Module Viewing Pages and Modules in the Recycle Bin Module Editors 1783 1783 1784 1785 .

Deleting Modules from the Recycle Bin Deleting Pages from the Recycle Bin Emptying the Recycle Bin Restoring Deleted Modules Restoring Deleted Pages Troubleshooting: Page Cannot Be Restored Until Its Parent Is Restored First Troubleshooting: Page Cannot Be Deleted Until Its Children Have Been Deleted First 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1789 1790 Search Optimization Google Analytics About the Google Analytics Module Signing Up for GA Module Editors Setting Google Analytics Adding a Segmentation Rule Editing a Segmentation Rule Deleting a Segmentation Rule Search Admin About the Search Admin Module Including Common Words in Searches Including Numbers in Searches Re-Indexing Searched Content Setting the Maximum Word Length for Searches Setting Minimum Word Length for Searches Search Crawler About the Search Crawler Module Suite 1791 1791 1791 1793 1795 1795 1796 1797 1797 1797 1797 1798 1798 1798 1799 1799 1800 1800 .

Add URL's for Indexing Configuring the SearchCrawlerAdmin module Configuring Search Crawler Modules for Upgrade Portals All Users Performing a Search Help with Search Queries Sample Query Syntax Prohibited Queries Module Editors Setting up Search Crawler Searching Upgrading Existing Sites Settings Configuring the SearchCrawler Input Settings Configuring the SearchCrawler Results Settings SearchCrawlerAdmin About the SearchCrawlerAdmin module Adding URL's for Indexing Enabling/Disabling Spidering Managing URL's for Indexing Deleting URL's from Indexing Adding Directories to the Index 1802 1802 1802 1803 1803 1803 1804 1805 1805 1806 1807 1808 1808 1808 1809 1809 1809 1811 1812 1812 1813 1814 1815 1818 1819 . Enable Search Crawler Task in Schedule 3.Configuration Enabling Search Crawler Functionality 1. Set Your Site to Full Trust 2.

Deleting Directories from the Index Managing Spidered Documents Setting SearchCrawlerAdmin Options Adding a Duplicate Pattern Editing a Duplicate Pattern Deleting a Duplicate Pattern Search Engine SiteMap About the Search Engine SiteMap Module Configuring the SiteMap Settings Purging Cached Sitemap Setting the Sitemap Providers Submitting Site to Google Submitting Site to Yahoo! or Bing Taxonomy Manager About the Taxonomy Manager Module Viewing Vocabularies List Module Editors Adding the First Term (Hierarchical Vocabulary) Adding Additional Terms (Hierarchical Vocabulary) Adding Terms (Simple Vocabulary) Creating a Vocabulary Deleting Terms Deleting a Vocabulary Editing Terms Editing a Vocabulary 1820 1821 1822 1824 1827 1828 1829 1829 1830 1832 1832 1833 1834 1834 1834 1835 1835 1835 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 .

Viewing User Entered Tags SuperUsers Creating a Vocabulary Deleting User Entered Tags Editing User Entered Tags 1843 1844 1844 1845 1845 Users and Roles Controlling Site Access Add New User About the Add New User Module Adding a User Account Security Roles About Security Roles in DNN About Security Role Settings About the Security Roles Module All Users Filtering Security Roles by Role Group Viewing Security Role Details Module Editors User Settings Managing User Account Settings Adding a Security Role (Basic Settings) Creating a Membership Service Adding a Security Role with a Fee Adding a Security Role with an RSVP Code Obtaining an RSVP Link 1846 1846 1847 1847 1848 1849 1849 1850 1851 1851 1851 1852 1852 1852 1852 1853 1854 1856 1858 1860 .

Editing a Security Role Deleting a Security Role Adding a Role Group Editing a Role Group Deleting a Role Group Adding a User to a Security Role Editing a User's Security Role Access Deleting a User from a Security Role User Accounts About the User Accounts Module All Users Filtering User Accounts by Username Viewing All User Accounts Filtering User Accounts by Online Users Filtering User Accounts by Unauthorized Users Searching for a User Account Module Editors Adding a User Account Editing a User Account 1862 1863 1864 1865 1865 1866 1867 1868 1868 1868 1869 1869 1869 1870 1871 1871 1873 1873 1875 1876 Authorizing an Unauthorized User Deleting all Unauthorized User Accounts Deleting a User Account Adding a User to a Security Role Editing a User's Security Role Access 1877 1878 1879 1879 1880 .

Deleting a User from a Security Role Forcing a Password Change Managing a User Profile Managing a User's Password Profile Properties Managing Global User Profile Properties Reordering Fields Setting Fields as Required or Optional Setting Field Visibility Refreshing the Profile Properties Grid Adding a User Profile Property Editing a User Profile Property Deleting a Profile Property User Settings Viewing Membership and Password Settings Managing User Account Settings Setting User Registration Options Setting the Login and Logout Options User Switcher About the User Switcher Module Impersonating a User 1881 1882 1882 1883 1884 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1893 1893 1894 1894 1896 1900 1902 1904 1904 1904 Managing Site Design Managing Site Design Skin Designer About the Skin Designer Module Setting Container Token Values 1906 1906 1907 1907 1908 .

Setting Skin Token Values Troubleshooting the Yellow Warning Message "You Must Select A Token Setting" 1908 1909 Skins About the Skins Module All Users Applying a Default Site Container Applying the Default Site Skin Previewing a Container Package Previewing a Skin Package Restoring the Default Skin SuperUsers Deleting a Container from a Container Package Deleting a Skin from a Skin Package (Including Legacy Skins) Deleting a Skin Package Parsing a Skin Package 1910 1910 1911 1911 1911 1913 1915 1916 1918 1918 1918 1918 1918 .

"Using the Typical Method of the Installation Wizard" Auto: The "Auto" installation method bypasses the Wizard completely and uses the legacy Auto-Install procedure. "Using the Auto Method of the Installation Wizard" l l The DNN Installation Wizard Useful Links: l Installation instructions at http://info.dotnetnuke.pdf . Select this option if you wish to control which optional components get installed. There are three different installation methods provided: l Custom: The "Custom" installation method provides you with the ability to completely customize your DotNetNuke installation. "Creating a Custom Installation Setup" and "Using the Custom Method of the Installation Wizard" Typical: The "Typical" installation method makes some "typical" choices for you.com/rs/dotnetnuke/images/DotNetNuke_Install_Package_Installation_Instructions_071410.Installation Wizard About the Installation Wizard DotNetNuke has an easy to use Installation Wizard which helps you configure your DNN web site.

Russian. Polish. Dutch. Step 2: Installing DotNetNuke . Step 1: DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Complete the following settings: 1.l The link to the installation scenarios is http://www. Italian. Click the Next button. At Choose Language. 3. select Auto. Catalan. The following languages are available: English. Turkish. German. The installation will now start running.dotnetnuke. At Select Installation Method. and Arabic. Spanish.aspx Using the Auto Method of the Installation Wizard How to use the Auto installation method which bypasses the Wizard and uses the legacy Auto-Install procedure. 2. French. select a language to set the default portal language as well as the language used in this wizard.com/Resources/Wiki/tabid/1409/Page/Install_DotNetNuke/Default. Japanese.

1. Important.The Installation Status Report displays whilst DNN is installing. You may need to Scroll down the page to see this link. located below the Installation Complete message. Click the Click Here To Access Your Portal link. ready for you to login and commence building. . Read through the Getting Started information and update the default login details for the Administrator and Host accounts. The Installation Complete message is displayed once the installation is finished and your portal is ready to use. Your newly installed portal is now displayed.

.

Japanese. and Arabic. Polish. Catalan. At Choose Language. . Russian. German. Click the Next button.Related Topics: l See "Logging into a Site" See "Changing your Password" l Using the Typical Method of the Installation Wizard The Typical installation method provides a quicker method of installation than the Custom method by making some "typical" choices during your DotNetNuke installation. Turkish. Dutch. 2. select a language to set the default portal language as well as the language used in this wizard. Step 1: DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Complete the following settings: 1. 3. Spanish. At Select Installation Method. select Typical. French. The following languages are available: English. Italian.

1. enter the Name or IP Address of the computer where the Database is located. . the message "Your site passed the permissions check" is displayed. At Select Database.Step 2: Checking File Permissions The wizard is now testing if this DNN installation can successfully create and delete folders and files. If the test is successful. Click the Next button. If using Oracle enter the Data Source (SID). select one of the following options and complete the associated settings: l SQL Server 2005 (Express) File: a. In the Server text box. Step 3: Configure Database Connection 1.

b. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box if you are running the database as Database Owner the check box you will be running as the User ID specified. select from these options: l Check the check box if you are using SQL Server's Integrated Security. Optional. l e. ii. In the Password text box. which means you will be using your Windows account to access SQL Server. c. enter a prefix to use for all your database objects. enter the User ID for the Database. At Integrated Security. enter the Password for the Database. Skip to Step 1e. This helps ensure that there are no object name clashes. Uncheck the check box if you have been given a User ID/Password to access your Database and provide the User ID/Password combination. In the Object Qualifier text box. i. In the User ID text box. . If you are using SQL Server Express then you will most likely need to check this option. In the Filename text box. l d. At Run as db Owner. enter the name of the Database File (located in the App_Data Directory).

In the Password text box.l or SQL Server 2000/2005 Database: a. select from these options: l Check the check box if you are using SQL Server's Integrated Security and will be using your Windows account to access SQL Server. Uncheck the check box if you have been given a User ID/Password to access your Database and provide the User ID/Password combination. a. In the Database text box. If using Oracle enter the Data Source (SID). enter the Password for the Database. In the Server text box. c. b. If you are using SQL Server Express then you will most likely need to check this option. enter the Name or IP Address of the computer where the Database is located. In the User ID text box. At Integrated Security. l . enter the User ID for the Database. enter the Database name which you have previously created on the SQL server. b.

Click the Next button. Click the Next button. In the Object Qualifier text box. 2. The "Installation of Database Complete" message displays once the installation is complete. the check box if you will be running as the User ID specified. Step 4: Run Database Installation Scripts The database scripts commence automatically running and the progress is displayed in the window. Optional. This helps ensure that there are no object name clashes. At this point the Next button is enabled. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box if you are running the database as Database Owner. l e. At Run as db Owner. enter a "prefix" to use for all your database objects. Step 5: Configure Host Account .d. 1.

b. d. In the Last Name text box. e. In the Confirm Password text box. In the First Name text box. In the Email Address text box. enter the first name of the Host. enter the email address of the Host. 2. enter the last name of the Host. Step 6: Configure Administrator Account 1. c. enter the Administrator's first name. In the User Name text box.1. f. b. In the Password text box. complete these details: a. In the Configure Host Account section complete these details: a. In the First Name text box. enter a password for the Host. Click the Next button. enter a user name for the Host. enter the Administrator's last name. In the Last Name text box. . In the Portal Administrator section. re-enter the password for the Host.

enter a password for the Administrator. f. In the Portal Properties section. In the User Name text box. In the Portal Title text box. ready for you to login and commence building. In the Password text box. select the template for this portal. In the Confirm Password text box. b. enter the Administrator's email address. complete these details: a. Click the Next button. re-enter the password for the Administrator. . enter a user name for the Administrator. e. Your newly installed portal is now displayed.c. In the Email Address text box. At Template. 2. 3. d. enter a title for the portal.

.

Dutch. Russian. Step 2: Checking File Permissions .Using the Custom Method of the Installation Wizard The Custom installation method provides full customization during your DotNetNuke installation. Step 1: DotNetNuke Installation Wizard Complete the following settings: 1. select a language to set the default portal language as well as the language used in this wizard. The following languages are available: English. containers. select Custom. 2. At Select Installation Method. 3. Italian. At Choose Language. Note: Images used in this tutorial will vary slightly depending on the DNN version you are using. Catalan. Optional. For details on enabling optional skins. providers and templates during your custom install. French. Turkish. German. Japanese. and Arabic. Click the Next button. Polish. Spanish. See "Creating a Custom Installation Setup" before beginning this tutorial. languages.

a message detailing possible error is displayed. button.The wizard is now testing if this DNN installation can successfully create and delete folders and files. Click the Next Step 3: Configure Database Connection . Fix the errors to continue. Review the test message: l If the test is successful. the message "Your site passed the permissions check" is displayed. a response message is displayed. Once the test is complete. If the test is unsuccessful. l 2. 1.

enter the User ID for the database. select one of these two options and complete the associated settings: l SQL Server 2005/2008 (Express) File: a. b. enter the name of the Database File (located in the App_Data Directory). select from these options: l Check the check box if you are using SQL Server's Integrated Security. b. In the Server text box. enter the password for the database. Skip to Step 2. In the Filename text box. At Run as db Owner. In the Password text box. enter the User ID for the database. enter the Name or IP Address of the computer where the Database is located. Uncheck the check box if you have been given a User ID/Password to access your database and provide the User ID/Password combination. b. In the Password text box. the check box if you are running the database as the User ID specified. At Integrated Security. Uncheck the check box if you have been given a User ID/Password to access your Database and provide the User ID/Password combination. If you are using SQL Server Express then you will most likely need to check this option. If using Oracle enter the Data Source (SID). In the Database text box. At Select Database. which means you will be using your Windows account to access SQL Server. l d. c. In the Server text box. If you are using SQL Server Express then you will most likely need to check this option. enter the password for the database. enter the Database name. In the User ID text box. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box if you are running the database as database owner. l . enter the Name or IP Address of the computer where the Database is located. c. ii. In the User ID text box. l l or SQL Server 2005/2008 Database: a. i.1. If using Oracle enter the Data Source (SID). a. At Integrated Security. Skip to Step 3. select from these options: l Check the check box if you are using SQL Server's Integrated Security and will be using your Windows account to access SQL Server.

At this point the Next button is enabled. Click the Next button. Step 4: Run Database Installation Scripts The database scripts commence automatically running and the progress is displayed in the window. 1. enter a prefix to use for all your database objects. Optional. 3. This helps ensure that there are no object name clashes.d. . l 2. The "Installation of Database Complete" message displays once the installation is complete. At Object Qualifier. Click the Next button. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box if you are running the database as database owner. At Run as db Owner. the check box if you are running the database the User ID specified.

In the Password text box. In the First Name text box. In the Configure Host Account section complete these details: a. e. Basic or NTLM. In the Confirm Password text box. enter a password for the Host. In the Email Address text box. re-enter the password for the Host. enter a user name for the Host. b.Step 5: Configure Host Account 1. In the SMTP Server Settings section complete these details: a. b. enter the first name of the Host. enter your SMTP server name or IP address. enter the email address of the Host. In the Server text box. d. enter the last name of the Host. select the required authentication method from Anonymous. In the User Name text box. In the Last Name text box. . c. f. 2. At Authentication.

At Enable SSL. l 3. . Click the Next Step 6: Install Optional Modules 1.c. button. Optional. Check the check box beside each of the modules to be installed. Note: You can install the other modules listed here at any time once installation is completed. the check box if SSL isn't required. Click the Next button. See "Installing Available Extensions" 2. select from these option: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable SSL (secure socket layers) for secure pages.

. Check the check box beside each skin or container you want to install.Step 7: Install Skins and Containers 1. "Creating a Custom Installation Setup" for details on enabling optional skins and containers. Optional.

"Creating a Custom Installation Setup" for details on how to enable optional languages. Check the check box beside each Language you want to install. Optional. Step 8: Install Language Packs 1.2. Click the Next button. 2. . Click the Next button.

"Creating a Custom Installation Setup" 1. . button. Click the Next the check box beside each authentication system you want to install. Optional. You can also add and select additional Providers to be installed. Check 2.Step 9: Install Authentication Systems On this page a number authentication systems are automatically selected for installation.

Step 11: Configure Administrator Account 1. . In the Portal Administrator section. Check 2. In the User Name text box. In the First Name text box. enter the Administrator's first name. b. c. complete these details: a. enter the Administrator's last name. In the Password text box. In the Last Name text box. You can also select additional Providers to be installed. button. On this page a number of providers are automatically selected for installation. enter a user name for the Administrator. "Creating a Custom Installation Setup" 1. Click the Next the check box beside each of the providers you wish to install. enter a password for the Administrator. Optional. d.Step 10: Install Providers DotNetNuke uses a provider module for extensions.

select a template for the portal.e. Click the Next button. 3. re-enter the password for the Administrator. . enter the Administrator's email address. complete these details: a. In the Portal Properties section. At Template. b. Any templates you uploaded will be displayed here. In the Email Address text box. 2. ready for you to login and commence building. enter a title for the portal. Your newly installed portal is now displayed. In the Confirm Password text box. In the Portal Title text box. f.

.

Modules: Add module installation zip files to the Install/Module folder. Containers: Add container package zip files to the Install/Container folder.Creating a Custom Installation Setup DNN allows you to modify what happens during the installation process by simply adding or removing files in the Install folder. Skins: Add skin package zip files to the Install/Skin folder.resources are available in a check box list for you to decide during the install process if they get installed. Files with . The ones with a . go to the Install folder. Download the DNN Installation zip file from the DotNetNuke.zip extension are automatically installed and the ones with . Providers: Add provider zip files to the Install/Provider folder. During the installation process DNN looks in the folders under Install to see if there are any new files that need to be processed during the installation. 3. Unzip the installation file.com web site. Templates: Add template package zip files to the Install/Templates folder. In this folder you can see there are some modules with a .zip extension. In the unzipped installation file.resources extensions can be selected or deselected for installation when completing the Installation Wizard. You can modify how DNN installs by adding or removing files from these sub-folders. l l l l l l . Note: Zip files will automatically be installed and cannot be disabled when completing the Installation Wizard. Languages: Add language resource package zip files to the Install/Languages folder. Here's how to include one of these add-ins to your DNN Custom Method installation: 1. Some of these folders contain aspects of DNN that can be modified during the installation process.resources extension and some with a . This folder contains a number of sub-folders. Add one of the below zip/ files to the correct sub-folder to make it available during installation: l Authentication Systems: Add authentication system zip files to the Install/AuthSystem folder. 2. 4.

4.Managing Your User Account Logging In and Out Logging into a Site How to login to a site using the typical basic login method.OR . Click the Login button. enter your password. 1. Click the Login link to display the Account Login module (also titled the User Log In module). enter your user name. This link is typically located in the top right corner of each page . In the User Name text box.Navigate to an Account Login module. Tip: Mouse over or click the Help login help. 2. In the Password text box. Related Topics: icons displayed beside the User Name and Password fields to view . 3.

l See "Logging in with LiveID" See "Logging in with a Verification Code" See "Logging in with a Security Code" See "Logging in with a Verification Code and a Security Code" l l l Logging Out of a Site How to log out of a site. This feature adds a cookie to your computer so it will not work on another computer. enter your password. This does not cancel the Remember Login setting. Check the Remember Login check box. Selecting the Remember Login will automatically log you into that site next time you visit it. 1. 6. It is also portal specific so it will not log you in to other portals within this DNN installation.Navigate to an Account Login module. 4. Remembering Login Credentials How to set a site to remember your login credentials. 5. In the Password text box. logging out will forget your login credentials. Click the Login link (which typically located in the top right corner) . Enter your verification code or the security code if required. If you have set the site to remember your login credentials. Note: At the time of writing this setting expired after 24 hours. . simply close your Web browser. 1.OR . enter your user name. Tip: To exit a site without logging out. Optional. 2. Click the Login button. 3. In the User Name text box. Click the Logout link which is typically located in the top right corner of each page.

Optional. enter your user name. 1. If the Security Code field is displayed. Related Topic: l See "Enabling Remember Me on Login Control" Retrieving your Password If you forget your password you can have it sent to the email address associated with your user account. In the User Name text box. Click the Retrieve Password link. Click the Send Password link. Click the Login link or navigate to an Account Login module.Tip: To exit a site. If the password sends successfully. 2. enter the code displayed as a picture into the Security Code text box. 5. Password Has Been . 3. simply close your Web browser. the message " Sent To Your Email Address" is displayed. 4. If you click the Logout link you will need to login next time.

Login Failed. l . remember that Passwords are case sen- Action: Attempt to logging in again. as detailed in your Welcome Message. Please Enter Your User Name: Enter your User Name into the User Name text box and then click the Retrieve Password link. Remember That Passwords are Case Sensitive What Happened: Login was unsuccessful. If you are still unsuccessful. ensuring Caps Lock is not selected on your keyboard. If this occurs you will be unable to login even with the correct details until either the account automatically unlocks or the Administrator unlocks the account for you Troubleshooting. Troubleshooting. Retrieving Password Failed The following error messages may be displayed when password retrieval fails: l User Name Does Not Exist: Retry with a different user name or email the Administrator for assistance. Click Proceed to Login to go to the Login module. "Retrieving your Password" Note: If your login fails too many times your account will be locked for the time set by the Administrator. If you are still unsuccessful. Login Failed. The " sitive" message is displayed. check your user name and password are correct.6. The Retrieve Password page.

In the Current Password text box. This displays the user profile page. re-enter your new password. This displays the Manage Profile page. In the New Password text box. If you are updating the default Administrator login details for the first time. enter your current password. Login to the site. enter your new password. Managing Your Profile Changing your Password How to update the password associated with your user profile. begin at Step 5.OR -Navigate to a View Profile module (also called the My Profile module). 6. b.l Password could not be sent at this moment. In the Confirm Password text box. 4. c. . 3. 5. Click the Edit Profile link. Important. update the following fields: a. "Logging into a Site" 2. 1. Click on your [Display Name] link (typically located in the top right corner of the site) . Select the Manage Password tab. Click the Change Password link. Please try again later or contact the site administrator: Retry login later or contact the Administrator. In the Change Password section.

Go to the Photo field and select from these options: Uploading a New Image 1..Changing your Password Managing your Profile Photo How to manage the photo associated with your user profile. button and select the file from your computer.. 2. 1. Click the Browse. . See "Managing your User Profile" 2. Go to the Manage Profile page of the View Profile (also titled My Profile) module. Click the Upload File link.

Click the Edit Profile link.OR -Navigate to a View Profile (also called My Profile) module. Update any of these User Credentials: button. This displays the user profile page. Managing your User Credentials How to manage your user credentials including your names and email address. . At File. Mandatory fields are indicated by the Required 1. Removing Images from Profile 1. Click on your [Display Name] link (typically located in the top right corner of the site) . Click the Update link. This displays the image to the right of this field. Selecting a Previously Uploaded Image 1. select <None Specified>. Click the Save File link to save the selected file. 4. At File. Note: Your user name cannot be changed. This displays the Manage Profile page. Login to the site.3. 5. "Logging into a Site" 2. This displays the selected image. 4. 3. select the required photo from the drop-down list.

edit your last name. In the Display Name text box. Click the Update link. In the First Name text box. however sites in other countries will typically use local names for address fields. Admin Only sets a field as visible to Administrators only. contact details. In the Last Name text box. edit the name you want to be displayed to other site members. etc. Public sets a field as visible to anyone who is able to view your user profile. edit your first name. edit your email address. photo. Tip: If your country is either Canada or United States of America. select the Country before selecting a Region as this will pre-populate the Region field. biography. Admin Tip: Modify the Manage Profile page to suit your needs. Members Only sets a field as visible to authenticated site members. time zone and preferred locale. In the Email Address text box. rename and modify fields and more! See "Managing Global User Profile Properties" . Note: You can set the visibility of each field as follows. Managing your User Credentials Managing your User Profile How to manage all your personal user details including your name. You can add.a. The fields used in this example are typical for a US based site. b. d. 5. c.

ecozany. enter the first name. Login to the site. a.g. E. Optional. 5. E. In the Postal Code text box.g. select. If the Manage Profile page is not displayed. E. On the Manage Profile page. New York i. In the Unit text box. rose.g. At Country. New York j. In the Street text box.OR -Navigate to a View Profile (also called My Profile) module. In the Last Name text box. In the Fax text box.com q. MD f. In the First Name text box. enter your facsimile number. Mandatory fields are indicated by the Required button. 101 Blackburn Road h. In the Region text box. enter the city.g. click the Manage Profile link. A d. www. In the Telephone text box. select a country from the drop-down box. This displays the user profile page. m. enter your web site URL. "Logging into a Site" 2.g. See "Managing your Profile Photo" . enter a suffix for the name. enter the first name. enter a prefix for the name. upload or remove a photo or image for your profile. In the Middle Name text box. n. enter your mobile number. In the Prefix text box. E. In the IM text box. E. E. Flat 35 g.g.g. enter your instant messenger id. E. E. 3. In the Suffix text box. E. enter/select the region.booth@ecozany. United States k. Booth e. E. o. Ms b. enter the first name.com p. E. In the Cell/Mobile text box.g. 4. Click the Edit Profile link. Rose c. E. At Photo. In the City text box. complete or edit any of the following fields and then select the Visibility for each field (see note above). enter a unit number.g. enter the street address. Click on your [Display Name] link (typically located in the top right corner of the site) .g.g. NY 11368 l. enter/select the postal code. In the Website text box.g. enter your telephone number.1.

Select the name of your locale from the drop-down box.Select Display Native Name to display the native spelling of your locale (E. In the Biography Editor. At Preferred Locale: i.g. select your time zone from the drop-down box.OR . s. At TimeZoneInfo.r. t.g. Italy) . enter a biography. . Select Display English Name to display your locale in English (E. Italia) ii.

This permanent deletes your user account. removing your access to restricted pages and content. Click the Edit Profile link. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to un-register?" . Admin Tip: The list of available locales is managed using the Languages module. "Logging into a Site" 2. 3.6. This displays the user profile page. This displays the Manage Profile page. Click the UnRegister link. Login to the site. 1. Unregistering your User Account How to unregister from a site. Click on your [Display Name] link (typically located in the top right corner of the site) .OR -Navigate to a View Profile (also called My Profile) module. 4. Click the Update link.

e. This opens the User Registration page. A message is also sent to the Administrator advising that you have unregistered. b. You are now unregistered and have been automatically logged out of the site. enter the name you want to be displayed to other site members. In the Last Name text box. enter your first name. c. Your user name is private and cannot be changed. In the First Name text box. enter a user name. Click the Register link (typically located in the top right corner of the page). In the Display Name text box. Signing Up for a User Account Signing up as a Registered User How to sign up to become a registered user of a site. Mandatory fields are indicated by the Required button. In the User Registration section. A message is sent to you confirming that your account has been unregistered. enter a valid email address. d. 1. In the User Name text box. In the Email Address text box. 2. . complete all of these fields: a. Click the OK button to confirm. enter your last name.5.

1. Signing up as a Registered User with a Security Code How to sign up to become a registered user of a site when a security code is required. In the Confirm Password text box. re-enter your password. or you may need to open your welcome email to obtain additional information to complete login. Tip: Depending on the set up of the site. b. enter your password. Click the Register link.3. Note: Passwords are case sensitive. Mandatory fields are indicated by the Required button. This opens the User Registration page. complete all of these fields: a. . 4. In the Enter a Password section. In the Password text box. Click the Register link (typically located in the top right corner of each page). you may be automatically logged in and your account details displayed.

enter a user name. . In the Enter a Password section. In the Confirm Password text box. re-enter your password. In the Display Name text box. enter your password. b. e. d. enter a valid email address. c. In the Password text box. In the Email Address text box. c. At Security Code. 4. Your user name is private and cannot be changed. In the User Name text box. enter the code displayed as a picture in the text box below. In the Last Name text box. complete all of these fields: a. In the User Registration section. enter your first name. 3.2. enter your last name. complete all of these fields: a. Click the Register link. Note: Passwords are case sensitive. b. In the First Name text box. enter the name you want to be displayed to other site members.

Subscription grants you immediate access to any pages or content restricted to service subscribers. 5. Click the Subscribe link beside the service you want to subscribe to. you may be automatically logged in and your account details displayed. Once a user subscribes they immediately gain access to any modules or pages restricted to this service. Click the Edit Profile link.Navigate to a View Profile (also called My Profile) module. This displays the "You have successfully subscribed to the [Service Name] role" message at the top of the module. This displays the user profile page. Subscribing to a Service with an RSVP Code How to subscribe to a member's service using an RSVP code provided by an Administrator. 4. "Logging into a Site" 2. 3. Click the Manage Services link. This displays a list of the available services. . This displays the Manage Profile page. Click on your [Display Name] link (typically located in the top right corner of the site) .OR . Login to the site.Tip: Depending on the set up of the site. Tip: Where a fee is charged for the service you will be redirected to the payment Web site to complete the payment process. 1. Subscribing to Member Services Subscribing to a Member Service How to subscribe to a member's service. or you may need to open your welcome email to obtain additional information to complete login. The user may need to refresh their Web browser to view additional areas of access.

Login to the site. enter the code supplied to you.1. "Logging into a Site" 2. Select the Manage Services tab. Click the Subscribe link to the right of the RSVP Code text box. This displays the Manage Profile page. This displays a list of the available services. This displays the following messages: You have successfully subscribed to the [Service Name] role. In order to get access to the new services you will need to Logout and then Login to the site again. This displays the user profile page. Click the Edit Profile link. Subscription grants you immediate access to any pages or content restricted to service subscribers. 3. In the RSVP Code text box. 7. Subscribing to a Service with an RSVP Link How to subscribe to a member's service using an RSVP link provided by an Administrator.Navigate to a View Profile (also called My Profile) module.OR . 6. . Tip: Where a fee is charged for the service you will be redirected to the payment web site to complete the payment process. You have been successfully added to the role(s) associated with the RSVP Code entered. Logout and then Login to the site to gain access to the new services. 5. 4. Click on your [Display Name] link (typically located in the top right corner of the site) .

This displays the message "You have successfully unsubscribed from the [Service] role.com/Default. This displays the user profile page. Unsubscribing from a service removes your access to any modules or pages restricted to subscribers. l Click the Maximize Click the Minimize button to show content.aspx?rsvp=rsvpcode&portalid=0 3.domain. Login to the site.Navigate to a View Profile (also called My Profile) module. E.g. Only the title. header and footer are visible. 5. 4. http//www.1. Click the Manage Services link.OR . This displays a list of the available services. Click on your [Display Name] link (typically located in the top right corner of the site) . "Logging into a Site" 2. Enter the RSVP link into the Address window or your Web browser . Click the Unsubscribe link beside the service you want to unsubscribe from.OR . Login to the site.click on the RSVP link in an email message. l ." Unsubscribing from a Member Service Working with Content Minimizing and Maximizing Content How to minimize or maximize module content. Logout and then Login to the site to gain access to the new services. "Logging into a Site" 2. button to hide content. Click the Edit Profile link. Unsubscribing from a Member Service How to unsubscribe from a member's service. 3. 1. This displays the Manage Profile page.

2. Tip: Display syndicated content using the News Feeds (RSS) module.Select Syndicate from the module actions menu. or other RSS programs. Use the Print option on your new Web browser to print this content.OR . 1. This opens a new Web browser with the content displayed in a print friendly format.Tip: If you are logged in. . You can then subscribe to the feed and view it using Internet Explorer. Click the Syndicate button (typically located in the bottom right corner of the module) . Click the Print button (typically located in the bottom right corner of the module) . This displays the XML code for the module content.OR . This option may not be for all content. Printing Content How to print module content. these settings are remembered the next time you visit the site enabling you to customize the way you view different pages.Select Print from the module actions menu. 1. This option may not be available for all content. Content displayed in a Web browser ready to print Subscribing to Syndicated Content How to create an RSS feed of content.

l Click the Subscribe to this feed link and complete the Subscribe to this Feed dialog box.You can now do one of the following: l Copy the URL from the Address bar of your Web browser and use as required. .

1. See "About the Taxonomy Manager Module" Tagging Page Content .Tagging Page Content How to add a tag to a page. 3. Click the Add Tags link (typically located at the base of each page). 2. Enter the tag name into the text box. Click the Save link. The newly added tag will now be listed at this field. Tip: Tags can be managed using the Taxonomy Manager module. This functionality is only available on sites where tagging has been enabled.

Related Topics: l "Overview of the RibbonBar Control Panel" "Overview of the Iconbar Control Panel" "Configuring the Control Panel Options" See "Setting the Default Control Panel" to set the default Control Panel for all portals. The Admin Console See "About the Admin Console" The Host Console See "About the Host Console" . Page Editors.Working with the DNN Control Panel About the DNN Control Panels DNN comes with a choice of two Control Panels called the RibbonBar and the Iconbar which enable Content Editors (optional). l l l Overview of the RibbonBar Control Panel The RibbonBar is the default Control Panel. Administrators and SuperUsers to access a range of page management tools and portal administrative tasks. In DNN Community Edition. The Admin and Tools and menus are displayed to the Administrator and the Host menu is displayed to SuperUsers. It displays the Modules and Pages menus to users who are authorized to manage the current page. The permissions required for Professional Edition are listed in the below tables. Permissions. user must have Edit Page permissions granted to access the modules and pages tool.

The Modules Console Function Add New Module Description Permissions (Community/Professional Adds a new module to the current page. The permissions required for Professional Edition Permissions are listed in the below table. See Edit Content / Add Content Module "Adding an Existing Module (RibbonBar)" The Pages Console Note: In DNN Community Edition. . user must have Edit Page permissions granted to access these tools. See "Adding a New Module Edit Content / Add Content (RibbonBar)" Add Existing Adds a new instance of an existing module to the current page.

See "Adding A New Page Visible to Administrators only using the RibbonBar" Edit P Update the page name. See "Copying a Page"See "Copying a Page" Link to delete current page. menu options and skin for the current page. Edit P See "Copying Design to Children Pages" Add a new page directly from the Control Panel.Function Actions Section Page Settings Add Copy Delete Description Perm mun Link to edit current page settings. See "Adding a New Page via the Site Settings Page" Select to copy the current (or any other) page including modifying modules. See "Copying Per. Edit P . See "Importing a New Page" Link to export a page. See "Deleting a Page"See "Deleting a Page" Enabled if the current page is not a special page. See "Editing Page Settings" Select to add a new page and configure setting.Admi missions to Descendant Pages"Enabled if page has child pages. Settin Copy current page design (skin and container settings) to children.See "Exporting a Page" Edit P Edit P Edit P Edit P Import Export Copy Actions Section Copy Permissions to Children Copy Design to Children Add New Page Section Add New Page Update Current Page Section Update Current Page Edit P Edit P Copy current page permission to children pages. Link to import a page.

See "Adding a User Account" Opens the Add Role page. See "Adding a Security Role (Basic Settings)" .The Tools Console The Tools menu of the RibbonBar as displayed to Administrators The Tools menu of the RibbonBar as displayed to SuperUsers and the Host Tool Description Role Restriction Common Actions Section Add User Add Role Opens the Add User page.

You cannot view the module menu which enables you to manage the modules on the current page if you are in View mode. Link (new window) to Help URL defined in Host Settings. .Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Web Servers See "About the Web Server Manager Module" Support Integrity View Website Help Help Opens the Help resource for this site. See "Switching Sites" SuperUser SuperUser SuperUser SuperUser SuperUser View Website Section Setting the RibbonBar Mode How to select the mode that you view your site in. Click on the Mode drop-down list and then select one of the following: l View: Select to view your site as a typical user without editing rights. 1. See "Setting the Online Help URL" Opens the DNN Support center. Important. This hides the module actions menu on all modules and disables the Tools menu. See "About the File Integrity Checker Module" Select a new site to view.Tool Upload File Clear Cache Recycle Application Pool Description Opens the upload file interface of the File Manager. See "Uploading Files" Select to clear the cache of all old files Select to restart the server and retrieve all new files. Role Restriction SuperUser SuperUsers Advanced Tools Section .

This displays the pane layout of the skin applied to this page. the titles of all modules within each pane including the module actions . This displays the module actions menu for all modules l Layout: Select to view the layout of the current page.l Edit: Select to edit your site.

This displays the management console associated with the chosen link. Modules. Host. .menu. Viewing the RibbonBar Management Menus How to view the features associated with each section of the RibbonBar. Hover your mouse over either of the Admin. Pages or Tools links located on the top righthand corner of the RibbonBar. 1.

Administrators and SuperUsers. It enables users to add new pages (See "Adding a New Page via the Site Settings Page"). Admin or Host link (top right) to view either the Admin Console or Host Console respec- The Iconbar Control Panel as displayed to SuperUsers Page Functions Section The Page Functions section (left) is accessible to Page Editors. Access will change depending on the permissions for the current page. delete the current page (See "Deleting a Page"). edit settings for the current page (See "Editing Page Settings"). export the current page (See "Exporting a Page") and import a page (See "Importing a New Page"). Note: Page Editors will have access to one or more of these tools according to the permissions granted to them. . Tip: Click the Tip: Click the tively. Admin link (top right) to view the Admin Console page.Tip: Click on either the Admin or Host link to view the Admin Console or the Host Console as a page rather than as a drop-down menu. shortcuts to six common administration tasks and quick links to the Administration and Host pages. Overview of the Iconbar Control Panel The Iconbar Control Panel provides a single interface from which authorized users can access page and module management tools. copy the current page See "Copying a Page").

This link is displayed to SuperUsers. See "About the Security Roles Module" Files: Opens the Admin > File Manager page. See "About the User Accounts Module" Roles: Opens the Admin > Security Roles page. "Adding an Existing Module (Iconbar)" and See "Adding an Existing Module (RibbonBar)" Tip: Users must be authorized to deploy a module and be a page editor to add a module to a page. It enables these users to add new or existing modules as well as set the role visibility. or Edit Page permissions in DNN Community Edition) and Administrators. l Setting the IconBar Mode How to set the mode of the Iconbar Control Panel. pane and alignment of the module being added. Administrators and SuperUsers can access these additional icons: l Site: Opens the Admin > Site Settings page. This link is displayed to Administrators and SuperUsers.Module Insertion Section The Module Insertion section (center) is accessible to Page Editors (users with Add Content or Full Control permissions in Professional Edition. See "About the Site Settings Page" Users: Opens the Admin > User Account page. Common Tasks Section Page Editors can access this icon: l Help button which links to the DNN Online Help URL set by the host. Click Host link (top right) to view the Host Console page. See "About the Extensions Module" l l l l l The Iconbar Control Panel (as displayed to the Host) Console Quick Links l Click the Admin link (top right) to view the Admin Console page. See "About the File Manager Module" Help: Opens the Online Help resource associated with the site. title. This option is disabled if no help link is provided. See "Adding a New Module (RibbonBar)". Extensions: Opens the Admin > Extensions page. .

Module menu.. 1. This functionality isn't available to Module Editors. select from these options: l Click the Minimize Click the Maximize button to hide the Control Panel. Module content is hidden. In the top right hand corner of the Control Panel. l . The default visibility is set by Administrators. l l Maximizing/Minimizing the IconBar How to hide or display the IconBar using the Maximize/Minimize button. Important. Permissions. This option shows you how the page appears to site visitors. Edit: Displays all module editing tools available to the current user. This option must be selected to edit the page. This option enables you to view the design of the page skin without the distraction of module content. select from the following options: l View: View the page with module editing tools hidden. E.1. add/edit links. Layout: Displays the layout of page panes and any modules within those panes. At Mode. button to display the Control Panel.g. Settings button.

Basic Features Icon Page Name Host Settings Description The Host > Host Settings page enables SuperUsers to configure basic and advanced host settings which apply to the host portal. as well as default settings for each new portal including design. hosting space. SMTP server settings and more. See "About the Host Settings Page" The Portals page allows the Host to create and maintain all portals within this DNN installation.About the Host Console The Host Console is only visible to SuperUsers. proxy settings. It also allows the Host to generate a template of an existing portal for duplication on another DNN portal installation. It can be accessed by clicking on the Host link on the Control Panel. See Portals .

See "About the Vendors Module" The Host > SQL page enables Hosts with SQL knowledge to execute SQL queries against the database.Either you are not currently logged in. See "About the User Accounts Module" The Host > Extensions page displays the Extensions module which allows Hosts to install and manage extensions. See "About the Lists Page" The Host > SuperUser Accounts page displays a version of the User Accounts module which enables the Host and SuperUsers to create and manage SuperUser accounts. See "About the Schedule Page" The Host > Search Admin page allows the Host to specify the settings associated with DNN's search capability which will be applied to all portals. Skins. New items (tasks) can also be added to the schedule. or you do not have access to this content" is displayed to all other users. Logs. Event Queue. as well as allocate extensions to other portals. The Dashboard module can be added to site pages. as well as configure user settings relating to authentication. upload new files and manage existing files. See "About the Search Admin Module" The Host > List page displays the Lists modules which allows the Host to maintain information which can be identified by a key value and a data value. See "About the SQL Page" The Host > Schedule page displays the Schedule module which enables the Host to optimize the efficiency of a portal by reducing the frequency of common tasks. Smiley's and Templates. When the module is place on a site page sets the search capabilities for the related portal only. See "About the Extensions Module" The Host > Dashboard page displays the Dashboard module which provides a snapshot of the DotNetNuke Application. Cache. Containers. This File Manager includes the follow default folders: Host Root. Vendors SQL Schedule Search Admin Lists SuperUser Accounts Extensions Dashboard .Icon Page Name File Manager Description "About the Portals Page" The Host > File Manager page displays the File Manager module (See "About the File Manager Module") which enables the Host to manage file folders. vendor banners and affiliate accounts using the Vendors module. however only the Host can view the module. A message reading "Access Denied . The SuperUser Accounts module provides all the same user management tools as the User Accounts module apart from Security Role management. The Host > Vendors page enables the Host to create and manage vendor accounts. The host can assign the Search Admin module to one or more portals as desired.

and Updated Modules/Providers.RadEditorProvider. See "About the HTML Editor Manager" Configuration Manager HTML Editor Manager Professional Features Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Professional Edition customers also have access to these additional tools which are grouped under Host >Professional Features on the menu. Security Fixes. It also enables the Host to configure the DotNetNuke. See "About the Configuration Manager Page" The Host > HTML Editor Manager page enables the Host to choose which provider is enabled for the RadEditor in this DNN installation. located under the Host menu displays the What's New module which displays a summary of the major features for each release including lists of the Major Highlights.Icon Page Name What's New Description The Host > What's New page. See "Overview of Professional Features" . See "About the What's New Module" The Host > Configuration Manager page displays the Configuration Manager module which enables the Host to the Host to modify configuration files as well as merge scripts.

Click the Upload Skin/Container link located at the base of the module. The Host Settings Page Uploading a Skin and/or Container How to upload skins and or container using the Host Settings page. . Navigate to Host > Host Settings. SMTP server settings and more. as well as default settings for each new portal including design.Configuring Your Host Settings About the Host Settings Page The Host Settings page enables Hosts to configure basic and advanced host settings which apply to the host portal. 1. hosting space. 2. proxy settings.

3. typically located at the base of the module. 2. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Click the Test link. . See "Using the Install Extension Wizard" Testing Outgoing Email Settings How to test the outgoing mail settings for all portals. This sends a test email to the Host account. 1.

a message describing the error is displayed. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. l Tip: If you used the web. If the test is not successful. Clearing the DNN Cache How to clear the DNN cache.eml file. This displays one of the following messages: l If the test is successful the Email Sent Successfully message is displayed. 2.3. . located at the base of the module below all navigation tabs. 3. look in the folder specified for the . Click the Clear Cache link. Go to Advanced Settings > Performance Settings. 1.config workaround to send emails without a SMTP server.

Navigate to Host > Host Settings. .4. Restarting the Application How to restart the DNN application. 1. Click the Restart Application link. typically located at the base of the module below all sections. 2. Click the Update link.

. select the version number from the drop-down list. Other options are DotNetNuke. 2. DotNetNuke.Restarting the Application Viewing the DNN Version Upgrade Log How to view the database log file for any SQL scripts which have been executed.Schema and UnInstall log files. 1.Data. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. At View Upgrade Log for Version.

config file as in the example below: Example Add an "httpRuntime" tag inside of the <system." is displayed. Modifying Maximum File Upload Size By default ASP. If you want to increase this size. <configuration>    <system. If a log file exists for the selected version it is now displayed. we allowed 100 MB uploads (1024 Kb * 100) .web> </configuration> maxRequestLength = max files size (in Kilobytes) allowed for upload executionTimeout = number of seconds allowed before asp..web> area.. you can override the defaults in the web.web>        <httpRuntime maxRequestLength="102400" executionTimeout="3600"/>    </system.net kills the operation in the example. This generally indicates that the script was never executed.3.NET limits the size of file uploads to 4MB. Click the Go link. If no log file exists a message reading "A log file does not exist for the script version specified.

1. . the memory available to your Web server's AppPool must be large enough. Permissions: Code Access Security is used to minimize the attack surface however some aspects of DotNetNuke need different permissions to fulfill their tasks. . IP Address: The IP Address of the Server. Server Name: The Name of the Server.NET Framework: The .NET Identity: The Windows user account under which this DNN installation is running. This account requires folder permissions on the server. If you notice problems uploading large files. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. See "Checking for and Downloading DNN Framework Upgrades" Upgrade Available?: If Check For Upgrades is checked an upgrade is available. the Update Site to current Framework link is displayed. 2. Go to Basic Settings > Configuration. but worth noting that for large file uploads (100MB). Note: If the current Framework is not being used. you should contact your hosting provider and verify that AppPool memory allocations are adequate.Config file. l l l l l .g. When retrieving data from the database Reflection is needed and when accessing outside Web sites such as with the News feed module WebPermission is needed. Basic Settings Configuration Viewing Configuration Details How to view configuration details for your DNN installation as set in your Web. Check For Upgrades?: Check the check box to set this DNN Installation to check the DotNetNuke web site for new framework upgrades. DotNetNuke Professional Edition DotNetNuke Version: The version of this DotNetNuke installation. ASP. The Display Beta Message and Check For Upgrades? fields can be edited from this page.Note: This is unusual. This is specified through IIS. E. The following details are displayed: l DotNetNuke Product: The DotNetNuke product you are running.NET Framework version which this DNN installation is running on.config file. Display Beta Message?: Check the check box to display a message indicating that the running version is a Beta release. an icon is displayed at this field whenever l l l l l Data Provider: The provider name which is identified as the default data provider in the web.

Is Web Farm?: If this check box is checked then this DNN installation is running in a web farm configuration. GUID: The GUID (Global Unique Identifier) is a unique identifier that can be used by module developers to create unique licenses per portal.l Relative Path: If the portal is in a virtual directory the relative path from the root is displayed here as shown below. The site this image was taken from was running on Vista Ultimate IIS 7 as a Virtual Directory. Physical Path: The physical path is the path to the root of the portal. This is the Server. This setting can be enabled or disabled in the root configuration file for your portal. Server Time: Displays the current date and time of the web server.MapPath result. l l l l Viewing Configuration Details .

3. At Display Beta Message?. 2. Go to Basic Settings > Configuration.Viewing Configuration Details How to optionally display message in your web site browser which indicates whether the version of DNN you are currently running is a Beta release. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Click the Update link. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to display a message. the check box to hide message. 1. . l 4.

Beta Message displayed in Web site browser Checking for and Downloading DNN Framework Upgrades How to set your portal to check for upgrades to the DNN core framework. select from these options: l Check the check box to enable upgrade checking. At Check For Upgrades?. 2. This enables an Update Available or Update Unavailable icon to display at the Upgrade Available? field. this field will indicate when an upgrade is available and provide a button to go to the download section of DNN. 3. If selected. Go to Basic Settings > Configuration. Uncheck the check box to disable upgrade checking. 1. l . Navigate to Host > Host Settings.

l The Red Error icon indicates an upgrade is available. Click the Update link. Note: If this setting is enabled. . One of the following icons will be displayed: l The Green Tick icon indicates this installation is using the latest and current version.4. Click to open the Downloads page of the DotNetNuke web site in a new Web browser. an icon will display at the Upgrade Available? field whenever an upgrade is available.

2.config file with the . . If a more recent version is available the Update Site to current Framework link is displayed. Go to Basic Settings > Configuration. Navigate to Host > Host Settings.NET Framework How to update your DNN installation to the current . Click the Update Site to current Framework link.NET Framework. 3. 4. This framework may be required for some custom modules.NET 3. 1. At .Updating Site to Current . This update the Web.NET Framework.5 Framework. the current framework details are displayed.

2. DNN loads the first portal created as the default. select the host portal from the drop-down list. see"Setting the Host Details" 1. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. . Go to Basic Settings > Host Details. At Host Portal. To set additional host details. 3. Changing the portal selected here changes which portal is loaded by default. The Host portal is also the portal associated with the Host skin object.Updating Site to Current Framework Host Details Setting the Host Portal By default.

The host title is displayed wherever the [HOSTNAME] skin token. E.dotnetnuke. http://www. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 2. URL and email address for the host portal. support@domain. In the Host URL text box.g. Go to Basic Settings > Host Details. In the Host Emailtext box. In the Host Title text box. . Click the Update link.com 5. Alternatively. 1.4. enter the email address for the host portal. leave this field blank to hide this field. 3. This link links to the Portal Administrator email for authenticated users and to the host email for authenticated Administrators. enter your company URL. DotNetNuke 4. a "Help" link is displayed.g.com. E. Where the host URL field is also completed. If the Help skin object is included in the skin. the title functions as a link to the URL. enter a name for your web site such as your business or company name.g. Setting the Host Details How to set the title. E.

font and strike) excluded from the strict version. This setting controls all portals within this DNN installation. and includes elements and attributes that have not been marked deprecated in the HTML 4. Click the Update link. 2. select from the following options: l HTML 4 (legacy): Enables parsing and validation of HTML documents by SGML tools based on the Document Type Definition (DTD) XHTML 1. Go to Basic Settings > Host Details. XHTML 1. Includes the presentational elements (such as center. l l 4.6. 1. At Fallback Skin Doctype. 2.0 transitional: The XML equivalent of HTML 4. If remember me is allowed.01. Click the Update link. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 3. . Navigate to Host > Host Settings.01 Transitional. Enabling Remember Me on Login Control How to enable the Remember Login option on the login control (Account Login module) as the Host. users can create cookies which persist over multiple visits. Setting the Fallback Skin Doctype How to set the fallback skin doctype for web pages on all portals within this DNN installation.0 strict: The XML equivalent to strict HTML 4. 1. Go to Basic Settings > Host Details.01 specification.

3. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable the Remember Login option. Click the Update link.g.0. Enabling Remember Me on Login Control Appearance Enabling/Disabling DNN Copyright Credits How to enable the DNN credits to be displayed in the title bar of the Web browser for all portals in this installation. . the check box to disable the Remember Login option.0). At Enable Remember me on login controls?. This setting also enables DNN credits to be displayed in the HTML source code downloaded to render the portals pages. E. (DNN 6. l 4.

Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. 1. l 4. 3. 2. At Show Copyright Credits. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. l . the check box to disable custom error messages. 2. Click the Update link. the check box to hide credits. Enabling/Disabling Custom Error Messages How to enable or disable the use of custom error messages for this DNN installation. 3. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. The custom errors in DNN make a more pleasant experience for the users of the portal when an error occurs. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to display credits. At Use Custom Error Messages?.1. instead of seeing a scary error message DNN serves up a nicely formatted message that the user can acknowledge but still know how to keep working with DNN. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable custom error messages.

l 4. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable custom CSS classes. Setting the Host Skin and Container How to set the skin and container to be applied to the Host pages for all portals within this DNN installation. the check box to disable custom CSS classes. This can be used be skin designers to apply specific CSS styles to specific module types.4. Click the Update link. Enabling/Disabling Custom Module CSS Classes How to enable a custom CSS class based on the module definition to be rendered. At Use Custom Module Css Class?. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. 2. Click the Update link. . 3. 1. Navigate to Host > Host Settings.

Related Topics: l See "Uploading a Skin and/or Container" Setting the Host Edit Skin and Container How to set the default skin and container which are applied to the editing pages for all portals within this DNN installation. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. 4. At Edit Skin. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 6. select the skin for all Host pages from the drop-down list. 2. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. select the container for all Host pages from the drop-down list. select the container for all Host pages from the drop-down list.1. 1. 3. select the skin for all Host pages from the drop-down list. At Host Container. 3. Optional. 2. . 4. At Edit Container. At Host Skin. Click the Update link. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. 5. Click the Preview Host Skin and Container link to preview the selected skin and container in a new Web browser.

Note: Administrators are able to renew their Hosting under Admin > Site Settings. 1. Optional.5. Click the Preview Edit Skin and Container link to preview the selected skin and container in a new Web browser. . 6. Go to Basic Settings > Payment Settings. Related Topics: l See "Uploading a Skin and/or Container" Payment Settings Setting the Payment Processor for Portal Hosting How to set the entity which is used to process online payments for portal hosting. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 2. Click the Update link.

Optional. If you don't have a PayPal account. the files are successfully loaded. Where more than one option is set.3. then click the Go To Payment Processor WebSite link and sign up for an account. The cost of hosting is set as a fee for Megabyte space. select the name of you payment processor from the drop-down box. Only PayPal is provided. 7. 6. the Administrator receives a message to contact their hosting provider to purchase additional space. this will be your email address. For example. Setting Child Portal Hosting Fee How set the default hosting fee for child portals in this DNN installation. enter the fee charged for a child portal. page quota or user quota. 5. If you are configuring PayPal. 2. If sufficient space is available. If there is insufficient space. Click the Update link. when a file is uploaded to the site's File Manager. if hosting is allocated by Megabytes. In the Processor Password text box. In the Processor UserId text box. 3. Go to Basic Settings > Payment Settings. At Payment Processor. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. enter the User ID code provided by your selected Payment Processor. the same message is displayed when the Administrator attempts to add more pages or user accounts than allocated. Host settings can be modified for individual portals via the Host > Portals page. 1. hosting is restricted when the first option reached. Likewise. In the Hosting Fee text box. enter the password provided by your selected Payment Processor. . 4. the available hosting space is checked.

1. select the currency to be used for payment processing. enter the number of Days the demonstration portal is available. Leave this field blank for unlimited space. Enabling/Disabling Anonymous Demo Signup How to enable anonymous site visitors to sign up for a demonstration portal. 2. In the Hosting Space (MB) text box. 5. In the Demo Period text box.4. only the Host can create new portals. 8. Optional. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 3. enter the maximum storage space for files in Megabytes per portal. In the Page Quota text box. In the User Quota text box. Leave this field blank for unlimited user accounts. Go to Basic Settings > Payment Settings. 6. . 7. Leave this field blank for unlimited pages. enter the maximum number of users allowed for each child portal. Click the Update link. At Hosting Currency. Note: Enter -1 for no end date. If this setting is disabled. enter the maximum number of pages allowed for each child portal.

aspx" . d. select one of the following options: l Check the check box to permit all visitors access to the Create New Child Site page. c.4. Add this link on one or more pages as required using the Links module. If this option is selected. Uncheck the check box if only the Host can create new child portals. Click the Update link. See Step 6 for more details.OR .com/dotnetnuke/tabid/17/ctl/Signup/mid/321/portalid/0/Default. 6. Select Add New Portal from the module actions menu . b. To create a sign up link: a.Click the Add New Portal link. The link will look something like this "http://mywebsite. At Anonymous Demo Signup?. l 5. Navigate to Host > Portals. a sign up link must be made available to enable sign up. Copy the URL from the Address field of the Web browser. Optional.

6. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. This assists with search engine indexing. 2. enter the replacement information. . Click the Update Rule button. Check with the modules vendor prior to enabling this setting if you are unsure if it supports the Friendly URL Setting. 3. In the Replace With text box.com/Home/tabid/1/ctl/Edit/mid/12/ItemID/1/Default. At Use Friendly Urls?. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable friendly URL's. 3. Click the Add New Rule link. Go to Advanced Settings > Friendly Url Settings. Friendly URL's work with all core DotNetNuke modules.Advanced Settings Friendly URL Settings Enabling/Disabling Use Friendly URL's How to set DNN to enable query strings to be replaced by a friendly URL. enter the URL to be matched. 2. For example the URL: http://www. 4. the check box to disable friendly URL's. This displays a new blank row below any existing Friendly URL rules enabling you to enter details for this rule. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Go to Advanced Settings > Friendly Url Settings. 5.domain. Adding a New Friendly URL Rule How to add a new friendly URL rule. l Warning. however third party modules may not support the friendly URL settings.aspx?tabid=1&ctl=edit&mid=12&ItemID=1 would be replaced by the below friendly URL: http://www.com/Default. In the Match text box.aspx 1. 1.domain.

5. 3. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. In the Match text box. Click the Update Rule button. 1. button located to the right of the Update Rule button. edit the details as required. Tip: To cancel editing a rule. 2. Click the Edit Rule button beside the rule to be edited. 4. click the Delete Editing a Friendly URL Rule . Go to Advanced Settings > Friendly Url Settings.Adding a New Friendly URL Rule Editing a Friendly URL Rule How to edit a friendly URL rule. In the Replace With text box. 6. edit the details as required.

Proxy Settings Setting the Web Request Timeout Period 1. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 4. Click the OK button to confirm.Deleting a Friendly URL Rule How to delete a friendly URL rule. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 1. Go to Advanced Settings > Friendly Url Settings. Click the Delete Rule button beside the rule to be deleted. Go to Advanced Settings > Friendly Url Settings. 2. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 2. 3. .

smtp.g.com To use default port number 25. 1. This is the default option. enter the SMTP server name followed by a colon and the port number. E. 2.ecozanymail.com:587 l l 4. Click the Update link.g. SMTP Server Settings Setting the SMTP Server and Port How to set the SMTP Server address and an alternate port for new portals.ecozany. In the SMTP Server and port text box. smtp. enter the SMTP server name.3.ecozanymail. At SMTP Authentication. E.g. mail. enter one of the following options: l Enter the SMTP Server address. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 3. select from the following options: l Anonymous: Username and password are not required to send outgoing mail. Go to Advanced Settings > SMTP Server Settings. .com To specify an alternate port. E. The SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server is the mail server which sends outgoing mail.

At Module Caching Method. 4. . In the SMTP Password text box. 5. In the SMTP Username text box. select either Memory or Disk. Go to Advanced Settings > Performance Settings. enter a SMTP Username if required. At Page State Persistence. Click the Update link.l Basic: Select for basic username and password authentication: a. Click the Update link. etc. Setting the Module Caching Method 1. the permissions on those pages. 3. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. DotNetNuke is capable of having its performance tuned to maximize database and server interaction. enter a SMTP Password if required. 3. the list of modules in use on the site. Related Topics: l See "Sending Emails without the SMTP Server" Performance Settings Setting Page State Persistence How to set the page state persistence setting which directs DNN on where to store the ViewState for the page. Setting the Caching Period for all Portals To assist in handling of different web site styles. b. Here's how to set the Page State Persistence: 1. The Performance Setting changes how long this information is cached. l NTLM: Select to use NT LAN Manager authentication. It does this in the form of caching. DotNetNuke has quite a few sets of information that get used every time a page is clicked. 2. Go to Advanced Settings > Performance Settings. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. These pieces of information are cached on the server so that the pages are shown as fast as possible. 4. select either Page or Memory. which allows content which has already been generated from the database to be stored as a file for the next time the same information is required. permissions for folders in the File Manager. 2. The information includes items like the list of Pages. Click the Update link. l File: Portals/0/OnlineHelp/Cache folder.

Light: Select for a caching period of 30 seconds. Best for most Web sites containing information updated on a regular basis. DotNetNuke will retrieve information from the database and store it in a cache for an extended period of time. l . This option is recommended on high traffic sites. select one the following options from the drop-down box: l None: Select if items are not cached. Best for Web sites updated on a frequent basis. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Go to Advanced Settings > Performance Settings. DotNetNuke will retrieve information from the database and store it in a cache for a short period of time. Moderate: Select for a caching period of 1 minute. Heavy: Select for a caching period of 2 minutes. DotNetNuke will always retrieve information from the database and not store any information in a cache. Best for Web sites that are always changing (Rare). l l l 4. Overview of Authenticated Cacheability When a user clicks on a link on a web page the contents of that request can be cached in a number of different places. These include: l The Web browser making the request. Click the Update link. 3. At Cache Setting. 2. The Web server responding to the request.1. DotNetNuke will retrieve information from the database and store it in a cache for a period of time. This is the default option.

such as proxy servers. Click the Update link. . Sets Cache-Control: public to specify that the response is cacheable by clients and shared (proxy) caches. Both of these setting will reduce the payload by about 15% however a CPU performance hit is taken on the server. Clients receive a Cache-Control: no-cache directive but the document is cached on the origin server. the rest of the response may be supplied from a shared cache. Setting Content Compression How to set if the content stream is compressed in DNN. Sets Cache-Control: private to specify that the response is cacheable only on the client and not by shared (proxy server) caches. Specifies that the response is cached only at the origin server. ServerAndPrivate Indicates that the response is cached at the server and at the client but nowhere else. Go to Advanced Settings > Performance Settings. which are in the request or response stream.Compression library built in which can use either GZip or Deflate compression. Public. The Authenticated Cacheability setting of ServerAndNoCache makes the content only cacheable on the server. At Authenticated Cacheability. the directive applies to the entire request and a shared (proxy server) cache must force a successful revalidation with the origin Web server before satisfying the request. select either NoCache. the directive applies only to the named field. This is the most secure but also does not take advantage of Web browser caching etc.l Any cache-capable devices. For sites where the content is not particularly sensitive it is OK to set this to a more open setting such as Public. 3. 1. Private Public Server ServerAndNoCache Applies the settings of both Server and NoCache to indicate that the content is cached at the server but all others are explicitly denied the ability to cache the response. Equivalent to ServerAndNoCache. Member Name NoCache Description Sets the Cache-Control: no-cache header. Server. or ServerAndPrivate. If possible the same compression can be achieved using the IIS compression which is more efficient. With a field name. Setting Authenticated Cacheability How to set the Cache-Control HTTP header value for authenticated users. Private. 4. The following table is from MSDN and explains what the different values mean. Default value. ServerAndNoCache. 2. Proxy servers are not allowed to cache the response. DNN has the System. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Without a field name. Similar to the NoCache option.Net. This speeds up the browsing experience and also reduces the load on the server.

At Use Whitespace Filter. l 4. enter a list of the excluded paths. E. Go to Advanced Settings > Compression Settings. In the Excluded Paths text box. At Compression Setting. 2. 3. Removing white space from the rendered HTML reduces the payload by about 10%-15% and has almost no impact on server performance. 3. Compression Settings Setting Excluded Paths How to exclude pages and other resources from being compressed.aspx/desktopmodules/Module/PageThatHasProblemsW . Go to Advanced Settings > Performance Settings. 1. 2. Some resources used on a DNN site should not be compressed as this may affect their functionality. /desktopmodules/Module/PageThatHasProblemsWhenCompressed. 2. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Click the Update link. Click the Update link. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable white space filtering the check box to disable white space filtering. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Enabling/Disabling the Whitespace Filter How to enable or disable the whitespace filter which removes white space from the output HTML. Go to Advanced Settings > Performance Settings.1.g. 1. select one of the following options from the drop-down list: l No Compression Deflate Compression GZip Compression l l 4. 3. Navigate to Host > Host Settings.

JQuery Settings Setting the JQuery Settings 1. Click the Update link. Setting the Whitespace Filter How to use a regular expression filter to remove whitespace. but decreases readability of the JavaScript. 2. Go to Advanced Settings > Compression Settings. DNN does this by applying a regular expression to the output and removing whitespace according to that regular expression. select from these options: l Check the check box to use the standard jQuery script file. Removing white space from the rendered HTML reduces the payload by about 10%-15% and has almost no impact on server performance. 3. Click the Update link. view the version string embedded in the local jQuery script. At Use Hosted jQuery Version?. At Installed jQuery Version. l Uncheck the check box to use a minified version which significantly reduces the size of the JavaScript file. In the Hosted jQuery URL text box. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to use the URL entered in the Hosted jQuery URL field for the jQuery file. Here's how to change the White SpaceFilter regular expression: 1. At Use jQuery Debug Version?. 4. In the Whitespace Filter text box. .4. the check box to use local copies of the file. Go to Advanced Settings > JQuery Settings. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 4. 3. By default this is set to the latest jQuery minified script hosted on Google's CDN servers for optimum performance. l 5. 2. enter the full URL for the jQuery script. enter the regular expression used to filter out white space.

com/asp/coll_servervariables.com" > .ServerVar hash table.domain. then value can be a semicolon delimited list of values. Equal: Performs a search of the value list to determine if the value of the specified server variable is in the value list. Valid values: NotFound. If this is not a regex operation.asp operator: Defines the operation that determines whether an actual match exists. Redirect: Performs a standard redirect to the URL specified in the location attribute. See: http://www. For example it could include a list of IP addresses that should be blocked. NotEqual: Performs a search of the value list to determine if the value of the specified server variable does not exist in the value list.196. You can define as many rules as needed. Redirect. Valid values: Regex.10. NotFound: Returns a 404 status code and stops all further response processing. NotEqual l l Regex: Uses the regular expression specified in the value attribute to determine a match.w3schools. PermanentRedirect. l action: Defines the action to take if a match occurs. For a regex rule.2" operator="Equal" action="Redirect" location="http://www.Other Settings Request Filter Settings Configuring the Request Filter Each rule element in the request filter defines a simple matching expression and the action to take if a match is found. l l l l location: The URL where the request will be redirected. Recovering from Errors: l It is possible to lock yourself out of the web site if you incorrectly configure a rule. PermanentRedirect: Performs a permanent redirect (status code 301) to the URL specified in the location attribute. you might want to create a rule like the one below:< rule servervar="REMOTE_ADDR" values="205. Rule Attributes: l servervar: This is the name of a Server variable from the Request. For example if you intend to prevent an IP address from accessing the site. Equal. the value should be a regular expression that used as a matching expression. This provides a flexible "or" operation where any one rule can cause the request to be blocked. This can be left blank for the 'NotFound' action. l l l value: Defines the value of the servervar that triggers the rule.

1. the Host Administrator will still need to enable the feature and on the "Host Settings" page before they can create any rules and use the feature. Users who are upgrading from a previous DotNetNuke version will need to add the following entry to the HTTPModules section of their web. 2. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. However. 3. then it will be automatically created from the template provided in the Config directory. Go to Other Settings > Request Filter Settings. l Enabling/Disabling Request Filter Settings How to enable or disable the request filter settings. Adding a Request Filter How to add a request filter to your DotNetNuke installation. At Enable Request Filters?. To recover from this error. Note: The following Yellow Warning message displays when you choose to add a request filter: WARNING: Adding an incorrect request filter rule may prevent you or your customers from being able to access your DotNetNuke website. . l 4. Click the Update link.config and Release.l If you inadvertently selected the 'NotEqual' operator you would actually lock out everyone except the specified IP. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. the check box. and may require you to manually edit the DotNetNuke. Installation/Upgrade: l The appropriate HTTPModule entry has been added to the Development. 3. This displays any existing request filters and enables new rules to be added. Go to Other Settings > Request Filter Settings. Click the Add New Rule link. Uncheck the check box to disable request filters. If the DotNetNuke. or edit the web. you must edit the DotNetNuke.config file to remove the incorrectly configured rule. At Enable Request Filters?.config files and will be available for use automatically when installing a new DotNetNuke site. select from the following options: l Check the check box to enable request filters.config file does not exist in the root directory.config file to correct the rule. 1.config to remove the request filter from the HTTPModules section. check 4. 2.config file.

select the operator to use when comparing the incoming request against the specified server variable and value list from these options: Equal. enter the value of the servervar that triggers the rule. or NotFound. or Regex. 10. 8. This value is only used for Redirect and PermanentRedirect actions. then value can be a semicolon delimited list of values. 9. This displays the newly saved rule. For a regex rule. 7. In the Server Variable text box. Click the Save button. enter the URL to redirect the user if the incoming request matches this rule. select the action to perform if the incoming request matches this rule from these options: Redirect. At Operation. If this is not a regex operation. the value should be a regular expression that used as a matching expression. 6. In the Location text box. NotEqual. At Action. PermanentRedirect. A complete list of valid Server Variables can be viewed by clicking on the MSDN link. In the Match Value text box. enter the Server Variable to use when filtering incoming requests.5. .

Click the Edit the check box. 5. At Enable Request Filters?. Repeat Steps 4-10 to add additional rules. check 4. Go to Other Settings > Request Filter Settings. Deleting a Request Filter How to permanently delete a request filter that has been added to this DNN installation. 3. Editing a Request Filter How to edit a request filter that has been added to your DotNetNuke installation. 1. 2. Click the Save button. 6. .11. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. button beside the filter to be edited. Edit one or more fields as required.

At Enable Request Filters?. Click the Delete button beside the filter to be deleted. Admin and Host pages. l RIBBONBAR . select the appearance of the Control Panel from these options: l ICONBAR . Go to Other Settings > Other Settings.1. 2. Other Settings Setting the Default Control Panel How to set which control panel is used across all portals within this DNN installation. check the check box. 2. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 5. 3. Current Page.Tools are grouped into Common Tasks. 1.All tools displayed on one interface. At Control Panel. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. 3. 4. Go to Other Settings > Request Filter Settings. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. . Click the OK button to confirm.

4. Click the Update link. Setting the Control Panel Related Topics: l See "Overview of the RibbonBar Control Panel" See "Overview of the Iconbar Control Panel" See "Configuring the Control Panel Options" l l .

2. etc) to be collected into a buffer before being sent to the database. enter the number of Items to buffer before sending them to the database. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings. then 20 log events will need to occur before the buffer will be sent to the database. 1. select how site log files are stored from these options: l Database: Select to store the Site Log data in the DNN Database. which means that the buffer will be sent to the database when it has one event in it. 3. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. l 4. By default this is set at 1 item.g. This field allows Site Log Events (e.Configuring Site Log Settings for all Portals How to configure the default settings for all Site Logs within this DNN installation. Navigation. 5. At Site Log Storage. enter the default number of Days which the Site Log history is kept for. . For example if the Site Log Buffer is set to 20 items. In the Site Log History text box. In the Site Log Buffer text box. Logins. File System: Select to store the Site Log data in the default directory under the portals subdirectory.

2. the check box to disable user tracking. This setting can be updated for existing portals by the Host under Admin > Site Settings. This is the default setting. This setting should be enabled where the Users Online module is required. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable user tracking. l . Related Topics: l See "Editing Portal Host Settings" Enabling/Disabling Users Online How to enable or disable tracking of online users for all newly created portals.6. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. At Enable Users Online. Click the Update link. 3. 1. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings.

If a user has not interacted with a site for more than 20 minutes. Click the Update link. Click the Update link. E.g. In the Users Online Time text box. it can be automatically unlocked with a successful . 2. The default settings is 20 minutes. 1. and are not tracked further. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Setting the Auto-Unlock Time for User Accounts How to set the auto-unlock time period following multiple unsuccessful attempts to login to a user account. After an account is locked out due to unsuccessful login attempts.4. enter the time period in minutes. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings. they are not considered to be online. 4. This settings applies to all new portals. Setting the Users Online Time How to set the number of minutes that an inactive user is tracked. 3.

Go to Other Settings > Other Settings.authentication after a certain period of time has elapsed. 1. edit and remove the file extensions that are allowed to be uploaded to this DNN installation by site Administrators and other authorized users. 2. In this case. SuperUsers must unlock the account manually to enable the user to login. select from these options: a. The following file extensions are permitted by default: swf. In the Auto-Unlock Accounts After text box. Click the Update link. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. The default setting is 10 minutes. jpeg. 3. Managing Allowable File Extensions How to add. 4. . jpg. Enter the number of Minutes a user must wait until the account can be automatically unlocked. b. Enter "0" minutes to disable auto-unlock feature.

htmtemplate. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings. Click the Update link. xls.g. css. Enabling/Disabling the Scheduler How to enable or disable the Scheduler on all portals and set the scheduler mode. xsl. pdf. ppt. 2. xml. pptx. bmp. ).template. doc. zip. xsd.wma To remove a file extension: Remove the three letter extension and the preceding comma ( . png. 3. docx. . l 4. perform one of the following: l To add a file extension: Enter the extension preceded by a comma ( .fla.jpe. E. gif. . In Allowable File Extensions window. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. xlsx. 1. txt. ).

Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Disabling/Enabling Event Log Buffer How to enable or disable the Event Log Buffer for all new portals. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings. l l 4. Request Method: Select to execute tasks when HTTP Requests are made. Timer Method: Select to maintain a separate thread to execute scheduled tasks while the worker process is alive.1. At Scheduler Mode. . select from the following: l Disabled: Select to disable the scheduler. 2. Click the Update link. 3.

This is the URL associated with the Online Help button accessed via module actions menus. The default setting is to the Online Help provided by DNN Corp which is located at http://www. 3.dotnetnuke. Leave this field blank to remove Online Help for the Admin/Host areas of DotNetNuke. 2.1. the check box to disable. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable. Click the Update link. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. l 4. . Setting the Online Help URL How to set the URL for the Online Help service for all portals.com/About/DotNetNukeOnlineHelp/tabid/787/Default. At Enable Event Log Buffer.aspx. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings.

com/default.aspx?tabid=787. Click the Update link. In Help URL text box. For custom modules. 3. 4. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings.1. To disable Online Help: Leave this field blank. choose one of these options: a. Enabling/Disabling Online Module Help How to enable or disable online help option on the module actions menu. 2. To restore Online Help URL to the default DotNetNuke Online Help: Enter http://www. If enabled. this URL should be provided by the module development company. . To set a custom URL: Enter the URL to your help resource.dotnetnuke. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. c. b. a Help URL for the module will need to be added to the module.

1. 3. 2.1. At Enable Module Online Help. the check box to disable. Click the Update link. l 4. Navigate to Host > Host Settings. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings. 2. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable. . Enabling/Disabling Auto-Sync of the File System How to enable or disable automatic synchronization of the file system. Navigate to Host > Host Settings.

. Go to Other Settings > Other Settings. the check box to disable. 1. 2. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable. Click the Update link. Enabling this feature provides dynamic portal and content localization.3. Enabling/Disabling Content Localization How to enable or disable the passing of the user's current culture. l 4. At Auto-Sync File System?. Navigate to Host > Host Settings.

This option will use the default "en-us" (US English) setting.3. At Enable Content Localization?. . 4. Click the Update link. l Uncheck the check box to disable content localization. select from the following options: l Check the check box to enable content localization.

Additional Host Tools Configuration Manager About the Configuration Manager Page The Host > Configuration Manager page displays the Configuration Manager module. 2. . The Configuration Manager Module Modifying Configuration Files How to modify DNN Configuration files using the Configuration Manager. Navigate to Host > Configuration Manager. Expand the Configuration Files section. This module enables SuperUsers to modify configuration files and merge scripts again this DNN installation. 1.

click the OK button to confirm. Note: If the changes require the web site to be reloaded. Click the Save Changes link. In this scenario.3. At Configuration File.config file and is updated using the Configuration Manager. This loads the selected file into the File text box. Edit the file as required. a message reading "Changing the web. Would you like to continue?" will be displayed. Note: The message "You will lose your current changes if you load a new config file!" is displayed each time you select a new config file. 5. Modifying Maximum Request Length How to modify the Maximum Request Length value which sets the maximum files size (in Kilobytes) allowed for upload (by default ASP. regardless of whether you have saved your changes. select the file to be modified from the drop-down box.config will cause your website to reload and may decrease site performance while the application is reloaded by the webserver. we will allow 100 MB uploads (1024 Kb * 100) . In the below example. This value is maintained in the web.NET limits the size of file uploads to 4 Megabytes). 4.

select web. At Configuration File. Edit the maximum request length value as required.net terminates the operation. 4.config file into the File text box. This loads the web. In this scenario. If you choose to increase the value to 20000 or greater. insert the text executionTimeout="3600" after maxRequestLength. 2. Tip: You can use the Find (Ctrl + F) feature on your Web browser.g. 3. as shown in the below image.config from the drop-down box. Note: The message "You will lose your current changes if you load a new config file!" is displayed each time you select a new config file.1. maxRequestLength="20000" 6. it is recommended that you also add an execution timeout which sets the number of seconds allowed before asp. Locate the line which includes the text maxRequestLength="8192". regardless of whether you have saved your changes. Navigate to Host > Configuration Manager. Expand the Configuration Files section. 5. Optional. E. .

This setting places the system messages as file in the location specified rather than sending them as email. Sending Emails without the SMTP Server How to send emails with no SMTP server set up using the Configuration Manager. This loads the web. you should contact your hosting provider and verify that AppPool memory allocations are adequate. Would you like to continue?" 8. 3.config will cause your website to reload and may decrease site performance while the application is reloaded by the webserver. If you notice problems uploading large files. The file name will be similar to 674a7938-a51f-48c6-b8fc-46dd25446f86. Note: It is unusual.7. select web. . that for large file uploads (100MB). Expand the Configuration Files section.config file into the text window below. Click the OK button to confirm. At Configuration File. 2. Click the Save Changes link.eml. 1. but worth noting. Navigate to Host > Configuration Manager. A message reading "Changing the web.config from the drop-down box. the memory available to your Web server's AppPool must be large enough.

.

paste this script into the Merge Scripts text box.4. Review any message which is displayed and then click OK to continue. l <mailSettings>  <smtp deliveryMethod="specifiedPickupDirectory"> pickupDirectoryLocation="C:\MyFolder\Portals\0" /> l <stmp> <mailsettings> l 6. This loads the selected file into the File text box. 5. At Configuration File. You must change the pickup direction location to a folder on your computer. 3. Click the Execute Merge link. . Navigate to Host > Configuration Manager. Related Topics: l See "Setting the SMTP Server and Port" Merging Configuration Scripts How to merge configuration scripts using the Configuration Manager module. 1. Maximize the Configuration Merge Scripts section. select the file to be modified from the drop-down box. Expand the Configuration Files section. I. which you must change to a folder on your computer. IMPORTANT. At Merge Script. This example uses the location "C:\MyFolder\Portals\0". 2.e.

.

Click the Execute Merge link.. . select from these option: l To upload a script file: a.. b. Review any message which is displayed and then click OK to continue. Expand the Configuration Merge Scripts section. 6. 5. c. This loads the selected file into the text window below. Click the Upload link. Click the Browse.4. l or Paste your script into the Scripts text box. At Merge Script. button. Select the required file.

.

Navigate to Host > Configuration Manager. Expand the Configuration Files section. select web. Optional. .eml. Sending Emails without the SMTP Server How to send emails with no SMTP server set up using the Configuration Manager.config from the drop-down box.7. 2. This setting places the system messages as file in the location specified rather than sending them as email. search for a part of the merged script in the Configuration Files section. To view the successful merge. 3. This loads the web.config file into the File text box. The file name will be similar to 674a7938-a51f-48c6-b8fc-46dd25446f86. At Configuration File. 1.

.

mywebsite. 2.g. 1/8/2011 5:28:14 PM o o o o o o o o . Click the Execute Merge link. E. NT AUTHORITY\NETWORK SERVICE Host Name: The name of the Host Computer.g. Related Topics: l See "Setting the SMTP Server and Port" Dashboard Viewing Dashboard Information How to view a snapshot of your DotNetNuke Application on the Dashboard page.com Server Time: The current date and time for the web server.00_Install Site URL: The principal URL for this site. /mywebsite. E. http://www. 5.00.NET 2.g.com Relative Path: The relative location of the application in relation to the root of the site.g.g. Expand the Configuration Merge Scripts section. E. 1. E. E. -IIS/7.1434 ASP. The following options are available: l Web Server: Select to view the following information about the web server where this DNN Application is located: o OS Version: The version of Windows on the server. MyComputer-PC Physical Path: The physical location of the site root on the server. E.4. Microsoft Windows NT 6. This is the account which needs to be granted folder permissions on the server.0 .g.NET Framework Version: The version of .6001 Service Pack 1 Web Server Version: The version of Internet Information Server (IIS). E. C:\DotNetNuke\Releases\DotNetNuke_06. E.0.g. Review any message which is displayed and then click the OK button. Navigate to Host > Dashboard. Most of these setting are configured via the Host Setting page or in the Web. Click one of the six links displayed on the left hand side of the module to view the associated information.50727.NET Identity: The Windows user account under which the application is running.g.0.config file using the Configuration Manager.

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 (SP1) .2531. SP2 Product Edition: The Edition of SQL Server installed.3068.00. Database Files: Displays a list of data and log files for this DotNetNuke installation.g. Express Edition (64-bit) Software Platform: The full description of the SQL Server Software Platform installed.10. This list may not be complete if you regularly clean your database backup history tables.00 Service Pack: Installed Service Pack(s).0.g.0 (X64) Mar 29 2009 10:11:52 Copyright (c) 1988-2008 Microsoft Corporation Express Edition (64-bit) on Windows NT 6. o o . E.l Database Server: Select to view the following information about the database server where this DNN Application is located: o o o o Database Version: The version of SQL Server 9. E. E.1 (Build 7600: ) Database Backup History: Displays the last 20 database backups for this DotNetNuke installation.g.

FileBasedCachingProvider Logging Provider: The default logging provider for the site.g. E.00. E. E.00 Host GUID: The site's unique identifier.l Host: Select to view the following information about the host settings for this DNN Application: o DotNetNuke Product: Display the name DotNetNuke application you are running.g. AspNetHostingPermission Data Provider: The default data provider for the site. DBLoggingProvider Html Editor Provider: The default Html editor provider for the site.g.g.g. 06. SqlDataProvider Caching Provider: The default caching provider for the site. E. TelerikEditorProvider Friendly URL Provider: The default friendly URL provider for the site. WebPermission. E. DotNetNuke Enterprise Edition DotNetNuke Version: The version of DotNetNuke.g. ReflectionPermission. E. E. DNNFriendlyUrl o o o o o o o o . E.g. 3461026C-0271-4EB8-8273-45FCB37FA64F CAS Permissions: The Code Access Security (CAS) Permissions available for this site.g.

I.e.g. Searchfriendly Scheduler Mode: The Timer Method maintains a separate thread to execute scheduled tasks while the worker process is alive.o Friendly URLs Enabled: Displays whether Friendly URL's are enabled for the site. E. E. the Request Method executes tasks when HTTP Requests are made. REQUEST_ METHOD Web Farm Enabled: Displays True or False to indicate if the site operates in Web Farm mode. I. True or False Friendly URL Type: Displays the type of Friendly URL's used for the site.g. True or False o o o l Portals: Select to view the following information for each portal in this DotNetNuke Application: o o o o o Portal Name: The portal name as set in the Host Title or Site Title field. You can also disable the scheduler by selecting Disabled. Alternatively. GUID: The Global Unique Identifier Pages: Number of site pages Roles: Number of security roles Users: Number of registered users .e.

Version: Displays the module version.l Modules: Select to view a summary list of the installed modules on this DNN Application: o o o Module: Displays the module name. . Instances: Displays the number of instances of the module.

In Use: Displays True or False to indicate if the skin is currently in use on any site.l Skins: Select to view the following details for each skin installed on this DNN Application: o o Skin: Displays the skin name. .

. For additional Host only tasks related to language management. This section covers the Host only tasks. For details on additional topics which can be performed using the Extension module. See "About the Extensions Module" and the related section.Extensions About the Host Extensions Page The Host > Extensions page displays a unique instance of the Extensions module which enables SuperUsers to install and manage extensions. as well as allocate extensions to other portals. See "About the Languages Module" and the related section.

OR . 4. 3. To view additional information about a module's usage: a. 1. Optional.Viewing Detailed Module Usage Information How to view which modules are in use on a DNN installation. Expand the Modules section to view the installed modules list. . This opens the Module Usage Information page. The Host is able to view this information across all portals. Navigate to Host > Extensions . as well as how many instances and on which pages. Click the Yes link beside the required module. 2.Navigate to an Extensions module. Select the Installed Extensions tab. 5. which portals they are in use on. In the In Use column. a Yes link is displayed beside each module that is in use on this site.

This lists the names of all pages where the module is located. . At Show Pages For. select the name of the portal to view all instances of the module on that portal. or select Host to view all instances of the module on the Host pages. c. Click on the Page Name link to visit that page. Optional.b.

etc. Once an extension is installed can be managed and allocated to one or more portals using the Host > Extensions page.g. Modules. Extensions include modules. skins. 8. languages and authentication systems. 2. Navigate to Host > Extensions . 3. review the package installation results and then click the Return link. 7. review the release notes and then click the Next link. . At License. Select the Available Extensions tab. review the package information and then click the Next link.OR . Authentication Systems. On the Package Installation Report page. On the Review License page: a. Click the Next link. On the Release Notes page. 4. Click the Install button beside each extension to be installed. 1. b.Viewing Detailed Module Usage Information Installing Available Extensions How to install one or more extensions which have been packaged with your DNN installation. review the license for this extension. 5. 6. Buying More Extensions How to buy more extensions for your DNN installation using the Host's Extensions module.Navigate to an Extensions module. the check box to agree to the license terms. E. containers. At Accept License? check c. Expand an Extensions section. On the Package Information page.

Once you are finished you can return to your DNN site and deploy the extension. Click the Buy [Extension Name] button for the required extension. Select the Purchased Extensions tab. Navigate to Host > Extensions . 1.com Web site where you can complete this purchase.1.OR .OR .com and display them in the Extensions module. locate the required extension. 1.Navigate to an Extensions module. This will transfer you to the Snowcovered. Using the Search and Filter Options.Navigate to an Extensions module. This provides you with a simple way to install your extensions on this or other DNN installations. 2. 2. See "Fetching List of Purchased Extensions" Fetching List of Purchased Extensions How to fetch the list of extensions which you have purchased from Snowcovered. 2. Navigate to Host > Extensions . Select the More Extensions tab. .

1. a. c. In the Password text box. 4. . click the Deploy button which is only displayed for extensions which can be deployed to the version of DNN you are using. Installing an Extension How to install any type of extension using the Extensions module. To enter or update your store information.com account. click the Enter Store Credentials or the Update Store Credentials button.com account. To deploy an extension to the DNN installation. b. enter the username for your Snowcovered. Click the Fetch List of Extensions button. Navigate to Host > Extensions.3. Optional. enter the password for your Snowcovered. 5. In the Username text box. Click the Save button. This displays a list of your purchased extensions.

review the license for this extension. button. The Upload Results page will be displayed if there is an unusual result such as a legacy Skin or Container. review the release notes and then click the Next link.OR . Tip: If you are uninstalling a module. 3. .2. At License. Complete the wizard . Click the Browse. 2.. 6. At Accept License? check c. This opens the Install Extension Wizard. 4. 1. This tutorial assumes you have just selected the Install Extension Wizard option which has opened the Install Extension Wizard.Click Cancel and start again. If you do not wish to lose this data. Uninstalling an Extension How to install any type of extension using the Extensions module. On the Review License page: a. Navigate to Host > Extensions. review the package installation results and then click the Return link. On the Package Installation Report page. you should consider creating a site template.Click the sion Wizard link. Expand the section which the required extension is associated with. or the language package has already been uploaded. 3. Click the Delete button beside the extension to be uninstalled.See "Using the Install Extension Wizard" Install Exten- Using the Install Extension Wizard How to install an extension using the Install Extension Wizard. or exporting the module content before uninstalling it. select the required action and click the Next link . Click the Next link. 5. In this case. b. all instances of the module on the portal are deleted including the module settings and the content within the module. Click the Next link. 2. b. On the Release Notes page. c. the check box to agree to the license terms. Select the required file from your computer. review the package information and then click the Next link. Select Install Extension Wizard from the module actions menu . On the Upload New Extension Package page: a.OR . Optional. 4. Select the Installed Extensions tab. 3. On the Package Information page.. 1. This opens the Uninstall Package page.

enter the module description. 8. (Warning. At Create Module From. Click the Create Module link. 7.5. This opens the Create New Module page. Creating a Module from an Existing Control How to create a module from an existing control. select the folder to use for your module development. Select Create New Module from the module actions menu . Navigate to Host > Extensions. This displays the Uninstall Package page with the Package Uninstall Logs for you to review. In the Resource text box.) 6. Create New Module . Check the Delete Files check box to permanently remove the resource files associated with the language. At Add Test Page?. 4. Optional. Only recommended for experienced DNN module developers. select Control. Uncheck the check box for no test page. At Owner Folder.OR . select from these options: l Create New Module link. l 10. you will be taken to the test page once the module is created.Click the This opens the Create New Module page. 1. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 7. The only way to regain a language deleted in this manner is to re-enter all of the language values into a new language. 9. Optional. 2.Click the link. the folder to use for the module. Navigate to Host > Extensions. 1.OR . Click the UnInstall Package link. At Module Folder. If selected. 8. 5. enter the name for the module resource. Removing the resource files for a language will remove the languages permanently. In the Description text box. 2. In the Name text box. Click the Return link to return to the module. Select Create New Module from the module actions menu . 3. Click the Yes button to confirm. enter a friendly module name. Important. Check the check box to add a test page for the new module. Creating a Module from a Manifest How to create a module from a manifest. 6.

3. e. you will be taken to the test page once the module is created. 4. At Owner Folder. This opens the Create New Extension page of the Create New Extension Wizard. the folder to use for the module. In the Resource text box. At Language. 2. In the Name text box. At Create Module From. Click the Next link. c. 3. select Manifest. select the folder to use for your module development. an Extension Language Pack or a Module. b. select Display English Name or Display Native and then select a language from the drop-down list.Name to avoid potential clashes if you intend to distribute the extension. 4. enter the name for the module resource. Optional. 7. select from these options: l Check the check box to add a test page for the new module. It is recommended that you use the format CompanyName. Navigate to Host > Extensions. d. enter a friendly name. In the Version text box. . Click the Create Module link. In the Description text box. At Module Folder. At Select Extension Type. 1. select the type of extension you want to create. enter a description. If selected. If you are not adding either a Core Language Pack. In the Friendly Name text box. l 8. Optional. 5.OR . At Add Test Page?. then skip to Step 4. 6. select a version number. enter a unique name for this extension. complete these fields: a. On the Language Pack Specific Details page. complete these fields: a. Optional. This step only appears when adding either an Extension Language Pack or a Core Language Pack.Click the Create New Extension link. This tutorial assumes you have just selected the Create New Extension option which has opened the New Extension Wizard. Select Create New Extension from the Extensions module actions menu . Creating a New Extension How to create a new extension using the New Extension Wizard. On the Create New Extension page. Uncheck the check box for no test page. f.

Optional. In the Organization text box. the module will be available to all portals. l j. select the category for this module from these options: l Admin: Select for modules which are typically only available to Administrators. Click the Next link. e. Once completed. On the Owner Details page. complete these fields: a. ISearchable. complete these fields: a. 6. b. Uncategorized: Select if this module doesn't belong to any of the above categories.b. In the Business Controller Class text box. In the Permissions text box. Enterprise: Select for modules which are only available in DNN Enterprise Edition. identifies if the module is Upgradable. In the Folder Name text box. At Is Portable?. enter fully qualified namespace of the class that implements the Modules Features (IPortable. 5. (Extension Language Pack Only) At Package. g. select from these options: l Check the check box to set the module as premium. In the Owner text box. The default folder name is the module name. enter the name of the organization responsible for this package. Uncheck the check box if this isn't a premium module. Click the Next link. Optional. At Module Category. enter the name of the owner of this package. i. choose the package associated with this language pack. identifies if the module is IPortable. h. At Is Upgradable?. enter any dependencies for this module. enter any Code Access Security Permissions which this module requires. edit the name of the folder for this module. etc) d. c. b. . This step only appears when adding a Module. Premium modules are not automatically assigned to new portals. Professional: Select for modules which are only available in DNN Enterprise Edition. At Is Searchable?. At Is Premium Module?. f. l l l l c. In the Dependencies text box. On the Module Specific Details page. Skip to Step 4. Host: Select for modules which are typically only available to SuperUsers. identifies if the module is ISearchable.

select either C# (C Sharp) or Visual Basic as the language used for this module.. select a folder. At Module Folder.. In the Url text box. "Editing Package Settings for Extensions" Authentication Systems: See "Managing Authentication System Settings" to configure the location of the source files and enable this provider. 8. Important. e. 4. l All Extension types: To add a License and Release Notes. 2. What Next. d. In the Email Address text box. Click the Create Folder link. Click the Next link. 3. or add a new folder for the module. b. enter the name for the new module. In the Folder Name text box. 7. At Owner Folder. enter a name for the folder. a. At File Name/Language. At Create Module From. . This returns you to the Extensions module. 5. In the Name text box. Core Language Pack: See "Edit Core Language Settings" Modules: To complete creating a module package.Click the This opens the Create New Module page. 1. The new folder is selected. Select Create New Module from the module actions menu . Recommended for experienced DNN module programmers only. enter the URL of the organization.c. Create New Module link. Navigate to Host > Extensions. enter a contact email address for this package.OR . enter a friendly module name. select New. In the File Name/Language text box. 6. Extension Language Packs: See "Editing Language Files" to add language files to this package. click the Add Folder link to create a unique folder inside DesktopModules for your development files. complete these additional tutorials: l l l l l See "Adding a New Module Definition" See "Adding a Module Control" See "Creating a Module Package" l l Creating a New Module How to create a new module using a manual process for undertaking custom module upload.

enter the module description. At Add Test Page?. This is the name that is displayed to Page Editors in the Control Panel and is the default module title. Click the Create Module link. select from these options: l Check the check box to add a test page for the new module. In the Friendly Name text box.9. you will be taken to the test page once the module is created. In the Description text box. Optional. In the Description text box. . enter the module description. enter the friendly name of this module. 12. Uncheck the check box for no test page. 10. Creating a New Module Creating a Module Package How to create a module package using the Extensions module. If selected. l 11. Optional. 13.

complete the following fields as required: a. select from the following options: l Check the check box to review the manifest before creating the new package. 2. . If this option is selected Step 7 will be skipped c. b.dnn extension. select the manifest file from the drop-down list. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to use the existing manifest. select from the following options: l Check the check box to use the existing manifest for the Package. Click the Edit button beside the required module. At Choose Manifest File. Expand the Modules section. At Use Existing Manifest. 5.Create Package page. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to review the manifest.dnn5. Navigate to Host > Extensions. Click the Next link.Tip: You can create installation packages for DNN 4+ and DNN 5+ in the same module package by adding two manifest files. On the Create Package . 3. At Review Manifest. This opens the Edit Extension page. This opens the Create Package Wizard. you can use either . 4. If you are only producing a DNN5 package. 1.dnn or . whereas the DNN 5+ has . The manifest file for DNN 4+ retains the . i. If this option is Step 5 will be skipped. Click the Create Package link located at the base of this page.dnn5 extensions for your files.

modify the listed files if required: Highlight and delete any files you do not want to include in this package. Optional.6. b. d. edit the folder name to select files from a different folder and then click the Refresh File List link to view the related files in the multi-line text box. the check box to include the installation files. Optional. In the multi-line text box. l c. At Include Source. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to include the source code. Click the Next link. In the Folder text box.Choose Files To Include page. . Enter the name of any additional files you want to include in this package. On the Create Package . complete the following fields as required: a.

modify the listed files if required: i. On the Create Package .Choose Assemblies To Include page. ii. Click the Next link. Enter the name of any additional assembly files you do want to include in this package. . In the multi-line text box. complete the following fields as required: a. b.7. Optional. Highlight and delete any assembly files you do not want to include in this package.

edit the manifest if required.Create Manifest page. Click the Next link. complete the following fields: a.8. Optional. b. On the Create Package . . In the multi-line text box.

In the Archive File Name text box. enter the file name to use for the archive (zip) file. At Create Package. enter the file name to use for the manifest file. On the Create Package . i. In the Manifest File Name text box. In the Manifest File Name text box. l b. select from the following options: l Check the check box to create a zip file pack.9. c. At Create Manifest File. complete the following fields: a. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to create a package file. select from the following options: l Check the check box to create a manifest file.Create Package page. . enter the file name to use for the manifest. Uncheck the check box if you don't want to create a manifest file.

5. enter a friendly name for this definition. A cache time of "-1" indicates that the module does not support output caching.Create Package Results page the results of the package creation are displayed. 3.d. 10. enter the file name to use for the archive zip file. In the Archive File Name text box. Module Defintions and Controls Adding a New Module Definition How to add a new definition to a module using the Extensions module. Click the Add Definition link. On the Create Package . enter the default cache time for this module. Expand the Module Definitions section. 7. 1. Click the Next link. 4. Click the Edit button beside the required module. 11. . In the Default Cache Time text box. 2. In the Friendly Name text box. Expand the Modules section. e. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. Navigate to Host > Extensions. 6.

. In the Friendly Name text box. 6. Click the Update Definition link. Navigate to Host > Extensions. In the Default Cache Time text box. Adding a New Module Definition Editing a Module Definition How to edit a definition associated with a module. select the definition to be edited from the drop-down list. This new module definition is now listed in the drop-down box of the Select Definition field. 6. Click the Update Definition link. 5. 5. 1. 4. Expand the Module Definitions section. At Select Definition. Deleting a Module Definition How to delete a definition associated with a module. 7. A default cache time of "-1" indicates that the module does not support output caching. 3. select the definition to be deleted from the drop-down list.8. edit the friendly name for this definition. Click the Edit button beside the required module. 3. Navigate to Host > Extensions. 8. Click the Delete Definition link. 2. 2. 4. Expand the Modules section. Expand the Module Definitions section. edit the default cache time for this module. 1. Expand the Modules section. At Select Definition. Click the Edit button beside the required module.

At Manifest.dnn) file to import from the drop-down list. Optional. Navigate to Host > Extensions. At Control. Import Module 5. select the control (. Click the Import Control link. 1.OR . select the manifest (.Deleting a Module Definition Importing a Module Definition How to import a module definition using the Extensions module.aspx) file to import from the drop-down list. Click the Import Manifest link. This opens the Import Module Definition page.Click the Definition link. 6. 2. 3. Select Import Module Definition from the module actions menu . . 4.

Expand the Module Definitions section. Edit: This is the interface type for the editing of information in the module. 6. select an icon from the drop-down list. This opens the Edit Module Control page. In the Help URL text box. 4. Navigate to Host > Extensions.au/Default. 5. At Icon. 9. View: This is the interface type for the display of information in the module. Note: You can pass this field in the query string of a URL to display this interface (E. select from these options: . At Type. Click the Add Module Control link. Expand the Modules section. Edit Announcements). Click the Update link.7. 13.com.g.g. www. At Supports Popups?. 11. 2. This icon is displayed in the Module Header if supported by the skin. 1. Host: This is the interface type for a module interface which is viewable by the Host. select the source (. This is the link to the physical file which defines the module interface. l l l l l 10.ascx) file from the drop-down list. Admin: This is the interface type for a module interface which is viewable by Administrators. At Source. select from the following interface types: l Skin Object: This is the interface type for the display of a skin defined in the . enter a unique name to identify this control within the module. 8. In the View Order text box. Click the Edit button beside the required module. For an edit control. Anonymous: This is the interface type for the display of a module interface that unauthenticated users can view. In the Key text box. E.aspx?tabid=1&mid=200&ctl=Edit) 7.g. Adding a Module Control How to add a module control using the Extensions module. enter a URL to a web page with information on how to use the module/interface.domain. 3. In the Title text box.ascx format. enter the name of the module as it should appear in the controls list and when the interface is displayed (e. enter a view order override if desired. you would typically enter Edit. or enter the type name for this control in the text box. 12.

5. l 15. Click the Edit button beside the required module. At Supports Partial Rendering?. Adding a Module Control Editing a Module Control How to edit a module control using the Extensions module. the check box if partial rendering is not supported. popup editing pages) the check box if popup's aren't supported. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box if the module control supports AJAX partial rendering. 2. 4. Navigate to Host > Extensions. Expand the Module Definitions section.g. 3. . l 14. 1.l Check Uncheck the check box if the module control supports modal popup's (e. Expand the Modules section. This opens the Edit Module Control page. Click the Edit button beside the required control. Click the Update link.

Expand the Module Definitions section. At Definitions.6. 1. 4. Managing Extension Settings Managing Authentication System Settings How to view and edit the authentication settings for an authentication system using the Extensions module. select a module definition to add a module control to. Navigate to Host > Extensions. 2. Deleting a Module Control How to delete a module control using the Extensions module. Click the Delete button beside the control to be deleted. . 3. See "Adding a Module Control" 7. 6. Expand the Modules section. Click the Edit button beside the required module. Click the Update link. 5. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 7. Edit one or more fields as required. Click the Update link.

This is the name the module is commonly known as and is the default module title. In the Login Control Source text box. In the Friendly Name text box. In the Authentication Type text box. release notes. b. 4. Click the Related Topics: l Update Extension link. Click the Edit button beside the required extension. DesktopModules/AuthenticationServices/LiveID/Login.ascx 7.ascx 8. . owner. Navigate to Host > Extensions.g. enter/edit the type of authentication System. E.1. 2. Click the Edit button beside the required module. l 10. In the Settings Control Source text box. select from these options: l Check the check box to enable this authentication system on all portals in this DNN installation. enter/edit the source of the Settings Control for this Authentication System. E. 6. 1. license. 2. description. See "Editing Package Settings for Extensions" Editing Module Package Settings How to edit the package settings of a module such as friendly name. edit the module description. organization name and contact details. Go to the Package Settings section and edit one or more of these fields as required: a. E. Expand the Authentication Systems section. In the Description text box. 3. enter/edit the location of the source files of the logoff control for this authentication system.g. LiveID. At Enabled. Navigate to Host > Extensions. Expand the Authentication Settings section. In the Logoff Control Source text box. 4. enter/edit the location of the source files of the login control for this authentication system. 9. edit the friendly name of this module. 3. This enables Administrators to enable and configure this authentication system on their portal. 5. version. DesktopModules/AuthenticationServices/LiveID/Logoff. c. the module name is displayed. Uncheck the check box to disable the authentication system on all portals in this DNN installation. At Name.g. etc. Expand the Modules section. This opens the Edit Extension page.

Click the Update Module link. . In the Email Address text box. edit the email address of the owner/organization that created this module. In the Organization text box.d. f. g. In the Owner text box. e. In the Release Notes text box. edit the module license. edit the owner of this module. At Version. edit the module release notes. edit the URL of the owner/organization who created this module. In the Url text box. edit the version number. j. edit the name of the organization that created this module. 5. In the License text box. h. i.

.

Once a module is set as premium. Enabling/Disabling Premium Module Assigning/Unassigning Premium Modules to Portals How to assign or remove a premium module from one or more portals. At Is Premium Module? select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to set this module as premium. Go to the Module Settings section. 3. 5. Navigate to Host > Extension. the check box to set this module as not premium. When a module is set as premium it is selected (assigned) to all existing portals and can then be assigned/unassigned from these portals as required. Click the Update Desktop Module link located at the base of the Extension Settings section. Click the Edit button beside the required module. Navigate to Host > Extensions. it will be a premium module on all newly created portals. Click the Edit button beside the required module. It will not be auto-assigned to newly created portals. I. Premium modules can then be assigned (made available to add to a page) on selected portals.e. 3. 2. 4. 1. 2. . l 6. 1. Expand the Module Settings section.Editing Module Package Settings Enabling/Disabling Premium Module How to set a module as premium using the Extensions module. Note: Premium modules are not autoassigned to a portal when it is created. Expand the Modules section.

click on the portal name in the Assigned list and click the Remove button. ISearchable. folder name. b. business controller class and view if the module is IPortable. Professional. Click the Edit button beside the required module. etc). click on the portal name in the Available list and then click the Add button. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. In the Folder Name text box. c. Common. . 4. Editing Module Extension Settings How to edit the settings of a module extension such as module name.4. At Is Portable?. perform any of the following as required: l To assign this premium module to a portal. e. Navigate to Host > Extensions. All portals are now listed l l To remove this premium module from a portal. All portals are l 6. To assign this premium module to all portal. 1. select the category this module will be listed under in the Module section of the RibbonBar Control Panel. Enterprise. Expand the Modules section. button. 3. edit the fully qualified namespace of the class that implements the Modules Features (IPortable. At Module Category. 2. check the check box if the module supports the IPortable interface that enables content to be exported and imported. At Assigned Premium Modules. d. ISearchable. To remove this premium module from all portals. In the Name text box. button. At Is Searchable?. check the check box. check the check box if the module supports the ISearchable interface that enables content to be indexed. In the Business Controller Class text box. click the Add All in the Assigned list. edit the name of the folder for this module. Options are Admin. edit the module name. Go to the Module Settings section and edit one or more of these fields as required: a. The selected portal is now listed in the Assigned list. The selected portal is now removed from the Assigned list. click the Remove All now removed from the Assigned list. 5. or Upgradable. At Is Premium Module?. Note: The Common category is the default category displayed in the RibbonBar therefore you should use this for the modules you use frequently. f.

l 5. Click the Update Extension link to save any changes. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. 6. At Is Upgradable?. At Is Premium Module? select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to set the module as premium. h. Editing Module Extension Settings Edit Core Language Settings How to edit the language package setting using the Extensions module. the check box to set the modules as not premium. check the check box if the module supports the Upgradable interface that allows it to run custom code when upgraded. .g.

Expand the Language Pack Settings section. owner. Click the Edit button beside the required extension. 3. Expand the required extension section. Note: Files can be edited at a system. Expand either the Core Language Pack or Extension Language Pack section as required. license. In the Friendly Name text box. Click the Edit button beside the required language. icon. . Click the Edit button beside the required language. Click the Edit Language Files link. In the Icon File text box.1. Navigate to Host > Extensions. This opens the Languages module. 2. 1. 4. Click the Update Extension link. This opens the Edit Extension page. 3. version. organization name and contact details. edit the friendly name of this module. Expand either the Core Language Pack or Extension Language Pack section as required. c. Editing Language Files How to edit the values associated with a language package such as resource names. At Language. This opens the Edit Extension page. Go to the Package Settings section and edit one or more of these fields as required: a. This opens the Edit Extension page. 1. Expand the Language Pack Settings section. Navigate to Host > Extensions. Complete Steps 2 onward "Editing Language Files" Editing Package Settings for Extensions How to edit the package settings of an extension including friendly name. edit the description. 2. description. In the Description text box. select the associated language. This opens the Edit Extension page. 5. Navigate to Host > Extensions. 2. This is the name the module is commonly known as and is the default module title. portal terms. host or portal level. 4. 6. b. instructions. This opens the Edit Extension page. and portal privacy. 4. system messages. edit the name of the icon file associated with this extension. 3. 5. release notes. 6.

Examples of when a list may be created would be to create a new regions list for a country on the existing Country list. edit the license. edit the owner of this extension. In the Organization text box. An example of this is the countries list used in DNN. modify the version number. An Entry is an individual item of data which relates to a List and is made up of a Key Identifier and a Data Portion. but their usage defines their differences: l A List is a collection of Entries. f. In the Owner text box. In this case the Country. In the Release Notes text box.g. E. i. e. g. In the License text box. which are in effect the same. The List module is based around Lists and Entries. The list is 'Countries' and the entries are the actual countries. edit the URL of the owner/organization who created this extension. j. In the Email Address text box. or to create a new list to manage categories on the Documents module.d. Lists About the Lists Page The Lists page displays the Lists module which enables SuperUsers to maintain lists of information which can be identified by a key value and a data value. h. England. 5. In the Url text box. Holland l Note: Each Entry can also be a list. edit the name of the organization which created this extension. edit the release notes. edit the email address of the owner/organization that created this extension. can be its own list and have region entries associated with it. At Version. which has a Key Identifier and a Data Portion. An example of this is the regions list used in DNN. Click the Update Extension link. . Australia. which is an entry under the Countries List.

In the below example we add a Category list for use in the Documents module. Navigate to Host > 2. . 1. Lists.The Lists Module Adding a Parent List How to add a parent list to the portal using the Host Lists page. Click the Add List link.

At Parent List. In the Entry Text text box. E. Note: When creating a categories list for the Documents module. enter a name for the list. 5. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box if you want to be able to reorder the entries in this list.g. E. the Entry Value is displayed as the category name. At Enable Sort Order. FM. enter the identifier or code for the first entry. enter the first entry (item) that will be in this list. leave this field set to None Specified. Forms 6.3. In the List Name text box.g. In the Entry Value text box. Documents 4. Optional. or Forms.g. l . E. 7. the check box to use alphabetical sort order for list entries.

g. select the entry you to use as the new list. Navigate to Host > 2. Click the Add List link. the check box to use alphabetical sort order for list entries. E. Country 5. Optional.g. Adding a new region to the Countries List. 1.g. Related Topics: l See "Adding a List Entry" Adding a Child List How to add a child list to the portal using the Host Lists page.g. 9. enter the name to be assigned to the List E. VIC 8.g.8. l . Country. E. E. Check Uncheck the check box if you want to be able to reorder the entries in this list. select from these options: l Lists. enter a name for the list. 3. In the Entry Value text box. enabling you to commence adding list entries to this list. At Parent Entry. In the Entry Text text box.Australia 6. select the list to add the new list under. In the List Name text box. Click the Save link. At Enable Sort Order. Victoria 7. E. E.g. enter the identifier of the first entry of the list. At Parent List. Region 4. The newly added parent list is now displayed.

Click the Save link. 1. navigate to and select the title of the List where the new entry will be added. The new list and the first entry for this list is now displayed.g. Navigate to Host > Lists.9. Adding a List Entry How to add a new list entry to a list using the Host Lists page. Documents. E. as shown below. . 2. This displays details of this list to the right. In the Lists section.

enter the identifier for the entry E. Manuals 6. This displays fields enabling you to enter the details for the new entry. In the Entry Text text box. enter the data for the entry E. In the Entry Value text box. Repeat Steps 3 . . 7. Click the Save link. Click the Add Entry link.g. Manuals 5. 4.6 to add additional entries to the list.3.g.

3. Click the Edit button beside the list entry to be edited.g. Victoria in the Australian Countries List 1. 5.The newly added List Entry Editing a List Entry How to edit a list entry within a list maintained on the Host Lists page. 4. 2. This displays the details of this list. Click the Save Entry link. In the Lists section. E. Edit the entry details as required. navigate to and select the title of the required list. . Navigate to Host > Lists.

Country. In the Lists section. 3. navigate to and select the title of the required list.g. E. Navigate to Host > Lists. 2. Click the Delete List link. Click the Delete button beside the entry to be deleted.Australia:Region. Click the OK button to confirm. This displays the details of this list. 3. 1. Navigate to Host > Lists. 1. Deleting a List How to delete a user generated list from the Host Lists page. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 4. Note: Only user generated lists can be deleted. navigate to and select the title of the required list.Deleting a List Entry How to delete a list entry within a list maintained on the Host List page. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" . This displays details of this list and its related list entries. Note: Only user generated entries can be deleted. 2. If an entry is also a list the list and any sub lists and entries will also be removed. In the Lists section.

The Schedule Module Viewing Schedule History (All Tasks) How to view the Schedule History which displays the history of events which are scheduled on this DNN installation.4. Schedule About the Schedule Page The Schedule page (Host > Schedule) displays the Schedule module (also called the Scheduler module) which manages the running of multiple tasks at a scheduled interval. . This enables the Host to optimize the efficiency of a portal by reducing the frequency of common tasks. Click the OK button to confirm. New items (tasks) can also be added to the schedule.

l l l l l l 3. This displays the following details for each task: l Description: A description of the task including any notes on the task.1. Start: Date and time the task began. Navigate to Host > Schedule. End: Date and time the task ended. 2.g. Duration (seconds): Duration of the task in seconds. Viewing Schedule Status How to view details of the current status of scheduled events as well as items in schedule queue for this DNN installation using the Schedule module. Select View Schedule History from the module actions menu. Succeeded: A True or False statement tells if the scheduled task was successfully completed. E. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. . Next Start: Date and time the task is next scheduled to run. UsersOnline Purge Completed Ran On Server: The server on which the task was run.

Free Threads: The number of threads free to be active. This displays the following details: l Current Status: Details the number of current threads for scheduled events. Name: The name of the scheduled task. Active Threads: The number of threads currently active. the following information is listed in the table: l Schedule ID: The task identifier. In the Items in Queue section.g. the number of seconds that the task is overdue is displayed here.1. Object Dependencies: Lists the object which the task is reliant upon. l l l l 3. Next Start: Displays the date and time when the task is next scheduled. Triggered By: Describes what triggers the event. 2. Select View Schedule Status from the module actions menu. Waiting for request Maximum Threads: The maximum number of threads permitted at any time. Time Remaining (seconds): Displays the remaining time in second until the task is next run. Overdue (seconds): When a task fails. . Navigate to Host > Schedule. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. l l l l l l l 4. E. Servers: Lists the servers for the task. Command: Enables the host to Start or Stop the current task.

The following details are displayed for each task: Description: A description of the task including any notes on the task. 1. Navigate to Host > Schedule. Succeeded: A True or False statement tells if the scheduled task was successfully completed.Viewing Task History How to view the history of scheduled events for an individual task using the Schedule module. UsersOnline Purge Completed Duration (seconds): Duration of the task in seconds. Click the l History link beside a task. Next Start: Date and time that the task is next scheduled. l l l l l 3. E. . Click the Cancel link to return to the module. Start: Date and time the task began.g. Ended: Date and time the task ended. 2.

Click the Edit button beside the task to be edited. l 4. At Schedule Enabled. the Yes check box to disable the task. 3. Click the Update link. select from the following: l Check Uncheck the Yes check box to enable the task.Enabling/Disabling Scheduled Tasks How to enable or disable tasks in the Schedule module. Navigate to Host > Schedule. . 2. 1.

4. 1. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. Navigate to Host > Schedule. . Click the Run Now link located at the base of the module.Enabling/Disabling Scheduled Tasks Running a Task How to run a scheduled task immediately on the Schedule module. 2. This displays the message "Item added to schedule for immediate execution". Click the Edit button beside the task to be run. 3.

Running a Task Now Adding an Item to the Schedule How to add an item to the schedule using the Schedule module. or leave it unchecked to Add Item to Schedule 6.SiteLog. enter a numerical value and select Seconds. Hours.g. enter a name for the scheduled job. 2. In the Full Class Name and Assembly text box. the Yes check box to enable the schedule task. DotNetNuke. 1. check disable this item. At Retain Schedule History.Click the link. Leave blank to disable timer for this task. Minutes. Navigate to Host > Schedule. select the number of most recent records to be kept. 3. At Schedule Enabled. . enter the full class name followed by the assembly name. Hours. In the Friendly Name text box.Services. In the Time Lapse text box. 7. 4. 8.OR . Minutes. DOTNETNUKE 5. Select Add Item to Schedule from the module actions menu .PurgeSiteLog.Log. Leave the text box empty to disable retrying failed tasks. E. or Days from the drop-down list box to set the frequency of the task. In the Retry Frequency text box. or Days from the drop-down list to set the time period after a task fails to run before retrying the task. enter a numerical value and select Seconds.

SiteLog. Modify one or more fields as required. "Adding an Item to the Schedule" 4. Click the Update link.OR . At Run on Servers. check the Yes check box to run the event once for each frequency that was missed if the web server is ever out of service and is returned to service. Click the Edit button beside the task to be edited.Select NONE to prevent the event from running each time the application starts. select each of the servers that this task should run on. 11.e. 10. enter the tables or other objects that this event is dependent on. 3. 12.Users. 2. 13. 1.UsersOnline. . At Catch Up Enabled. E. Click the Update link. Navigate to Host > Schedule. the portal) starts . select APPLICATION_START to run this event when the web application (i. Optional.g. At Run on Event. Editing a Scheduled Task How to edit the settings of a task on the Schedule module. In the Object Dependencies text box.9.

. Navigate to Host > Schedule.Editing a scheduled task Deleting a Scheduled Task How to permanently delete a scheduled task for the Schedule module. 3. Click the OK button to confirm. Click the Edit button beside the task to be deleted. 1. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 4. Click the Delete link. 2. As an alternative you can disable a task which you may want in the future.

SQL About the SQL Page The SQL page (Host > SQL). Details of executed SQL queries are logged in the Log Viewer module. displays the SQL module which enables SuperUsers to execute SQL queries against the available databases as defined in the web.config file. This automatically replaces {databaseowner} or {objectqulalifier} with the appropriate values. See "About the Log Viewer Module" .

enter the SQL script to be executed.config file. This allows you to execute your SQL against databases other than the database for running DNN. At Connection.The SQL Module Executing an SQL Script How to execute SQL statements against a database using an SQL script file. In the Script text box. 1. 4. select the database to execute your SQL against. check the check box if the SQL statement does not return a value and only acts on the database to make changes. . 2. 3. Optional. Navigate to Host > SQL. Optional. This field displays the available database connections as listed in the <connectionStrings> section of the web. At Run As Script.

5. If the Run As Script check box is unchecked. Click the Execute link. the results are now displayed. .

Click the Load link. 4. Optional. . At Connection.Uploading and Executing an SQL File How to upload and execute a SQL file against the selected database. At SQL File. 3. Click the Execute link. If the Run As Script check box is unchecked. 2.. Navigate to Host > SQL. 5. This loads the contents of the SQL file into the Script text box. click the Browse. 6. This allows you to execute your SQL against databases other than the database for running DNN. button and then select the SQL file from your computer. select the database to execute your SQL against. check the check box if the SQL statement does not return a value and only acts on the database to make changes.. 1. the results are now displayed. At Run As Script. This field displays the available database connections as listed in the <connectionStrings> section of the web.config file.

Professional Features Overview of Professional Features The below tools are located under the Host section of the RibbonBar Control Panel. See "About the Security Center Module" Displays the User Switcher module. knowledge base articles and more. See "About the Health Monitoring Module" Displays the File Integrity Checker module which enables authorized users to see what files have been modified or are missing. Health Monitoring Application Integrity SearchCrawler Admin Security Center User Switcher Technical Support . See "About the Web Server Manager Module" Displays the Health Monitoring module which enables authorized users to see what files have been modified or are missing. You can access them by either hovering over or clicking on the Host link. Here professional edition customers can find the latest support news. See "About the File Integrity Checker Module" Displays the SearchCrawlerAdmin module which forms part of the DNN Enterprise Edition Search Engine. Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Icon Page Name Manage Web Servers Module Description Displays the Web Server Manager module which provides a simple interface for managing your multiple web servers. See "About the Search Crawler Module Suite" and See "About the SearchCrawlerAdmin module" Displays the Security Center which continuously feeds relevant alerts to Administrators with links to download any relevant security patches. See "About the User Switcher Module" Links to the Technical Support section of the DotNetNuke Support Network.

Links to the View Tickets section of the DotNetNuke Support Network. Links to the Software and Documentation section of the DotNetNuke Support Network where you can access downloadable upgrades. Note: Login required. DotNetNuke staff will promptly reply to your request and progress will be tracked using the ticket. If you have questions about this email please contact sales@dotnetnuke. . Activating a license will ensure that you continue to receive the benefits provided to our customers. you should have received an email with your account and invoice information. Note: Login required. Note: Login required. Here professional edition customers create new support requests (Start A New Ticket) and track existing tickets. Here professional edition customers can manage licenses for subscribed products. Click the Add License button. Details of any licenses which have been previously activated are displayed.com.Icon Page Name My Support Tickets Module Description Note: Login required. See "Automatically activate your DNN Professional Licenses" Links to the License Management section of the DotNetNuke Support Network. Here's how to activate a license: 1. Displays the SharePoint Connector module which enables SuperUsers to synchronize files between a SharePoint site and a DNN site. subscribed products and additional documentation. Navigate to Host > Professional Features > Activate your License. When you purchased DotNetNuke Professional. 2. Links to the DotNetNuke Support Network Knowledge Base which provides guidance for DotNetNuke administrative tasks and answers to common technical questions. See "Overview of the SharePoint Connector Module" Activate Your License License Management Knowledge Base Software and Documentation SharePoint Connector Automatically activate your DNN Professional Licenses The License Manager allows you to activate your DotNetNuke Professional licenses. Note: Login required. This ensures you will continue to receive customer benefits. Displays the Activate Your License module which allows you to activate your DotNetNuke Professional licenses.

In the Invoice Number text box. Production: Select if this is a production (live) portal l 4. 6.3. This value is defaulted to the name of the current web server and may need to be changed when operating in a web farm. enter the invoice number given to you when you purchased your license. At License Type select from these options: l Development: Select if this is a development portal. Click the Automatic Activation button. In the Account Email text box. select the name of the machine that is running DotNetNuke. At Web Server. . 7. 5. enter the email address used when purchasing the license.

respectively. the following license information is displayed: l License Type: either Development or Production. Click the Add License button. 1. Details of any licenses which have been previously activated are displayed. . Invoice Number: Displays the invoice number Web Server: Displays the name of the web server for this DotNetNuke Activated: Displays a checked or unchecked check box which indicates whether the license is active or inactive.A Status message is now displayed. If successful. Expires: Displays the date when the license expires l l l l Manually activate your DNN Professional Licenses How to activate you DNN Professional Edition License using manual activation. 2. Navigate to Host > Professional Features > Activate your License. If unsuccessful. review the message and try again.

3. copy the server ID information to your clipboard. This value is defaulted to the name of the current web server and may need to be changed when operating in a web farm.Server ID. enter the email address used when purchasing the license. At Web Server. Important. enter the invoice number given to you when you purchased your license.com web site. Login to the DotNetNuke web site using your account information. If you use the Live ID . 6. In the Account Email text box. 7. On the DotNetNuke. Click the Manual Activation button. In the Invoice Number text box.com link. This opens the Request License page of the DotNetNuke. At STEP 1 .com web site. a. It is best to use the standard login method when logging in to the DotNetNuke. 8. 5. Click the Request an activation key on DotNetNuke. 9. Production: Select if this is a production (live) portal l 4. select the name of the machine that is running DotNetNuke. 10.com web site in a new browser window. At License Type select from these options: l Development: Select if this is a development portal.

d. you will not be taken to the correct page. At STEP 1. Click the Generate Activation Key button. b.method. c. Copy the key from the STEP 3 text box. Please enter the key generated by the licensing wizard in the textbox below. . This displays the activation key in the STEP 3 text box. paste the information copied at Step 8 into the text box.

Activating your DNN Professional Licenses Manually . Return to your DotNetNuke site. In the Activation Key text box. 12. Click the Submit Activation Key button.com web site. paste the key which you just copied from the DotNetNuke.11. 13.

with instructions for extending your license. This displays a status message detailing whether the request has been successfully submitted or not. 4. Click the Submit Request button. enter your company name. 5. Note: You must first request an extended trial and have received the extension information before completing this tutorial. Click the Request Extended Trial License button. you should receive an email within 1 business day.Requesting an Extended Trial License How to request a 15 day extension to your trial license for DNN Professional Edition. enter the email address where the extended trial information should be sent to. enter the invoice number given to you when you purchased your license. 3. In the Email Address text box. Navigate to Host > Professional Features > Activate your License. 1. Once the request has been submitted. See "Requesting an Extended Trial License" . Requesting an Extended Trial License Activating an Extended Trial License How to activate a 15 day extension to your trial license for DNN Professional Edition. 6. In the Company text box. In the Invoice Number text box. 2.

3. 2. Click the Delete button beside the license to be deleted. "Are you sure you want to delete this license?" . Navigate to Host > Professional Features > Activate your License. In the Extended Trial Key text box. Click the Complete Activation button.1. Navigate to Host > Professional Features > Activate your License. 2. 1. If unsuccessful. Click the Activate Extended Trial License button. 4. Activating an Extended Trial License Deleting a License How to delete a non-active or expired license using the License Manager. A Status message is now displayed. This displays the message. enter the trial key which was emailed to your following your request for an extension. Details of previously activated licenses are displayed. review the message and try again.

It enables the Host to choose which provider is enabled for the RadEditor in this DNN installation. HTML Editor Manager About the HTML Editor Manager The HTML Editor Manager page is located under the Host page (Host Console). The HTML Editor Manager Setting the RadEditor Provider How to set which provider is used for the RadEditor control.RadEditorProvider (default) and the TelerikEditorProvider which are both included with DNN 6+.3. . DNN comes with two different providers for the RadEditor . Click the OK button to confirm.RadEditorProvider. It also enables the Host to configure the DotNetNuke.the DotNetNuke.

Click the Copy Selected button. See "Installing Available Extensions" or "Installing an Extension" 1. navigate to the required portal. Optional. 5. Options include Registered Users. 4. Select the required provider from the drop-down box at the top of the module. Navigate to Host > Editor Provider Settings. To create a configuration which is only associated with one portal. 3. E. select the role for this configuration. At Bind To Role. select the configuration you want to base this new configuration on.RadEditorProvider for registered users. Administrators. You must install this provider or another suitable provider before they can be set. 3. Everyone. Host users. . This displays the Editor Configuration tab to the right.g.Note: The TelerikEditorProvider is not installed by default. In the navigation tree displayed to the left. 1. These configurations can be applied to a single page on the current portal. Click the Change button. Navigate to Host > HTML Editor Manager. 2. all pages of the current portal. Adding New Editor Configurations How to create different configurations for the DotNetNuke. or all pages of all portals within this installation. however it is included as an available extension. Administrators and SuperUsers. 2.

Click the Create link. This option applies to all pages of the current portal .OR . check the check box to set this configuration as only available on the current portal. l 7. .Uncheck the check box to associate this configuration with all portals.6. The new configuration is now displayed in navigation tree to the right. select the single page which this configuration is associated with. Select from the following options to set where this configuration is available: l At Bind To Current Portal. At Special Tab.

Update one or more settings as required. 4. Click the Save File button. Settings include setting the skin. 1. Navigate to Host > Editor Provider Settings. choosing the size and layout of the Editor and its toolbars and setting the File Manager folders to be used for each resource type (e. flash. Modify one or more settings to customize this configuration and then click the Save File button. Tip: This tutorial shows how to configure the settings for everyone who uses the Editor. however different configurations can be created for registered users. select Everyone.g. etc).8. This displays the Editor Configuration tab to the right. Optional. documents.RadEditorProvider for the RadEditor. . 3. Configuring The Editor Provider for Everyone How to configure the settings applied to the DotNetNuke. 2. Administrators and SuperUsers. In the navigation tree displayed to the left. images.

RadEditorProvider. Select from these options: l Default: Light gray toolbars.Configuring The Editor Provider for Everyone Overview of the Editor Configuration Settings The below table provides a list of the settings available for configuring the DotNetNuke. Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings Skin Sets the skin design for the Editor. . Note: The top left button in each of the below screen buttons look during hover. Buttons darken slightly upon hover.

.Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings l Black: Black toolbars. Buttons lighten slightly upon hover.

Buttons become orange upon hover. .Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings l Sunset: Light gray toolbars.

.Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings l Hay: Green-gray toolbars. Buttons become light green upon hover.

.Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings l Forest: Forest green toolbars. Buttons become orange upon hover.

Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings l Vista: Blue toolbars. . Buttons lighten upon hover.

l l Note: If all options are disabled. Language Enter a language to override the language of the portal context. Check the check box to enable one or more of the available editing modes.Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings AutoResizeHeight l Check the check box to auto-resize the height of the Editor to match content heigh Editor scroll bar. EnableResize Check to enable the resize option on the Editor. then all three modes are enabled. Uncheck to restore the height set for the Editor and display a scroll bar. Preview: Preview the Editor content. All three are e l Design: Edit and format the content by using the RadEditor toolbars. The current locale is used . Html: View and manage content in HTML. Set the overview width of the Editor. l BorderWidth Height Width EditModes Set the width in pixels of the border which can be displayed around the Editor. The defau Set the overview height of the Editor.

preserving text sizes only l l l l MSWordRemoveAll: Strips Word-specific tag on Paste.aspx"> l l l l l LinksUseRelativeUrls l l LinksUseTabNames l Check to set links a portal pages like this: <a href="/Default. removing both fonts and Css: Strips CSS styles on Paste Font: Strips Font tags on Paste. a parag the Enter key is pressed. Span: Strips Span tags on Paste. /editor. Check to enable relative URL's.g. pressing Shift+Enter inserts a tag. format stripping will be applied to all content th paste.NET AJAX are small code snippets. In this option. All: Strips all HTML formatting and pastes plain text. This makes it impossible to start bulleted/numbered list with StripFormattingOptions Enforces content formatting. preserving fonts and text sizes MSWordNoFonts: Strips Word-specific tags on Paste. which are called in a seq editor content. Note: Lists are ty they accept the same attributes as paragraph tags. This option also enables you to pressing Ctrl+M or the New Paragraph button. This file must reside either in the s portal directory. The path set here is relative to its parent (e.aspx"> Uncheck to use absolute URL's.Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings cases you should leave this empty. <a href="/Home.aspx?TabName=Home l Uncheck to set links to portals pages like this: <a href="/Default.com/Home. AllExceptNewLines: Clears all tags except line breaks and new lines on paste. Uncheck to insert a new paragraph when the Enter key is pressed. ContentFilters Filters in RadEditor for ASP. when the mode (html / design / preview) is switched or when the page is described here: http://www. <a href="http://ecozany.telerik. This means that whenever you insert a will insert a new paragraph.html CssFile NewLineBr The css file to be used by the editor in wysiwyg mode. NoneSupressCleanMessage: Doesn't strip anything on paste and does not ask MSWord: Strips Word-specific tags on Paste. As a result.aspx?TabName=H .css is a file in the r Check to insert a new line when the Enter key is pressed.com/help/aspnet-ajax/editor-content-filters. The EditorStripFormattingOptions setting can have any or a combination of the fo l None: Pastes the clipboard content as is. In addition.

Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings ShowPortalLinks l Check to enable the "Link To Portal Page" drop-down list in the toolbar to display a portal pages. Note: You must click ins toolbar. Note: The "Link To Portal Page" option still display down list is blank. The floating toolbar can be dragged to any position on th l ShowOnFocus: Toolbar appears directly above the Editor only when the Editor i click outside the Editor. the toolbar disappears. l Floating: Displays the ToggleFloating Toolbar button above the Editor. w hide or show the toolbar. . Toolbar Settings ToolbarMode Select from the following to set the toolbar mode: l Default: Static toolbar is positioned on top of the content area l PageTop: Toolbar appears docked at the top of the page. l Uncheck to disable portal links.

* which allows all extensions. Important. For more information see http://radeditor.extensionname. Example One: Width set to 700px Example Two: Width set to 550px DMX Integration Settings DMXIntegration DMXPath DMX users can enable DMX integration here. .codeplex.Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings ToolsWidth Enter the pixel the width of the Editor's toolbar.com/wikipage?title=DMXIntegration Set the path that the DMX file manager should start with. Specify the root of the docume here. Document Manager Settings DocumentsFilters Enter a comma separated list of possible extensions to be used in the Document Manager mat: *. Leave this field blank if th Default. The default setting is *.

jpg.swf.extensionname. The default setting is ..mpeg. Select which File Manager folder to display for Insert Media (Image Manager). A m required.. Files which exceed this size. They cannot however navigate to other folders. Enter a comma separated list of possible extensions to be used in the Image Manager usin *. Enter a comma separated list of possible extensions to be used in the Flash Manager usin *. Images which exceed this size.*.. Users can browse files well as any child folders.. Users can browse folder as well as any child folders.Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings DocumentsPath Select which File Manager folder to display for the Document Manager.. They cannot however navigate to other folders.*.extensionname. A minimum The default setting is 1024000.. The default setti Enter the maximum size in KB's for media files.gif Select which File Manager folder to display for the Flash Manager. Users can brows folder as well as any child folders. Files which exceed this size.bmp. Files which exceed this size.jpeg.*. The de talRoot] MaxDocumentSize Image Manager Settings ImagesPath Enter the maximum size in KB's for documents. A minimum The default setting is 1024000.fla Select which File Manager folder to display for the Media Manager. Users can browse file well as any child folders. The default setting is 1024000. A minimum The default setting is 1024000.extensionname. Enter a comma separated list of possible extensions to be used in the Flash Manager usin *. Documents which exceed this size. The de talRoot] MaxTemplateSize Enter the maximum size in KB's for template files... The default setting is *. Silverlight Manager Settings SilverlightPath SilverlightFilters MaxSilverlightSize Enter a comma separated list of possible extensions to be used in the Silverlight Manager mat: *.* Enter the maximum size in KB's for media files. Files which exceed this size.png. Users can selected folder as well as any child folders. The default setting is *.avi. A minim ... They cannot however navigate to other folders. The default setti Enter the maximum size in KB's for Flash files.*. A minimum The default setting is 1024000.extensionname. They cannot however navigate to other folders. They cannot however navigate to other folders [PortalRoot] MaxImageSize ImagesFilters Flash Manager Settings FlashPath MaxFlashSize FlashFilters Media Manager Settings MediaPath MaxMediaSize MediaFilters Enter the maximum size in KB's for images.*...*. Template Manager Settings TemplatePath Select which File Manager folder to display for the Template Manager.mpg Root path for where the Silverlight applications are kept. The default setting is *.*.

codeplex.codeplex.aspx As above. Editing Editor Configurations How to edit the default settings applied to the DotNetNuke. Note: This must be a r rent skin directory. This displays the selected configuration to the right.com/discussions/231612?ProjectName=radeditor Enter a function name to be called when the Editor fires the OnPaste event (every time s into the html code on the Editor's HTML tab). The default setting is 1024000. http://radeditor. In the navigation tree displayed to the left. As above. select the configuration you want to update. choosing the size and layout of the Editor and its toolbars and setting the File Manager folders to be used for each resource type (e. http:// . The default setting is *.com/products/aspnet-ajax/spell. As above.html. SpellCustomDictionarySuffix As above. TemplateFilters Client Script Settings OnClientCommand Executing OnClientPasteHtml Enter a comma separated list of possible extensions to be used in the Flash Manager usin *. flash.g.com/wikipage?title=On ScriptToLoad Developer Settings FileBrowserContent ProviderTypeName SpellAllowAddCustom SpellCheckProvider SpellCustomDictionary SourceTypeName SpellDictionaryLanguage SpellDictionaryPath SpellEditDistance SpellWordIgnoreOptions Enter the name of the JavaScript file to be loaded by the provider. Everyone. As above. images. Navigate to Host > HTML Editor Confguration. As above. 2.RadEditorProvider for the RadEditor.g.com/wikipage?title=OnC The content provider is a class that handles how files and folders in the file mananger dia ride this setting if you have another content provider in place. SpellFragmentIgnoreOptions As above. 1. Visit the Telerik Web site for more details on setting these spell checking options. E. http://radeditor. etc).telerik.Editor Configuration Settings Common Settings required. This function can be placed in the JavaSc ScriptToLoad setting.htm Set a function name to be called when the Editor fires the OnExecute event on the client mand is executed). See this example.extensionname. Settings include setting the skin. documents.codeplex. . See this example. This function can be placed in the js file defined in the ScriptToLoad s see http://radeditor.*. As above.

Configuring The Editor Provider for Everyone Deleting Editor Configurations How to delete one or more configurations which you have created for the DotNetNuke. In the navigation tree displayed to the left. Navigate to Host > Editor Provider Settings. On the Editor Manager tab. update one or more settings as required. 2. See "Overview of the Editor Configuration Settings" 4. On the Toolbar Configuration tab. You may choose to reorder. . select the configuration to be deleted. Click the Update button. regroup or remove some tools. E. 5. Note: You cannot delete the generic configuration for Everyone.g. modify the XML as required.3. 1.RadEditorProvider for the RadEditor.

Click the Delete button. Synchronization can be scheduled according to your business requirements. l . enables SuperUsers to synchronize files between a SharePoint site and a DNN site. Files maintained on SharePoint are the 'master' files which are 'pushed' to your DNN site. located under Host > SharePoint Connector.3. SharePoint Connector Overview of the SharePoint Connector Module The SharePoint Connector module. Features: l Files deletes from your SharePoint can optionally be deleted from your DNN site.

you must undertake the below tutorial and then repeat the final step of the See "Installing SharePoint Connector" tutorial. manage and send log entries. See "About the Log Viewer Module" Only available in DotNetNuke Enterprise Edition l The SharePoint Connector Module Enabling Full Trust for SharePoint Connector How to enable full trust on your DNN portal to enable SharePoint Connector.A Log Viewer is integrated with SharePoint Connector to enable SuperUsers to view. Important. . Note: Failure to undertake this task prior to configuring SharePoint Connector will result in the following error message "That assembly does not allow partially trusted callers. The DotNetNuke server has rejected your request to pair. This task is a prerequisite for installing SharePoint Connector." If you receive this message.

*" /> to <trust level="Full" originUrl=". 3.*" /> 4. At Configuration Files. 2. This loads the file into the File text box below. 5. Managing Roles Security for SharePoint Connector How to set the required roles security on your SharePoint Server for SharePoint Connector Important. This task is a prerequisite for installing SharePoint Connector. select the web.1. Note: Failure to undertake this task prior to configuring SharePoint Connector will result in the following error message "DotNetNuke server is unable to process your request. If you receive this mes- . Click the Save Changes link. Please confirm that you installed and confirmed Windows Communication Foundation on the server hosting your DotNetNuke installation. In the File text box.config file. Navigate to Host > Configuration Manager. change the text from <trust level="Medium" originUrl=". Click the OK button to confirm.

. Go to the Roles Summary section and then click the Add Roles link to open the Add Roles Wizard.sage. Click Server Manager in the left navigation. Check the Application Server check box. 3. 2. Open your Server Manager. 1. you must undertake the below tutorial and then repeat the final step of the See "Installing SharePoint Connector" tutorial. Click on the Server Roles link. 4. 5.

7. Click the Next button until you advance to the Select Roles Services page. . Check the Web Server (IIS) Support check box. This opens the Add Roles Wizard.6. 8. Click the Add Required Roles Services button.

9. The Installation will now commence running. The Results page is displayed once the installation is completed. 10. Click the Install button. . Click all the Next buttons until the Install button is enabled.

Installing SharePoint Connector How to install SharePoint Connector. See "Managing Roles Security for SharePoint Connector" .11. You must have the DotNetNuke. Full trust must be enabled on your DNN site.TimerJob. Prerequisite 2. Prerequisite 1. Set appropriate role security levels on your SharePoint server.wsp file.SharePoint. Click the Close button to close the wizard. See "Enabling Full Trust for SharePoint Connector" Prerequisite 3.

wsp file name. Go to your SharePoint Central Administration. 2. Navigate to Operations > Global Configuration . Note: You cannot copy and paste this path. b. Click on the DotNetNuke. Paste a copy of the wsp file into the c: drive. enter the below path.Solution Management.SharePoint. a.wsp" e. rather is MUST be typed.1. "C:\Program Files\Common Files\microsoft shared\Web Server Extensions\12\BIN\stsadm" -o addsolution -filename "c:\DotNetNuke. Go to your SharePoint Server. The "Operation Completed Successfully" message is displayed. d. This opens the Command Prompt window in elevated privilege mode.TimerJob. In the Command Prompt window.SharePoint. enter cmd and then press and hold the Ctrl + Shift + Enter keys. a. In the Search box. Strike the Enter key. c.TimerJob. b. . Click the Windows Start button.

d. ensure Now is selected in the Deploy When? section. e. Click the OK button to confirm. .c. Click the Deploy Solution button. On the Deploy Solution page.

f. . You are now returned to the Solution Management page. Navigate to Central Administration > Application Management > External Service Connections . Click the Click here to configure your DotNetNuke's Connection link. h. where the DNN SharePoint Connector solution status is now listed as "Deployed".DotNetNuke Connector. g.

To acquire this token: i. This opens the Server Connection page where you can enter. iv. ii. At SharePoint Sync Token. In the DotNetNuke Synchronization Token text box. l. k. Navigate to Host > SharePoint Connector. view or create a connection with a DotNetNuke Server. Go to the DotNetNuke Credentials section. . In the DotNetNuke Server Address text box. Navigate to Host > SharePoint Connector. ii. In the DotNetNuke Username text box.i. iii. copy the token. j. copy the DotNetNuke Server Address. enter the username of a SuperUser for the DotNetNuke server. In the DotNetNuke Password text box. iii. Go to your DNN Site. To acquire this address: i. At SharePoint Sync Token. At SharePoint Synchronization Site Address. Go to your DNN Site. enter the synchronization token for the DotNetNuke server. The synchronization token is found in the SharePoint Connector settings page on that DotNetNuke server. o. enter or paste the server address for the DotNetNuke server. m. copy the token. enter the password of a SuperUser for the DotNetNuke server. n. Go to the DotNetNuke Server section.

Review the Installation Results. 3.p. Your DNN site and SharePoint Repository should now be successfully paired and your SharePoint Connector installed. Click the Save button. .

This opens the Command Prompt window in elevated privilege mode. Go to your SharePoint Central Administration. In the Search box. a. The default setting is on the hour. 1. Optional. 4. 1. Enter "C:\Program Files\Common Files\microsoft shared\Web Server Extensions\12\BIN\stsadm" -o copyappbincontent 5. 2. Setting the Synchronization Schedule How to set the frequency with which files are pushed from your SharePoint site to your DNN site. select one of the following radio buttons and set the frequency that the DotNetNuke Connector timer job runs: l Every Hour: Select to synchronize every hour. In the Synchronization Schedule section. Go to your SharePoint Server. Click the Windows Start button. Navigate to Application Management > DotNetNuke Connector. The creates breadcrumbing to Central Administration > Application Management > DotNetNuke Connector > Synchronization Item. Select the number of minutes after the hour. . Strike the Enter key. 3. 3. enter cmd and then press and hold the Ctrl + Shift + Enter keys. 4. Select Settings > Synchronization Schedule from the menu. 2.Enabling SharePoint Breadcrumbs How to enable breadcrumbs to DotNetNuke File Synchronization Management within your SharePoint.

Synchronizing Files How to synchronize your SharePoint and DNN files. a. a. Optional. Select the day of the week and time. This tutorial assumes you have one or more files uploaded to your SharePoint site which are ready to be synchronized. check email notification to be sent if an error occurs. In the Recipient's Email Address text box. Select the time of the day. This will 'push' the files from your SharePoint site onto your DNN site.l Every Day: Select to synchronize daily. Click the OK button to confirm. 5. l Every Week: Select to synchronize weekly. Optional. The default setting is 12 AM. the Enable check box if you wish to enable a. . 6. Optional. enter the email address where the notification will be sent. The default setting is Sunday and 12 AM. In the Email Notifications section.

Please note that this could cause performance issues depending on the number of documents that you are transferring. Go to your SharePoint Central Administration. Optional. In the Propagate Deletions section. select the document folder library (including all sub-folders) to be synchronized with DNN. In the Document Source section. At Portal. 5.1. . Go to the Document Destination section. 7. select the destination portal and then select the parent folder on your DNN site. Navigate to Application Management > DotNetNuke Connector. 3. 2. Click the New Synchronization Item button to open the Synchronization Item page. check the check box if you want deleted files from your SharePoint server to be deleted from your DotNetNuke server as well. 6. 4.

. Details of this pending synchronization is now displayed. Click the OK button to confirm.8.

Following the next synchronization. Synchronization Successful Message . a successful or unsuccessful record will be displayed on this page.9.

A child portal can be converted into a Parent Portal at any time by simply modifying the Portal Alias entry.com/directory). The portals page displays a list of all existing portals including the following details of each: l Portal Title: The Title of the portal as set on the Admin > Site Settings page. setting the Primary/Secondary DNS entries to point to the Hosting Providers DNS Server. Disk Space: The amount of space in Mega Bytes (MB) allocated to the portal..217). http://www. www.174. l .com). Expires: The date when hosting for this portal is set to expire. This generally involves purchasing a Domain Name from an Internet Registrar. Do not create a Parent Portal until all of the DNS mappings are in place or else you will not be able to access your portal. A child portal is a subhost of your Hosting Provider account. Portal Aliases: The http aliases for the portal. and having your Hosting Provider map the Domain Name to the IP Address of your account.domain.e. l l l l l What is the difference between a parent and child portal? l A parent portal is associated with a unique URL (i. Essentially this means a directory is created on the web server which allows the site to be accessed through a URL address which includes a Parent domain name as well as the directory name (I.domain.e. If you need to have multiple Domain Names pointing to the same portal then you can add multiple aliases in the portal edit interface. Users: The number of Registered Users for the portal. 65. You can also use the IP Address of your site without a Domain Name (i.86. It also allows the Host to generate a template of an existing portal for duplication on another DNN portal installation. Hosting Fee: The monthly fee set for the portal.Creating and Managing Portals About the Portals Page The Portals page allows the Host to create and maintain all portals within this DNN installation.e.

select the site you want to go to from the drop-down box. 3. hosting space. Hover over the Tools link. Tip: This can also be achieved using the RibbonBar. 2. Viewing any Portal How to view any portal within this DNN installation using the Portals module. 4. At Sites. site log history. etc). . click on the link to go to home page of that portal. See "Switching Sites" 1. Viewing any Portal Switching Sites How to switch between sites (portals) using the RibbonBar. Once a portal has been created. 2. In the Portal Aliases column.Note: Portals are created using the default setting as defined on the Host Settings module (such as hosting fee. Navigate to Host > Portals. Go to the View Website section. these properties can be modified for individual portals. 1. Performing this task will take you to the default page of the selected portal which will be the page set as Home or the Splash page. Click the Switch Site link.

At Portal Type. In the Title text box.domain. host space. E.click the displays the Add New Portal page. Optional.com c. 3. enter description of the portal. New portals are created with the default settings as defined in the Host Settings module. In the Portal Setup section. Optional. d. g. enter the key words for the portal separated by a comma ( . host fee. select a template from the drop-down list. select Parent. Optional. b. Navigate to Host > Portals. In the Description text box. site log history. This . When the portal is created the Administrator receives a message with the login details you have provided for them however their password is not included for security reasons. In the Home Directory text box. f. e. www. 1. These settings can be modified once the portal is created. Note: Click the Customize link a second time to return to default setting. At Template. 2. E. click the Customize link and enter a new location for this portals home directory (relative to the DNN installation root directory).OR .Adding a Parent Portal How to add a new parent portal to this DNN installation.g. In the Keywords text box. enter an alias for the portal. Select Add New Portal from the module actions menu .g. complete the following fields: a. ). MyWebsite. enter the name of the portal.g. In the Portal Alias text box. E. Add New Portal link. Optional.

In the Username text box.4. complete the following fields: a. 5. b. In the Security Settings section. f. c. enter the Administrator's first name. e. enter the Administrator's email address. . Click the Create Portal link. d. In the Email text box. In the Last Name text box. enter the Administrator's last name. In the First Name text box. In the Confirm text box. enter a password for the Administrator. In the Password text box. re-enter the password for the Administrator. enter a username for the Administrator.

New portals are created with the default settings as defined in the Host Settings module.g.Adding a Parent Portal Adding a Child Portal How to add a new child portal to this DNN installation. . host space. site log history. These settings can be modified once the portal is created. host fee. When the portal is created the Administrator receives a message with the login details you have provided for them however their password is not included for security reasons. E.

Optional. At Portal Type. Note: Child Portal names must be unique. f. select Child. b. complete the following fields: a. www. c. At Template. In the Confirm text box. Note: Click the Customize link a second time to return to default setting. 4. click the Customize link and enter a new location for this portals home directory (relative to the DNN installation root directory). enter the Administrator's last name. E.com/Child. Add New Portal link. b. c. In the Password text box. enter an alias for the portal. enter a username for the Administrator. In the Home Directory text box. e. d. enter the name of the portal.Click the displays the Add New Portal page. Optional.domain.g. enter the key words for the portal separated by a comma ( . MyChildWebsite.1. re-enter the password for the Administrator. enter the Administrator's first name. Optional. 2. In the Portal Setup section. In the Last Name text box. E. In the Title text box. enter description of the portal. enter the Administrator's email address. Optional. In the Username text box. d. ). select a template from the drop-down list. e.OR . 5. In the Description text box. In the Keywords text box. 3. In the Security Settings section. complete the following fields: a. enter a password for the Administrator. In the Email text box. Click the Create Portal link.g. In the Portal Alias text box. In the First Name text box. This . Select Add New Portal from the module actions menu . Navigate to Host > Portals. g. f.

page quota.Adding a Child Portal Editing Portal Host Settings How to edit hosting settings including hosting space. user quota. . site log history and premium modules for a portal.

Click the Update link. Go to Advanced Settings > Host Settings. In the Disk Space text box. enter the available disc space in Megabytes (MB) allowed for this portal . The module is now removed from the Selected Mod- l To remove all premium modules from the site: 1. At Expiry Date. 2. enter the number of days that Site Log activity is kept for this portal. Click on the module name in the Selected Modules list. enter the maximum number of users allowed for this portal. . Click on the module name in the Available Modules list. Leave this field blank for unlimited user accounts. All modules are now removed from the Selected 11. click the Calendar link and select the date that hosting contract for this portal expires. Click the Remove Module ules list. 8. 2. 5. 6. Navigate to Host > Portals. button. 3. The module is now listed in the Selected Modules list. 2. Click the Edit button beside the title of the required portal. In the Page Quota text box. 7. Click the Add Module button. Click on the module name in the Selected Modules list. In the Hosting Fee text box enter the monthly hosting fee for this site. button.1. Click the Add All Modules list. All modules are now listed in the Selected Modules l To remove a premium module from the portal: 1. 2. Leave this field blank for unlimited pages. In the Site Log History (Days) text box. Click the Remove All Modules Modules list. button. This opens the Edit Portals page. 10. 2. l To add all premium modules to the portal: 1. 4. 9. In the User Quota text box.OR Leave this field blank for unlimited space. Click on the module name in the Available Modules list. enter the maximum number of pages allowed for this portal. perform the following to add or remove premium modules on this site: l To add a premium module to the portal: 1. At Premium Modules.

Optional. the check box if an SSL Certificate has been installed for this porthe check box if pages which are not marked as Secure are not 6. In the SSL URL text box. Click the Edit button beside the title of the required portal.com 7. check tal.domain. In the Standard URL text box. At SSL Enforced? check accessible with SSL (HTTPS). www. Optional. Navigate to Host > Portals. Go to Advanced Settings > SSL Settings. 4. At SSL Enabled?.Editing Portal Host Settings Setting SSL Settings for a Single Portal How to set the SSL settings for an individual portal. 2.secure.g. This is only required if the SSL Certificate does not match your standard URL. 1. Optional. enter a URL which will be used for secure connections for this portal. Optional. This opens the Edit Portals page. 3. . E. enter your standard portal URL for non-secure connections. 5.

3. it can then be deployed to that portal by Administrators. At Premium Modules. Click the Edit button beside the title of the required portal. This opens the Edit Portals page. button. click the Add All Modules Selected Modules list. Click the Update link. 1. This opens the Edit Portals page. The module is now listed in the Selected Modules list. Go to Advanced Settings > Host Settings section. Navigate to Host > Portals. 5. Once a premium module has been added to a portal. At Premium Modules. All modules are now listed in the . Click the Add Module button. Repeat Steps 4-5 to add additional modules. 4. Once a premium module has been added to a portal. 6. Go to Advanced Settings > Host Settings. 4.8. 2. Navigate to Host > Portals. Adding Premium Modules to a Portal How to add one or more premium modules to a portal. Click the Edit button beside the title of the required portal. click on the module name in the Available Modules list. it can then be deployed to that portal by Administrators. Adding Premium Modules to a Portal Adding All Premium Modules to a Portal How to add all premium modules to a portal. 1. 3. 2.

Repeat Steps 5 .Host Settings.6 to remove additional modules. This opens the Edit Portals page. All modules are now removed from . 3. Navigate to Host > Portals. click on the module name in the Selected Modules list. 1. Click the Edit button beside the title of the required portal. 4. 2. Click the Remove Module button. Navigate to Host > Portals. 4. The module is now removed from the Selected Modules list. button.Adding All Premium Modules to a Portal Removing One or More Premium Modules from a Portal How to remove a single premium module from a portal. Go to Advanced Settings . Go to Advanced Settings > Host Settings. At Premium Modules. 1. 3. 5. Removing One or More Premium Modules from a Portal Removing All Premium Modules from a Portal How to remove all premium modules from a portal. Click the Edit button beside the title of the required portal. click the Remove All Modules the Selected Modules list. This opens the Edit Portals page. 6. At Premium Modules. 2.

2. Services. 1.resources extension is also saved. enter a name to save the new template portal as.Removing All Premium Modules from a Portal Exporting a Portal Template How to export a portal template for use with the Site Wizard or when creating a new portal. The template file has a . About Us. 6. select the portal to be exported as a template. Uncheck the check box to NOT copy the portal content. If you included the portal content a second file with a . Select Export Portal Template from the menu . Small Business 5. Module content for modules which allow import/export can optionally be included. The address where the exported template file(s) have been saved to is now displayed. enter a description of the portal template. This will copy the content of any modules which have export/import capabilities. E.g.click the Export Portal Template link. Pages are: Home. 3. l 7. Click the Export Template link. E.template. select from the following options: l Check the check box to copy portal content to the template. Products.g. pages settings and module settings. In the Template File Name text box. In the Template Description text box.OR . .template extension. Navigate to Host > Portals. Contact Us. The portal template includes all portal pages. 4. At Portal. At Include Content. Five page web site for a small business.

. Go to the saved template files and save them to your local computer for future use. Optional. Error Message: HTTP Error 404.Not Found The request filtering module is configured to deny a request that exceeds the request content length. modify maxRequestLength="8192" in the web. Navigate to Admin > File Manager. By default DNN is configured for a maximum upload of 8 Megabytes. Locate and select the [TemplateName].. If you receive this message the size of the file you are trying to upload exceeds 8192 KB. This means you need to modify the Web. Click the Browse.config file to the required limit. Tip: The file extensions . .13 . It is recommended that files greater than 8 Megabytes be uploaded using FTP (file transfer protocol) access. button.template and . 2. Uploading a Portal Template to a new DNN Installation The Admin can upload an exported site template to upload an exported portal template to a new DotNetNuke installation.template file. 3. To do this. See "Modifying Maximum Request Length" 1. 4.config file associated with this DNN installation.8.resources may need to be added as Allowable File Extensions before these file types can be uploaded.template. Click the Upload button.

OR . Click the 7. Upload button.5. 8. complete the remaining steps: a. 1. Select Delete Expired Portals from the module actions menu . c. Navigate to Host > Portals. 3. 6. Click the OK button to confirm. 2. Deleting Expired Portals How to delete all portals whose hosting has expired. Click the Upload File link. See "Setting the Host Portal" 1. Navigate to Host > Portals page. To do this you must set another portal as the host portal. Click the Upload File link. Deleting Expired Portals Deleting a Portal How to permanently delete a portal. 2. At the drop-down box. select the Templates folder. Optional. Note: The portal set as the host portal cannot be deleted. Locate and select the [TemplateName]. The expiry date is displayed in the Expires column.Click the Delete Expired Portals link. This display the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Portal?" . Optional.resources file. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete These Items?" 4. If the template includes content. Click the Expired link to view all expired portals.template. b. Click the Delete button beside the portal to be deleted. Click the Browse button.

Setting is effective in single-portal configuration only. To edit this parameter you must edit the Host setting in the database directly as there is no user interface for this yet. Click the OK button to confirm.3. Optional. Canonical: The new URL is automatically mapped but is handled as a Canonical URL. This setting will disable the automatic creation of Portal Aliases. this mode is used to determine how to handle web sites that have multiple domains pointed at one IIS Web site. check the check box to automatically map a new URL. Redirect: The URL is automatically mapped but is redirected to the default alias and a permanent redirect (301) is sent to search engines. DNN will automatically add that portal alias to its list. l l 5. 3. Go to Advanced Settings > Portal Aliases. This opens the Edit Portals page. This adds a link element to the <head> element of the page so that when an alias that is not the default is used to browse to the site it tells search engines to compile all the results into one alias (the canonical or default alias). 1. . Note: Use the OmitFromRewriteprocessing option to stop this behavior being applied to any URL's that you do not want to be processed. 2. 4. At Portal Alias Mapping Mode. Navigate to Host > Portals. Select from these options: l None: Select if the new URL is not mapped. This is the default setting on upgrades. Click on the Edit button beside the title of the required portal. This setting determines how the portal responds to URLs which are mapped to the portal but are not currently in the list of aliases. Portal Aliases Configuring Portal Alias Settings How to choose your portal alias mapping mode and set the default alias for your portal. At Auto Add Portal Alias.

enter the new alias. If the mode is set to Canonical then the default alias is used as the canonical alias for search engines. Check the Create child folder in website root? check box create this alias as a child portal alias. complete the remaining steps. This opens the Edit Portals page..6. the Portal Aliases section. Note: Do not include the http:// protocol prefix. Add New Alias link. you are now finished. 8. 7. or a server name (i. 2.e. 7. 146.e. At Default Alias. MYSERVER). Optional. 9.2). select the default alias for this portal. The name servers changed. Adding a Portal Alias How to add multiple domain names which can be used to navigate to this portal. If either Canonical or Redirect were selected. 6. The default alias is used in conjunction with the Portal Alias Mapping Mode field. Repeat Steps 3-4 to return to Portal Aliases section. etc.e. 1. Maximize 5. Click on the Edit 3.) and you need to set up a secondary URL (perhaps using the IP address and a unique child portal name) to access the site. Navigate to Host > Portals.0. This is important if the primary domain name for the portal is not resolving properly (I.. Click the Update link. a full URL (i. In the HTTP Alias text box. Maximize 4.e.com). an IP address (i. If the Portal Alias Mapping Mode field was set to None at Step 5. This could be a local address (i. . Click the Update link. Click the button beside the title of the required portal. the Advanced Settings section.domain. local host).0.e. If the mode is Redirect then the default alias is used as the permanent redirect. www.

Deleting a Portal Alias How to delete a portal alias. from a portal using the Portal Alias module.Portal Aliases. 4. Click on the Edit button to the left of the HTTP Alias to be edited. edit the portal alias as required in the text box which is now exposed. 5. 3. Navigate to Host > Portals. . also known as a HTTP alias. 6. In the HTTP Alias list. Click on the Edit button beside the title of the required portal. 1. Go to Advanced Settings . This opens the Edit Portals page. 9. The newly added portal alias is now displayed in the HTTP Alias list.8. The newly added Portal Alias Editing a Portal Alias How to edit portal aliases (also known as HTTP aliases) which are used by DNN to identify portals when they are accessed by a Web browser. 2. Click the Update link. Click the Update button.

click the Delete button beside the alias to be deleted. Go to Advanced Settings > Portal Aliases section. 3. Click the OK button to confirm. . Navigate to Host > Portals. 2. Click on the Edit button beside the title of the required portal. In the HTTP Alias list. This opens the Edit Portals page. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 5. 4.1.

. See the Additional Host Tools > Extensions section of this manual for details on installing modules.Installing and Allocating Modules Installing and Allocating Modules Modules are installed and allocated using the Host > Extensions page. allocating them to one or more portals and setting premium modules.

Extensions The Admin > Extensions page displays the Extensions module which enables Administrators to manage extensions which have been installed on the site by the Host.About the Admin Console The Admin pages in the main menu is available only to Administrators and SuperUsers. See "About the Site Settings Page" Additional settings can be accessed by SuperUsers. Languages The Admin > Languages page displays the Languages module which enables Administrators and authorized users to enable and manage the languages files associated with a site. Placing your mouse over Admin in the main menu displays the child pages. This module cannot be deployed on site pages and is therefore only accessible to Administrators and SuperUsers. See "About the Languages Module" Additional functionality such as installation is available to the Host. It enables them to manage settings and tools for this portal. Note: The Admin page is hidden from the navigation by default. Pages The Admin > Pages page displays the Tabs module which enables full page management including the ability to modify page hierarchy. . See "About the Pages (Tabs) module" SuperUsers can also manage Host Tabs. The Admin Console Overview of the Admin Child Pages Icon Page Name Description And Tutorial Link Site Settings The Admin > Site Settings page displays the Site Settings module. See "About the Extensions Module" Additional extension management can be accessed by SuperUsers.

See "About the File Manager Module" Recycle Bin The Admin > Recycle Bin page displays the Recycle Bin module which enables users to restore or permanently delete pages and modules. See "About the Vendors Module" The Admin > Site Log page displays the Site Log module which enables viewing of statistical reports for the site. as well as configuration of user settings relating to authentication. See "About the User Accounts Module" The Admin > Vendors page displays the Vendors module which enables the creation and management of vendor accounts. See "About the Google Analytics Module" Taxonomy The Admin > Taxonomy page displays the Taxonomy Manager module. The Skin Designer module. See "About the Taxonomy Manager Module" Search The Admin > Search Engine SiteMap page displays the Sitemap module.Icon Page Name Description And Tutorial Link Tip: A large section of language packs are available from the DotNetNuke Web site and the DotNetNuke MarketPlace. page design as well as apply a template to the site using a simple step-by-step wizard.The Admin > Google Analytics page displays the Google Analytics module which improves lytics Pro your site results online. See "About the Skins Module" and "About the Skin Designer Module" Tip: Skin installation is managed by the Host using the Host > Extensions page. also titled the Skin Editor and the Skin Designer module. The Skin module. See "About the Engine Site Search Engine SiteMap Module" . enables authorized users to preview and apply skins to the site. See "About the Security Roles Module" The Admin > User Accounts page displays the User Accounts module which enables the creation and management of user accounts. See "About the Site Log Module" Site Log Newsletters The Admin > Newsletters page displays the Newsletters module which enables sending bulking email messages to individual email addresses and security roles. See "About the Newsletters Module" File Manager The Admin > File Manager page displays the File Manager module which enables management of site files. See "About the Log Viewer Module" Site Wizard The Admin > Site Wizard page displays the Site Wizard module which enables authorized to view the module to configure basic site settings. Skins The Admin > Skins page displays the Skins module. which can be deployed on any site page. which cannot be deployed on site pages. See "About the Site Wizard Module" Google Ana. vendor banners and affiliate accounts using the Vendors module. See "About the Recycle Bin Module" Event Viewer The Admin > Event Viewer page displays the Log Viewer module (also called the Event Viewer module) which provides a log of database events. enables Administrators to set container and skin token values. This module can be deployed on site pages. Vendor accounts and banners maintained under the Admin page are only available to this site. Security Roles User Accounts Vendors The Admin > Security Roles page displays the Security Roles module which enables the management of security roles as well as role assignment.

Icon Page Name Description And Tutorial Link Map Content Staging The Admin > Content Staging page displays the Content Staging module which enables users to publish content from a staging portal to a target (production) portal. . See "About the Content Staging Module" Only available in DotNetNuke Enterprise Edition Tip: Click the Admin button in the main menu to go to the Admin page which displays icons linking to each child page.

SuperUsers have access to additional Advanced Settings sections called Portal Aliases. and user registration settings. DNN usability. Tip: To quickly configure the basic site settings and get started with building your portal. different site settings can be configured for each language as required.Configuring Your Site Settings About the Site Settings Page The Site Settings page (Admin > Site Settings) enables Administrators to configure basic and advanced site settings including design. advertising. See "About the Stylesheet Editor" Tip: You can also navigate to these sections via the Host > Portals page. See "About the Site Wizard Module" Important. SSL Settings and Host Settings. Note: For details on using the Stylesheet Editor see the "Managing Site Design" section of this manual. . etc. See "Editing Portal Host Settings" and other topics in the "Creating and Managing Portals > Managing Portals" section of this manual. payment. Where two or more languages are enabled on a site.

The Basic Settings tab of the Site Settings Module .

etc. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. See "Setting the Site Logo" . description. 3. In the default DNN skin.The Advanced Settings tab of the Site Settings Module as displayed to SuperUsers Basic Settings Site Details Configuring your Site Details How to view the GUID for your site and set the site title. Go to Basic Settings > Site Details. 1. Note 1: The copyright notice displays on pages where the applied skin contains the Copyright skin object. terms of use. the copyright notice appears at the bottom right of all pages. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 4. Optional. keywords and copyright notice. Note: This title is also used as a tool tip when a user places their mouse over the site logo. Note 2: Title is the only required field. This title displays in the title bar of the Web browser and is used in language files such as the privacy statement. In the Title text box. enter a title for the site. 2.

for example.fair trade toys.5. in defining the internal reference for a type of access point in a software application. or for creating unique keys in a database". you can view the GUID (globally unique identifier) which can be used to identify this site. In the Keywords text box.eco-friendly. If the title of your site is My Website. toys. In the below image. In the Copyright text box. E. then the copyright notice displays as 'Copyright (c) 2011' l Static Copyright Notice: Enter the copyright notice as you wish it to appear. 6. This information will not update and doesn't include any site information. In the Description text box.g. If the Title field is also blank.g. perform one of the following: l Dynamic Copyright Notice: Leave the Copyright field blank to automatically display the current year and the site title as the copyright notice. At GUID . the copyright notice displays as 'Copyright (c) 2011 My Website'. "Globally"). E. E. Wikipedia defines a GUID as "a special type of identifier used in software applications in order to provide a reference number which is unique in any context (hence.g. enter one or more keywords separated by commas which will be used by search engines to index this site. the entered text is 'Copyright (C) 2005-2007 My Website' 8. 7.organic toys. . enter a description which will be used by search engines to index this site.fair labor toys.

5. Description and Keywords fields are complete. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. select either the Google. 1. Site Marketing Submitting your Site to Search Engines How to submit the site to one or more search engines for indexing. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. . 2. Optional. This will add the site to the search engine's list of sites to be indexed. Go to Basic Settings > Site Marketing.9. At Search Engine. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. Click the Update link. Yahoo or Microsoft search engines. 4. Go to Basic Settings > Site Details and ensure the Title.

See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language"This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. Repeat Steps 5-6 to submit your site to one or both of the other search engines. enter the file name. 6. 7. http://www. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated.g. Description and Keywords fields are complete. Tip: Page Editors and Administrator can also to add a title. In the Add Site text box. This will display a unique file name. Click the Create link. b. Click the OK button to confirm. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. Return to the Site Settings page: a. sign up for one. Go to Basic Settings > Site Marketing. therefore it is recommended that these fields are completed for all pages before submitting the site.domain. Go to the Dashboard. This opens the Google Webmaster Tools web page in a new Web browser. 3. 2. 1. Submitting your Site Map URL to Google How to submit a site map URL of your site to Google for improved search optimization. 5. click the Submit link. If you do not have a Google Account. Click the Submit link. enter the URL of your site. 7. On Google Webmaster Tools: a. Copy this name. Sign in to Google Webmaster Tools with your Google account. E. c. Click the Verify link. In the Verification text box. Optional. description and keywords to each site page. At Site Map URL.6. Go to the Basic Settings > Site Details section and ensure the Title. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. 8. d. Select Upload an HTML file. g. 4. f.com/ e. b. The quality of this information will affect your ranking on search engines. Return to Google Webmaster Tools: .

1. . 3. Submitting your Site Map URL to Google Signing up for AdWords How to sign up to advertise the site on Google AdWords. c. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. 2. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. If this feature is enabled. Click the Start Now button and complete the Sign-up steps. 4. b. This goes to the Google Adwords Web site. On the Google Sitemaps tab. a single banner is displayed on each site page where the skin object [Banner] is included in the page skin design. Note: This feature only works for banners whose type is set as 'banner'. click the Sign up for AdWord link. select Add General Web Sitemap. Once you have signed up your text banners (maintained under Admin > Banners) appear in the Google search results as well as affiliate web site. Go to Basic Settings > Site Marketing.a. 1. Go to Basic Settings > Site Marketing. Copy and paste the URL displayed into the Site Map URL text box on your Site Setting page. The banner displayed changes to a new banner each time a page is refreshed or revisited. Click the Verified button. 2. At Advertise. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. Optional. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. View the Sign-up demos on this page for full details. Enabling/Disabling Banner Advertising How to enable or disable site wide banner advertising.

A site logo is typically displayed in the top left corner of all site pages. Click the Update link.. At Banners. and then clicking the Save File link. select from these options: l None: Select to disable banner advertising. button and selecting the file from your computer.. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. 1. Banner Advertising set as Disabled Appearance Setting the Site Logo How to set the logo for this site as well as update the favorite icon. Click the Update link. l 5.4. Host: Select to enable banner advertising for vendors maintained on this installation under Host > Vendors. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. Site: Select to enable banner advertising for vendors maintained on this site under Admin > Vendors. Optional. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. The site logo displays on pages where the applied skin contains the Logo skin object. select from these options: l Select an existing file by selecting the Folder where the file resides. clicking the Browse. Upload a new file by clicking the Upload File link. 4. or using a Vendors module which has been added to a page. 2. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. At Logo. The uploaded file is automatically selected. and then selecting the required file from the File drop-down box. . as it is in the default DNN skins. l l 5. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings.

Click the Update link. button and selecting the file from your computer. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated.. and graphical web browsers will then make use of it. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. 4. If the background has been set in the skin.The Site Logo Setting the Body Background How to set the background image to be tiled on all pages of this site. Browsers that . Setting the Favicon How to set the favicon for your site. associated with a particular Web site or web page. 2. clicking the Browse. At Body Background. Upload the image to the Admin > File Manager. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. A favicon (short for favorites icon) is an icon file. A web designer can create such an icon and install it into a web site (or web page) by several means. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled.. 1. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. this setting will be overridden. Upload a new file by clicking the Upload File link. Optional. The uploaded file is automatically selected. most commonly 16x16 pixels. select from these options: l Select an existing file by selecting the Folder where the file resides. and then selecting the required file from the File drop-down box. l 5. and then clicking the Save File link.

Click the Update link. . Enable this setting to enable JavaScript/HTML widgets that have been included in skins. The favicon is an important aspect of a site's brand identity and is an important attribute which needs to be customized for marketing purposes.I Co file in the root of the site (not portal) that favicon. Browsers that support a tabbed document interface typically show a page's favicon next to the page's title on the tab. Optional. The uploaded file is automatically selected. as these are the only files supported by Internet Explorer.ico extension can be selected at this field. 2. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. l l 4. 1.provide favicon support typically display a page's favicon in the browser's address bar and next to the page's name in a list of bookmarks. button and selecting the file from your computer. To upload a new file: Click the Upload File link. 1. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. Note 1: If no favicon is set and there is a favicon. clicking the Browse. select from these options: l For no favicon: Select <None Specified> from the File drop-down box. Note 2: Only files with an *. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. 3. Enabling/Disabling Skin Widgets How to enable or disable widget functionality in skins.Ico will be detected by browsers and used.I Co in the root by default. At Favicon. We ship with a favicon. and then clicking the Save File link...ico. To select an existing file: Select the Folder where the file resides and then selecting the required file from the File drop-down box. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. 2. and site-specific browsers use the favicon as desktop icon. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. The skin widget field is associated with the Widget skin object.

E. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. Setting the Default Portal Skin and Container How to set the default skin which is applied to all site pages including the Admin pages.4. Setting the Edit Skin and Container How to set the skin which is applied to the editing pages of the site and the container which is applied to the modules on those pages. etc.g. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. See Page Settings . See "Advanced Settings for Existing Pages" Note 2: The container can be overridden for an individual module by setting the Module Container field. the check box to disable skin widgets. Note 1: The page skin can be overridden for individual site pages as can the containers on that page. Tip: Choose a skin and container with minimal design and images to speed up editing time! . select the required container from the drop-down list.Page Management for more details. At Portal Skin. 6. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. module settings pages. page settings pages. Optional. At Portal Container. See "Configuring Advanced Page Settings for a Module" 1. 7. Optional. 5. as well as the container which is applied to all existing and new modules on these pages. select the required skin from the drop-down list. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable skin widgets. Click the Update link. 2. Click the Update link. At Enable Skin Widgets. Click the Preview Portal Skin and Container link to preview the selected skin and container in a new Web browser. module editing pages. l 5. 4.

domain.aspx) the Splash page is displayed. 5. Click the Update link. The Splash page is typically not included in the site menu. At Edit Skin. or adding a Flash animation with an automatic redirect feature to the Splash page. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3.g. To disable the splash page. http://www. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3.com/ContactUs/tabid/103/Default. 6. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled.domain. This can be done by adding a link to a site pages. 2. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings.domain.g. Optional. l . 4. Click the Preview Portal Skin and Container link to preview the selected skin and container in a new Web browser. The Splash page should include some form of redirection to one or more site pages. select the page name from the drop-down list. When a visitor first comes to the standard URL of your site. Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management. Optional. select from the following options: l To set the splash page. At Splash Page. 7. select the required skin from the drop-down list.aspx) rather than a specific page (E. 4. Go to Basic Settings > Appearance. Advanced Settings Page Management Enabling/Disabling a Splash Page How to enable or disable a Splash page for this site.1. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. Optional. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. 2. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. select the required container from the drop-down list. 1. At Edit Container.com/default.com or http://www. select <None Specified>. http://www. A Splash page must be created by a Page Editor or an Administrator. that is the main URL (E.

http://www.aspx). Click the Update link. Visitors are also taken to the Home page when they click on the site logo. Visitors are taken to the Home page when they navigate to the URL of the site (E.domain.com/default.5.g. If a Home page is not set. A Sample Splash Page Setting the Home Page How to set any page as the Home page of this site.com or http://www. .domain. unless a Splash page is displayed. the page located on the far left or top of the menu is the default Home page.

Tip 1: You cannot delete the page set as the Home page. 1. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. If a Login page is not set. This will display the default login page. The default login page requires the Login skin object to be included in the skin. If you have logged out of the portal and do not have an Account login module viewable by 'All Users' you will be unable to log in again. This setting enables you to create a custom Login page rather than using the default login page which only displays the Account Login module. To use the default Home page. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. To do so. Click the Update link. 2. Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management. Optional. Tip 2: If this setting is set to None Specified.g.domain. Warning: Do not apply this setting without first adding an Account Login module to the page you are selecting and ensure the page is available to All Users. E.aspx?tabid=1&ctl=Login at the end of the URL. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. l 5. 4. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. select the page name from the drop-down list.com/Default. Enabling a Custom Login Page How to set any page as the Login page for the site. you can delete any site page (unless they are set as one of the other special pages) including the page named 'Home'.aspx?tabid=1&ctl=Login. the default Login page is used. At Home Page. http://www. enter your portal URL into the address bar of your Web browser and add Default. If this occurs. select <None Specified>. . select from the following options: l To set the Home page. you must first select a new home page or select None Specified.

Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. Optional. select <None Specified>. . 1. Login page). Restoring the Default Login Page How to restore the default Login page to the site.1. l 2. Ensure an Account Log In module is added to the page. Optional. 4. Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management. Click the Update link. Navigate to Admin > 3. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. 6. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 4. At Login Page. Warning: The Login skin object must be included in the Portal Skin to access the default login page. Don't restore the default Login page if you are using a custom Portal Skin that doesn't include this skin object. Site Settings.g. 5. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. Your Login page must include the following: l Ensure the View Page Permissions enable All Users to view the page. At Login Page. Add a new page to your site (E. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. select the name of the Login page you created from the drop-down list. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. 2. Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management.

See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. E. Click the Update link. This page enables visitors to register for a new account. select the registration page you created from the drop-down list. Restoring the Default Registration Page How to restore the default user registration page to this site.5. 2. Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. Optional. 4. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. 1. . This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. At Registration Page. Warning.g. Do not apply this setting without first creating a registration page. 1. Setting a Custom Registration Page How to set a custom registration page for this site. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. Register 5. Click the Update link.

4. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. Add other modules and content as desired. and manage modules they are authorized to using the My Modules module. ensuring permission to view the page is granted to All Users. Optional. Create a new page to your site (E. The user profile enables authorized users to maintain their user credentials. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. b. See "Adding a New Page via the Site Settings Page" b. You may like to set the page as not included in the menu. . profile. 1. Important. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management. Click the Update link. In addition. users manage messages from and to other site members using the Messaging module. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. 5. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Warning. Profile). Setting a Custom User Profile Page How to create and set a custom user profile page for this site.2. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" c. 2. Add a View Profile module to the page. select <None Specified>. Create a User Profile page: a. Do not apply this setting without first creating a User Profile page. See "Adding a New Module (RibbonBar)" c. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. password and services.g. At Registration Page. Set the custom user profile page: a. Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management. Optional.

Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. At User Profile Page. select <Search Results>. e. Setting the Search Results Page How to set a custom or a default search results page for this site using the Site Settings page. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. To use the default search results page. 3. 4. l . select User Profile. Click the Update link. Optional. At User Profile Page. 1.d. select the user profile page you created from the drop-down list. Restoring the Default User Profile Page How to restore the default user profile page of this site. select from the following options: l To set a custom search results page. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. 1. 2. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. Click the Update link. Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management. At Search Results Page. 2. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. 5. select the page name from the drop-down list.

4. Optional. Viewing the Home Directory Security Settings Enabling/Disabling User Registration How to disable or enable site visitors to apply to become a registered user of the site. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings.4. Enabling user registration displays the Register link on pages where the applied skin contains the Register skin object. Go to Advanced Settings > Page Management. The Home Directory cannot be modified. . the home directory is displayed. Click the Update link. 2. Related Topics: l See "Configuring Search Crawler Modules for Upgrade Portals" Viewing the Home Directory How to view the Home Directory used for the storage of files in this site as configured when the site was created. 1. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. At Home Directory.

This creates a user account for them. thereby verifying the user's email address. however access to the Registered User role is restricted until the account is authorized ( See "Authorizing an Unauthorized User" ). add a new user account ( See "Adding a User Account" ) and then add the user to the Administrators security role ( See "Adding a User to a Security Role" ). Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. Private: Registering visitors can apply to become a site member. 1. At User Registration.1. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. l l l 5. Optional. Setting the Primary Administrator How to set which user in the Administrator role is the primary administrator for this site. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" . Go to Advanced Settings > Security Settings. select which language you wish to update. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. unregistered accounts and feedback submitted using the Feedback module (unless this is overridden on the Feedback module). Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. 2. select from the following: l None: Registration is disabled. Public: Registering visitors gain immediate access to the Registered User security role. Note: The Primary Administrator receives email notification of each new registration. Optional. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. At Select Language. This Administrator receives email notification of member activities such as new registrations. 4. The verification code is emailed to them in a welcome email when they register. Click the Update link. 2. Verified: Access to the Registered User role is conditional on the user verifying their account by entering a verification code the first time they log in to the site. 3. Tip: To create new Administrators.

At Portal TimeZone. Navigate to Admin > 2. At Administrator. At Select Language. select the display name of the required administrator. Click the Update link. select which language you wish to update. 4. 3.3. Setting the Portal TimeZone How to set which time zone is the default for this site. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. select the time zone for the location of this site. Optional. 5. Go to Advanced Settings > Security Settings. . See "Replacement Tokens" for more details. This sets all time related information on this site including the default setting for the current time and date ( [DateTime:Now] ) replacement token. Click the Update link. 5. Site Settings. 4. Go to Advanced Settings > Security Settings. 1.

In the Processor UserId text box. enter the page URL that subscribers are redirected to after payment. 7. PayPal 6. PayPal is used as the example in this topic. In the Processor Password text box. 1. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. At Currency. Leave blank to return to the Home page. 5. 11. the check box to disable Sandbox and enable live transactions. Leave blank to return to the Home page. In the PayPal Return URL text box. select the currency to process payments with. enter page URL that subscribers are redirected if payment is canceled. Optional. 8. In the PayPal Cancel URL text box. Click Go To Payment Processor WebSite and sign up for an account.Payment Settings Setting the Payment Processor How to configure payment processing for this site. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. select a payment processing company from the drop-down list. enter the Password provided by PayPal. PayPal is the only payment processor included by default. This enables you to receive payment from users who subscribe to Member Services (roles) on this site. 10. select from these options l Check Uncheck the check box to enable PayPal Sandbox. Optional. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. At Use Sandbox?. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. Tip: Enabling the sandbox allows test orders to be sent to the payment gateway without taking live transactions. E. 4. 2. enter the UserID code provided by PayPal. At Payment Processor.g. l . however your DNN developer can configure DNN to work with other providers. Optional. 9. Go to Advanced Settings > Payment Settings.

. select from these options: l Check the check box to enable pop-ups. 2. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. Optional. Usability Settings Enabling/Disabling Inline Editing How to enable pop-up edit pages throughout this site.12. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. l Uncheck the check box to use separate edit pages. 1. 4. At Enable Pop-Ups?. or to navigate to a new page for editing. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. Go to Advanced Settings > Usability Settings. Click the Update link. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated.

. Inline editing enables authorized users to perform basic editing of HTML module content directly on the web page. It also enables inline editing of all module titles. Inline editing doesn't affect the standard method for editing content and module titles. Enabling/Disabling Inline Editing How to enable or disable inline editing. Click the Update link.5.

Click the Update link. l 5. At Inline Editor Enabled?. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable inline editing. Editing content inline Inline editor enabled for module title editing . This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. Go to Advanced Settings > Usability Settings.1. the check box to disable inline editing. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. 2. 4. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. Optional.

Go to Advanced Settings > Usability Settings. l 5. Optional. Go to Advanced Settings > Usability Settings. 4. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. When an authorized user uses the control panel. 1. 6. the mode and visibility are personalized so that they remain set however they were last used by that user. Click the Update link. select which language you wish to update. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. Optional. At Select Language. select to display the control panel as either Minimized or Maximized.Hiding System Folders How to prevent or allow adding hidden folders or folders that start with underscore when performing folder synchronization. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. At Hide System Folders. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. At Control Panel Visibility. 1. This field only displays when multiple languages are enabled. 2. select either the View or Edit mode. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to prevent adding hidden and underscore folders. Optional. Click on the country flag icon associated with the culture (language) to be updated. At Control Panel Mode. . See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 4. the check box to allow. See "Viewing a Site in a Secondary Language" 3. 2. 3. Configuring the Control Panel Options How to configure the default settings for the Control Panel. 5.

select from the following options to set which editors (Page Editors and Module Editors. Portal Alias.org/Style/CSS/ . visit http://www. The CSS maintained in this editor is the default CSS applied to all portal pages.w3. l 8.7. SSL Settings and Host Settings Only SuperUsers can access the Host Settings. Click the Update link. Module Editors: Select this option to display the Control Panel to both Page Editors and Module Editors. or Page Editors only) can view the Control Panel. Related Topics: l See the Creating and Managing Portals section of this manual See "Setting SSL Settings for a Single Portal" l Stylesheet Editor About the Stylesheet Editor DNN uses a CSS (cascading style sheet) to control the fonts. This enables these users to view the site in either View or Edit mode. this CSS will override the CSS maintained on the Admin > Site Setting page. A Page Editor is any user authorized to create and manage pages and page settings. Tip: Module Editor is any user authorized to edit module content. Where a skin package containing a CSS file is applied to a page or the site. For information on using CSS. etc. styles and colors applied across the portal. l Page Editors: Select this option to display the Control Panel to Page Editors only. manage module content. Portal Aliases and SSL Settings sections of the Site Settings page. At Control Panel Security.

Select the Stylesheet Editor tab. edit the current stylesheet. .OR . 5. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. This doesn't affect any styles that are part of a skin package uploaded to this site. 4. Click the Save Style Sheet link. Hold down the Ctrl button and press the F5 button .The DNN Stylesheet Editor Editing the Stylesheet How to edit and save changes to the default stylesheet. In the multi-line text box. 2.Click the Refresh button on your Web browser to view the changes. 3. 1.

Navigate to Admin > Site Settings. 2. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Want To Restore The Default Stylesheet (All Changes To The Current Stylesheet Will Be Lost)?" 4. Click the OK button to confirm.Click the Refresh button on your Web browser to view the changes. 3. Hold down the Ctrl button and press the F5 button . Click the Restore Default Style Sheet link.OR .Editing the Stylesheet Restoring the Default Stylesheet Restore the default stylesheet to the site. 5. The portal uses a CSS (cascading style sheet) to control the fonts and colors applied across the site. . Select the Stylesheet Editor tab. 1. Note: this will not affect any stylesheets that are part of a skin package. Any modifications to the stylesheet on this page will be deleted.

Restoring the Default Stylesheet .

.Building Your Portal Quick Start to Building a Portal Creating the content for a DNN site is as simple as adding pages. For a quick start to adding pages and content to your DNN site: l See "About the Site Wizard Module" to configure basic site settings. These are called the Admin and Host pages respectively. Other users can be can also be given permission to manage the settings of specific pages and create new pages as children of those pages. adding modules and then adding content to those modules. Products and Contact Us) as well as the Admin and Host pages. Adding and Managing Pages Members of the Administrator and SuperUser security roles can add pages. See "Setting Page Permissions" DNN also includes special pages which enable Administrators to manage their site and Hosts to manage all portals. Services. page design as well as apply a template to the site using a simple step-by-step wizard. See "About the Admin Console" and "About the Host Console" The below image displays a site with four publicly accessible pages (Home. See "Adding A New Page Visible to Administrators only using the RibbonBar" See "Adding a New Module (RibbonBar)" See "Adding Module Content" l l l Key Concepts About Pages DNN sites are created by adding one or more pages to the site and then adding content (using modules) to each page.

Additional modules can be purchased from snowcovered. There are many different types of modules. Your Host can install additional modules. One or more modules are added to each site page to create and manage the site content.com Related Topics: .About Pages About Modules DNN uses a modular design system to display content on a page. each managing a different type of site content or site administrative tasks.

l

See "Installing Available Extensions" See "Installing a Module"

l

Web site with the Account Login, HTML and Search Input modules

Role Based Access
Access to view and manage the content (pages and modules) and settings of all portals is controlled using role based access. By associating a user's account with one or more roles (also called Security Roles) you can permit or deny them access to view and/or edit site pages and modules. Here is a brief overview of User Accounts and Roles (also called Security Roles) in DNN: Working with User Accounts
l

Administrators and authorized users can create user accounts for any person. See "Adding a User Account" Administrators can enable site visitors to register themselves for a user account. See "Enabling/Disabling User Registration" and other topics in this section. Once a user has an authorized user account, they can access all pages and modules that are restricted to members of the Registered Users role.

l

l

l

Individual users (including unauthorized users) as well as role members can be granted a range of permissions to manage the content and settings of pages and modules. See "Page Details Settings for Existing Pages" and "Setting Module Permissions"

About the Site Wizard Module
The Site Wizard module enables all users who are authorized to view the module to configure basic site settings, page design as well as apply a template to the site using a simple step-by-step wizard. Permissions. All users who are authorized to view the Site Wizard module can complete all steps of the wizard, however they require permission to select or change the site logo.

Using the Site Wizard
How to use the Site Wizard module which is located on the Admin > Site Wizard page and can be added to any site page. Tip: All settings of the Site Wizard are option so you can click the Step 1 - Site Configuration Wizard 1. Optional. Read the introductions. 2. Click the Next link. Next link to skip any page.

Step 2 - Choose a Template for your site This step enables you to choose a template for your site. Templates contain pages with modules which may or may not include content. 1. At Build your site from a template (below), check able templates. the check box. This displays a list of the avail-

2. Click on the name of a template to select it. This displays a description of the selected template.

3. Choose one of the following options to set how duplicate modules will be handled:
l

Ignore: Places a copy of any duplicated modules on the same page. Replace: Deletes the existing copy of the duplicate content and replaces it with the template copy. Merge: Combines the existing information and template information into one module. Next link.

l

l

4. Click the

Step 3 - Select a Skin for your Site

How to select a new skin to be applied to the site pages. This will not override settings on individual pages. Tip: From this page onwards, you can click the Site Wizard Previous link to return to any of the previous pages of the

1. Optional. To preview a skin, click on the thumbnail image (where provided). This displays a larger image of the skin in a new Web browser. 2. Select a skin. 3. Click the Next link.

Step 4 - Choose a Default Container for your site How to select new default containers for modules on the site. This doesn't override module setting which have been set for individual modules. 1. If you selected a skin at Step 3, the matching containers are displayed here and the default container is preselected.

2. Optional. Check

the Show All Containers check box to view all of the available containers.

3. Optional. To preview a container click on a thumbnail image (where provided). This displays a larger image of the container in a new Web browser. 4. Select a container. 5. Click the Next link.

Step 5 - Add Site Details How to enter or edit the site details for this site. These are the default details used by search engines to index your site. 1. In the Name/Title text box, enter the name or title to be applied to the site. This will show in visitor's Web browser title.

2. In the Description text box, enter description to be applied to the site. This will be the description that Internet search engines will display to visitors. The site must be submitted to these search engines. 3. In the KeyWords text box, enter keywords to be applied to the site. This will be what the Internet search engines look for if you choose to submit your site to them. 4. At Logo, select or upload a logo. Note: You must be logged in or have permissions to upload/select files. 5. Click the Finish link. A message reading "If you changed the skin for your site, it should change when you leave this page" is displayed.

6. Click on the Home page (or any other site page) to view any skin or module changes and to view any new pages or modules added using a template. Related Topics:
l

See "Setting a File Link" See "Uploading and Linking to a File"

l

Pages
About Pages
DNN sites are created by adding one or more pages and then adding modules which display content onto those pages. Pages can be created and managed using the Control Panel, or using the Pages module. Important. Only the Control Panel tools are covered in this section. See "About the Pages (Tabs) module" for details on its additional functionality.

Viewing Any Page
How to view any page within a site, including those which are not included in the menu.
l

Option One: If the page is included in the menu, then navigate to the page using the site menu. Option Two: If the page is not included in the menu click on a link to the page. Authorized users can create a page link using the Links module. See "Setting a Page Link" Option Three: See "Viewing any Page (Pages Module)"

l

l

Adding A New Page Visible to Administrators only using the RibbonBar
How to add a new page to a site using the RibbonBar. Page added using this method are only visible to Administrators. Note: If content localization is enabled, this task adds a page which is a neutral culture and will be the same for all languages. This topic assumes you are viewing the site in its default language. Name is the only required field. If you accept all default settings the new page will be added to the menu to the right of the page you were located on at Step 1. Pages added using this tutorial are only visible to Administrators, allowing you to add content to the page before setting it as viewable by one or more user roles. See "Setting Page Permissions" 1. Hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel displays. 2. Go to the Add New Page section. 3. In the Name text box, enter a name for the page. This is the name which appears in the menu. 4. Optional. At Template, select a page template. Page templates add one or more modules with optional content to the page - OR - Select No template. The Default template included with DNN adds a HTML module without any content into the Content Pane.

5. Optional. At Insert, select from these options:
l

Skip this step to add the page after (to the right of) the page you are currently on. Select to add the page either Before (to the left of) or After (to the right of) the page name selected in the second drop-down box. Select to add the page as a Child Of the page name selected in the second drop-down box.

l

l

6. Optional. At Include In Menu, check the check box to include this page in the menu - OR Uncheck the check box to hide the page in the menu. Note: You can provide users another way to navigate to the page by adding a link to that page using the HTML or Links module. Administrators can navigate to the page using the Pages module. 7. Click the Add Page button.

Adding a New Page using the RibbonBar

Adding a New Page via the Site Settings Page
How to add a new page to a site. This topic shows how to add a page with only the basic settings configured. Page Name is the only required field. If you accept all default settings the new page will be added to the menu to the right of the page you were located on at Step 1. Pages added using this tutorial are only visible to Administrators, allowing you to add content to the page before setting it as viewable by one or more user roles.

1. Hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel is displayed and then select Add from the Actions section. Note: If you are using the Iconbar, select the Add link from the Page Functions section.

2. In the Page Name text box, enter a page name as it will appear in the menu. This is the only required field. If you choose to update the new page now this will accept all the defaults and add a page in a neutral language. 3. Recommended. Complete the remaining optional page details for this page. See "Page Details Settings for New Pages" 4. Optional. Select the Permissions tab to set which users can view this page. ( See "Setting Page Permissions" ). The default permissions is visible and editable by Administrators only. Note: If permissions are not displayed, this means you are not authorized to manage permissions. In this scenario, the new page will inherit permissions from its parent page. 5. Optional. Select the Advanced Settings tab and complete any of the optional advanced page settings. "Advanced Settings for New Pages" 6. Optional. In the Localization section, select the required option. See "Localization Settings for New Pages" 7. Click the Update link. Related Topics:
l

See "Adding a New Page (Default Language)"

Updating Current Page
How to update some basic settings for the current page using the RibbonBar. This tutorial enables Page Editors to update the page name, change the visibility of the page in the menu, disable the page link, or change the page skin. Administrators can also change the location of the page in the menu. 1. Go to the required page. See "Viewing Any Page" 2. Hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel is displayed. 3. Go to the Update Current Page section and update any of these optional settings. 4. In the Name text box, edit the page name if required. 5. At Insert, select from these options to change the page location in the menu:
l

Skip this step to add the page after (to the right of) the page you are currently on. Select to add the page either Before (to the left of) or After (to the right of) the page name selected in the second drop-down box. Select to add the page as a Child Of the page name selected in the second drop-down box.

l

l

6. At Include In Menu, check the check box to include this page in the menu - OR - Uncheck the check box to hide the page in the menu. Note: You can provide users another way to navigate to the page by adding a link to that page using the HTML or Links module. Administrators can navigate to the page using the Pages module. 7. At Disabled, check enable. the check box to disable clicking on this page - OR - Uncheck the check box to

8. Click the Update Page link.

Moving Page Location (IconBar)
How to move a page to a new location on the site menu using the IconBar Control Panel. Admin Tip: Additional options are available to Administrators. See "Moving Page Position in Menu" 1. Go to the required page. See "Viewing Any Page" 2. Go the Page Functions section and then select Settings.

3. Go to the Basic Settings - Page Details section. 4. At Parent Page, select a new parent page, or select <None Specified> to change this page to a parent page. 5. Click the Update link.

Copying a Page
How to copy any existing page including the modules and optional module content. Note: Page Name is the only required field. If you don't set new permissions, then the page will be visible and editable by Administrators only. Note: If permissions are not displayed, this means you are not authorized to manage permissions. In this scenario, the new page will inherit permissions from its parent page. Also note that if you are on a Page with a different locale setting you will not be able to copy the page. 1. Optional. Navigate to the page you want to copy. 2. On the RibbonBar, hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel displays and then select Copy from the Actions section. This opens the Page Details tab of the Page Settings page. Note: For the Iconbar, select Copy from the Page Functions section.

3. In the Page Name text box, enter a name for the new page. The page name is displayed in the menu. 4. Recommended. Complete the additional basic settings for this page. "Page Details Settings for New Pages" 5. At Copy From Page, select the page be copied. If you selected a page at Step 1 it will be displayed here. 6. At Specify Modules, complete the following fields from left to right for each module listed: a. Check the check box (typically located to the left of the module title) beside the module title to be copied to the new page - Uncheck the check box beside any module you do NOT want copy. b. Optional. In the text box where the Module Title is displayed, edit the title if required. c. In the next field you can view the name of the pane where the module will be inserted. d. Set the content option for this module:
l

New: Select to add the module without any content. Copy: Select to add the module with an independent copy of the module content. Modifying copied content doesn't update the content of the original module. Note: This option will be disabled for modules which don't have content which can be copied such as the Feedback and Account Login modules.

l

l

Reference: Select to add the module with a referenced version of the copied content. If you modify the content on either instance this module in the future, the content on both copies of the module are updated.

7. Optional. Select the Permissions tab to set which users can view this page. See "Setting Page Permissions" 8. Optional. Select the Advanced Settings tab and complete any of the optional advanced page settings. See "Advanced Settings for New Pages" 9. Optional. In the Localization section, select the required option. See "Localization Settings for New Pages" 10. Click the Update link. You are now taken to the new page.

Copying Design to Children Pages
How to copy the design applied to a page to all of its child (descendant) pages. This applies the Page Skin and Page Container settings of the parent page to all child pages. This setting is only available for existing pages with child pages.

Using the Ribbonbar
1. Navigate to the parent page whose design you want to copy. 2. On the Control Panel, hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel displays. 3. In the Copy Actions section, select Copy Design to Children. This displays the message "Skin and container will be replaced for all children of this page. Are you sure you want to continue?"

4. Click the Yes button to confirm.

Using the Iconbar
1. Go to the required page. See "Viewing Any Page" 2. Go the Page Functions section and select Settings. This opens the Page Settings page. 3. Go the Advanced Settings - Appearance section. 4. At Copy Design to Descendants, click the Copy Design link. 5. Click the Update link.

Editing Page Settings
How to edit the settings of the current page via the Control Panel 1. Go to the required page. See "Viewing Any Page" 2. Hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel is displayed.

3. Edit page settings as required. See "Page Details Settings for Existing Pages" and "Advanced Settings for Existing Pages" 4. Click the Update link. Tip: If you are using the Iconbar, select the Settings link from the Page Functions section.

Accessing Page Settings using the Iconbar

Copying Permissions to Descendant Pages
How to copy the permissions applied to a parent page to all of its descendant (child) pages. This applies the Permissions set for viewing and editing pages. This setting is only displayed for pages with existing child pages.

Using the RibbonBar
1. Navigate to the parent page whose design you want to copy. 2. On the Control Panel, hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel displays. 3. In the Copy Actions section, select Copy Permissions to Children. This displays the message "Skin and container will be replaced for all children of this page. Are you sure you want to continue?"

4. Click the Yes button to confirm.

Using the Iconbar
1. Navigate to the required parent page. 2. Maximize the Control Panel. 3. Go the Page Functions section and select Settings.

4. Go the Basic Settings - Page Details section. 5. At Copy Permissions to Descendants, click the Copy Permissions link. 6. Click the Update link.

Exporting a Page
How to export a page which will be saved as a page template which can then be imported into any DNN site. 1. Navigate to the required page. "Viewing Any Page" 2. On the RibbonBar, hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel displays and then select from the Actions section - OR - For the Iconbar, select Export

Export from the Page Functions section.

3. At Folder, select a folder of the site's File Manager where the exported page will be stored. 4. In the Template Name text box, the name of the exported page is displayed. You can either use this as the name of the page template or change it to a new name. 5. In the Description text box, enter a description of the page you are exporting. This description is exported with the page template. Typically the description provides a brief overview of the page and (if included) it's content. 6. Optional. At Include Content?, check the check box to include module content - OR - Uncheck the check box to add the modules without any content. 7. Click the Export button.

8. The path where the page template has been created is now displayed.

Importing a New Page
How to add a new page using the Import function. This enables you to apply a page template that has previously been exported. The new page is added to the site before user can change the page settings. 1. On the RibbonBar, hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel displays and then select from the Actions section. For the Iconbar, select Import from the Page Functions section. Import

2. At Folder, select the folder of your File Manager where the template is located. This enables the template field below and populates the drop-down list with all templates within this folder. 3. At Template, select a template from the drop-down list. This displays a description of the selected template providing more details of the template. 4. At Import Mode, select Create A New Page. 5. In the Page Name text box, the name of the template will be displayed. You can choose to enter a new page name or use this name, 6. At Parent Page, select <None Specified> to set this page as a parent page - OR - Select the parent page from the drop-down box. Note: Page Editors can only select parent pages which they are editors of.

7. At Insert Page, select from these options to choose the location of the new page in the menu:
l

Select a page from the drop-down box and then select to add the new page either Before or After that page in the menu on the current level. Select Add to End to add the new page to the end of the menu on the current level.

l

8. At Redirect Mode? select from the following options to set where you will be redirected to once you complete this importing: a. Select View Imported Page to be redirected to the newly created page upon creation (Import). b. Select Edit Imported Page to be redirected to the Page Settings page of the newly created page upon creation (Import). This enables you to configure the page settings immediately. 9. Click the Import link.

Importing a New Page

Tip: View the new page to ensure that any modules that are set to display on all pages are not duplicated. This may occur if the selected template includes modules that are displayed on all pages.

Replacing the Current Page with a Page Template (Import Page)
How to replace the modules on the current page with a page template. 1. On the RibbonBar, hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel displays and then select from the Actions section - OR - For the Iconbar, select Import

Import from the Page Functions section.

2. At Folder, select the folder of your File Manager where the template is located. This will enable the template field below and populate the drop-down list with all templates within this folder. 3. At Template, select a template from the drop-down list. The description of the selected template will be displayed providing you with more details of the template. 4. At Import Mode, select Replace The Current Page. 5. At Redirect Mode? select from the following options to set where you will be redirected to once you complete this importing:
l

Select View Imported Page to be redirected to the newly created page upon creation (Import). Select Edit Imported Page to be redirected to the Page Settings page of the newly created page upon creation (Import). This enables you to configure the page settings immediately.

l

6. Click the Import link. The new page will now be added to the top level of the menu. If Edit Imported Page was selected at Step 6 you can now edit page settings as required. Tip: View the new page to ensure that any modules that are set to display on all pages are not duplicated. This may occur if the selected template includes modules that are displayed on all pages.

Replacing the Current Page with a Page Template (Import Page)

Deleting a Page
How to delete a page from a site. Pages set as either the Splash page, Home page, Login page, or the User page cannot be deleted until the setting is removed. The last visible portal page can also not be deleted. Deleted pages are stored in the Recycle Bin where they can be restored or permanently deleted by authorized users. 1. Navigate to the required page. 2. On the RibbonBar, hover over the Pages link until the Control Panel displays and then select Delete

from the Actions section - OR - On the Iconbar, select Delete from the Page Functions section. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to delete this page?"

3. Click the OK button to confirm. Tip: You can also delete a page via Page Settings. Related Topics:
l

See "About the Recycle Bin Module" See "Deleting a Page from a Secondary Language"

l

Page Settings
Page Details Settings for New Pages
How to set page details settings for new pages using the Page Settings page. Note: The Page Name field is the only mandatory field. This topic assumes you have already begun the process of adding a new page. See "Adding a New Page via the Site Settings Page" 1. Select the Page Details tab. 2. In the Page Name text box, enter a name for the page. If this page is displayed in the menu, this will be the name in the menu. 3. In the Page Title text box, enter a short, descriptive sentence summarizing the page content. The title is used by search engines to identify the information contained on the page. It is recommended that the title contains at least 5 highly descriptive words and does not exceed 200 characters.

4. In the Description text box, enter a description of the page content. The description is used by search engines to identify the information contained on the page. It is recommended that the description contains at least 5 words and does not exceed 1000 characters. 5. In the Keywords text box, enter key words for this page separated by comma. 6. At Tags, select one or more tags associated with this page. Page tagging is a way of categorizing content for more meaningful search results. 7. At Parent Page, select <None Specified> to set this page as a parent page - OR - Select the parent page from the drop-down box. Note: Page Editors can only select parent pages which they are authorized to edit. 8. At Insert Page, select from these options to choose the location of the new page in the menu:
l

Select a page from the drop-down box and then select to add the new page either Before or After that page in the menu on the current level. Select Add to End to add the new page to the end of the menu on the current level.

l

9. Optional. Set a page template which allows you to add modules with optional content to a new page. Note: This option is not available when copying a page. Complete the following to set the template for this page: a. At Template Folder, select the folder where the required template is located. b. At Page Template, select the required template. 10. At Include In Menu?, check check box to hide the page. 11. Click the Update Page link. the check box to include this page in the menu- OR - Uncheck the

Basic Settings for New Pages

Related Topics:
l

See "About the Taxonomy Manager Module"

Page Details Settings for Existing Pages
How to set page details settings for existing pages using the Page Settings page. See "Editing Page Settings" to begin this process. Note: Page Name is the only required field. 1. Select the Page Details tab. 2. In the Page Name text box, enter a name for the page. If this page is displayed in the menu, this will be the name in the menu.

3. In the Page Title text box, enter a short, descriptive sentence summarizing the page content. The title is used by search engines to identify the information contained on the page. It is recommended that the title contains at least 5 highly descriptive words and does not exceed 200 characters. 4. In the Description text box, enter a description of the page content. The description is used by search engines to identify the information contained on the page. It is recommended that the description contains at least 5 words and does not exceed 1000 characters. 5. In the Keywords text box, enter key words for this page separated by comma. 6. At Tags, select one or more tags associated with this page. Page tagging is a way of categorizing content for more meaningful search results. Note: Tags can be created by users (See "Tagging Page Content") or editors (See "Creating a Vocabulary"). 7. At Parent Page, select <None Specified> to set this page as a parent page - OR - Select the parent page from the drop-down box. Note: Users can only select parent pages which they have been granted Add, Full Control permissions for (Edit permissions in Community Edition) 8. At Include In Menu?, check check box to hide the page. 9. Click the Update Page link. the check box to include this page in the menu - OR - Uncheck the

Setting Page Permissions
How to set page permissions by username and roles. This topic assumes you are on the Page Settings page of a page. Note: Access to view and set page permissions are only available to Administrators and users with Edit/Full Control permissions for the page. See "About Page Permissions" Tip: When setting Permissions, you can change the selection at Filter By Group and set permissions for any of the roles within that group before updating. Important. In DNN Community edition, page management permissions consist of View and Edit permissions only. In DNN Professional, page management includes ten different permissions for page management which are the same for both users and roles. See "About Page Permissions" 1. Select the Permissions tab. 2. At Username, enter the username of a user that you want to grant or deny page viewing permissions to, and then click the Add link.

3. Optional. At Filter By Group, select from the following options:
l

< All Roles >: Select to view all roles (both global role and roles groups) in one single list. < Global Roles >: Select to view all roles which are not associated with a Role Group. E.g. Administrators, All Users, Registered Users, and Unauthenticated Users. [Role Group Name]: Select the name of a Role Group to view the roles within that group.

l

l

4. In the View (or View Page) column, click on the check box beside a user/role repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed.
l

Permission Granted:: Permission to view the page is granted. Permission Denied: Permission to view the page is denied, unless Full Control is granted. Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users cannot view the page unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission, or are granted Full Control/Edit Page permissions.

l

l

5. If you are using DNN Community Edition, skip to the final step in this tutorial. 6. In the Add column, select from these options:
l

Permission Granted: Users with Add permissions for a page can add child pages to that page. They cannot add any parent pages, and they cannot add child pages to any other pages. Permission Denied: Permission to add child pages is denied, unless Full Control is granted. Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users are unable to add pages unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission.

l

l

7. In the Add Content column, select from these options:
l

Permission Granted: Users with Add Content permissions for a page can edit content on the page. These users can add, move and delete modules, as well as manage the content and settings for modules on the page. Permission Denied: Permission to add and manage module content is denied, unless Full Control is granted. Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users are unable to view the page unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission.

l

l

8. In the Copy column, select from these options:
l

Permission Granted: Users with Copy permission can make a copy any page they can view. The new page can only be a child of the page they have copy permissions for. Permission Denied: Permission to copy the page is denied, unless Full Control is granted.

l

l

Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users are unable to copy the page unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission.

9. In the Delete column, select from these options:
l

Permission Granted: Users with Delete permissions can delete the page. If the page has child pages they are also deleted when the parent is deleted, however the user does not automatically have Delete permissions for these child pages. Permission Denied: Permission to delete the page is denied, unless Full Control is granted. Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users are unable to delete the page unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission.

l

l

10. In the Export column, select from these options:
l

Permission Granted: Users with Export permissions can export a page. Permission Denied: Permission to export the page is denied, unless Full Control is granted. Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users are unable to export the page unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission.

l

l

11. In the Import column, select from these options:
l

Permission Granted: Users with Import permissions can import a page. Permission Denied: Permission to import the page is denied, unless Full Control is granted. Not Specified: Users cannot import the page unless Full Control/Edit permission is granted.

l

l

12. In the Manage Settings column, select from these options:
l

Permission Granted: Users with Manage Settings permissions can change the page settings. Users can edit all of the settings on the Settings page, except for the permissions section which will not be visible. Permission Denied: Permission to manage settings the page is denied, unless Full Control is granted. Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users are unable to manage settings for the page unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission.

l

l

13. In the Navigate column, select from these options:
l

Permission Granted: Users with Navigate permissions can view a page in the navigation menu. Users can have this permission without view permissions, in which case they will not be able to view any content on the page but the page will be visible in the menu.

l

Permission Denied: Permission to navigate to the page is denied, unless Full Control is granted. Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users are unable to navigate to the page unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission.

l

14. In the Full Control (or Edit Page) column, select from these options:
l

Permission Granted: Users with Full Control permissions have full administrative rights for the page. This permission is the same as the Edit Page permission in the Community Edition. This role overrides other settings. Permission Denied: Permission to delete the page is denied, unless Full Control is granted. Not Specified: Permissions are not specified.

l

l

15. Click the Update Page link.

Page Permissions in DNN Professional Edition

About Page Permissions
How to set access to view, edit and manage pages and page content setting permissions by roles and/or usernames. This topic provides an overview of the different page permissions available. For full details See "Setting Page Permissions" Important. In DNN Community edition, page management permissions consist of only two settings: View Page and Edit Page. In DNN Professional, page management has ten permissions. Professional Edition Permissions Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Here is the full list of page permissions available in Professional Edition:
l

View: View permissions enable users to view the page. Add: Users with Add permissions for a page can add child pages to that page. They cannot add any parent pages, and they cannot add child pages to any other pages. Add Content: Users with Add Content permissions for a page can edit content on the page. These users can add, move and delete modules, as well as manage the content and settings for modules on the page. Copy: Users with Copy permission can make a copy any page they can view. The new page can only be a child of the page they have copy permissions for. Delete: Users with Delete permissions can delete the page. If the page has child pages they are also deleted when the parent is deleted, however the user does not automatically have Delete permissions for these child pages. Export: Users with Export permissions can export the page. Import: Users with Import permissions can import a page. Manage Settings: Users with Manage Settings permissions can change the page settings. Users can edit all of the settings on the Settings page, except for the permissions section which will not be visible. Navigate: Users with Navigate permissions can view a page in the navigation menu. Users can have this permission without view permissions, in which case they will not be able to view any content on the page but the page will be visible in the menu. Full Control: Users with Full Control permissions have full administrative rights for the page. This permission is the same as the Edit Page permission in the Community Edition.

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

Page Permissions in DNN Professional Edition

Community Edition Permissions Here is the list of page permissions available in Community Edition:
l

View Page: View permissions enable users to view the page. Edit Page: Edit permissions give users full administrative rights for the page.

l

Page Permissions in DNN Community Edition

Advanced Settings for New Pages
An overview of the advanced settings for new pages. All advanced page settings are optional. This topic assumes you are in the process of adding a new page ( See "Adding a New Page via the Site Settings Page") or editing an existing page (See "Editing Page Settings" 1. Select the Advanced Settings tab. 2. In the Appearance section, complete any of the following optional settings: a. At Icon, select the image to be displayed beside the page name in the menu. This image is also used as the Small Icon for any Console module relating to this page. Select the location of the required icon from these options:

l

File (A File On Your Site ), select to choose any imageSee "Uploading and Linking to a File" i. Set the link to an existing file ( See "Setting a File Link"or a new file ( "Uploading and Linking to a File". Note: You can remove the icon from this and the following field by selecting < None Specified > as the File Name when setting a file link.

l

System Image: Select to choose an icon which is part of your DNN application. This displays a list of available images. i. Select the required image.

b. At Large Icon, using the same steps as for the above field, select an image to be used as the Large Icon for any Console module relating to this page. c. At Page Skin, select Host or Site to view the associated skins and then select a skin from the drop down list. The default option of <Use Portal Default> uses whichever skin is set as the default for this site. See "Setting the Default Portal Skin and Container" d. At Page Container, select Host or Site to view the associated containers and then select a container from the drop down list. Note: The default option of <Use Portal Default> uses the skin is set as the default for this site. See "Setting the Default Portal Skin and Container" e. In the Refresh Internal (seconds) text box, enter the interval to wait between automatic page refreshes. (E.g. Enter "60" for 1 minute or 60 seconds.) Leave field blank to disable. f. In the Page Header Tags text box, enter any tags that should be rendered in the "HEAD" tag of the HTML for this page.

3. In the Cache Settings section, the following setting is available: a. At Output Cache Provider, select the provider to use for this page from these options:
l

FileOutputCachingProvider DatabaseOutputCachingProvider MemoryOutputCachingProvider

l

l

4. In the Other Settings, the following optional settings are available: a. At Secure? check the check box to force this page to use a secure connection or secure socket layer (SSL). This option requires the Administrator to configure the SSL Settings on the Admin > Site Settings page. b. At Site Map Priority, enter the desired priority (between 0 and 1.0). This helps determine how this page is ranked in Google with respect to other pages on your site (0.5 is the default). c. At Start Date, click the Calendar link and select the first date the page is viewable. d. At End Date, click the Calendar link and select the last date the page is viewable. Note: Expired pages can be viewed by Administrators via the Admin > Pages page. e. At Link URL, to set this page to be a navigation link to another resource (rather than displaying the page itself), select or add the link here. "About the Link Control" f. At Permanently Redirect?, check the check box to notify the web browser that this page should be considered as permanently moved. This enables Search Engines to modify their URL's to directly link to the resource. Note: This setting is ignored if the Link Type is set to None.

5. Click the Update Page link. Tip: If a Small Icon is set for the page, it will also be used as the small icon for any Console module which is added to the page. Related Topics:
l

See "Working with the Calendar" See "About The Console Module"

l

Advanced Settings for Existing Pages
How to set the advanced settings for existing pages on the Page Settings page. See "Editing Page Settings". All advanced page settings are optional. 1. Select the Advanced Settings tab. 2. In the Appearance section, complete any of the following optional settings: a. At Icon, select the image to be displayed beside the page name in the menu. This image is also used as the Small Icon for any Console module relating to this page. Select the location of the required icon from these options:
l

File (A File On Your Site ), select to choose any imageSee "Uploading and Linking to a File" i. Set the link to an existing file ( See "Setting a File Link"or a new file ( "Uploading and Linking to a File". Note: You can remove the icon from this and the following field by selecting < None Specified > as the File Name when setting a file link.

l

System Image: Select to choose an icon which is part of your DNN application. This displays a list of available images. i. Select the required image.

b. At Large Icon, using the same steps as for the above field, select an image to be used as the Large Icon for any Console module relating to this page. c. At Page Skin, select Host or Site to view the associated skins and then select a skin from the drop down list. The default option of <Use Portal Default> uses whichever skin is set as the default for this site. See "Setting the Default Portal Skin and Container" d. At Page Container, select Host or Site to view the associated containers and then select a container from the drop down list. The default option of <Use Portal Default> uses whichever skin is set as the default for this site.

e. At Copy Design to Descendants, click the Copy Design link. "Copying Design to Children Pages" f. At Disabled, select from these options:
l

Check the check box if the page name is not a link. I.e. When you click on the page name in the menu nothing happens. This option is typically selected for a parent page to provide a way for users to navigate to its child pages. Uncheck option. the check box for this page name to be a link to the page. This is the default

l

g. In the Refresh Internal (seconds) text box, enter the interval to wait between automatic page refreshes. (E.g. Enter "60" for 1 minute or 60 seconds.) Leave field blank to disable. h. In the Page Header Tags text box, enter any tags (i.e. meta-tags) that should be rendered in the "HEAD" tag of the HTML for this page

In the Site Map Priority text box. . d. check the check box to notify the client that this page should be considered as permanently moved. click the Calendar link and select the last date the page is viewable. the following setting is available: a. "About the Link Control" f. select or add the link here. b. At Secure?. This option will only be enabled if the host has enabled SSL ( See "Setting SSL Settings for a Single Portal" ) . enter the desired priority (between 0 and 1.3. 5. This helps determine how this page is ranked in Google with respect to other pages on your site (0. This would allow Search Engines to modify their URL's to directly link to the resource. Note: This setting is ignored if the Link Type is set to None.5 is the default). In the Other Settings section. At Start Date.OR . click the Calendar link and select the first date the page is viewable. the following optional settings are available: a. At End Date. select the provider to use for this page from these options: l FileOutputCachingProvider DatabaseOutputCachingProvider MemoryOutputCachingProvider l l 4.0). At Output Cache Provider. At Link URL. In the Cache Settings section. c.Uncheck the check box remove use of SSL connection. check the check box to force this page to use a secure connection (SSL). Click the Update Page link. At Permanently Redirect?. to set this page to be a navigation link to another resource. See "Viewing any Page (Pages Module)" e. Note: Expired pages can be viewed by Administrators via the Admin > Pages page.

In the Localization section. Create Localized Versions of Page: Select to a version of this page for each language. This is the default option.Localization Settings for New Pages How to set the localization setting for new pages on the Page Settings page. Note: The Localization section only displays if content localization is enabled. Create in Current Culture only: Select to create a page for the language you are currently viewing the site in. l l Setting Localization Settings for New Pages Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling Content Localization" . select from the following: l Create Single Neutral Culture Page: Select to create a single page which is shared for all languages.

There are many different types of modules. One or more modules are added to each page allowing you to create and manage content. l See "Minimizing and Maximizing Content" See "Printing Content" See "Subscribing to Syndicated Content" See "Tagging Page Content" l l l Related Topics: . A page which has the Search Input. Modules can be purchased from sites such as Snowcovered. however these actions may be disabled on one or more modules. HTML and Media modules added to it Note: All users can perform the following actions on modules.com. each managing a different type of site content or site administrative tasks.Modules About Modules DNN uses a modular design system to display content on a page. Your Host can install additional modules.

enables users with the correct permissions to add and edit module content. delete or move modules. Note: Some menu options are role restricted. The menu also provides access to the Module Settings page where users can set module specific setting such as view and edit permissions and design settings can be configured. import/export module content. If the Control Panel is displayed. . and view a Syndicated URL of the module content. Tip: You can drag the Manage button to any location within the boundaries of its module. The Module Actions Menu Opening the Module Actions Menu How to view the options available to you on the module actions menu.l See "About Module Settings" and the related section for details on setting the module settings which are common to all modules See "Using the Install Extension Wizard" See "Installing a New Module" l l Module Actions Menu The module actions menu. print module content. Important. ensure Mode is set to Edit to view and access this menu.

.1. Mouse over the Manage button to view the drop-down menu.

This opens the Export M 2. Links_Sponsors_December2011 4. Select page. This creates an XML file which is saved to the selected folder. It is useful to keep this as the start of the file name so you can easily identify module type in the future. Media. Links. This option may be disabled in the menu. Exporting Module Content Import Content Enables exported content to be imported into IPortable modules. HTML/HTML and XML modules. select the folder where you want to save the exported content. Modules which allow content import/export are known as IPortable modules. This opens the Import 2.Function of Menu Icons Icon Name Edit Edit Content My Work Admin Export Content Function Add a new record to the module or edit the existing content. Import Content from the module actions menu. Note: The module type is enter default. Repository. E. FAQ. E. Export content from the module. View your current workflow tasks in the HTML/HTML Pro module. Exampl include the Announcements. 3. You can only import content from a Links m into another Links module. Select page. This option may be disabled in the menu. Click the Export link. Note: Content must first exported from a module of the same type.g. Help. 1. 1.g. In the File text box. At Folder. select the folder where exported file is located from the drop-down list. Exported content can then be imported it into another m of the same type. You can only import content from a Links module into another Link ule. At Folder. enter a name for the export file. . Export Content from the module actions menu. E.g. Survey.

4. At File. Click the Import link. the imported content is merged with the exi content. See "Configuring Basic Page Sett Modules" Opens the Module Help page for this module. Tip: If the module already contains content. select the file name from the drop-down list.Icon Name Function 3. . This feed can be downloade your computer or displayed in another module such as the News Feeds (RSS) module. Importing Module Content Syndicate Help Enables users to view a syndicated feed of the module content. Here you can view basic module information help. Synd must be enabled on the Module Setting page of a module.

.Icon Name Function Technical information including the module creator and module version is displayed to Ho users.

Icon Name Function 1. Online Help 2. The default option is the resource called DNN Online Help which is maintained by DNN Corp however your Host m another resource. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. See "Enabling/Disabling Online Module Help" . Optional. This option may be disabled in the menu. Select to view the Online Help Web site associated with your site. Click the View Online Help link to view detailed help for this module onl This opens the Online Help resource in a new Web browser.

See "Configuring Basic Page Settings for Modules" Enables the Host to view and update the source files for a module. choose from these options: l None Specified: No file is selected. This opens the Module Settings page. Important. Move the module to the bottom (below all other modules) within the current pane. 1. Settings User Control or Resource File: Select one of these options and then edit t Module Control Source as required. Move the module up one position within the current pane. Move the module to the top (above all other modules) within the current pane.Click the Settings but 2. 1. Move the module to another pane on the current page. Move the module down one position within the current pane.Icon Name Print View Source Function Provides a print friendly copy of the module content for printing. l Tip: Ensure Mode is set to Edit on the Control Panel. Select Settings from the module actions menu . You must be authorized to deploy a module and have the appropriate page editing permissions to add a module to a page. Click the Update link. This page provides Page Editors and Adm istrators with access to configure a wide range of module settings. Host Tip: See "Editing Module Extension Settings" to manage module categories. Delete Refresh Move Section To Top To Up To Down To Bottom To [PaneName] Adding a New Module (RibbonBar) How to a new module to a page using the RibbonBar. Edit one or more settings as required. Important. Permissions. Opens the module settings page for this module.OR .net and DNN. If content localization is enabled. 3. Requires advanced knowledge of ASP. See "Restoring Deleted Modules" Refreshes the module with the latest content. Delete the module. 4. Adding a new module inserts a module without content into the current page. Print must be enabled on Module Setting page of a module. At Select File. See "Adding a Module to all Languages" or "Adding Modules to a Secondary Language Only" as required. .

If you select a pane other than the Content Pane. Optional.g. Optional. Add New Module is pre-selected. The module is added to the Content Pane by default. a. 6. Select this option if you want to add content and configure the module settings before others can view the module. enter a title for this module. the module name is used by default. Professional: Modules specific to DNN Professional Edition. select the placement of the module from the first drop-down box. Optional. set the following options: a. On the RibbonBar. l l Below: Select to add the module below another module within the selected pane. Page Editors Only: The sets module as only visible only to the roles/user who can edit this page. select the module the new module will be added below. If no title is entered. depending on the number of modules located in the selected pane: l Top: Select to add the module above all existing modules within the selected pane. At Module. go the Module Insertion section and select Add New Module. select the module the new module will be added above. . HTML 3. At Insert. About Us. select the pane you want to insert the module into. a. hover over the Modules tab until the Add Module window appears. l Admin: Modules which are typically used for site administration rather than managing content. The names of other panes will depend upon the skin applied to this page. E. Optional. l 5. Common: Modules selected as frequently used. select one of the following module categories from the drop-down list to populate the Module field below with the related modules. At Category. All Categories: Modules within all categories including those which haven't been associated with a category). Enterprise: Modules specific to DNN Enterprise Edition.g. At Module Selection. At Pane.1. Note: On the Iconbar. At Module. 4. In the Title text box. At Visibility. At Module. E. Skip to Step 9. Above: Select to add the module above another chosen module within the selected pane. This is the default setting. One or more of the following options is available. the position of the pane is briefly shown on the page. 2. l l l l b. select the module to be added. select from the following options: l Same As Page: This sets the module as visible to all roles/users who can view this page.

"Adding Module Content" Tip: When you add the module listed as Users & Roles. 7. Adding a New Module using the RibbonBar Adding a New Module using the Iconbar .OR .Click the Add Module To Page link on the Iconbar. or move them to different pages as you like. You can delete one or all of them. My Profile and User Accounts) are added to the page. Click the Add Module button on the RibbonBar . For modules that enable you to add content. This is the default option.l Bottom: This adds the module below all existing modules within the selected pane. three separate modules (Security Roles. These modules do not need to be used on the same page.

Maximize the Control Panel. select the category this module belongs to from these options: l Uncategorized: Modules which have not been assigned to a category.g. The module is added to the Content Pane by default. If you select a pane other than the Content Pane. You cannot add an existing module to the page where it already exists. Host: Modules which are located on the Host pages (e. select the placement of the module from the first drop-down box. 4. The content of this module is shared with the existing module. At Pane. Banners). Tip: You must be authorized to deploy a module and have the appropriate page editing permissions to add modules to the current page. Optional. select the page where the existing module is located. 8. 6.Adding an Existing Module (RibbonBar) How to add an existing module to the current page using the RibbonBar. however they can be configured to enable other users to deploy them to the site. These modules only to Host. 2. Schedule). At Visibility. Optional. select from the following options: l Same As Page: This sets the module as visible to all roles/users who can view this page. These modules are typically available only to Administrators. Select the Common Tasks tab and at Add Module select Existing. select the pane you want to insert the module into. Important. Select this option if you want to add content and configure the module settings before others can view the module. depending on the number of modules located in the selected pane: . Note: Selecting the module here appends either 'with content' or 'without content' to the Copy Module field below depending on whether the selected module supports copying of content. l 7. At Category. SQL. File Manager. One or more of the following options is available. At Module. Admin: Modules which are located on the Admin pages (e.g. 1. 3. At Page. Page Editors Only: The sets module as only visible only to the roles/user who can edit this page. User Accounts) or require some Admin assistance (e. Optional. This is the default setting. At Insert. therefore updating the content on any version of this module will update the content in all of the other versions as well.g. select the module to be added. the position of the pane is briefly shown on the page. The names of other panes will depend upon the skin applied to this page. l l 5.

select the module the new module will be added above. At Module. select the module the new module will be added below. Click the Add Module button. select from these options: l Check the check box to create an independent instance of this module. a. . You cannot add an existing module to the page where it already exists. 1. This module shares the settings and (where applicable) the content of the existing module and modifying either instance will update both versions. 9. This is the default option. Related Topics: l "Adding Module Content" See "Setting Permissions to Deploy a Module" l Adding an Existing Module (Iconbar) How to add an existing module to the current page using the Iconbar. This new module contains both the settings and (where applicable) the content of the existing module however you can modify this module without affecting the existing module. Above: Select to add the module above another chosen module within the selected pane. The module content is shared so if you update the content on one module the content in the other module also updates.l Top: Select to add the module above all existing modules within the selected pane. Go the Module Insertion section and select Add Existing Module. l Bottom: This adds the module below all existing modules within the selected pane. Uncheck the check box to display the existing module on this page. l 10. Important. Tip: You must be authorized to deploy a module and have the appropriate page editing permissions to add a module to a page. a. Skip to Step 9. At Module. l l Below: Select to add the module below another module within the selected pane. At Copy Module. Maximize the Control Panel. 2.

l 6. depending on the number of modules located in the selected pane: l Top: Select to add the module above all existing modules within the selected pane. select the module the new module will be added above. Add Module To Page link. button above the module . 5. This is the default setting. select the page where the existing module is located. Note: If this setting has been disabled. At Module. At Visibility. select the placement of the module from the first drop-down box. For modules that enable you to add content. At Page. 4. a. select the module the new module will be added below. 8. If you select a pane other than the Content Pane. select the pane you want to insert the module into. Optional. Skip to Step 9. select the module to be added. select from the following options: l Same As Page: This sets the module as visible to all roles/users who can view this page. a. Select this option if you want to add content and configure the module settings before others can view the module. At Insert. This is the default option. the title can instead be edited by a Page Editor on the Module Settings page. One or more of the following options is available. l Bottom: This adds the module below all existing modules within the selected pane. Optional. See "About Module Settings" 1. At Pane.3. l l Below: Select to add the module below another module within the selected pane. Click the Related Topics: l "Adding Module Content" Editing Module Title Inline How to edit the title of a module inline. 7. Above: Select to add the module above another chosen module within the selected pane. the position of the pane is briefly shown on the page. Optional. At Module. Place your mouse over the module title to be edited. This displays the Edit title. The module is added to the Content Pane by default. The names of other panes will depend upon the skin applied to this page. At Module. Page Editors Only: The sets module as only visible only to the roles/user who can edit this page.

3. button to save your changes . Click the Update changes. Click the Edit button. 4.2. Edit the title.OR . This enables inline title editing.Click the Cancel button to cancel your .

Add [Item] link (typically Editing Module Content How to edit module content. see the "Managing Module Content" section of this manual. 1. Tip: If the Control Panel. Complete the form fields. Tip: If the Control Panel is displayed. 3. Click the Edit button located beside the content to be edited. Select Edit [Item] from the module actions menu . This topic demonstrates how content is typically added to modules. 3. however this is not applicable to all modules. 2. however this is not typical of all modules.Adding Module Content How to add content to a module. Click the Update link. For detailed information on editing content for individual module types. Select Add [Item] from the module actions menu . This topic demonstrates how content is typically edited on modules. This opens the Edit page for this module. This opens the edit page for this module. see the "Managing Module Content" and "Advanced Site Management" sections of this manual.Click the located at the base of the module). ensure Edit mode is selected. . Edit the fields.OR . Editing modules with multiple items such as the Announcements and Links modules: 1.OR . Editing modules with a single content item such as the HTML and IFrame modules: 1. ensure EDIT mode is selected.Click the Edit [Item] link (typically located at the base of the module). 2. Click the Update link. For details on adding content to different module types.

Tip: If the Control Panel. see the "Managing Module Content" section. ensure EDIT mode is selected. This topic demonstrates how content is typically deleted from a module. 3. For full details on deleting content for individual module types. however this is not applicable to all modules. Edit the fields.2. Click the Update link. Click the Edit button located beside the content to be deleted. 1. . Related Topics: l See "Editing (Translating) Localized Module Content" See "Editing the Content of Shared Modules" l Deleting Module Content How to delete module content.

g. The Module Settings page enables authorized users to modify basic module settings related to the module content (e. This page also controls more advanced settings related to the design of the module (containers. module title. printing) and site wide module settings. This page also controls more advanced settings related to the design of the module (containers.g. Click the Delete link. which roles or users are able to view and manage the module). Click the OK button to confirm.2. Select Delete from the Delete This Module?" module actions menu. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 3. borders. module start and end dates) and module permissions (e. printing) and site wide module settings. which roles are able to view and edit a module). Related Topics: l See "Delete Modules from Secondary Language" Module Settings About Module Settings All modules include a Module Settings page which enables authorized users to modify basic settings related to the module content (e. Tip: To delete content from modules with a single content item such as the HTML and IFrame modules you can either remove all the content or simply delete the module.g. Deleting a Module How to delete a module from a page. Tip: Deleted modules are stored in the Recycle Bin.g. module title. module header and footer. borders. module header and footer. 1. Click the OK button to confirm. module start and end dates) and module permissions (e. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Want To 2. . All modules have a Settings page which is accessed by selecting Settings from the module actions menu.

4. 3. This field cannot be edited. etc. the culture associated with this module is displayed. Events. See "Editing Module Title Inline" 1. FAQ and many more. edit the module title. Page Settings: Settings specific to this particular occurrence of the module for this page. In the Module Title text box. 5. See "About Content Localization" Module Specific Settings: Several modules have additional settings which are specific to this module type. Modules which have specific settings include the Announcements. 6.Basic Settings section. E. HTML. . Localization Settings: The Localization section only displays if content localization is enabled. edit and manage the module is set. Note: Tags can be created by users (See "Tagging Page Content") or editors (See "Creating a Vocabulary"). At Module.g. the Display Container? setting must be checked and the container applied to the module must include the [TITLE] skin token. click on the drop-down box and then check the check box beside the tag you want to associate with this module. Permissions: This section includes module permissions where access to view.g.OR . For full details on working with this section. 2. Module Settings are settings which are the same on all pages where the Module appears. At Module Culture. Repeat to select additional tags. which is a way of categorizing content for more meaningful search results. Go to the Module Settings . Tip: You may also be able to edit to title inline. l l l l Module Settings Configuring Basic Module Settings How to view basic module settings and set the module title and tags. At Tags. This section is typically named according to the module type. Tagging is a way of categorizing content for more meaningful search results. E. This section is divided into Basic Settings. Select Settings from the module actions menu . view the name of the module.Click the Settings button. Announcements. Documents. This section is divided into Basic Settings and Advanced Settings. This section is named Links Settings on the Links module. Note: In order to view the Module Title. Note: Some modules have additional permissions to add/edit and manage module content. Advanced Settings and Added to Pages.The page is divided into these tabs: l Module Settings: Settings relating to the Module content.

Module content is shared therefore changes made on one instance of the module are reflected on all instances of the module. . this doesn't affect the pages where it is already located. Click the Update link. See "Editing Module Title Inline" Related Topics: l See "Tagging Page Content" See "Creating a Vocabulary" l Configuring Advanced Module Settings How to set a module to display on all pages including Admin pages.7. If you choose to only display the module on new pages. Tip: You may be able to edit the module title directly on the page. or only on newly added pages.

Uncheck the check box to display the message. add. changes to module settings located on the Page Settings tab are unique to the module which you changed. Plain text and basic HTML such as headings. Select Settings from the module actions menu . l l Uncheck the check box to disable. Go to the Module Settings . then these changes will be reflected on all copies of the module. Optional. edit or delete the header which displays above the module content.Advanced Settings section. In the Header text box. At Hide Admin Border. This message is also displayed by default for any modules which are added to the Admin pages. The message is displayed to Administrators and SuperUsers on modules which are only visible to Administrators.OR . add. the check box to add the module to both existing and new pages. edit or delete the footer which displays below the module content. However. If the control panel is displayed. . 1. This message appears on the page where the module is located as well as on the Module Settings page for that module. In the Footer text box. ensure the Mode is set to Edit. 3. This will hide the message even if the module is only visible by administrators.Click the Settings button. This displays the message even if the module is only visible to members in the Administrator role (which by default includes all hosts). At Add To New Pages Only?. This displays the Add To New Pages Only? field. if you make changes to any module settings located on the Module Settings tab. l Check the check box to hide the message.* a. select from these options to set the visibility of the "Visible By Administrators Only" message. italic and bold can be used. l 5. select from these options: l Check the check box. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to only add the module to any new pages which are added. At Display Module On All Pages?. 6. 4. 2.Once a module is set to display on all/new pages.

7. At End Date.[start date]" message is displayed to these users prior to the start date. A "Module Expired [end date]" message is displayed to these users once the module has expired. Modules with a start date are only visible to Page Editors and Administrators prior to that date. edit and republish the content as desired. enabling them to create content in advance. the module is only visible to Page Editors and Administrators. Once the end date is reached. At Start Date. click the Calendar link and then select the last day that the module will be visible on the site. . click the Calendar link and select the first day that the module will be visible on the site. 8. enabling them to retain. A "Module Effective .

Click the Update link. .9.

header and footer The message displayed when Admin Border is displayed * Tip: You can delete any instance of a module from any page without is affecting this setting.Module with a start date. See "Working with the Calendar" l See "Working with the Calendar" .

Click on the linked [Page Name] to view the module on that page. The Added To Pages List Related Topics: l "Configuring Advanced Module Settings" Permissions About Module Permissions How to set access to view. Import: Users can import the module content using the module actions menu.Added To Pages section.Click the Settings button. Edit Content: Users can edit the module content. Export: Users can export the module content using the module actions menu. 1. Go to the Module Settings . Optional. This displays a hierarchical list of all pages (apart from the current page) where this module is located. edit and manage module content by roles and/or usernames. 3. l l l l . This setting includes a link to view the module on any of the listed pages.Viewing Added To Pages Module Settings How to view a list of the pages where a module is located. module management permissions consist of only two settings: View and Edit.OR . module management has seven permissions. 2. In DNN Community edition. In DNN Professional. For full details See "Setting Module Permissions" Important. Here you will find an overview of the different module permissions available. Delete: Users can delete the module through the module actions menu. Professional Edition Module Permissions: Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Here is the full list of module permissions available in Professional Edition: l View: Users can view the module on the page. Select Settings from the module actions menu .

Edit Module: Users can add and edit the module content. l Module Permissions in DNN Professional Edition Community Edition Module Permissions: Here is the list of module permissions available in Community Edition: l View Module: Users can view the module on the page. Full Control: Users have full administrator rights for the module. l Module Permissions in DNN Community Edition .l Manage Settings: Users can change access the module settings page for this module and manage all setting excluding permissions.

click on the check box beside a role/username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed. Select the Permissions tab. If you choose to uncheck this option. The following options are available: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. In the View (or View Module) column. and Full Control. All Users. Optional. Skip to step 7. 8. [Role Name]: Select the name of a Role Group to view the roles within that group. The following options are available: . If you are using DotNetNuke Community Edition. Users cannot view the module unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission. Permission Granted: Users can view the module. Fine grain management of modules is available in Professional Edition by providing these additional settings: Delete. 3. the check boxes at View Module will become available. Registered Users. or are granted Full Control permissions. select from these options: l Check the check box if the users which are authorized to view this module should be the same as the page it is located on. Export. Permission Denied: Users cannot view the module. 2. l 6. In the Username text box. Additional permission options are available on some modules such as the Events module. This displays the Security Roles image in the View (or View Module) column indicating that the view security is 'locked'. 4. Note: Users with Edit Module permissions in DNN Community Edition cannot view the module. enter the username of a user to whom you wish to grant or deny module permissions. select from the following options: l < All Roles >: Select to view all roles (both global and group roles) in one single list. and then click the Add link. Optional. click on the check box beside a role/username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed. Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition 1. unless Full Control is granted. Import. Skip to Step 14. Permission can be granted or denied for a role or for an individual user. Manage Settings. < Global Roles >: Select to view all roles which are not associated with a Role Group. Repeat for additional usernames. and Unauthenticated Users. l l 7. Select Settings from the module actions menu . At Filter By Group. This includes Administrators. l l 5.Click the Settings button. In the Edit Content column. At Inherit View permissions from Page. Optional.OR .Setting Module Permissions How to set permissions to view and edit a module. Uncheck the check box to set different permissions for viewing this module than set for the page it is located on.

Users cannot import the module unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission. Permission Denied: Users cannot manage module settings. In the Delete column. Users cannot export the module unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission. Users cannot manage module settings unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission. or are granted Full Control permissions. unless Full Control is granted. click on the check box beside a role/username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed. unless Full Control is granted. In the Manage Settings column. or are granted Full Control permissions. l l 12. or are granted Full Control permissions. Permission Granted: Users can delete the module. The following options are available: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. In the Export column. or are granted Full Control permissions. l l . unless Full Control is granted. The following options are available: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. click on the check box beside a role/username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed. or are granted Full Control permissions. Permission Denied: Users cannot edit content. l l 11. Permission Granted: Users can edit content. Permission Denied: Users cannot export the module. l l 10. Permission Granted: Users can manage module settings.l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users cannot delete the module unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission. l l 9. The following options are available: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Users cannot edit content unless they belong to another role/username which has been granted permission. unless Full Control is granted. Permission Denied: Users cannot import the module. click on the check box beside a role/username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed. Permission Denied: Users cannot delete the module. Permission Granted: Users can import the module. unless Full Control is granted. The following options are available: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Permission Granted:: Users can export the module. In the Import column. click on the check box beside a role/username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed.

module title. Note: In DNN Community Edition. Tip: When setting Permissions. For Example: In the below screen capture. click on the check box beside a role/username repeatedly until the correct permission is displayed. apart the user with the username John who has been denied access to edit the module.13. . permission to view the module are inherited from the page and permission to edit the module has been granted to all Registered Users. The following options are available: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. In the Full Control ( or Edit Module ) column. Click the Update link.Basic Settings section of the Module Settings page. you can change the selection at Filter By Group and set permissions for any of the related roles before updating. l l 14. Permission Granted: Users have full control to view the module. Minimize/Maximize button. Note: Some module containers may not include the skin token required to view the icon. Permission Denied: Users are denied full control. Setting Module Permissions Page Settings Configuring Basic Page Settings for Modules How to set the Module Settings in the Page Settings . View Module permissions must also be granted. manage module content and manage module settings. Print button or Syndicate button.

Uncheck the check box to hide the module container 5.OR .Important. File ( A File On Your Site): Select to choose an image from the File Manager or upload a file. See "Uploading a File and Linking to the File" l . 4. 2. Print and Syndicate settings. choose whether to display an icon in the module container. The icon can be any common image type such as a JPEG. a. At Icon.OR . At Display Container?. At Link Type. The below diagram shows the settings which you can set in this section. 3. Select the Page Settings tab. check the check box to display the module container . select from the following: l None: Select for no icon. 1. Module Title. The Display Container? setting must be checked to view the Icon. Select Settings from the module actions menu . or GIF. Expand/Collapse. The icon is typically displayed to the left of the module title.Click the Settings button. Go to the Basic Settings section.

select the default alignment for module content. Center. See "Setting a File Link" ii. At File Name. l System Image: Select to choose from the system icon library. Content which has been formatted using the RTE will override this setting. See "Setting a File Link".i. 6. Tip: Another way to set no icon is to select <None Specified> at this field. l Left. At Image. l . select an image from the drop-down list. At Alignment. i. select the file from the drop-down list. Not Specified: Select to use default alignment. Right: Select content alignment.

In the Color text box.OR . Navy or #CFCFCF. At Display Container?. The Print icon displays in the menu and on the module container.g. l button. check the check box to display the module container . E. button. enter a color name or hex number. 8. 9. module title.com/Html/html_colors. l Check Uncheck the check box to display the Print the check box to disable. The Maximize button is displayed enabling users to maximize the content. The module title. button and allow printing. 11. Find Color code charts at http://www. Check Uncheck the check box to allow syndication and display the Syndicate the check box to disable syndication. At Collapse/Expand. button is dis- l Minimized: Select to hide the module content. In the Border text box. l Maximized: Select to display the module content on the page. Print button or Syndicate button. select from the following options to enable or disable the Syndicate Syndication enables users to create an XML syndication of module content. select from the following options to set the visibility of the Print button which enables users to print the module content. l 10. None: Select to display module content and remove the Maximize / Minimize button.Uncheck the check box to hide the module container including the icon. l 12. 1 = 1 pixel width.g. l . Leave this field blank for no border. At Allow Print?. enter a number to set the width of the border in pixels.asp. E. The Minimize played enabling users to minimize the content.w3schools. header and footer are still visible. select from the following options to set the visibility of module content. At Allow Syndicate?.7. Minimize/Maximize button.

13. . At Module Container. Click the Update link. enter a title for the Web Slice . File: The default setting. b. In the Web Slice TTL text box. Optional. l Check the check box to enable WebSlice and set any of these optional settings: a. l Uncheck the check to disable WebSlice 14. optionally set this module as a WebSlice. Optional.OR . In the Web Slice Title text box. select the name of the module container you want to use on this module from the drop-down list.Leave blank to use the End date . At Is a WebSlice?.OR .Leave blank to use the module title. Optional. Host Tip: System icons associated with the Icon field are stored in the Images folder of your DotNetNuke Installation Related Topics: l See "Adding News Feeds from Syndicated Modules" Configuring Cache Settings for a Module How to set the provider used for cached files and set the period before the cache in DNN refreshes.Leave blank to use the default to the cache time (converted as minutes). enter the Time to Live (TTL) for this web slice in minutes . 15. See "Working with the Calendar" c. At Web Slice Expires: Enter a date when the Web Slice will expire . Optional.OR . Suitable for a shared hosting environment. a. Click the Preview link to view the module with this container applied in a new browser window.

Set to a low number like 0 if your module content changes frequently or set it to a higher number like 1200 if the content doesn't change all that often and you would like better performance out of your site. Entering 60 will mean that every 60 seconds DNN will refresh module content from the database. The default setting is 1200.Click the Settings button. a. At Apply To All Modules?. You can optionally set these settings for all existing modules. skip to Step 6. The following options are available: l None Specified: Click to disable caching. This is typically not suitable for a shared hosting environment. Select either File. select the page name where the module will be moved to from the drop-down list.Click the Settings button. Configuring Advanced Page Settings for a Module How to set the Advanced Page Settings on this module as the default settings for all new modules. It this option is selected.OR . select the provider to use for this page. 4. check modules.OR . Select the Page Settings tab.Advanced Settings. Select this option if you have web site has a large amount of RAM allocated. In the Cache Duration (Seconds) text box. l 5. check the check box to use these page settings for all new modules. At Output Cache Provider. 3. Select Settings from the module actions menu . 1. . 5. enter the duration (in seconds) the information for this page will be refreshed. At Set As Default Settings?. 1.Memory: This is the fastest caching method. 3. the check box to apply these page settings to all existing 4. I. Click the Update link. Go to the Cache Settings section. 2. Optional. Select Settings from the module actions menu . or Memory.e. At Move To Page. Go to Page Settings . 2.

l l Files and File Content Folders and Folder Settings and Permissions Portal Settings l l Note: Content staging is only supported between cloned portals. only settings managed on the Module Content. . Creating a Staging Portal How to create a staging portal from a production portal. Page Settings and Permissions (also called Tab Settings and Permissions). 2. Note: Content is only published for modules that allow import/export of content. Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition 1.6. For modules such as the Feedback module where there is no content. Click the Update link. Create a backup of your production SQL database. Create a new database for your staging portal. Modules: l l Module Settings for all modules regardless of whether they are iPortable (i.e. Restore the production site database into your staging database. Only available in DotNetNuke Enterprise Edition The following types of entities are deployed to the production sever during a publish action l Pages (also called Tabs). 3. Note: Permissions are only applied for the users and roles that exist in the target portal. It eliminates the need to make content changes to your live production portal. Content Staging About the Content Staging Module Content staging enables users to publish content from a staging portal to a target (production) portal. allow import/export of content). your staging portal should be created using a backup of your production portal.

Rename the folder to help you identify it as the physical location of your staging portal. Edit the web. 5. 7. Portal Address and Publishing Token. Important. Open Windows Explorer and make a copy of the folder that is the physical location for the production web site. Delete the records in the Portal Alias table. This will be the physical location for the staging portal. Open the Portal Alias table in the new staging database.4. Only available in DotNetNuke Enterprise Edition Pairing Your Portals Two pieces of information are required to pair two portals. . To do this turn on Windows feature Windows Communication Foundation HTTP Activation. Create a new IIS web site for the staging portal with the physical location set to the folder you created in step 6. This will be regenerated the first time the staging portal is accessed.config file for the staging portal to update the connection string to connect to the staging database. Content Staging relies upon Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) services which must be enabled on your production web server before commencing the below topic. 9. This must be done before you can publish content from a server to a target server you have to pair the two servers together. Configuring Content Staging How to configure content staging using the Content Staging module. 8. 6.

Note: If the domains you are using are not entered into a DNS server you will need to add the URL and IP Address of BOTH servers into the HOSTS file on BOTH servers so that they can communicate. Login to your production portal.Go to a Content Staging module.OR .OR . 6. the Connection Verified Successfully message is dis- . 4.Go to a Content Staging module. Click the played. Login to your staging portal. 3. If successful. Tip: You may find it helpful to copy and paste this information into a text file. Navigate to Admin > Content Staging . 5. 2. 7. Enter (or paste) the information you copied at Step 4 into Production Site Address and Production Publishing Token fields respectively. Test Connection link. Copy the information displayed at the Local Site Address and Local Publishing Token fields.1. Navigate to Admin > Content Staging .

Go to a Content Staging module. . Click the Connect Portals link. Note 1: All modules and languages which are present on the Staging site must be installed on the production site before staged content can be published. 4.OR . Note: You will need to re-enter these details every time you navigate to the Content Staging module to publish content. In the User Name/Password text boxes. the user should either be a Host user or be in the Administrator role in the production server for the login attempt to be successful. You have successfully paired your production and staging portals and are ready to publish staged content. 2. 5. Navigate to Admin > Content Staging . 1. enter either the Host or Admin login details. Go to the Publish Staged Content section.8. Note: Even though the user name and password are entered in the staging site. the authentication is done at the production site. Click the Authenticate link. Login to your staging portal. 3. See "Publishing Staged Content" Publishing Staged Content How to publish content from your staging site to your production site.

such as the automatic reordering of pages. the table shows that there has been one page and one module added to the site. when the page was added. as well as a module called "About EcoZany" . Maximize any node to view more details.This displays the following Publish Summary details: Summary Table A table is now displayed which summarizes the status of the content on the Staging site. Changes which have not been published to the Production site are colored green. Note: The number of pages which have been updated (as shown in the Updated column) is greater than one. In the below image. Detailed Tree Folder A tree folder providing detailed information of the content changes is displayed below the summary table. This refers to the number of updates which occurred in the database. In the below image. you can see that a page called "About Us" was created.

. This publishes the content changes to your production site. Click the recently.6. 7. Click the Analyze Content link if it is possible that additional changes may have been made Publish Content link. Optional.

Click the OK button to select. module settings. If the required year isn't displayed. To view the Calendar. Select the required month and/or year. etc. click the Calendar link or the Calendar button.Common Tools Working with the Calendar The Calendar is an ASP. Default Calendar The default Calendar control is used throughout the DNN Framework and in a growing number of modules. The Calendar is typically accessed by clicking on the Calendar link. page settings. . Admin Console. Step One: Locating the required date l Modifying the Month and/or Year: 1.g. however some modules have other link names. Events module displays the View Date link.Net control widely used to select and maintain dates in module content. 3. 2. use the Double Right Arrow or Double Left Arrow buttons to view the other years. E. Click on the Month Year information located above the monthly calendar.

Click the Today button to view the current month/year with Today's date. Click the Right Arrow month. button above the calendar month to view the calendar for the previous button above the calendar month to view the calendar for the o Click the Double Left Arrow three months previous. l Navigating to Other Months: o Click the Left Arrow month. depending on where the Calendar is in use.g. o button above the calendar month to view the calendar for the next button above the calendar month to view the calendar for the o Click the Double Right Arrow three months in the future. Step Two: Selecting the Required Date l To Select a Date: Click on the date cell in the calendar. . Click on the Month Year information located above the monthly calendar. To close the Calendar without selecting a Date: Click off the calendar. Note: You may be unable to select dates prior to today. 2. This will close the calendar and the selected date will be displayed in the associated text box. These modules are currently being updated to use the default calendar. Events) use the Calendar control which was standard in previous versions on DNN. l Module Calendar Several of the available project modules (e.l Viewing Today's Date: 1.

g. 2009) located at the top right of the calendar. perform any of the following options: l Go to the Previous Year: Click the previous year (E. Go to Today's Date: Click Today located in the top center of the calendar to return to the current month. . l l l l 3. 2007) located at the top left of the calendar.g. March) located to the right of the current month. January) located to the left of the current month.g.g. 2. To locate the required date. Click the Calendar link or the Calendar button. The calendar will close and the date will be selected. Today's date is displayed as red. Go to the Next Month: Click the next month (E.The following options are available to locate the required date using the calendar: 1. Go to the Next Year: Click next year (E. Go to the Previous Month: Click the previous month (E. Once you have located the required date the following options are available: l To Select a Date: Click on the date in the calendar.

The calendar will close and no date will be selected. .l To close the Calendar without selecting a Date: Click the Close button located below the calendar. Replacement Tokens By adding one or more of the below replacement tokens into content you can display portal or user data to site users. 2. or to add a personalized salutation at the beginning of each newsletter. etc. E. Replacement Token [Portal:Currency] Example USD Replacement Token Description Displays the portal currency type as set on the Site Settings page. About the Pager The Pager is a control which enables you to easily navigate to other pages of records and is used on a number of DNN Admin and Host modules such as the Event Viewer and the User Accounts modules. The Previous page of records A specific page by number. the default number of records displayed per page can be set and the pager control can also be suppressed.g. Page 1. 3. File Upload Delete this text and replace it with your own content. HTML Pro and Newsletters modules. Here's an overview to this control: n The current page and total number of pages is displayed to the left. Some examples how you might use a replacement token are to display the portal name and description as the content of a module. Page navigation links are displayed on the right enabling you to quickly move to: l n The First page of all records. Replacement tokens can be added to the content of the HTML. The Next page of records The Last page of records l l l l The Pager Control Tip: On the User Account page. They can also be added in the HTML of skins and containers by your designer.

Portal (relative) Path of Home Directory. Displays the description of the current page. Difference in minutes between Portal default time and UTC.g. Indicates if the user is currently online.gif toys. Date Tokens [DateTime:Now] [DateTime:Now|f] [DateTime:Now|F] Tuesday. Displays the date and time when the user registered on the site. Displays the keywords for the current page.com Rose Booth Rosie Page (Tab) Tokens [Tab:Description] [Tab:FullUrl] [Tab:IconFile] [Tab:KeyWords] [Tab:TabName] [Tab:TabPath] [Tab:URL] http://www.com Copyright 2011 by EcoZany /Portals/0/EcoZany/ logo. Home //HTML Page relative path to icon file. dolls.gif EcoZany -480 Displays the email address of the primary Administrator as set on the Site Settings page. . Displays long date and long time. Indicates if the user is approved.aspx icon.[Portal:Description] The EcoZany toy store is an online Displays the portal description as set on the Site shop that sells a wide range of Eco. The last name of the user.Settings page.com/Services/ Displays the full URL of the current page. logo. The first name of the user. fair trade. The email address of the user. Displays the copyright text entered in the Copyright field on the Site Settings page.gif The portal name as set on the Site Settings page. admin@ecozany. games.ecozany. October 26. E. The display name of the user. 2011 5:39:20 PM Current date and time. 2011 5:39 PM Displays long date and short time. Friendly toys and games. [Portal:Email] [Portal:FooterText] [Portal:HomeDirectory] [Portal:LogoFile] [Portal:PortalName] [Portal:TimeZoneOffset] User Tokens [User:DisplayName] [User:Email] [User:FirstName] [User:LastName] [User:Username] Membership Tokens [Membership:Approved] Yes / No [Membership:CreatedDate] 10/4/2011 1:08 PM [Membership:IsOnline] Yes / No Welcome to EcoZany Rose Booth Rose. October 26. Portal Path to Logo file. tabid/73/Default. The username of the user.Booth@ecozany. Page name Page relative path Page URL 10/15/2011 5:39 PM Tuesday.

Other RTE's which can be integrated with DNN include the FCKEditor and the Free Text Box. as for DateTime above. Editor About the Editor The Editor is an ASP. g. Co-ordinated Universal Time. 2011 10/15/2011 5:39 PM Displays short date and short time. Events and HTML/HTML Pro. Displays short date and long time. Displays year and month. Tuesday. Other appended options are F. October 26. The Rich Text Editor (RTE) associated with the Editor provider is an asp. 2011 5:39 PM Co-ordinated Universal Time . 2011 5:39:20 PM Displays date and time as per your local settings. . This example displays long date and short time. Other appended options are F. FAQ. 10/15/2011 5:39 PM Tuesday. This manual details how to use two different providers for the RadEditor control which are the DotNetNuke.[DateTime:Now|g] [DateTime:Now|G] [DateTime:Now|Y] [DateTime:UTC] [DateTime:UTC|f] 10/26/2011 5:39 PM 10/26/2011 5:39:20 PM October. The RTE used on your site will depend upon the version and edition of DNN you are using. The Basic Text Box associated with the Editor is the same for all DNN versions. as for DateTime above. CPU tick count since midnight. October 26.RadEditorProvider (default) and the TelerikEditorProvider which are both included with DNN 6+. Displays date and time as per your local settings.long date and short time. g.net control. G and Y.Net control provides basic and rich text editing capabilities across numerous modules including Announcements. CPU ticks per day (for calculations) [DateTime:System] [DateTime:System|f] Tick Tokens [Ticks:Now] [Ticks:Today] [Ticks:TicksPerDay] 633282985407609550 633282624000000000 864000000000 Upload New Extension Package Delete this text and replace it with your own content. G and Y. CPU tick count for current second.

2. Select the Basic Text Box radio button located above the Editor. 1.RadEditorProvider for the RadEditor) Related Topics: l See "About the HTML Editor Manager" Adding Basic Text using Editor How to add basic text into the Basic Text Box of the Editor.The Default Editor for DNN 6.0+ (DotNetNuke. You can also paste basic HTML into the basic text box. At Render Mode (located below the Editor) select the Text radio button. .

it will display as such until it is changed. 1. Note: This is the default view for this Editor. Adding Rich Text Using The Editor How to add rich text to the Editor.3. Click inside the Editor and then enter or paste (Ctrl + V) your text. however if you last viewed the Editor as the Basic Text Box. . This enables the Editor toolbars and displays the content of the Editor as rich text. Select the Rich Text Editor radio button located above the Editor.

links. etc. Pasting HTML Content How to paste HTML content into the Editor control. Tip: HTML can also be pasted into the Raw Render Mode . Paste in your Html. This displays the Editor as a Basic Text Box. select Html. Click inside the Editor and then enter your text.2. At Render Mode (located below the Editor). 1. 3. Select the Basic Text Box radio button located above the Editor. insert images. 2. The content within the Editor is displayed as HTML.

1. . Click either the Design or HTML tab located below the editor.Pasting HTML into the HTML module Viewing Content in Design or HTML View How to switch between Design and HTML view in the RadEditor.

Announcements and Events modules. The RadEditor offers great table management and design including content layout templates. . script or table insertion. page links. This manual details how to use two different providers for the RadEditor control which are the DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider (default) and the TelerikEditorProvider which are included with DNN 6+.RadEditor About the RadEditor The RadEditor is a RTE provides rich text editing capabilities for numerous modules including the HTML. flash. The RadEditor provides extensive text formatting tools. images. FAQ.

RadEditorProvider (default) .The DotNetNuke.

2. Toggle Full Screen Mode (F11) button to toggle Editor . Release when the desired size is displayed. Click and drag the Editor larger or smaller as desired. Tip: An alternative option is to click the to/from full screen mode.The TelerikEditorProvider Modifying Editor Size How to increase or decrease the size of the RadEditor. 1. Position your mouse over the bottom right corner of the Editor until it becomes a two directional arrow.

These are updated each time you click inside the editor after a modification.Modifying Editor Size Viewing Word and Character Count The number of words and characters inside the RadEditor is displayed in the bottom right corner. .

DotNetNuke. It provides rich text editing tools for numerous modules including the HTML.RadEditorProvider The DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider is the default RTE provider packaged with DNN (06. Announcements and Events modules.RadEditorProvider About the DotNetNuke.00+). FAQ. . SuperUsers can modify the toolbar and editor configurations as well as create unique configurations.

RadEditorProvider has the following tools: Tool AJAX Spellchecker Find And Replace (CTRL + F) Icon Description Click to enable Spell checking mode. Misspelled words are highlighted in yellow. icon (or CTRL + F) to open the Find / Find Select All (CTRL + A) N/A Cut (CTRL + X) N/A Copy (CTRL + C) N/A Choose to either find.RadEditorProvider Editor Related Topics: l See "About the HTML Editor Manager" Toolbars Main Toolbar The main toolbar of the DotNetNuke. find and replace. Select all content within the Editor. Additional options include Match Case. See "Check Spelling" Click the Find And Replace And Replace dialog box. Match Whole Words. or find and replace all instances of the text entered into the Find text box. .The DotNetNuke. Cut selected content. Copy selected content. and search up or down from the current cursor position.

If no suggestions are available. Tip: Edit any misspelt word by clicking on it. Ignore/Ignore All: Select to ignore this word and continue with spell checking. Redo (CTRL + Y) Option One: Click the Redo icon to redo the last action. Click the Finish Spellchecking button when you are finished . Paste From Word. Paste copied content into the Editor. Undo (CTRL + Z) Option Two: Click the Arrow icon to view a list of previous actions and undo multiple actions at one time.OR . Place your cursor inside the Editor. Paste options are Paste. Strip Font.Click the Cancel button to exit Spell checking mode. Change Manually: Select and enter word into the provided text box and then click the Change Manually icon. 1. . Paste from Word.Tool Paste (CTRL + V) Paste Options Icon N/A Description CTRL + V to paste cut or copied content into the Editor. Click the AJAX Spellchecker icon. PasteHTML. The first misspelt word is ready to perform one of the following actions against: l Choose Suggested: Select the correct word from the list of suggested words. Paste As Html. Paste Plain Text. Add to Dictionary: Select to add the word to your dictionary. l l l 3. Repeat for each misspelt word. Option Two: Click the Arrow icon to view a list of previous actions and redo multiple actions at one time. Option One: Click the Undo icon to undo the last action. 4. then (no suggestions) is displayed. Misspelled words are highlighted in yellow. This starts spell checking.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. 2. Check Spelling How to check spelling using the DotNetNuke.

RadEditorProvider RTE Insert Toolbar The Insert toolbar of the DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider RTE has the following tools: Tool Insert Media Icon Description Click the Insert Media icon to open the drop-down list of media insertion tools. Document Manager.Spell Checking using the DotNetNuke. Media Manager. Flash Manager. Select from these options: Insert Media. . or Image Map Editor.

This icon changes each time you make a new selection. Additional link settings are available. See "Inserting a Document" Opens the Flash Manager which enables you to insert Flash (*. "Adding a URL Link". Additional settings are available. See "Inserting Flash" Opens the Media Manager which enables you to insert media into the Editor.RadEditorProvider has the following tools: Tool Insert Symbol Icon Description Option One: Click the Arrow icon to open the symbol gallery and then select the required symbol to be inserted. Opens the Image Manager which enables you to insert images into the Editor. See "Inserting Images" Opens the Document Manager which enables you to insert a document link into the Editor. See "Deleting a Link" Link to a site of your page.Tool Icon Description Once you have selected an option. Dropdown Toolbar The Dropdown toolbar of the DotNetNuke. or "Adding an Anchor" Removes a link from selected content. . which means the last selected option is always displayed.swf) into the Editor. as well as upload and manage files. To choose an option other that the one displayed in the toolbar.htmtemplate) into the Editor. you can also create folders. See "Adding an Email Link". The properties tab enables you to set properties of the media to be inserted. the icon associated with that option is displayed in the toolbar. See "Linking to a Portal Page" Insert Media * Document Manager * Flash Manager * Media Manager * Image Map Editor Template Manager * Save Template Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) * Remove Link (CTRL +SHIFT + K) Link to Portal Page * These tools provide access your portal's File Manager where. See "Inserting a Template" Save the content in the Editor as a new template. See "Inserting Media" Opens the Image Map Editor which enables you to create an image map. anchor or email link. The properties tab enables you to set the properties of the image to be inserted. See "Saving a Template" Insert a link. click the Arrow icon. The properties tab enables you to set properties of the flash to be inserted. See "Creating an Image Map" Opens the Template Manager which enables you to insert a template (*. You must first select the image to be mapped. depending on your authorization level.

Add/remove strikethrough to selected content. See "Inserting a Table" Place your cursor in the required location and then select the New Paragraph icon (or CTRL + M) to insert a paragraph break.Select Table Wizard to design a more complex table. Select the content you want to strip formatting from (such as font color.Tool Icon Description Option Two: Click the Insert Symbol icon to insert the symbol that was inserted previously. Transforms all letters in the select text to upper case. Add/remove underline to selected content. Create a bullet list. Outdent selected content. . Transforms all letters in the select text to lower case.RadEditorProvider RTE has the following tools: Tool Text Formatting Bold (CTRL + B) Italicize (CTRL + I) Underline (CTRL + U) Strikethrough Indent and Lists Indent Outdent Numbered List Bullet List Other Convert to Lower Case Convert to Upper Case Horizontal Rule Paragraph Style Apply CSS Class Format Stripper Icon Description Add/remove bolding to selected content. font heading). 1. Click the Insert Table icon to insert a table in the current location OR . Select the CSS Class to be applied to the selected content. Indent selected content. Create a numbered list. Insert Table New Paragraph Toggle Full Screen Mode (F11) Formatting Toolbar The Formatting toolbar of the DotNetNuke. Inserts a horizontal rule where the cursor is currently located Select the paragraph style for the selected text. Select to toggle the Editor to/from full screen mode. Add/remove italics to selected content.

Click and drag the Editor larger or smaller as desired. This disables all tools and toolbars with the exception of the Design button. Click the Arrow icon beside the Strip Formatting button and then select the type of formatting to be stripped from these options: Strip All Formatting. Tool Design HTML Icon Preview Words* Characters* Resize Editor** N/A N/A Description Click to view content in design mode. Displays the number of words inside the RadEditor. Strip Font Elements. How to increase or decrease the size of the Editor. This disables all tools and toolbars with the exception of the Design and Preview buttons. Strip Css Formatting. 2. Click to view. Strip Span Elements.RadEditorProvider RTE. Click to preview content inside editor. Release your mouse button when you are finished. Strip Word Formatting Content Toolbar The Content toolbar of the DotNetNuke. add or edit the HTML for this content. This enables all toolbars. Displays the number of characters inside the RadEditor. * These fields are updated each time you click inside the editor after a modification. 1.Tool Icon Description 2. Position your mouse over the bottom right corner of the Editor until it becomes a two directional arrow. . Tip: This toolbar is located below the editor.

The Resource Manager consists of the following toolbar and windows: Resource Manager Toolbar. select the parent folder and then click the New Folder button. Document Manager. Preview/Properties Window. Note: Access to some tools is restricted by role. Media Manager and Template Manager of the RadEditor. . Folder Window.Managing Images and Media Using the Resource Manager How to navigate to. Move forward by one folder in the Folders window. The Resource Manager is commonly used for the Image Manager. Flash Manager. Filename Window. Resource Manager Toolbar Tool Back Forward Refresh New Folder Icon Description Go back by one folder in the Folders window. Refresh to retrieve newly updated files. select or manage folders and files using the Resource Manager of the DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. In the Folders window.

some pages will not be displayed properly. Files can be moved by dragging into a different folder. New Folder or Upload. Filename Window: Displays a list of the folders and/or files within the selected folder. Right click a folder to perform Delete. Tip: Click the Collapse/Expand the left pane button to hide/show the Folder Window. Upload Folder Window: This window displays the folders of the File Manager using a hierarchical tree structure. . Press "OK" to confirm deletion. Upload In the Folders window. This is useful once you have navigated to the required folder as it provides additional space to view files details. Select the image or folder to be deleted and then click the Delete button. Select a file to view a preview and/or properties information in the Preview/Properties Window. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to delete the selected file? The selected file may be in use. Select a folder to view its sub-folders and/or files in the Filename Window. Right click an image or folder to perform Delete. Rename.Tool Delete Icon Description 1." 2. Click the OK button to confirm. Folders can be moved by dragging into a different folder. select the folder where the file will be uploaded to and then click the button. Rename. If deleted. New Folder or Upload.

Collapse/Expand the left pane Preview/Properties Window: Displays a preview and/or properties of the selected file. . Select Document Manager from the actions toolbar.RadEditorProvider RTE. Properties can be modified as required. 1. Inserting a Document How to insert a document using the DotNetNuke. This will open the Document Manager.

select a class for the document link. At CSS Class. 6. Optional. See "Using the Resource Manager" 3. See "Setting Document Properties" The Document Manager Setting Document Properties How to set/edit the optional properties of documents inserted using the DotNetNuke. Optional. modify the text associated with this document. Optional. In the Tooltip text box. 7.2. In the Link Text text box. 5. 4. Navigate to and select the required document. enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link. The filename is used by default. At Target select the target window for this link. Optional. Click the Insert button.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Tip: Additional document properties are available. .

b. In the Height text box. opens the Hyperlink Manager. l Uncheck the check box to use the default class. Leave this field blank to use the height defined by the Flash. Uncheck the Specify Class ID check box to hide the Class ID field and ensure all other fields can be set. enter a pixel value to set the Flash width. In the Class ID text box. Select Flash Manager from the actions toolbar button. button from the drop-down menu. Navigate to and select the required Flash. select High.. 1. 3. This opens the Flash Manager.. This reveals the Class ID text box. Inserting Flash How to insert Flash media using the DotNetNuke. Leave this field blank to use the width defined by the Flash. enter a pixel value to set the Flash height. At Quality. Insert the document. d. Optional. At Specify Class ID. enter the name of the CSS class to be applied to this Flash. Medium or Low as the quality of the Flash. . anchor or email address as required. i. Add/edit the link. c. Right-click on the document and click the Properties. Click the Properties tab and set the properties. 4. select from these options: l Check the check box to set a class for this media.1. See "Using the Resource Manager" 3. Click the OK button to confirm. This 2. a.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. In the Width text box. ii. 2.

check the check box to auto play the Flash .Uncheck the check box if the user must select to replay the Flash.Uncheck i.OR . At Flash Menu. j. check box to disable. g.OR . At Loop. At Transparent. At HTML Align. At Flash Align. h. check the check box to automatically loop the Flash movie repeated . select the HTML alignment.OR . select No Color for no background color or select a color from the dropdown box. k.Uncheck the check box the check the check box for a transparent background . check to hide it. At Play. 4. To modify Flash. the check box if the user f. Click the Insert button.OR . . simply delete it and reinsert it with the required properties. the check box to display the Flash menu .Uncheck must select to play the Flash.e. select the Flash alignment. Tip: You cannot edit the properties of Flash once it has been inserted. At Background Color.

The Flash Manager Inserting Media How to insert media (such as sound and movie files) using the DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. This opens the Media Manager. Select Media Manager from the actions toolbar. 1. .

Tip: You cannot edit the properties of media once it has been inserted. Leave blank to use the actual media size. Leave blank to use the actual media size. b. select the alignment. select from these options: l Check the check box to set a class for this media. e. In the Width text box.2. ii. enter the pixel value to set the media height. At Align. Uncheck the Specify Class ID check box to hide the Class ID field and ensure all other fields can be set. Optional. Click the Properties tab and set the properties. At Specify Class ID. To modify media. In the Height text box. enter the name of the CSS class to be applied to this Flash. simply delete it and reinsert it with the required properties. At Properties select a property to view more information on that property and select Yes or No as required. . Navigate to and select the required media. enter the pixel value to set the media width. a. c. Click the Insert button. See "Using the Resource Manager" 3. This reveals the Class ID text box. d. i. l Uncheck the check box to use the default class. 4. In the Class ID text box. Repeat for each property as required.

Select Insert Media (CTRL + G) from the actions toolbar.The Media Manager Inserting Images How to insert an image using the DotNetNuke. 1. This opens the Image Manager.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. .

. Navigate to and select the required image. Right-click on the image. Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to modify the previewed image . Optional. Actual Size. Click the Insert button. Optional. Use the Best Fit. Click the Image Editor button to edit the way the image is displayed. See "Setting Image Properties" 6.these changes cannot be saved. Optional. The Image Manager Editing an Image How to edit an image inserted in the DotNetNuke. 2. Click the Properties tab and set image properties.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Select the image to be edited.2. See "Working with the Image Editor" 5. See "Using the Resource Manager" 3. 4. 1.

or Flip Both.Enter the opacity percentage into the % text box. At Rotate. l To change the image: At Image Src. ii.. or 270°. text box. This displays a red box which defines the area to be cropped. Flip Horizontal. You can now define the area to be cropped: i. click the Image Manager select the new image. Click the Image Editor 2.3. click the Enable Crop button. In the Save As. Tip: The new image will inherit the properties of the previous image. 3. b. enter the width and height in pixels for the crop area. enter the X (vertical) and Y (horizontal) coordinates for the crop area.Click the Decrease and Increase buttons. c.. select from None. drag the slider to the preferred percentage (%) . a new name for this edited image is displayed. This opens the Image Editor. It is in the format of filename_thumb. drag the slider to the preferred image size . In the Width and Height text boxes.OR Uncheck the check box to allow the width and height to be modified independently. At Constrain proportions? check the check box to lock the width/height ratio .OR . Select from these editing options: a. See "Setting Image Properties" 4. from the drop-down menu. Tip: Remove the _thumb from the file name to override the original file. .. At Opacity. Click the OK button to confirm. select a direction to flip the image from these options: None. At Width and/or Height. 180°. At Crop. In the X and Y text boxes. The pixel size is displayed in the respective Px text boxes to the right.. d.jpg extension file. See "Inserting Images" 1. Modify this name as desired. Flip Vertical. e. In the Resize section: i. button and then locate and l Modify any other properties as required. Working with the Image Editor How to use the Image Editor tool in the Image Manager of the DotNetNuke. This topic assumes you are currently inserting a new image. Select Properties. The image will be saved as a . 90°. This opens the Properties window. button.OR .RadEditorProvider RTE. At Flip. ii.

Right-click on the image and then select Image Map Editor from the drop-down list .Uncheck the check box if you don't want to override an existing file.. Repeat Steps 4 and 6.. This will open the Image Map Editor.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. If the message "A file with a name same as the target already exists!" is displayed. Click the Save button. At Overwrite If File Exists?.Select Image Map Editor from the actions toolbar. This enables warning message if the filename already exists.4. 5. Creating an Image Map How to create an image map using the DotNetNuke. this is preventing you from overwriting an existing image. . check the check box to overwrite a file that exists with the name entered in the Save As.OR .OR . Troubleshooting. Tip: When Cropping an image drag and resize the crop area on the preview image. Insert an image. 2. text box . 1.

Repeat Step 3 to add additional areas. New Window: Will open a new window. At Select Area Shape. Same Window: The link will open in the same window. Move and resize the area as required. Top and Height. c. Width. edit the properties as required and then click the Update Area button. This displays a gray box defining the area. select either Rectangle or Circle. the link will open in the parent frame. l Target: No target is set and the link will open in the same window. These additional editing options are available: l To edit an existing area. Browser Window: The link will open in the same window. 5. Search Pane: Media Pane:Optional. In the URL text box. Parent Window: If web page consists of frames.3. Click the New Area button. f. b. This updates the Define Area Properties fields for Left. In the Alt Text text box. select the target for the URL. enter the URL to open when a user clicks on this Area. d. click on it in the preview window. To create an area: a. At Target. Optional. i. enter the text to be displayed for this area. . 4. Click the Update Area button. l l l l l l e.

click the Remove Area button. 2. Alternatively. l 6. Creating an Image Map Setting Image Properties How to set the optional properties of an image using the Image Manager of the DotNetNuke. . Click the OK button to confirm. enter the height in pixels which the image will be displayed as. In the Height text box.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. 3.. In the Width text box. from the drop-down list. 1. Click the Lock Ratio / Unlock Ratio button to unlock or lock the width/height ratio at any time.. 4. If the image has already been inserted.l To remove an area. right-click on the image and select Properties. if you are currently adding the image. enter the width in pixels which the image will be displayed as. To remove all areas. click the Remove All button. click on the Properties tab of the Image Manager. Unlocking the ratio enables the width and/or height to be modified independently.

enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the top margin. enter the long description for this image. 10. At CSS Class. Click the OK button. 6. click the Alignment Selector button and select the alignment for this image. select a class for this image.5. enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the right margin. 9. 12. enter the alternative text for this image. click the Color Picker button and select the border color. set any of these fields: a. In the Left text box. c. enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the bottom margin. At Image Alignment. At Border Color. enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the left margin. In the Border Width text box. At Margin. d. b. . 11.use the Increase and Decrease arrows. In the Top text box. In the Right text box. Note: A Border Width must be entered to display the border. 7. In the Alt Text text box. 8. In the Bottom text box. enter the pixel width for the border . In the Long Description text box.OR .

Setting the properties of an existing image .

edit/update and delete mapped areas as required.Setting the properties of an image during insertion Editing an Image Map How to edit an image map using the DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider for the RTE.OR . Select the mapped image. Add. See "Creating an Image Map" 4. 2. 1..Right click on the image and then select Image Map Editor from the drop-down menu. 3. . Click the OK button to save. Click the Image Map Editor button in the toolbar . This opens the Image Map Editor window.

extend the caching time as required. This can occur if the image is set as hidden. 1. Return to the module to see if the image is displaying. This can also occur if module caching is set for too longer period. Remove the Hidden property from the image.Creating an Image Map Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying Some images may not display in the Editor. In this case. You may need to Refresh (Hold down the Shift key and strike the F5 key) the page to see the changes. See "Configuring Cache Settings for a Module" . See "Setting the Hidden Property of a File" 2.

Note: This field is not displayed when adding a link to an image. Clicking the link opens the user's email program with the selected email address in the "Send To" field. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) 3. enter the email address. enter the text for this link.OR . Highlight the text/object for the link . This opens the Hyperlink Manager.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. In the Address text box.OR . Select the E-mail tab. 7. 6. 5.Select Clear Class to use the default class. . select a class for the link . button. 4. enter a subject which will populate the subject field of the email message. At CSS Class. Tip: If you type an email address with a recognized extension directly into the Editor it will automatically add a "send to" link to the address. 1.Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying in HTML Module Managing Links and Anchors Adding an Email Link How to add an email link to text or an image using the DotNetNuke. In the Link Text text box.Place you cursor where you want to insert the link. In the Subject text box. Optional. If you have selected a recognized email address it will be displayed here. 2.

OR . Adding a Page Link How to insert a link to a page within this site using the TelerikEditorProvider RTE. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) link tab selected.8. Note: Disabled pages appear in the list. This opens the Hyperlink Manager with the Hyper- 3.Place you cursor where you want to insert the link. however they cannot be selected. Highlight the text/object for the link . 2. Click the OK button to confirm. 1. At Page. select the page for this link from the drop-down list. button. . This displays the URL of the selected page in the URL field below.

At CSS Class. d.Select Clear Class to use the default class. The default option is None which opens the link in the current window. i. In the Tooltip text box.4. select the target window for this link. c. Check the Log the user. Note: This field is not displayed when adding a link to an image. Related Topics: l See "Viewing Link Tracking Report" . Check the Track the number of times this link is clicked check box to enable Link Tracking for this link. Click the OK button. 5. At Target.OR . edit the linked text. The following optional setting are available: a. date and time for each click check box to also enable the Link Log. select a class for the link . The link must be saved before you can view the Tracking tab where tracking information is displayed. b. In the Link Text text box. e. enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link.

RadEditorProvider for the RTE. In the Link Text text box.Select None to use the existing window. E. c. At CSS Class. At Target. The following optional settings are available: a. The link must be saved before you can view the Tracking tab where tracking information is displayed. In the Tooltip text box. select the CSS class to use. This displays the anchor URL in the URL field. select the anchor name.OR . Highlight the text/object to be linked to the anchor. #Fair Labor 4. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) Hyperlink tab pre-selected. . enter the text to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link. b. At Existing Anchor. select the target for this link . button. d.Adding an Anchor Link How to create a link to an anchor using the DotNetNuke. e. This opens the Hyperlink Manager with the 3. Check the Track the number of times this link is clicked check box to enable Link Tracking for this link. 1. 2. enter/edit the linked text as required.g.

5. Check the Log the user. button. Optional. Related Topics: l See "Adding an Anchor" Adding a URL Link How to insert a link to a URL located on another web site using the DotNetNuke. select the target window for this link.OR . In the Tooltip text box. In the Link Text text box.i. date and time for each click check box to also enable the Link Log. 1.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Optional. Optional. At CSS Class. At Target. enter the URL address for this link. 2. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) Hyperlink tab pre-selected. select a class for the link . Highlight the text/object for the link . Click the OK button to confirm.OR . In the URL text box. Note: This field is not displayed when adding a link to an image. 6. Optional. enter the text for this link. 4.Select Clear Class to use the default class. then this field will be pre-populated with that text. 7. 5. . If you highlighted text at Step 1.Place you cursor where you want to insert the link. enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link. This opens the Hyperlink Manager with the 3.

Linking to a Portal Page How to link to any page of your portal using the DotNetNuke. Note: You can only select links which you are authorized to view. 3.OR . Only Administrators can link to the Admin pages. Click the Link to Portal Page drop-down box on the actions toolbar. Locate and select the page for this link. Highlight the text/object for the link . E.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. 1. Click the OK button to confirm.8. 2. . Maximize the Portal Links heading to display a list of your site pages.Place you cursor where you want to insert the link. 4.g.

E. Select the Tracking tab. In additional the tracking report displays data for the selected date range. then the page name is used as the linked text. http://ecozany. Viewing Link Tracking Report How to view tracking information for a tracked link within the TelerikEditorProvider RTE. l l l l .aspx Created: The date this link was created. 1. from the drop-down menu. If you link to the Home page.Tip: If you didn't select any text/object at Step 1. E. 2. and then click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) button . E. 3. This opens the Hyperlink Manager with the Hyperlink tab selected. the following information is displayed: l URL: The URL for this link. then a Home link is inserted.aspx?link=63&tabid=41&mid=386 Clicks: The number of times this link has been clicked.com/Store.g. 12/22/2010 8:42:27 AM Tracking URL: The tracking URL for this link. In the Link Info section.g.OR Right-click on the linked item and select Properties. Select the linked text or object. http://ecozany..g.com/LinkClick.. Last Click: The date and time when the link was last clicked.

At End Date. click the Calendar button. . Click the Display button. Select a new date if required. c. Select a new date if required. At Start Date. This displays the current month with today's date highlighted. complete the following to view the report: a.4. This displays the date and time when the link was clicked and the first and last name of authenticated users. See "Working with the RADCalendar" b. This displays the current month with today's date highlighted. click the Calendar button. In the Tracking Report section.

Click the Cancel button to close the Hyperlink Manager. Working with the RADCalendar The RADCalendar is date selection tool which is used when viewing link tracking reports within the TelerikEditorProvider RTE.View the required Month/Year in Calendar . Selecting a Date Step One .5.

This displays the previous or next ten years respectively. 4. 5. Click a month to view that month for the selected year. Click the Today link. Step Two . Tip: Click the Cancel link to cancel any selection and return to calendar. Click the Calendar button. Click the Month/Date 2. above the calendar.Selecting the Date . 3. l View Calendar for Another Month/Year: 1. Click the Month/Date 2. Click a month to view that month for the selected year. This opens the RADCalendar. If the required year is not displayed. 3. Click a different year to view if required. Here's an overview of the date selection options available for the RADCalendar: l View Calendar for Another Month: l Click the << Click the < Click the > Click the >> button view calendar from three months ago button to view calendar for the previous month button to advance the calendar by one month button advance the calendar by three months l l l l View Calendar for Today: 1. then click either the << or >> buttons below the displayed years.1. Optional. Click the OK button to view the calendar for the selected month/year. above the calendar.

Option One: 1. Click the Link to Portal Page drop-down box on the actions toolbar. 1. For more details on the available fields. Option Two: 1. Select the linked text or object.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Select the linked text or object. Click on or highlight the linked text/object. 3.. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) button. Deleting a Link How to remove a link from the DotNetNuke. Click the OK button. This closes the pop-up window and displays the selected date in the associated field. This opens the Hyperlink Manager. Right-click on the linked text or object. Click the OK button. Editing a Portal Page Link How to edit a link to a page in your site in the DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. See "Adding an Email Link" or See "Adding a URL Link" 4. 3. Click on a date in the calendar to select it. from the drop-down menu. 2.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Select a new link. Related Topics: l See "Viewing Link Tracking Report" Editing an Email or URL Link How to edit a link in the DotNetNuke. Click the Option Two: Remove Link (CTRL + SHIFT + K) button. Select Properties. 2. See "Adding an Email Link" or See "Adding a URL Link" 4. . 2. Option One: 1. Edit the link as required. For more details on the available fields. 2.1. Edit the link as required. 3.. This opens the Hyperlink Manager.

1. 4. Note: Links to this anchor can only be created in this instance of this module. Click the OK button to confirm. Option One: 1. Right-click on the linked text or object. button. Select the Anchor tab.Highlight the text or object for the anchor. 5. enter an anchor name. In the Name text box. Select Remove Link from the drop-down menu. An anchor is a location within this content which can be linked to using the Hyperlink Manager. Select the anchored text or object. Place your cursor where you want to insert the anchor . This opens the Hyperlink Manager. 2. This opens the Hyperlink Manager. 2. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) button. 2. Note: Text may display link formatting even though there is no link.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Editing an Anchor How to edit an anchor using the DotNetNuke. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) 3.OR .RadEditorProvider for the RTE. This opens the Hyperlink Manager. 1. Adding an Anchor How to create an anchor using the DotNetNuke. .

2. To insert a basic table. 2. move your cursor to highlight the number of rows or columns for the table and then click to select it. 3. Select the linked text or object. 1. Click the OK button to confirm. Locate and delete the anchor HTML which will look something like <a name="anchor name"></a> Managing Tables Inserting a Table How to insert a table using the DotNetNuke.. 2. from the drop-down menu. Click the OK button to confirm. Select Properties. . This opens the Hyperlink Manager. 1. Edit the anchor as required. Click the Remove Link (CTRL + SHIFT + K) button. Option Two: 1. 1. 4. Click the Insert Table 3.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Right-click on the linked text or object. 4. Place you cursor where you want to insert the table. Select the HTML tab. 2.RadEditorProvider. Option One: Use this option when the anchor has been created by first selecting text or an object. This displays the basic table in the Editor. Edit the anchor as required. Option Two: Use this option when the anchor has been added to the editor by placing the cursor in a location. Deleting an Anchor How to delete an anchor (bookmark) from the DotNetNuke.3. Select for these options: l button..

2.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Right-click using your mouse. See "Setting the Table Design" Editing a Table How to edit a table using the right click menu or the Table Wizard of the DotNetNuke. 1. click the Table Wizard button. Note: If you want to use the drop-down menu to modify the table design (rather than the Table Wizard) then place your cursor in the cell where you want to perform the modification. This displays the drop-down menu. Place your cursor inside the table. .l To design a more complex table.

Open the Table Wizard.g.Right-click on an existing table and then select Table Properties from the drop-down menu.OR . Go to the Table Properties tab and set any of these optional settings: 3. Table Prop- Editing a Table Setting Table Properties How to set the optional properties of a new or existing table using the Table Wizard of the DotNetNuke. The value will automatically be saved in pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol (%) into the text box.3. E. See "Inserting a Table" . set the table height in either pixels or as a percentage by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase and Decrease buttons. columns or cells of the table . In the Dimensions section: a.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Enter 100px or .OR . Click the OK button to confirm. 4. In the Height text box.Select either the erties or Cell Properties option to use the Table Wizard to modify the table. 1. Select an option to modify the rows. 2.

set the table width in either pixels or as a percentage as for height. button and build one or more styles. select a class for the content of this table. click the Style Builder Style Builder" button and select the table align- button and select the background color. b. At Background Color. or enter 100% to set the height as 100%. . 5. You can see the changes in the Preview window below. 4.100 to set the height as 100 pixels. In the Cell Padding text box. Click the OK button. click the arrow of the Alignment Selector ment. At Apply Special Formats To. In the Width text box.OR . In the CSS Class Layout section: a. In the Layout section: a. enter an Id reference for this table. See "Using the f.Use the Increase and Decrease buttons. At Alignment. click the Color Picker e. 7. At CSS Class. g. select which rows or column you want to apply special formatting to. 6. c. Leave blank for no specified width. At Style Builder. Select a CSS layout design from the drop-down box. Optional. Select a new tab to set additional properties. h. In the Cell Spacing text box. At Back Image. b. enter a number to set the pixel padding between cells . b.OR . enter a number to set the pixel spacing between cells . click the Image SRC button and select a background image for the table. In the Id text box. d.Use the Increase and Decrease buttons. The design is displayed in the Preview window below. Leave blank for no specified height.

Right-click and select border. 2.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Place your cursor on the outer edge of the table. Show/Hide Border from the drop-down menu to either hide or show the table . The cursor will change to show the table can be selected.Setting Table Properties Showing/Hiding Table Border How to hide or show the table borders using the Table Wizard of the DotNetNuke. 1.

1. . The below tutorial demonstrates how to add a background color to the first row of your table. Right-click inside a cell of an existing table and select Cell Properties from the drop-down menu.Setting Cell Properties How to set the optional cell properties of a new or existing table using the Table Wizard of the DotNetNuke.RadEditorProvider for the RTE.

This opens the Cell Properties tab of the Table Wizard.2. .

Leave blank for no specified height.g.Click the Select All link and then hold down the Ctrl key and click on one or more cells to deselect them. select the cells you want to set the properties of: l To select a single cell. At Preview. . or enter 100% to set the height as 100%. hold down the Ctrl key and click on cell to select it . The value will automatically be saved in pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol (%) into the text box. The selected cells are highlighted. set any of the following: a. In the Height text box. l 4. To select multiple cells. click on that cell.3. At Cell Properties.OR . set the cell height in either pixels or as a percentage by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase and Decrease buttons. The selected cell is highlighted. Enter 100px or 100 to set the height as 100 pixels. E.

In the Id text box. click the Style Builder Style Builder" f. e. See "Using the button and select a background image for the h. click the arrow of the Alignment Selector button and select the alignment of content. At Content Alignment. click the Color Picker button and select the background color. At CSS Class. d. Leave blank for no specified width. set the cell width in either pixels or as a percentage as for height. At Back Image. At Background Color.b. g. enter an Id reference for this/these cells. At Style Builder. c. button and build one or more styles. click the Image Manager table. . In the Width text box. select a class for this/these cells.

Open the Table Wiz- .RadEditorProvider for the RTE. The below tutorial demonstrates how to set one heading row and add a caption to the table. 1. 5.i. At No Text Wrapping.Uncheck the check box to allow text to wrap. check the check box to disallow text within this/these cells from wrapping to another line . Right-click inside a cell of an existing table and select ard (See "Inserting a Table" Table Properties . Setting Cell Properties Setting Table Accessibility How to set the accessibility of a new or existing table using the Table Wizard of the DotNetNuke.OR .OR . Alternatively. you can select another tab of the Table Wizard to set more properties. Click the OK button to confirm.

At Associate Cells With Headers. enter the number of rows which are headings. f. the check box to associate cells with headers . row associated with the Alignment Selector button and then select the alignment of the caption. Select a new tab to set additional properties. the default is center alignment. 1 b. In the Summary text box. The maximum number of heading rows for the current table is displayed to the right of this field. In the Caption text box. Optional. In the Heading Rows text box.g. c. . E. If no alignment is selected.2. In the Heading Columns text box. enter a caption to be displayed above the table.OR - g. The maximum number of heading columns for the current table is displayed to the right of this field. e. check uncheck the check box to disable. The table summary isn't displayed on the page. d. enter a summary of the table contents. enter the number of columns which are headings. Select the Accessibility tab and set any of these Accessibility Options: a. but can be read using accessibility tools such as text readers.

Click the OK button to confirm. .3.

1. Select a cell.OR . This opens the Table Wizard on the Table Design tab. a table of two columns by two rows is displayed as the basis for your design. Select Table Wizard.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Select the Table Design tab. Right-click on an existing table and select "Inserting a Table" Table Properties .Setting Table Accessibility by adding a table caption and a header row. 5. Setting the Table Design How to set the design a table using the Table Wizard of the DotNetNuke. You can choose to add columns and rows. Change tabs to set other properties. Click the OK button to confirm. Select an Increase or Decrease button to modify the table design. Optional. See 2.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Optional. 6. If you are adding a new table. 3. . This enables the Increase and Decrease buttons which are available to change the design. Click the Insert Table button. If you are editing an existing table. A table of two columns by two rows is displayed as the basis for your design. 1.Open the Table Wizard. 2. 4. as well as span columns and rows. Using the Table Wizard How to design a table using the Table Wizard of the DotNetNuke. your current design is displayed.

button. Select a new tab to set additional properties. Optional. button. click the Increase To remove a row: At Row. button. button. To modify the table. click the Decrease l To insert a column span: select a cell and then at Column Span. 4. click the Decrease l button. perform any of these actions: l To add a column: At Columns.3. click the Increase button. click the Decrease To add a row: At Rows. . l l l l To insert a row span: select a cell and then at Row Span. click the Increase To remove a row span: select a cell and then at Row Span. click the Decrease button. click the Increase To remove a column span: select a cell and then at Column Span. button. l To remove a column: At Columns.

Click on the corner of the table to select it. 2.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Deleting a Table How to delete a table from the DotNetNuke. Managing Templates Inserting a Template How to insert a template using the DotNetNuke.5. Click on the corner of the table to select it. Option Two: 1. and select Delete Table from the drop-down menu. Strike the Delete button on your keyboard. Click on the corner of the table to select it. 2. . Option Three: 1. 2. Option One: 1.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. Strike either the Backspace or Delete button on your keyboard respectively. Place your cursor before or after the table. Click the OK button to confirm.

Navigate to and select the required template. This opens the Template Manager. 1. This enables warning message if a template with this name already exists. images. In the File Name text box. tables. Select Save Template from the actions toolbar. Click the Insert button. enter a name for this template. 3.1. etc as desired. This inserts the template into the editor read for you to edit. 2.RadEditorProvider for the RTE. select the folder where the template will be saved to. Create your template by adding text. check the check box to overwrite any template that exists with this template . At Overwrite If File Exists?. At Folder.OR . Saving a Template How to create and save a template using the DotNetNuke. 4. . 3. 5. Select Template Manager from the actions toolbar. Place you cursor where you want to insert the template. See "Using the Resource Manager" 4. 2.Uncheck the check box if you don't want to override an existing file. This opens the Save As Template window. Note: Templates are typically stored in the Portal Root > Templates folder.

entering a different file name. l TelerikEditorProvider Overview of the TelerikEditorProvider The TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE is included with DNN. Click OK to close the window. it must be set as the preferred RTE by your Host. See "About the HTML Editor Manager" for details on changing the RTE provider. In this case. The following error was reported: The file already exists" is displayed. repeat Steps 2-6. . If there is a conflict. Click the Save button. l If there is no conflict with overwriting. the message "The template was saved successfully'" is displayed.6. a message reading "The template was not saved. however since it isn't the default provider.

The TelerikEditorProvider RadEditor Toolbars Actions Toolbar The actions toolbar of the TelerikEditorProvider RTE has the following tools: Tool Print (CTRL + P) Icon Description Print all Editor content. Depending on your computer set-up you may be able to print to a printer and/or create an XPS document. Page links display the page. E. l . Print Table of Links: A reference table of any links is appended to the printout. Document content is not printed in full.g. Print Options: l Print All Linked Documents: Creates separate printouts for each link.

Select all content within the Editor. Option Two: Click the Arrow icon to view a list of previous actions and redo multiple actions at one time. . Add to Dictionary: Select to add the word to your dictionary. Strip Font. Change Manually: Select and enter word into the provided text box and then click the Change Manually icon. 1. CTRL + V to paste cut or copied content into the Editor. and search up or down from the current cursor position. Paste copied content into the Editor. Cut selected content. Copy selected content. l l l 3. Place your cursor inside the Editor. Ignore/Ignore All: Select to ignore this word and continue with spell checking. Undo (CTRL + Z) Redo (CTRL + Y) Check Spelling How to check spelling using the TelerikEditorProvider RTE. Paste from Word. then (no suggestions) is displayed. or find and replace all instances of the text entered into the Find text box. If no suggestions are available. Paste options are Paste. See "Check Spelling" Click the Find And Replace And Replace dialog box. find and replace. Option One: Click the Redo icon to redo the last action. icon (or CTRL + F) to open the Find / Find Select All (CTRL + A) Cut (CTRL + X) Copy (CTRL + C) Paste (CTRL + V) Paste Options Choose to either find. Option One: Click the Undo icon to undo the last action. Paste From Word. The first misspelt word is ready to perform one of the following actions against: l Choose Suggested: Select the correct word from the list of suggested words. PasteHTML. Paste Plain Text. Misspelled words are highlighted in yellow. This starts spell checking.Tool AJAX Spellchecker Find & Replace (CTRL + F) Icon Description Click to enable Spell checking mode. Option Two: Click the Arrow icon to view a list of previous actions and undo multiple actions at one time. Repeat for each misspelt word. 2. Misspelled words are highlighted in yellow. Additional options include Match Case. Paste As Html. Match Whole Words. Click the AJAX Spellchecker icon.

Tip: Edit any misspelt word by clicking on it.OR . Spell Checking using the RadEditor Color and CSS Toolbar The Color and CSS toolbar of the TelerikEditorProvider RTE has the following tools: Tool Foreground Color Icon Description Option One: Click the Arrow icon associated with the Foreground Color button open the color picker and then select the required foreground color for the selected content.4. Click the Finish Spellchecking button when you are finished . Option Two: Click the Foreground Color icon to apply the used last color to the content. .Click the Cancel button to exit Spell checking mode.

Strip Font Elements. 2. . Strip Word Formatting. Displays the number of words inside the RadEditor. Select the content you want to strip formatting from (such as font color. Click the Arrow icon associated with the Strip Formatting button and then select the type of formatting to be stripped from these options: Strip All Formatting. Tool Design HTML Icon Words* Characters* N/A N/A Description Click to view content in design mode. Option Two: Click the Background Color icon to apply the used last color to the selected content. 1. This disables all tools and toolbars with the exception of the Design button. Tip: This toolbar is located below the editor. font heading). Click to view. Select the CSS Class to be applied to the selected content. Displays the number of characters inside the RadEditor. This enables all toolbars.Tool Background Color Icon Description Option One: Click the Arrow icon associated with the Background Color button to open the color picker and then select the required background color for the selected content. Strip Css Formatting. add or edit the HTML for this content. Strip Span Elements. Apply CSS Class Format Stripper Content Toolbar The Content toolbar of the TelerikEditorProvider RTE.

Fonts and Font Size Toolbar The Fonts and Font Size toolbar of the TelerikEditorProvider RTE has the following tools: Tool Paragraph Style Font Name (CTRL + SHIFT + F) Real Font Size (CTRL + SHIFT + P) Formatting Toolbar Icon Description Set the paragraph style for the selected text. Left align the selected content.Tool Resize Editor** Icon Description Increase or decrease the Editor window size. Set the font size in pixels for the selected text. Set the font for the selected text. Add/remove italics to selected content. Tip: A similar tool is the Toggle Full Screen Mode (F11) button which toggles the Editor between the current editor size and the full screen of the edit page. Center align the selected content. . 1. Release your mouse button when you are finished. Click and drag the Editor larger or smaller as desired. Add/remove underline to selected content. Right align the selected content. Position your mouse over the bottom right corner of the Editor until it becomes a two directional arrow. 2. Add/remove strikethrough to selected content. * These fields are updated each time you click inside the editor after a modification. The Formatting toolbar of the TelerikEditorProvider RTE has the following tools: Tool Text Formatting Bold (CTRL + B) Italicize (CTRL + I) Underline (CTRL + U) Strikethrough Alignment Align Left Align Center Align Right Icon Description Add/remove bolding to selected content.

2. This opens the Format Code Block window. Transforms selected content to subscript. 1. Click the Format Code Block button.Tool Justify Remove Alignment Indent and Lists Indent Outdent Numbered List Bullet List Other Show/Hide Borders XHTML Validator Icon Description Justify align the selected content. Place your cursor where you want to place the code block. Create a bullet list. select the radio button to set the type of XHTML validation you wish to perform. Inserts a group box. This is useful where table borders are not displayed. Inserts a new paragraph. 4. Use to layout forms and to label sections of your content. This displays the validation results and details. Inserts the current time according to your computer. Paragraph Toolbar The Paragraph toolbar of the TelerikEditorProvider RTE has the following tools: Tool SuperScript Subscript New Paragraph Insert Groupbox Horizontal Rule Insert Date Insert Time Format Code Block Icon Description Transforms selected content to superscript. At the very top of the window. Enables you to insert and format a block of code and have it render as text. In the Paste Source Code Below text box. Remove alignment formatting from selected content. Indent selected content. Create a numbered list. Outdent selected content. See "Formatting Code Block" Formatting Code Block How to insert a code block in the TelerikEditorProvider RTE. In the Options section complete the following: . Inserts a horizontal line. Click to show or hide all table borders. Click to open the XHTML Validator window. 3. paste the source code. Inserts the current date according to your computer.

VB. 6. Javascript. Leave blank for no specified width. Optional.". In the Max Snippet Width text box. C#.. CSS.g. 8.OR Uncheck the check box to disable numbering. CPP. check the check box to display line numbers for each line of code . or Python. XML. 9. At Select Language. Leave blank for no specified width. ASPX. 7.(x)HTML. Optional. Php.5. E. set the maximum width of the code block in either pixels or as a percentage. select the language of the code block from these options: Markup . Do this by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase and Decrease buttons. or enter 100% to set the width as 100%. . At Display Line Numbers. Click the Preview button to preview the code in the Preview window below. set the maximum height of the code block in either pixels or as a percentage. Optional. The value will automatically be saved as pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol (%) into the text box. Delphi. . SQL.. Enter 100px or 100 to set the width as 100 pixels. In the Max Snippet Height text box.

Opens the Document Manager which enables you to insert a document link into the Editor. Additional link settings are available. Resources Toolbar The Resources toolbar of the TelerikEditorProvider RTE has the following tools: Tool Icon Image Manager (CTRL + G) * Document Manager * Flash Manager * Description Opens the Image Manager which enables you to insert images into the Editor.10. Click the OK button to insert the code block.swf) into the Editor. The properties tab enables you to set properties of the image to be inserted. The properties tab enables you to set properties of the flash to be inserted. . Opens the Flash Manager which enables you to insert Flash (*.

Transforms selected text to upper case. Click the Arrow icon to access the drop-down menu and choose to enable or disable Statistics. Transforms selected text to lower case. Click on the number of rows/columns to insert a basic table . Click to insert a predefined code snippet. * These tools provide access your portal's File Manager where. Insert a link. Tables and Tools Toolbar The Tables and Tools toolbar of the TelerikEditorProvider RTE has the following tools: Tool Insert Symbol Icon Description Option One: Click the Arrow be inserted. Drag the image to t Click to open the Image Map Editor where you can configure an image map for this image.Tool Media Manager * Template Manager * Save Template Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) * Remove Link (CTRL +SHIFT + K) Icon Description Opens the Media Manager which enables you to insert media into the Editor. depending on your authorization level.htmtemplate) into the Editor. Opens the Template Manager which enables you to insert a template (*. Save the content in the Editor as a new template.OR . button. as well as upload and manage files.Select Table Wizard to design a mo complex table. The properties tab enables you to set properties of the media to be inserted. Additional settings are available. you can also create folders. Removes a link from selected content. anchor or email link. icon to open the symbol gallery and then select the required symbo Insert Table Insert Code Snippet Set Absolute Position Image Map Editor Convert to Lower Case Convert to Upper Case Module Manager Option Two: Click the Insert Symbol icon to insert the symbol that was inserted previously. Select the required image and then click the Set Absolute Position required absolute position. Enab .

Content changes are mark with green background for new content and red strikethrough for deleted content. Click to view the changes between your initial content and current content.Tool Icon Description Statistics displays the current number of words and characters inside the RadEditor in the bottom righ corner of the Editor. Toggle Full Screen Mode (F11) Track Changes Emoticons Select to toggle the Editor to/from full screen mode. Insert Current Emoticon: Click on the Emoticons icon to insert the emoticon which is cu rently displayed on the button. Note: The last emoticon inserted during this editing session is displayed Angel Smile emoticon is displayed by default. . These statistics are updated each time you click inside the editor following a edit.

Create a numbered list.Tool Icon Description icon to select a different emoticon. About RadEditor Opens the About RadEditor window which has a link more information on the RadEditor. General Tools Formatting Toolbar The Formatting toolbar of the RadEditor has the following tools: Tool Text Formatting Bold (CTRL + B) Italicize (CTRL + I) Underline (CTRL + U) Strikethrough Alignment Align Left Align Center Align Right Justify Remove Alignment Indent and Lists Indent Outdent Numbered List Bullet List Other Show/Hide Borders XHTML Validator Icon Description Add/remove bolding to selected content. Add/remove italics to selected content. Add/remove strikethrough to selected content. Create a bullet list. Add/remove underline to selected content. This is useful where table borders are not displayed. Right align the selected content. At the very top of the . Click to show or hide all table borders. Click to open the XHTML Validator window. Center align the selected content. Justify align the selected content. Remove alignment formatting from selected content. Left align the selected content. This will in Insert Different Emoticon: Click on the Arrow the selected emoticon and set it as the default emoticon for this session. Indent selected content. Outdent selected content.

7. CSS. check the check box to display line numbers for each line of code . 2. E. SQL. Delphi. Optional. CPP. Click the Format Code Block button. Optional. Do this by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase and Decrease buttons. set the maximum height of the code block in either pixels or as a percentage.. In the Paste Source Code Below text box. XML. This displays the validation results and details.OR Uncheck the check box to disable numbering. ASPX.(x)HTML. 4. 8. or enter 100% to set the width as 100%. Place your cursor where you want to place the code block. set the maximum width of the code block in either pixels or as a percentage.g. At Display Line Numbers. Enter 100px or 100 to set the width as 100 pixels. Leave blank for no specified width. 3. Php..Tool Icon Description window. In the Max Snippet Height text box. In the Max Snippet Width text box. Javascript. . The value will automatically be saved as pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol (%) into the text box. . VB. select the language of the code block from these options: Markup . or Python. paste the source code. C#. This opens the Format Code Block window.". Leave blank for no specified width. Formatting Code Block How to insert a code block in the RADeditor Rich Text Editor 1. 6. In the Options section complete the following: 5. select the radio button to set the type of XHTML validation you wish to perform. At Select Language.

9. Click the Preview button to preview the code in the Preview window below. . Optional.

Additional link settings are available. The properties tab enables you to set properties of the image to be inserted. The properties tab enables you to set properties of the flash to be inserted.swf ) into the Editor. . Opens the Document Manager which enables you to insert a document link into the Editor. Click the OK button to insert the code block.10. Opens the Flash Manager which enables you to insert Flash ( *. Resources Toolbar The Resources toolbar of the RadEditor has the following tools: Tool Image Manager (CTRL + G) * Document Manager * Flash Manager * Icon Description Opens the Image Manager which enables you to insert images into the Editor.

Insert a link. as well as upload and manage files. OPTION TWO: Click the Insert Symbol icon to insert the symbol that was inserted previously.Tool Media Manager * Template Manager * Save Template Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) * Remove Link (CTRL +SHIFT + K) Icon Description Opens the Media Manager which enables you to insert media into the Editor.htmtemplate ) into the Editor. Click to insert a predefined code snippet. Removes a link from selected content. anchor or email link. Enabling Statistics disp the current number of words and characters inside the RadEditor in the bottom right corner of the Ed These statistics are updated each time you click inside the editor following a edit. button. Tables and Tools Toolbar The Tables and Tools toolbar of the RadEditor has the following tools: Tool Insert Symbol Insert Table Insert Code Snippet Set Absolute Position Image Map Editor Convert to Lower Case Convert to Upper Case Module Manager Icon Description OPTION ONE: Click the Arrow icon to open the symbol gallery and then select the required symbo be inserted. Click on the number of rows/columns to insert a basic table .Select Table Wizard to design a mo complex table. * These tools provide access your portal's File Manager where. depending on your authorization level. Save the content in the Editor as a new template. Select the required image and then click the Set Absolute Position required absolute position. Additional settings are available. Opens the Template Manager which enables you to insert a template ( *. Transforms selected text to lower case.OR . The properties tab enables you to set properties of the media to be inserted. Click to access the drop-down menu and choose to enable or disable Statistics. you can also create folders. Transforms selected text to upper case. Drag the image to t Click to open the Image Map Editor where you can configure an image map for this image. .

Note: The last emoticon inserted during this editing session is displayed Angel Smile emoticon is displayed by default. Insert Different Emoticon: Click on the Arrow button to select a different emoticon. This will in the selected emoticon and set it as the default emoticon for this session.Tool Icon Description Toggle Full Screen Mode (F11) Track Changes Emoticons Select to toggle Editor to/from full screen mode. Click to view the changes between your initial content and current content. . Insert Current Emoticon: Click on the Emoticons icon to insert the emoticon which is cu rently displayed on the button. Content changes are mark with green background for new content and red strikethrough for deleted content.

Resource Manager Toolbar . select or manage folders and files using the Resource Manager provided with the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. Managing Images and Media Using the Resource Manager How to navigate to. Preview/Properties Window. The Resource Manager consists of the following toolbar and windows: Resource Manager Toolbar. Folder Window.Tool Icon Description About RadEditor Opens the About RadEditor window which has a link more information on the RadEditor. The Resource Manager is commonly used for the Image Manager. Document Manager. Media Manager and Template Manager tools of the RadEditor. Note: Access to some tools is restricted by role. Flash Manager. Filename Window.

Refresh to retrieve newly updated files. This is useful once you have navigated to the required folder as it provides additional space to view files details. Right click an image or folder to perform Delete. Delete 1. some pages will not be displayed properly. select the parent folder and then click the New Folder button. Folders can be moved by dragging into a different folder. Press "OK" to confirm deletion. New Folder or Upload. If deleted. select the folder where the file will be uploaded to and then click the button. Tip: Click the Collapse/Expand the left pane button to hide/show the Folder Window. Select the image or folder to be deleted and then click the Delete button. . This displays the message "Are you sure you want to delete the selected file? The selected file may be in use. Select a file to view a preview and/or properties information in the Preview/Properties Window. Files can be moved by dragging into a different folder. In the Folders window. Filename Window: Displays a list of the folders and/or files within the selected folder. Move forward by one folder in the Folders window. Rename. Upload In the Folders window." 2. New Folder or Upload. Right click a folder to perform Delete. Upload Folder Window: This window displays the folders of the File Manager using a hierarchical tree structure. Select a folder to view its sub-folders and/or files in the Filename Window. Click the OK button to confirm. Rename.Tool Back Forward Refresh New Folder Icon Description Go back by one folder in the Folders window.

In the Link Text text box. In the Tooltip text box. 7. Navigate to and select the required document. select a class for the document link. Tip: Additional document properties are available. Optional. Properties can be modified as required. See "Setting Document Properties" . Click the Document Manager button. Inserting a Document How to insert a document using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. Optional. The filename is used by default. 2. At CSS Class. Click the Insert button. This opens the Document Manager. See "Using the Resource Manager" 3. 1. Optional. enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link. Optional. 6. 5. modify the text associated with this document.Preview/Properties Window: Displays a preview and/or properties of the selected file. At Target select the target window for this link. 4.

. 4. Edit the link as required. Inserting Flash How to insert Flash media using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE.. 1. Right-click on the document and click the Properties. Click the OK button to confirm. 2. Click the Flash Manager button. opens the Hyperlink Manager. Navigate to and select the required Flash.Inserting a Document Setting Document Properties How to set/edit the optional properties of documents inserted using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. button from the drop-down menu. This 2. Insert the document. See "Using the Resource Manager" . 3. This opens the Flash Manager. 1.

g. enter the name of the CSS class to be applied to this Flash. enter a pixel value to set the Flash height.Uncheck i. Medium or Low as the quality of the Flash. select the Flash alignment.Uncheck the check box if the user must select to replay the Flash. the check box to display the Flash menu . Click the Insert button. Leave this field blank to use the height defined by the Flash. check the check box to automatically loop the Flash movie repeated . j. a. 4. Uncheck the Specify Class ID check box to hide the Class ID field and ensure all other fields can be set. To modify Flash. At HTML Align. In the Height text box. Leave this field blank to use the width defined by the Flash. . h.OR .OR . enter a pixel value to set the Flash width. e. Tip: You cannot edit the properties of Flash once it has been inserted. check to hide it. check box to disable. At Loop. check the check box to auto play the Flash .OR . At Quality. select the HTML alignment. At Transparent. This reveals the Class ID text box. At Flash Menu. At Specify Class ID. the check box if the user f. At Background Color. In the Class ID text box. k. select from these options: l Check the check box to set a class for this media. b. i. select High. d. l Uncheck the check box to use the default class. simply delete it and reinsert it with the required properties.Uncheck the check box the check the check box for a transparent background .OR . At Play. ii. c. Click the Properties tab and set the properties. In the Width text box.Uncheck must select to play the Flash. Optional.3. At Flash Align. select No Color for no background color or select a color from the dropdown box.

2. Click the Properties tab and set the properties. . ii. In the Class ID text box. i. 1. At Specify Class ID. This opens the Media Manager. Navigate to and select the required media. Optional. Uncheck the Specify Class ID check box to hide the Class ID field and ensure all other fields can be set.Inserting Flash Inserting Media How to insert media (such as sound and movie files) using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. a. Click the Media Manager button. select from these options: l Check the check box to set a class for this media. This reveals the Class ID text box. enter the name of the CSS class to be applied to this Flash. l Uncheck the check box to use the default class. See "Using the Resource Manager" 3.

b. select the alignment. At Properties select a property to view more information on that property and select Yes or No as required. Leave blank to use the actual media size. enter the pixel value to set the media height. Inserting Media Inserting Images How to insert an image using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. At Align. Click the Insert button. enter the pixel value to set the media width. In the Height text box. Repeat for each property as required. c. . In the Width text box. 4. d. Tip: You cannot edit the properties of media once it has been inserted. Leave blank to use the actual media size. To modify media. simply delete it and reinsert it with the required properties. e.

See "Using the Resource Manager" 4. Navigate to and select the required image. Click the Insert button. Select Insert Media button. See "Working with the Image Editor" 6. Click the Image Manager (CTRL + G) 3. This opens the Image Manager. Actual Size.1. Optional. Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to modify the previewed image . Optional.these changes cannot be saved. 2. Click the Image Editor button to edit the way the image is displayed. Optional. Use the Best Fit. Click the Properties tab and set image properties. See "Setting Image Properties" 7. Editing an Image How to edit an image inserted in the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. . 5.

This displays a red box which defines the area to be cropped.Enter the opacity percentage into the % text box. click the Enable Crop button. 3. See "Setting Image Properties" 4. Tip: The new image will inherit the properties of the previous image. ii. or Flip Both. At Width and/or Height. enter the width and height in pixels for the crop area. . c. enter the X (vertical) and Y (horizontal) coordinates for the crop area. e. At Constrain proportions? check the check box to lock the width/height ratio . Select from these editing options: a. This topic assumes you are currently inserting a new image. d.Click the Decrease and Increase buttons. button.OR Uncheck the check box to allow the width and height to be modified independently. 90°.. The pixel size is displayed in the respective Px text boxes to the right. or 270°. b. See "Inserting Images" 1. Flip Horizontal. Working with the Image Editor How to use the Image Editor tool in the Image Manager of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE.1. Right-click on the image. In the Width and Height text boxes. Flip Vertical. select from None. You can now define the area to be cropped: i. At Flip. drag the slider to the preferred percentage (%) . drag the slider to the preferred image size . 2. 180°.. click the Image Manager select the new image. Click the OK button to confirm. select a direction to flip the image from these options: None. Select the image to be edited. In the X and Y text boxes. Click the Image Editor 2. button and then locate and l Modify any other properties as required. ii. l To change the image: At Image Src.OR . At Crop. In the Resize section: i. At Opacity. At Rotate. Select Properties. This opens the Image Editor. from the drop-down menu.OR .

Click the Save button.OR . . text box. 4.Uncheck the check box if you don't want to override an existing file.jpg extension file. text box . Tip: Remove the _thumb from the file name to override the original file. At Overwrite If File Exists?.. Tip: When Cropping an image drag and resize the crop area on the preview image.3. It is in the format of filename_thumb. If the message "A file with a name same as the target already exists!" is displayed. check the check box to overwrite a file that exists with the name entered in the Save As.. this is preventing you from overwriting an existing image. Repeat Steps 4 and 6.. Troubleshooting. The image will be saved as a . 5. This enables warning message if the filename already exists. Creating an Image Map How to create an image map using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. a new name for this edited image is displayed.. Modify this name as desired. In the Save As.

New Window: Will open a new window. edit the properties as required and then click the Update Area button. click on it in the preview window. d. To create an area: a. select either Rectangle or Circle. Optional. Browser Window: The link will open in the same window. Width. This opens the Image Map Editor Target: No target is set and the link will open in the same window. i. These additional editing options are available: l To edit an existing area. Insert an image. Click the New Area button. Same Window: The link will open in the same window. 3. 5.1. c. l button. enter the URL to open when a user clicks on this Area. This displays a gray box defining the area. Click the Update Area button. the link will open in the parent frame. . Click OK to save. Repeat Step 3 to add additional areas. 2. select the target for the URL. f. Move and resize the area as required. click the Remove Area button. Right click on the image and click the Image Map Editor window. l l 6. b. l l l l l l e. enter the text to be displayed for this area. To remove an area. At Target. 4. click the Remove All button. This updates the Define Area Properties fields for Left. Search Pane: Media Pane:Optional. To remove all areas. In the URL text box. At Select Area Shape. Top and Height. In the Alt Text text box. Parent Window: If web page consists of frames.

click on the Properties tab of the Image Manager. At Border Color. . enter the height in pixels which the image will be displayed as. 3.. If the image has already been inserted. 7. In the Border Width text box. if you are currently adding the image.OR . 8. right-click on the image and select the Properties. 2. Unlocking the ratio enables the width and/or height to be modified independently. 4. In the Long Description text box. button. 5. enter the long description for this image. 1.Creating an Image Map Setting Image Properties How to set the optional properties of an image using the Image Manager of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. click the Color Picker button and select the border color. In the Height text box. Note: A Border Width must be entered to display the border. 6. In the Width text box. Click the Lock Ratio / Unlock Ratio button to unlock or lock the width/height ratio at any time. Alternatively.use the Increase and Decrease arrows. enter the alternative text for this image. enter the width in pixels which the image will be displayed as.. In the Alt Text text box. enter the pixel width for the border .

At CSS Class. In the Right text box. click the Alignment Selector button and select the alignment for this image. Click the OK button. In the Bottom text box. b. enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the right margin. At Margin. enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the left margin. enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the bottom margin. d. 11. enter a pixel value or use the Increase and Decrease arrows to set the top margin. select a class for this image. In the Left text box. Setting Image Properties Editing an Image Map How to edit an image map using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. c. At Image Alignment. set any of these fields: a. 10. . In the Top text box. 12.9.

Select the mapped image. Add. 2.1. . edit/update and delete mapped areas as required. Click the Image Map Editor button in the toolbar . Creating an Image Map Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying Some images may not display in the Editor.Right click on the image and then select Image Map Editor from the drop-down menu. Click the OK button to save. This can occur if the image is set as hidden. 3.OR . See "Creating an Image Map" 4. This opens the Image Map Editor window.

In the Address text box. Return to the module to see if the image is displaying. enter the text for this link. Note: This field is not displayed when adding a link to an image. button.OR . This opens the Hyperlink Manager. extend the caching time as required. In this case. enter a subject which will populate the subject field of the email message.1. enter the email address. If you have selected a recognized email address it will be displayed here. Clicking the link opens the user's email program with the selected email address in the Send To field. Select the E-mail tab. . Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) 3. Tip: If you type an email address with a recognized extension directly into the Editor it will automatically add a "send to" link to the address. You may need to Refresh (Hold down the Shift key and strike the F5 key) the page to see the changes. In the Link Text text box. See "Configuring Cache Settings for a Module" Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying in HTML Module Managing Links and Anchors Adding an Email Link How to add an email link to text or an image using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. 6. In the Subject text box. Highlight the text/object for the link . Remove the Hidden property from the image. 5. 2.Place you cursor where you want to insert the link. 4. This can also occur if module caching is set for too longer period. 1. See "Setting the Hidden Property of a File" 2.

At Page. however they cannot be selected.OR . This displays the URL of the selected page in the URL field below. Optional. Note: Disabled pages appear in the list.Select Clear Class to use the default class. This opens the Hyperlink Manager with the Hyper- 3. 8. 1. select the page for this link from the drop-down list. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) link tab selected. Adding an Email Link Adding a Page Link How to insert a link to a page within this site using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE.Place you cursor where you want to insert the link. select a class for the link . Click the OK button. button. Highlight the text/object for the link .OR . .7. 2. At CSS Class.

OR . In the Tooltip text box. c. Click the OK button. 5. The following optional setting are available: a. select the target window for this link. select a class for the link . At Target.Select Clear Class to use the default class. d. date and time for each click check box to also enable the Link Log. Related Topics: l See "Viewing Link Tracking Report" . The link must be saved before you can view the Tracking tab where tracking information is displayed. In the Link Text text box. e. i. enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link. b. Note: This field is not displayed when adding a link to an image. Check the Log the user.4. Check the Track the number of times this link is clicked check box to enable Link Tracking for this link. The default option is None which opens the link in the current window. edit the linked text. At CSS Class.

c. select the target for this link .g. b. At Target. In the Link Text text box. Check the Track the number of times this link is clicked check box to enable Link Tracking for this link. 2. The link must be saved before you can view the Tracking tab where tracking . e. This displays the anchor URL in the URL field. At Existing Anchor. In the Tooltip text box. #Fair Labor 4. d.Adding an Anchor Link How to create a link to an anchor using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE.OR . 1. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) button. At CSS Class select the CSS class to use. enter/edit the linked text as required. enter the text to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link. The following optional settings are available: a. 3. select the anchor name.Select None to use the existing window. Highlight the text/object to be linked to the anchor. E. This opens the Hyperlink Manager.

date and time for each click check box to also enable the Link Log. Click the OK button.. from the drop-down menu. At Track Clicks. 9. Highlight the text/object for the link . Select the Tracking tab. and then click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) button . Enabling this option will update the URL displayed in the URL field above.OR Right-click on the linked item and select Properties. If you highlighted text at Step 1. At Target.. Note: This field is not displayed when adding a link to an image. Optional. At CSS Class. Check the Log the user. Select the linked text or object. This opens the Hyperlink Manager with the Hyperlink tab selected. i. 2. enter the URL address for this link. 2. Related Topics: l See "Adding an Anchor" Adding a URL Link How to insert a link to a URL located on another web site using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE.Select Clear Class to use the default class. 1. Optional. then this field will be pre-populated with that text. In the Link Text text box. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) link tab pre-selected. enter a tool tip to be displayed when a user places their mouse over this link. 1.Place you cursor where you want to insert the link. This opens the Hyperlink Manager with the Hyper- 3. 5.information is displayed. Optional. 8. check the check box to track the number of clicks on this link . enter/edit the text for this link. 6. In additional the tracking report displays data for the selected date range. 4. button. select a class for the link . .OR . Optional.OR . select the target window for this link.OR Uncheck the check box to disable link tracking. In the Tooltip text box. Viewing Link Tracking Report How to view tracking information for a tracked link within the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. 5. Click the OK button. 7. In the URL text box.

This displays the current month with today's date highlighted. http://ecozany. l l l l 4.aspx?link=63&tabid=41&mid=386 Clicks: The number of times this link has been clicked. Select a new date if required. complete the following to view the report: a. At End Date. click the Calendar button.g. Last Click: The date and time when the link was last clicked.g. E. In the Link Info section.aspx Created: The date this link was created.3. See "Working with the RADCalendar" b.com/LinkClick. the following information is displayed: l URL: The URL for this link. 12/22/2010 8:42:27 AM Tracking URL: The tracking URL for this link. . click the Calendar button. http://ecozany. At Start Date. In the Tracking Report section.com/Store. This displays the current month with today's date highlighted. E. Select a new date if required.

Click the Display button. This displays the date and time when the link was clicked and the first and last name of authenticated users. . Click the Cancel button to close the Hyperlink Manager. 5. Working with the RADCalendar The RADCalendar is date selection tool which is used when viewing link tracking reports within the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE.c.

Selecting a Date Step One . l View Calendar for Another Month/Year: 1. . above the calendar. Click the Month/Date 2. This displays the previous or next ten years respectively. If the required year is not displayed. This opens the RADCalendar. Optional. Click a different year to view if required. Click a month to view that month for the selected year. 3. then click either the << or >> buttons below the displayed years. Here's an overview of the date selection options available for the RADCalendar: l View Calendar for Another Month: l Click the << Click the < Click the > Click the >> button view calendar from three months ago button to view calendar for the previous month button to advance the calendar by one month button advance the calendar by three months l l l l View Calendar for Today: 1. Click the Today link. above the calendar. Tip: Click the Cancel link to cancel any selection and return to calendar. Click the OK button to view the calendar for the selected month/year. 5. Click a month to view that month for the selected year. Click the Calendar button. Click the Month/Date 2.View the required Month/Year in Calendar 1. 3. 4.

3. Select Remove Link from the drop-down menu. Edit the link as required. Click the Remove Link (CTRL + SHIFT + K) Option Two: 1. Deleting a Link How to remove a link from the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. Option One: 1.. Related Topics: l See "Viewing Link Tracking Report" Editing a Link How to edit a link in the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. 2. 2. Select the linked text or object. from the drop-down menu. For more details on the available fields. See "Adding an Email Link". 4. Option One: 1. For more details on the available fields. 2.Selecting the Date 1. Click the OK button. Edit the link as required. Select Properties. 4. button. Right-click on the linked text or object. Click on a date in the calendar to select it. This opens the Hyperlink Manager. This opens the Hyperlink Manager. "Adding a Page Link" or See "Adding a URL Link". See "Adding an Email Link". 2. Option Two: 1. This closes the pop-up window and displays the selected date in the associated field.Step Two . Select the linked text or object. Click the OK button. Right-click on the linked text or object.. This opens the Hyperlink Manager. "Adding a Page Link" or See "Adding a URL Link". 3. . Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) button.

Note Links to this anchor can only be created in this instance of this module. Select the anchored text or object.Highlight some text or an object to add an anchor to it. 2. Click the OK button. 4. 5. 2. button. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) 3. . enter an anchor name.OR . Option One: 1. This opens the Hyperlink Manager. This opens the Hyperlink Manager. Place your cursor where you want to insert the anchor . Editing an Anchor How to edit an anchor using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. Click the Hyperlink Manager (CTRL + K) button. In the Name text box. Note: Text may display link formatting even though there is no link. 1. An anchor is a location within this content which can be linked to using the Hyperlink Manager.Adding an Anchor How to create an anchor using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. Select the Anchor tab.

2. Click the Remove Link (CTRL + SHIFT + K) button.3. Select the linked text or object. Edit the anchor as required. Edit the anchor as required. Option Two: 1. 1. Right-click on the linked text or object. Click the Insert Table 3. 4. This displays the basic table in the Editor. Select Properties. This opens the Hyperlink Manager. 1. 3. 4. Place you cursor where you want to insert the table. Option Two: Use this option when the anchor has been added to the editor by placing the cursor in a location. 1. Option One: Use this option when the anchor has been created by first selecting text or an object. 2. Locate and delete the anchor HTML which will look something like <a name="anchor name"></a> Managing Tables Inserting a Table How to insert a table using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. from the drop-down menu. Click the OK button. Select for these options: l button.. 2. Deleting an Anchor How to delete an anchor (bookmark) from the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. move your cursor to highlight the number of rows or columns for the table and then click to select it. . 2.. Select the HTML tab. Click the OK button. To insert a basic table.

See "Setting the Table Design" . click the Table Wizard button.l To design a more complex table.

Select an option to modify the rows. Note: If you want to use the drop-down menu to modify the table design (rather than the Table Wizard) then place your cursor in the cell where you want to perform the modification. Click the OK button.Select either the erties or Cell Properties to use the Table Wizard to modify the table. Right-click using your mouse. 2. 3. Table Prop- . This displays the drop-down menu. columns or cells of the table . 1. Place your cursor inside the table. 4.Editing a Table How to edit a table using the right click menu or the Table Wizard of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE.OR .

Go to the Table Properties tab and set any of these optional settings: 3. set the table height in either pixels or as a percentage by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase and Decrease buttons. Leave blank for no specified height. set the table width in either pixels or as a percentage as for height. In the Width text box. . In the Height text box.OR . 2. Open the Table Wizard.Editing a Table Setting Table Properties How to set the optional properties of a new or existing table using the Table Wizard of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE.Right-click on an existing table and then select Table Properties from the drop-down menu. 1. See "Inserting a Table" . Leave blank for no specified width. The value will automatically be saved in pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol (%) into the text box.g. or enter 100% to set the height as 100%. b. Enter 100px or 100 to set the height as 100 pixels. E. In the Dimensions section: a.

enter a number to set the pixel padding between cells . click the Image SRC button and select a background image for the table. Select a new tab to set additional properties. enter an Id reference for this table.OR . 6.Use the Increase and Decrease buttons. click the Style Builder Style Builder" button and select the table align- button and select the background color. 5. Click the OK button to confirm. h. . button and build one or more styles.4. check or uncheck one or more check box to apply/remove one or more styles as desired. b. 7. select a class for the content of this table. The design is displayed in the Preview window below. At Background Color. In the Layout section: a.OR .Use the Increase and Decrease buttons. In the Id text box. b. In the CSS Class Layout section: a. click the arrow of the Alignment Selector ment. At Alignment. d. g. click the Color Picker e. At Apply Special Formats To. In the Cell Spacing text box. enter a number to set the pixel spacing between cells . The changes can be viewed in the Preview window below. See "Using the f. Select a CSS layout design for your table from the drop-down box. At Style Builder. In the Cell Padding text box. At Back Image. Optional. At CSS Class. c.

Setting Table Properties Showing/Hiding Table Border How to hide or show the table borders using the Table Wizard of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. Place your cursor on the outer edge of the table. 2. The cursor will change to show the table can be selected. Show/Hide Border from the drop-down menu to either hide or show the table Showing/Hiding Table Border . 1. Right-click and select border.

click the arrow of the Alignment Selector button and select the alignment of content. The value will automatically be saved in pixels unless you enter the percentage symbol (%) into the text box.Setting Cell Properties How to set the optional cell properties of a new or existing table using the Table Wizard of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. Leave blank for no specified width. Right-click inside a cell of an existing table and select This opens the Cell Properties tab of the Table Wizard. click the Color Picker e. At No Text Wrapping. i. E. 1. At Background. or enter 100% to set the height as 100%. set the cell width in either pixels or as a percentage as for height. l 3. At Style Builder. See "Using the h. Leave blank for no specified height. g.OR . At Cell Properties. 2. At Back Image. To select multiple cells. d. In the Height text box.Uncheck the check box to allow text to wrap. click on that cell. set the cell height in either pixels or as a percentage by either typing a value into the text box or by using the Increase and Decrease buttons.g. The selected cell is highlighted. select which cells you want to set the properties of: l To select a single cell. button and build one or more styles. c. click the Image Manager table. The selected cells are highlighted. At CSS Class. hold down the Ctrl key and click on each required cell . At Content Alignment. set any of the following: a. button and select a background image for the button and select the background color. .OR .click the Select All link and then hold down the Ctrl key and click on one or more cells to deselect them. b. At Preview. Enter 100px or 100 to set the height as 100 pixels. check the check box to disallow text within this/these cells from wrapping to another line . click the Style Builder Style Builder" f. enter an Id reference for this/these cells. In the Width text box. select a class for this/these cells. Cell Properties from the drop-down menu. In the Id text box.

.5. Click the OK button to save or go to another tab of the Table Wizard to set more properties.

The below tutorial demonstrates how to add a background color to the first row of your table.Setting Cell Properties Setting Table Accessibility How to set the accessibility of a new or existing table using the Table Wizard of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE.OR . e.Open the Table Wizard. but can be read using accessibility tools such as text readers. In the Heading Rows text box. b. The maximum number of heading rows for the current table is displayed to the right of this field. Right-click on an existing table and select "Inserting a Table" Table Properties . At Caption Align. In the Heading Columns text box. enter the number of rows which are headings. The table summary isn't displayed on the page. In the Summary text box. d. enter a summary of the table contents. Go to the Accessibility tab and set any of these Accessibility Options: a. enter the number of columns which are headings. 1. In the Caption text box. enter a caption to be displayed above the table. See 2. . c. click the arrow of the Alignment Selector button and select the alignment of the caption. The maximum number of heading columns for the current table is displayed to the right of this field.

At Associate Cells With Headers.f. the check box to associate cells with headers . 1. Click the OK button. Optional. Setting Table Accessibility Using the Table Wizard How to design a table using the Table Wizard of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. . check uncheck the check box to disable. Click the Insert Table button. 2. Select a new tab to set additional properties. A table of two columns by two rows is displayed as the basis for your design. This opens the Table Wizard on the Table Design tab. 3. Select Table Wizard.OR - g.

. click the Increase To remove a row: At Row. button. This enables the Increase and Decrease buttons which are available to change the design. Setting the Table Design How to set the design a table using the Table Wizard of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. Optional. Select a cell. your current design is displayed. Select a new tab to set additional properties. Table 2. click the Decrease l button. 6. as well as span columns and rows. click the Decrease button. Open the Table Wizard. 5. button. button. Go to the Table Design tab. If you are adding a new table. click the Decrease button. 4. click the Increase To remove a column: At Columns.Right click on an existing table and select Properties. 3. 1. Change tabs to set other properties. click the Increase To remove a row span: select a cell and then at Row Span. click the Increase To remove a column span: select a cell and then at Column Span. Click the OK button. See "Inserting a Table" . 4. l l l l To insert a row span: select a cell and then at Row Span. Optional. perform any of these actions: l To add a column: At Columns.3. Select an Increase or Decrease button to modify the table design. If you are editing an existing table. button. 5. To modify the table. click the Decrease To add a row: At Rows. l l To insert a column span: select a cell and then at Column Span. Optional. button.OR . Click the OK button. You can choose to add columns and rows. a table of two columns by two rows is displayed as the basis for your design.

2. . This opens the Style Builder window. At Family.Designing a Table Using the Style Builder How to create CSS styles for tables using the Style Builder of the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. The Font tab will be displayed. select the required font type. Go to the Font Name section. Set the following Font properties: a. See "Setting Table Properties" 1. The Style Builder can be accessed from the Table Properties tab of the Table Wizard when adding or editing a table. At Style Builder. click the Style Builder button. i.

Strike either the Backspace or Delete button on your keyboard respectively. Strike the Delete button on your keyboard. 2. At Small Caps. button. Click the Delete Table Option Three: 1. select from these options: l Normal: No italics Italics: Italics (text leans forward) Oblique: Oblique italics (text leans backwards) l l iii. Right click to view the drop-down menu. Click on the corner of the table to select it. 2. select from these options: l Normal: No capitalization Small Caps: Small capitalization. 2. At Italics. Option One: 1. click the Color Picker button and select the font color. i. . Place your cursor before or after the table. Option Two: 1.b. At Color. Click on the corner of the table to select it. ii. Go to the Font Attributes section. l Deleting a Table How to delete a table from the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. 3.

. See "Using the Resource Manager" 4. 3. Navigate to and select the required template. Click the Insert button.Deleting a Table Managing Templates Inserting a Template How to insert a template using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. This opens the Template Manager. Note: Templates are typically stored in the Portal Root > Templates folder. 2. Click the Template Manager button. Place you cursor where you want to insert the template. This inserts the template into the editor read for you to edit. 1.

Inserting a Template Saving a Template How to create and save a template using the TelerikEditorProvider for the RTE. images. tables. etc as desired. 1. Create your template by adding text. .

If there is a conflict. repeat Steps 2-6.2. 3. In this case. a message reading "The template was not saved. This opens the Save As Template window. Click the Save button. l . check the check box to overwrite any template that exists with this template . enter a name for this template. Click the Save Template button. the message "The template was saved successfully'" is displayed.OR . Click OK to close the window.Uncheck the check box if you don't want to override an existing file. l If there is no conflict with overwriting. The following error was reported: The file already exists" is displayed. 4. entering a different file name. At Overwrite If File Exists?. This enables warning message if a template with this name already exists. In the File Name text box. 6. select the folder where the template will be saved to. 5. At Folder.

Saving a Template Link Control About the Link Control The Link Control tool enables Module and Page Editors to select a link to a URL. the range link types will vary. Media and the Form & Lists modules. E. a file. or to set no link. Depending on where it is used. a page on the web site. The Link Control is displayed on the add and edit page of many modules including the Links. One sets a link to an image and only includes options to link to a URL. Events. See "Enabling/Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks" Log the user. a file. a page. Announcement. See "Enabling the Link Log" Open a link in a new Web browser window. It is also used on the Administrator and Host only pages such as the Vendor directories. a file that has been uploaded to the site. or to set no link. The Announcements module uses two Link Controls when adding or editing announcements. See "Setting a Link to Open in a New Web Browser Window" l l . Documents.g. a user profile. date and time for every link click. The second one enables linking to all of the link types which are to set a link to a URL. a user's profile or to set no link. Optional Settings: l Track the number of times a link is clicked.

select File ( A File On Your Site ). Note: The My Folder folder is your own personal folder where you can manage your personal files such as your profile image. . 1. At Link / File Name. select the folder where the file is located. This will populate the File Name field below with the file in this folder. At Link / Link Type. 3. 2. select the file from the drop-down list. This topic assumes the file has already been uploaded to the site's File Manager. Note: This field may not be displayed on some modules. At Link / File Location.The Link Control Related Topics: l "Setting a File Link" "Setting a Page Link" "Setting a URL Link" "Adding a User Profile Link" l l l Module Editors Setting a File Link How to set a link to a file that has been uploaded to the site using the Link Control.

. select File ( A File On Your Site ). Note: This field may not be displayed on some modules. 2. click the Upload New File link. 4.Setting a File Link Uploading and Linking to a File How to upload a file and then set a link to that file using the Link Control. button. . This will populate the File Name field below with the file in this folder. button. 5.. Locate and select the required file on your computer. Click the Browse. 3. At Link / Link Type.. Note: The My Folder folder is your own personal folder where you can manage your personal files such as your profile image. At Link / File Location. When you select a folder that you have access to upload files to the Upload New File link is displayed.. Note: Editors must have permission to upload files to at least one folder in the File Manager. At Link / File Name. 1. Click the Uploaded Selected File link. select a folder that you have access to upload files to. 6. This displays the Browse.

1. Note: Pages that are not included in the menu and which have not been given a Parent page will be displayed at the end of this list. At Link / Link Type. however the link will only work for Administrators and SuperUsers. 2. It is therefore recommended that you test page links. At Link / Select A Web Page From Your Site. select the page from the drop-down box.Uploading and Linking to a File Setting a Page Link How to set a link to an existing page on the site using the Link Control. select Page ( A Page On Your Site ). Other users will see the link but nothing will happen when they click on it. . Tip: Pages which are set as disabled are displayed in the list of pages. Disabled pages can be linked to.

an image. The Link Control can be used to set a URL link to any URL. . a web page. The URL can be to a web site. In the Link / Location ( Enter The Address Of The Link ) text box.Setting a URL Link How to set a link to any URL using the Link Control. Setting a URL link Selecting an Existing URL Link How to select a link to an existing URL link using the Link Control. a web page. Once a link to a URL has been saved (updated). that URL will then be added to the drop down list of existing URL's that can be selected. select URL ( A Link To An External Resource ). 1. a file. enter the URL. etc. 1. etc. This topic explains how to set a link to a URL that has already been saved using the Link Control. The URL can be to a web site domain. 2. At Link / Link Type. select URL ( A Link To An External Resource ). a file. an image. At Link / Link Type.

2. The user can control which profile fields are visible to the public. 3. Below the Link / Location: ( Enter The Address Of The Link ) text box. Adding a User Profile Link How to set a link to a User Profile using the Link Control. site members or Administrators only.2. This displays a list of the existing URL's in the Link / Location: ( Enter The Address Of The Link ) drop-down list. click the Select An Existing URL link. 1. At Link / Link Type. At Link / Location: ( Enter The Address Of The Link ): select the URL from the drop-down list. . enter the user name of an existing user. select User ( A Member Of Your Site ). In the Enter The Username Of A Member Of Your Site text box.

The User's Profile Setting No Link This topic explains how to set the Link Control for no link. 1. This option is only available on modules where a link is optional such as the Announcements module. select None. At Link / Link Type. then a message reading "Username entered does not match a User in this web site" is displayed when you select update. .Note: If you enter a user name which does not exist in the User Accounts module.

Setting a Link to Open in the Same Web Browser Window Setting a Link to Open in a New Web Browser Window How to set a link to open in a new Web browser window using the Link Control. Click the Update link.Setting No Linking Setting a Link to Open in the Same Web Browser Window How to set a link to open in the same Web browser window using the Link Control. 1. uncheck 2. 1. . the check box. At Open This Link In New Browser Window?. At Open This Link In New Browser Window?. the check box. check 2. Click the Update link.

The Link Tracking information is displayed on the Edit Item page of any link it is enabled for.Uncheck the check box to disable this feature. At Track Number Of Times This Link Is Clicked? check the check box to track the number of times the link is clicked . 1. File or User) and will create a Tracking URL for the link. .OR .Setting a Link to Open in a New Web Browser Window Enabling/Disabling Tracking of Link Clicks How to track the number of times a link is clicked using the Link Control. list the number of times the link has been clicked and record the last time the link was clicked. This option can be used with any of the link types (URL. Click the Update link. Page. 2.

. time and the name of the user. Each time a link is clicked the Link Log records the date. Click the Edit button beside the item which may be an announcement.g. 1. E. The Link Log is displayed on the Edit Item page of any logged links.Link Tracking Enabled About the Link Log How to view details of links which are logged using the Link Control. a link. etc. Go to the Edit page associated with the logged link.

See "Working with the Calendar" 3. 4. To choose a different end date. Enabling the Link Log How to enable the Link Log using the Link Control. At Track Number Of Times This Link Is Clicked? check best with this enabled. At Log Start Date the first day of the current week is displayed. Click the Update link. 1. Click the Display link. The Link Log Important. the check box. And Time For Every Link Click? check Link Log. The Link Log is displayed on the Edit Item page of any link that it is enabled on.2. To choose a different start date click the Calendar link and select a new date. click the Calendar link and select a new date. The Link Log performs the check box to enable the 2. At Log The User. See "Adding a Page Link" and See "Viewing Link Tracking Report". Date. At Log End Date the last day of the current week is displayed. The RadEditor has a different method for adding and managing link tracking. . 3.

Enabling the Link Log Disabling the Link Log How to disable the Link Log using the Link Control module. The Link Log is displayed on the Edit Item page of any link that it is enabled on. .

Resolution (SuperUsers Only): See "Managing Allowable File Extensions" The Restricted File Type Warning Message .1. Click the Update link. E. Date.avi. At Log The User.wma. Disabling the Link Log Troubleshooting: Restricted File Type Warning Message You may receive a Restricted File Type warning message when attempting to upload a file via the Link Control to a module. This message is displayed when you attempt to upload a file with an extension that you are not enabled to upload such as a movie or a sound file. the check box.g. . . And Time For Every Link Click? uncheck 2.

At Link / Location: ( Enter The Address Of The Link ). 2. Click the OK button to confirm. At Link / Link Type. Below the Link / Location: ( Enter The Address Of The Link ) text box. 4. select URL (A Link To An External Resource). Deleting a URL will not remove any links that have been set to the URL using a module. URL's that have been set using the Link Control are stored on the Link Control.Administrators Deleting a URL from the Links URL List How to delete a URL from the existing URL's list on the Link Control. 1. These URL's can then be selected by Editors to quickly and easily reuse without re-entering the URL. select the URL to be deleted. Administrators can delete URL's from this list. 3. . This displays a list of the existing URL's in the Link / Location: ( Enter The Address Of The Link ) drop-down box. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 5. Click the Delete Selected URL From The List link. click the Select An Existing URL link.

See "About the See "About the File Integrity Checker File Integrity Checker Module" Checker Module" File Manager Building Your Portal > File Manager.See "About the Google Analytics Module" See "About the Google Analytics Module" See "About the Health Monitoring Module" See "About the Languages Module" See "About the Log Viewer Module" See "About the Newsletters Module" See "About the Recycle Bin Module" Health Mon. Advanced Site Management > Recycle Bin. or vendor accounts. Related Topics: l See "About Modules" for general module information.See "About the Languages Module" Advanced Site Management > Logs. See "About the Exten. See "About Module Settings" and the related section for details on setting the module settings which are common to all modules l Admin Page Modules l See "About the Admin Console" for full list of the child pages of the Admin page and their related modules. itoring Languages Log Viewer Newsletters Recycle Bin Advanced Site Management > Languages. security roles. The following modules are located on the Admin pages. Here’s a list of the Administration modules and information regarding which section of this manual you can learn more about each one: Module Name Extensions Manual Section Name Tutorial Link Advanced Site Management > Extensions. such as managing user accounts. Managing Individual Modules > Newsletters. .Managing Module Content Managing Module Content This section details how to manage content and settings for the different types of modules included with DotNetNuke.Advanced Site Management > Application Health. These modules (sometimes referred to as Admin or Administration modules) enable authorized users to undertake site administrative tasks.See "About the Extensions sions Module" Module" File Integrity Advanced Site Management > Application Health. however they can also be deployed and added to site pages.See "About the File Manager See "About the File Manager Module" Module" Google Analytics Advanced Site Management > Search Engine Optimization.

See "About the See "About the Security Center Security Center Module" Module" See "About the Security Roles Module" Security Roles Advanced Site Management > Users and Roles. See "Logging into a Site" and other topics in that section for more. See "About the Search Engine SiteMap Module" Managing Site Design > Skins. See "About the User Accounts Module" See "About the Site Wizard Module" See "About the Search Engine SiteMap Module" See "About the Skins Module" See "About the Pages (Tabs) module" See "About the Taxonomy Manager Module" See "About the User Accounts Module" See "About the User Switcher Module" See "About the Vendors Module" User Switcher Advanced Site Management > Users and Roles.See "About the Security Roles Module" Site Log Site Wizard Site Map Skins Tabs Taxonomy Manager User Accounts Advanced Site Management > Logs. . Important.See "About the Site Log Mod. See "About the Taxonomy Manager Module" Advanced Site Management > Users and Roles. See "About the Skins Module" Managing Individual Modules > Pages (Tabs) module. Tutorial Link See "About the Search Admin Module" Advanced Site Management > Application Health. the majority of information on working with the Account Login module is covered in the "Managing Your User Account > Logging In and Out" section of this manual.See "About the Site Log Module" ule" Building Your Portal > Site Wizard. This chapter covers a number of ways you can login to DNN using this module. Advanced Site Management > Search Optimization. The module includes an optional Register link which enables visitors to register on the site and help with forgotten passwords. See "About the Site Wizard Module" Advanced Site Management > Search Optimization.See "About the See "About the Web Server Web Server Manager Module" Manager Module" Managing Individual Modules > What's New.See "About the Vendors Module" Advanced Site Management > Application Health. See "About the User Switcher Module" Vendors Web Server Manager What's New Advanced Site Management > Vendors. See "About the What's New Module" See "About the What's New Module" Account Login About the Account Login Module The Account Login module (also titled User Log In) enables registered users to log in to a site using their login credentials.Module Name Search Admin Security Center Manual Section Name Advanced Site Management > Search Engine Optimization. The Account Login module can be deployed to any page and is automatically displayed on the default User Log In page. However.

This code is provided in the Welcome email with your other login information or can be retrieved using the Forgot Password? option. enter your user name. Note: The version number for this module does not update as it forms part of the DNN framework.OR . Click the Login link (typically located in the top right corner) to display the User Log In page . 2. The Login skin token Related Topics: l See "Example: Adding/Editing the Login Message" See "Restoring the Default Login Page" See "Enabling a Custom Login Page" l l All Users Logging in with a Verification Code You may be required to enter a verification code the first time you login to a DNN site. The Account Login module enabling login Skin Token: The [LOGIN] skin token displays the Login link which opens the User Log In page. In the User Name text box.00. The login link is located in the top right corner of the default DNN skin. 1.Navigate to an Account Login module.00. .Module Version: 01.

This displays the Verification Code field. Click the Login link (typically located in the top right corner) to display the User Log In page . enter your password. . 1. 6. Logging in with a Security Code How to login to a site when a security code is required. enter your verification code. re-enter your password.Navigate to an Account Login module. Note: the Verification Code is a number so if it begins with a 0. In the Password text box.3. Admin Tip: See the Security Roles section to find out how to enable the CAPTCHA Security Code. 4. enter your user name. Click the Login button. enter the code displayed as a picture. 3. 5.OR . Click the Login button. 2. This is a unique code that is generated as a picture each time you login. In the Verification Code text box. 4. 5. In the User Name text box. In the Password text box. Click the Login button again. it is a Zero and not the letter 'O'. enter your password. 7. In the Password text box. In the Security Code text box.

Logging in with a Security Code Logging in with LiveID How to login to a DNN web site using your LiveID credentials. .Navigate to an Account Login module. Click the LiveID button. Click the Login link (typically located in the top right corner) to display the User Log In page . 2. 1.OR .

Add a new profile.OR . Click the Login button to be redirected to the LiveID web site. . Select your profile (and Sign In if required) . 4.3.

In the Last Name text box. In the Display Name text box. c. In the First Name text box. You are now returned to the web site and are logged in authenticated. enter your last name. enter your user name. . Go to the Associate with Existing Account section. c. Go to the Register a new Account section. In the Password text box. enter your preferred display name. e. Complete one of the following: l Associate with Existing Account: a. Click the Associate with User Account link. f. l Register a new Account: a. enter your user name. Click the Register link. d. b. d. b.5. In the User Name text box. In the User Name text box. enter your first name. enter your password.

Logging In With LiveID Logging in with a Verification Code and a Security Code How to login to a site when a verification code and two security codes are required. Tip: Don't worry that this is a long process as you will only have to do this long login process the first time. The next time you will not have to enter the verification code and you will only have to enter one security code. The Verification code is provided in the Welcome email with your other login information. . whereas the security codes are generated as a picture when you log in.

8.OR . 2. enter your verification code. Click the Login link (typically located in the top right corner) . In the Password text box. re-enter your password. Note: the verification code is a number so if it begins with a 0. This displays the Verification Code field and a new security code. enter your password. enter the code displayed as a picture. This displays the Account Login module which may be titled User Log In. 6. Click the Login button again. . enter your user name. Click the Login button. In the User Name text box. 7. 3. 9. 4. enter the new code displayed as a picture.Navigate to an Account Login module. it is a Zero and not the letter 'O'. In the Security Code text box. 5. In the Password text box. In the Security Code text box. In the Verification Code text box.1.

At Available Locales. Go to Resource Name: EMAIL_PASSWORD_REMINDER_BODY. 1.Text. 3. select a language from the drop-down list. Navigate to Admin > Languages. To edit the message.Logging in with a Verification Code and a Security Code Administrators Editing the Password Reminder Email How to edit the message sent to users when they request a password reminder. The related email messages will be displayed below. 2. 5. perform one of the following options: . 4. Click the Language Editor link. A quick way to do this is to use the Find (Ctrl + F) feature of your Web browser. To view the current details click the Maximize button at Default Value. 6.

7. Click the Update link. 10. Click the Edit button. Paste and Edit the default value into the RTE. Click the OK button. Copy. Repeat all of the above steps to update this message for another language. the default Login page will be used. Note: The default login page requires the [LOGIN] skin token to be included. 9.Text which is the next field down the list. or enter your new message into the RTE ensuring you include the replacement tokens displayed at Default Value. .OR a. c. Are you sure you want to continue?" b. 11. This displays the message "All unsaved changes will be lost if you continue. Enabling a Custom Login Page Set any page as the portal Login page. To edit the email subject go to Resource Name: EMAIL_PASSWORD_REMINDER_SUBJECT. If no page is selected here. The default login page only displays the Account Login module however this setting enable you to create your own Login page. d. Edit the subject in the Localized Value text box. Click the Update link to return to the Language Editor. 8. Edit the message body using HTML tags in the Localized Value text box below .

aspx?tabid=1&ctl=Login at the end of the URL. Maximize the Advanced Settings section. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings . from the Control Panel. select <None Specified>. 4.domain. from the Control Panel. Restoring the Default Login Page How to restore the default Login page to this portal. 1. Create a Login page ensuring the Permissions to View Page are set to All Users. The [LOGIN] skin token must be included on the portal skin to access the default login page. Warning.Select Site 3. Click the Update link. At Login Page. . select the Page Name from the drop down list. Go to the Page Management section.g. If this occurs. This will display the default login page. 5. 6. Maximize the Advanced Settings section. Go to the Page Management section. Warning. http://www. Don't restore the default User Log In page without this skin token. You can add any other modules and content to this new Login page.OR . 4. Navigate to Admin > Site Settings . Do not apply this setting without first adding an Account Login module to the page you are selecting and ensure the page is available to All Users.Select Site 2. 2. enter your portal URL into the address bar of your Web browser and add Default.OR .1. E.com/Default.aspx?tabid=1&ctl=Login. The Login page must also have the Account Log In module added to it. If you have logged out of the portal and do not have an Account login module viewable by 'All Users' you will be unable to log in again. 3. At Login Page.

Navigate to the required Account Login module. Click the Update link. This may happen if: l You set the Login page to a page which doesn't have a Login module on it and then logout of the portal.Click the Settings button. 1. At Permissions.OR . Troubleshooting: Cannot Access the Login Page (Friendly URL's Disabled) If the Login Page setting on your portal has been configured incorrectly you may not be able to access the login page.aspx?tabid=24&ctl=login. At Permissions. check the View Module check box for Unauthenticated Users and ensure all other View Module check boxes are unchecked. uncheck the Inherit View permissions from Page check box.domain. l Here's how you can display the default User Log In page (for portals with friendly URL's disabled). 1. 5.com/Default. 4. Click the Update link. Navigate to any on your portal and in the address bar of the Web browser. Select Settings from the module actions menu . The Login page or the Account Login module on that page is set as not visible to All Users. 2. This setting is unique to the module and won't affect the Account Login module associated with the default User Log In page. This means the module will 'hide' once a user logs into the portal.5. Troubleshooting: Cannot Access the Login Page (Friendly URL's Enabled) If a Login page is set (see Admin > Site Settings) on your site it is possible to incorrectly configure the site so that you cannot access the login page. The URL will then be something like http://www. 3. add &ctl=login to the URL. Setting Account Login Module as Visible to Unauthenticated Users Only You can optionally set an Account Login module as only visible to unauthenticated users. This may happen if: .

aspx with /ctl/Login/Default. To display the login page where friendly URL's have been enabled: 1. You set a Login page but accidentally delete the page and logout of the site.. Announcements are ordered by their publish date by default. ISearchable The Announcements Module Project Links .g. link.com/Home/tabid/36/ctl/Login/Default.07. date of publication and a read more.aspx Announcements About the Announcements Module The Announcements module displays a list of announcements. Module Version: 04. You set a Login page but do not add a Login module to the page and then logout of the site. however view order can be specified.00. the login page will be http://www.com/Home/tabid/36/Default.domain.03 Minimum DNN Version: DNN 04.aspx.00 Features: IPortable. If the URL is http://www.1. 2.domain.aspx in the URL. Each announcement includes a title and a rich text description. Optional fields include an image.. E. Navigate to any other page on the site and replace Default.

set the link to display an image on this announcement or select None if no image is required. . enter a number to order this announcement.dotnetnuke. 1.com/Community/Forums/tabid/795/forumid/12/scope/threads/Default. 4. 1 = Second announcement.codeplex. enter a description for the announcement. At Link set the Read more.com/workitem/list/basic l l Module Editors Adding an Announcement How to add an announcement to the Announcements module. In the View Ordertext box. etc.aspx Issue Tracker: http://dnnannouncements. E.dotnetnuke. Minute and AM/PM to set a publish time.OR . At Expire Date. Select Add New Announcement from the Announcement link. set these options: l Click the Calendar link and select the date when the announcement will expire from the module. 2. See "About the Link Control" c. The publish date is displayed beside the announcement title in the default template.aspx Support Forum: http://www. The default time is 12:00 AM. This will override the default order which lists announcements from most recent publish date to oldest publish date. Select the Hour. Select the Hour. In the Description Editor. Optional.com/Products/Development/Forge/ModuleAnnouncements/tabid/924/Default. 0 = First announcement. l d. Optional. At Publish Date. The default time is 12:00 AM. The following optional settings are also available: a.l Project Home: http://www. In the Title text box. See "Setting a File Link" b. l e. Expired announcements can still be viewed and managed by content editors. enter a title for the announcement. Minute and AM/PM to set an expiry time.. Complete the following mandatory fields: a.Click the Add New Click the Calendar link and select the date when the announcement will be published on the module. b.g.. 3. set these options: l module actions menu . link for this announcement or select None for no link. Click the Update link. At Image.

Related Topics: l See "Working with the Calendar" .

.

2. Edit any fields as required.Adding an Announcement Editing an Announcement How to edit an announcement on the Announcements module. Select the Hour. Optional. If the announcement isn't displayed select Expired. Click the Edit button beside the announcement. The default time is 12:00 AM. Click the Update link. l 4. . If the announcement isn't displayed go to the Select View drop-down box and select All. 3. 3. Modifying the Announcement Publish Date How to change the publish date of an announcement on the Announcements module. At Publish Date. The publish date is displayed beside the announcement title in the default template. 1. edit these options: l Click the Calendar link and select the date when the announcement will be published on the module. Future or All from the Select View drop-down list. Optional. 4. 2. Minute and AM/PM to set a publish time. 1. Click the Edit button beside the announcement to be edited. Click the Update link.

Once the number of days set is reached the announcements are stored as Expired. 3. 3. 2. Click the Delete link. 1. Click the OK button. 3.Click the Settings button. . 2. In the History (Days) text box.Click the Settings button. Setting the Description Length for Search and RSS How to set the length of the description of an announcement on the Announcements module when it is used in DNN searches and in RSS feeds.OR . Select the Announcements Settings tab. 4. If the announcement isn't displayed go to the Select View drop-down list and select All. Optional. 14 will display announcements with a publish date from 1 to 14 days ago. 1.Deleting an Announcement How to permanently delete an announcement from the Announcements module. Click the Update link. E.g. Settings Setting Announcement History By Days How to set the default number of days each announcement is published for on the Announcements module. Click the Edit button beside the announcement to be deleted. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 4. 2. To use the maximum number (2000) enter 0. In the Description Length (Search & RSS) text box. enter the number of characters to be included.OR . Announcements which are more than 14 days old will automatically expire. Select the Announcements Settings tab. Select Settings from the module actions menu . Select Settings from the module actions menu . enter a number. 1.

" 4.OR . In the Default View text box. 3.4. This setting enables users who are authorized to add a copy of an existing Announcements module on a different page and then set the default view of that module to expired. Click the Update link. All: All announcements are displayed by default. This displays the message "Are you sure? This will overwrite the existing template. Click the Update link. select one of the following from the drop-down box: l Current: Current announcements are displayed by default. 2. l l l 4. Loading the Default Template How to restore any of the five default templates that defines the content. future. 1. . Select Settings from the module actions menu . Select Settings from the module actions menu . Setting the Default View for Announcements How to set the default view for announcements in the Announcements module. Click the OK button to confirm. 2. current or all.Click the Settings button. layout and style of announcements for an Announcements module. 1. Select the Announcements Settings tab.OR . Click the Load Default link beside the required template.Click the Settings button. Future: Future announcements are displayed by default. 3. This enables you to display an automatic archive of your announcements. Expired: Expired announcements are displayed by default. Select the Announcements Settings tab.

edit the template as required. This template controls the section before the first announcement item. 5. Tip: To hide the publish date. edit the template as required. E. Note: In the below images an Alternate Item Template has been created which displays the description in italics and the image column to the right. 6. 1. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. a Separator Template has also been created with a horizontal rule. edit the template as desired. Announcement 4.g. edit the template as required. In the Item Template text box.5. This template controls each alternate announcement item. In the Separator Template text box.[PUBLISHDATE] from the Template window. Select Settings from the module actions menu . 4. 3. Announcement 2. Leave blank to use the Item Template for all items.OR . delete. 7. etc. layout and style of announcements in an Announcements module. Select the Announcements Settings tab. Modifying the Announcement Templates How to modify the five templates that defines the content. Click the Update link. . This template controls each announcement items. In the Alternate Item Template text box. 2. In the Header Template text box.Click the Settings button.

The Announcement Templates .

The New Template Layout Banners About the Banners Module The Banners module displays vendor banner advertising. You can set the number of banners displayed in the module as well as set a number of layout options. HTML or plain text. Module Version: 01. as well as script such as JavaScript. . Banners can be either a static or an animated image. Note: The version number for this module does not update as it forms part of the DNN framework.00. then different banners are displayed each time the page is visited. Where more banners are available than the module is set to display at one time.00.

The [BANNER] skin object can be enabled or disabled on the Admin > Site Settings page and is a portal wide setting. This can be set to either Site or Host. Button. Banner 468 x 60 pixel This type of banner can be displayed either using a Banners module. MicroButton. or it can display where ever the [BANNER] skin object is included in the skin applied to a page. or by adding the [BANNER] skin object to the skin applied to the portal or to a page of the portal.Related Topics: l See "About the Vendors Module" See "Adding an Image Banner to a Vendor" See "Enabling/Disabling Banner Advertising" l l Module Editors About Banner Types An overview of the different types of banners that can be associated with a vendor account and displayed using the banners module. Below are examples of the industry standard sizes for banner images. The Banner Type 'Banner' can be displayed either using a Banners module. Block and Skyscraper. Five sizes of image banners are provided: Banner. See "Enabling/Disabling Banner Advertising" Micro Button 120 x 60 pixels . These sizes are recommendations only.

Button 120 x 90 pixels Block 125 x 125 pixels .

.Skyscraper 120 x 600 pixels Script Banner Script type banners can contain javascript which is executed when the banner is shown on the portal.

Banners must be added to a vendor account before they can be displayed in the module. See the Vendors module for more details.Enter 0 (zero) for no border.Select a single banner type (Banner. In the Banner Count text box. The following optional settings control how the banners displays in the module: a. Displaying a Banner How to display banners of a using the Banners module. Site: Displays banners managed on this site. l 3. Vertical is the default setting.Click the Banner Options link. Stylesheet styles are applied. At Banner Type. MicroButton. 5. b. enter a number to set the border width (pixels). Block. enter the maximum number of banners to be displayed at one time. See "About Banner Types" 4. This sets this module to only display banners belonging to this group ( A group name can be enter when added banners) . 2. or Script) to restrict the module to display only one type of banner. .Text Banner Text banners can be either plain text or HTML. The following optional settings lets you control which banners display: a.OR . Button.OR . 1. enter the banner group name.OR . select Vertical or Horizontal to set how the banners are displayed in the module. Select Banner Options from the module actions menu . select from these options: l Host: Displays banners managed on the Host portal. In the Banner Group text box. These banners are exclusive to this site. No border is the default setting. In the Border Width text box. select <All Types> to display banners of all types . These banners are available to all portals within this DNN installation. Text. b. At Orientation. Skyscraper. At Banner Source.OR Leave this field blank to display all banners regardless of group name.

Note: A Border Width must be set for this field to work.g. 3. e. 1.Click the Banner Options link. enter an redirect page which applies to all banners in this module.OR . DarkOrange. Displaying Banners Horizontally How to set the Banners module to display banners horizontally across the page. Click the Update link. Border Width must be set to enable this setting. In the Border Color text box. E. enter a number to set the height for each banner cell (pixels). Editing Banner Options How to edit the settings applied to the Banners module.c. . 7. Click the Update link. Edit the options as required. enter a color for the border. enter a number to set the space between banners and the border. d. In the Row Height text box. 6. Border Width must be set to enable this setting. See Reference > Color Codes and Names for more details. In the Banner Click Through URL text box. In the Column Width text box. Select Banner Options from the module actions menu . In the Cell Padding text box. 2. f. enter the pixel width for each banner cell.

1. select Horizontal. 2. . Displaying Banners Horizontally Displaying Banners Vertically How to set the banners module to display banners vertically down the page. In the Column Width text box. 1. 2. Displaying Banners Vertically Setting Banner Spacing 1. Click the Update link. Select Banner Options from the module actions menu. Click the Update link. How to set the width and height of the (invisible) table cells which each banner is displayed within. 3. select Vertical. Select Banner Options from the module actions menu. At Orientation. 4. If this setting is left empty the banners may not align evenly across the module. 3. At Orientation. enter a number to set the width of each column cell. Optional. 2. Select Banner Options from the module actions menu.

Click the Update link. . enter the pixel height of the row. In the Cell Padding text box. The default value is 4 4. 6. In the Row Height text box. enter the height for each banner cell in pixels. enter the width for each banner cell in pixels. In the Column Width text box. 5.3.

1. 3 3. Select Banner Options from the module actions menu. enter a hex number (#6495ED) or color code (CornflowerBlue) to set the color of the border. E. 2. .g. At Border Color. At Border Width. enter the pixel width of the border.Setting Banner Spacing Setting the Banner Border How to set the width and color of the border around each banner that is displayed in a banners module.

4. the Display Container? check box on the Settings page of this module to hide . Tip: You may like to uncheck the module container. Click the Update link.

2.OR . Go to a File Manager module . 1. File Manager the H: check box to remove the hidden property from the file. 5. button to save your changes. Click the Save Changes . an image may not display in the Banners module if its properties are set as hidden.OR .Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. Click the Rename File 4. Uncheck button beside the file to be edited. Locate the required file.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . 3.Banners Module with Borders Displayed Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying Depending upon the caching set.

You may need to Refresh (Hold down the Shift key and strike the F5 key) the page to see the changes.6. Return to the module to see if the image is displaying. Troubleshooting: Image Not Displaying in HTML Module .

Users may be enabled to add comments. edit and delete their own blog entries as well approve.01. Below the calendar a Monthly list of links to all previous months with blog entries is provided. Recent_Entries: Displays the recent entries for the selected blog. Days which have a blog entry are highlighted on the calendar. Recent_Comments: Displays recent comments for the selected blog. access the Blog Settings page and add a blog entry to their own blog(s). Bloggers can create. Recent Entries layout can be modified.Blog About the Blog Module The Blog module consists of nine integrated modules which enable authorized users to create and manage one or more blogs (Web blog).02 Features: ISearchable Here's an overview of the nine Blog modules: Blog_Archive: Displays a monthly calendar. Blog_List: Displays a linked list of all existing blogs and a View All Recent Entries link to all recent blog entries. where comments can be enabled or disabled and where child blogs can be created. Searches can be made across all blogs or can be limited to a single blogs. Blog_Categories: Enables the creation and management of blog categories. This module also provides access to the Blog Settings page where blog details and setting are configured. Search_Blog: Enables all users to search blogs by keywords or a phrase. Links to private blogs are only visible to the blog owner. Module Version: 04.06. l .00 Minimum DNN Version: 04. Tags can be displaying as a tag cloud or tag list. Blog_Tags: Displays the tags which bloggers have created when adding blog entries. edit or delete comments added to their blog. View_Blog: Provides these tools to these user groups: l All Users can view blog entries and blog search results in this module. New_Blog: Enables authorized users to create a new blog. users can view all blog entries for that date in the View_All_Recent_Entries module. By clicking on a tag users can view associated entries in the View_Blog module. By clicking on a category users can view associated entries in the View_Blog module. Comment layout can be modified. By selecting a date. Results are displayed in the View_Blog module.

They can also choose to add a new blog module part. The Blog Modules Project Links . and enable DNN Search. set the layout and word limit of blogs in this module. One of the modules which make up the full Blog module suite. E.l Page Editors/Administrators have access all of the above functionality as well as access to the Module Options page of this module where they enable and setup blog comments. Permissions: Page Editors must have Manage Settings (DNN Community Edition) or Full Control (DNN Professional Edition) permission granted.g. Administrators can optionally provide bloggers with to access the Blog Settings page via this module's menu.

Uncheck the Inherit View permissions from Page check box. Blog_Tags. Select the Permissions tab. l l Now you should determine which users or roles are able to create their own blog. Recent_Comments. 2. These modules are suitable for any pane. . Move the modules to your preferred pane layout. Go to the New_Blog module.l Project Home: http://www.com/workitem/list/basic l l Configuration Laying out the Blog Modules Here's a suggested way to layout the Blog modules on a page. b. a. 1.com/Products/Development/Forge/ModuleBlog/tabid/842/Default. The width of these modules is designed to fit in these 'thin' panes on the standard DNN skin. See "Adding a New Module (RibbonBar)" This adds one of each of the eight modules in the Blog module suite. 3. 1. See "Enabling Users to Create Blogs" Enabling Users to Create Blogs How to enable users (including unauthenticated users if desired) and roles to create and manage their own blog. 4. Add the Blog modules to a page. At Permissions select one of the following options: l Option One: Hide the New_Blog module from users who cannot create and manage blogs.com/Community/Forums/tabid/795/forumid/92/scope/threads/Default.dotnetnuke.Click the Settings button. This module displays blog entries which can be lengthy. A typical layout would be: l Left Pane or Right Pane (Recommended): Search_Blog. Select Settings from the module actions menu . therefore it is best suited for the main content pane. Recent_Entries. Any Pane: Blog_Categories.dotnetnuke. 2.aspx Support Forum: http://www. Content Pane (Recommended): View_Blog. select the roles/usernames that are authorized to create a blog.codeplex.OR .aspx Issue Tracker: http://dnnblog. At View/View Module. Blog_Archive and Blog_List module.

a.DNN Professional Edition l Option Two: Display the New_Blog module to users who cannot create blogs or need to login to create/manage their blog. select the roles/usernames that are authorized to create a blog. This displays the "You must be logged in and have permission to create or edit a blog" to unauthenticated users. This allows all . Enabling registered users to view the New_Blog module and create their own blog . At Full Control/Edit Module.DNN Community Edition Enabling registered users to view the New_Blog module and create their own blog . Leave the Inherit View permissions from Page check box checked users who can view this page to view this module.c. .

DNN Professional Edition 5.DNN Community Edition All users authorized to view the page can view the New_Blog module. The Create My Blog link is enabled Related Topics: . At Full Control/Edit Module. select each role/username that is authorized to create a blog. Click the Update link.b. All users authorized to view the page can view the New_Blog module. however only registered users can create their own blog . This displays the Create My Blog link on the New_Blog module. however only registered users can create their own blog .

Setting Blog permissions in DNN Community Edition Related Topics: l See "Enabling Users to Create Blogs" See "Setting Module Permissions" l Adding a Blog Module Part How to add one or more individual modules which are part of the Blog module suite. Note: Bloggers must be viewing their own blog to access these tools. select the roles/usernames who are authorized to create a blog. 2.OR . At Edit Module (DNN Community Edition) or Full Control (DNN Professional). Tip: Bloggers can also access these tools using the New_Blog module. Add Blog Entry and Mass Edit Blog Posts) using the View_Blog module. 1. .Click the Settings button. Select Settings from the module actions menu .l See "Setting Module Permissions" See "Enabling Bloggers Blog Management Rights" l Enabling Bloggers Blog Management Rights How to enable bloggers to access blog management tools (Edit Blog Settings. 4. Go to the View_Blog module. Select the Permissions tab. Note: You must be a Page Editor tor Administrator to perform this task. 3.

. Go to the View_Blog module. This is the default setting. 3. select where to insert the Blog module part. Search_Blog. 2. At Add Blog Module Part.OR .Click the Settings button. d. Select the Blog Tag Settings tab. Click the Add link. Adding a Blog Module Part Configuring Blog Tag Settings How to set the way blog tags are displayed on the Blog_Tags module which forms part of the Blog module suite. etc.g. At the first drop-down box.1. At the third drop-down box. Select Settings from the module actions menu . 4. 1. Go to the Blog_Tags module. Select from the following options: l Tag Cloud: Select to display tag names. select the required Blog module part. l Tag List: Select to display tags in a list. E. complete the following steps (use fields from left to right): a. New_Blog. In the text box. select the pane to add the Blog module part to. enter the title for the blog module part. c. Leave blank to use the standard title for this blog module part. 2. At the second drop-down box. b. The number of entries associated with each tag is listed beside the tag name. e. The default option is "Title".

5. Select the Recent Blog Comments Settings tab. In the Maximum Comments text box. The default setting is ten (10) comments. 3. . Configuring Blog Tag Settings Modifying Recent Comments Template How to modify the template which defines the content. In the Display Template text box. style and number of blog comments on the Recent_Comments module which forms part of the Blog module suite. Click the Update link. modify the HTML template as required. 2. 4.Click the Settings button. Click the Update link. modify the maximum number of comments to be displayed.OR . Select Settings from the module actions menu . layout. 1. 5.

"Rose Booth's Blog") ."Adding an Existing Module (Iconbar)" 3. See "Adding an Existing Module (RibbonBar)" . Optional. See "Configuring Advanced Settings for the Blog Module" 4. This enables you to create a personal blog page for a blogger and sets the View_Blog. . Blog_Comments) to the page however they will display information from other blogs. See "Adding A New Page Visible to Administrators only using the RibbonBar" 2.g.The default Display Template is: <div class="Blog_RecentComments"><a href="[PERMALINK]" class="Blog_ RecentComments_Title">[TITLE]</a><div class="Normal">[COMMENT]</div><div  class="Blog_RecentComments_Dateline">By [AUTHOR] on: [ADDEDDATE]</div></div> Recent Comments module with a modified Display Template Creating a Personal Blog Page How to display a single blog on a new page or on a page other than the page where all blogs are displayed. 1. Using the View_Blog module. Search_Blog and Blog_Archive modules display information exclusively for this blog. Optional.OR .Go to the page where you want to place the personal blog. set the required page at Personal Blog Page.g. Add an existing copy of the View_Blog module to the page. You can add other blog module parts (E. Add a new page for the personal blog page (E. These are the only modules that function exclusively as a personal blog. You may like to add Search_Blog and Blog Archive modules to this page.OR .

3. Select a parent category from the drop-down box if this new category should become a child category (sub-category) of an existing category.A Personal Blog Page Including the Search_Blog and Blog Archive Modules Blog Categories Adding Blog Categories How to add blog categories using the Blog_Categories module which forms part of the Blog module suite. . Select Edit Categories from the Blog_Categories module actions menu. Enter the name of your category text box. Optional. In the Required. enter the category name. 2. 1.

5. 4. In the Portal Categories list (displayed on the right of this page) click on the category to be edited.OR . Enter the name of your category text box.select None to make this a parent category. . Select Edit Categories from the Blog_Categories module actions menu. select a new parent for this category . Click the Update link. edit the category name. 2. 3. The category is now listed in the Portal Categories list displayed on the right of this page. A Newly Added Blog Category Editing Blog Categories How to edit blog categories using the Blog_Categories module which forms part of the Blog module suite. Click the Add link. 1. In the Required.4. At the drop-down box.

2. In the Portal Categories list (displayed on the right of this page) click on the category to be deleted.Editing Blog Categories Deleting Blog Categories How to delete blog categories using the Blog_Categories module which forms part of the Blog module suite. 1. Select Edit Categories from the Blog_Categories module actions menu. . Click the Delete link. 3.

enter the value 0. The default setting is 1024. At Make Entry Summary Mandatory. 2. Note: It is strongly recommended that a limit is set to ensure speedy results for searches. enter the value 0. In the Limit Search Summary text box. l . This displays the following settings which you may wish to modify.Deleting Blog Categories Blog Module Options Configuring Basic Settings for the Blog Module How to configure the basic settings for the Blog module using the View_Blog module. Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu. 3. b. This opens the Blog Module Options page. To set no limit. In the Limit Auto-Generated Entry Summary To text box. 1. To set no limit. a. Go to the Basic Settings section. The default setting is 255. edit the maximum number of characters for the auto-generated summary of blog entries. Uncheck the check box to set the Summary field as optional. edit the maximum number of characters to be returned when a search is made. select from these options: l Check the check box to set the Summary field on the Add Blog Entry page of the View_Blog as mandatory.

The default setting is 10. Click the Update link. 6. The default setting is 10. 7. In the Limit Recent RSS Entries To text box. Larger images can be uploaded. The default setting is 400. 5. edit the maximum number of recent RSS entries to be displayed. enter the maximum number of recent entries displayed when a user clicks the View All Recent Entries link on the Blog_List module. In the Limit Recent Entries To text box. In the Limit Upload Image Width To text box.4. . however they will be scaled down to this width. enter the maximum pixel width for images which can be uploaded by bloggers when adding an entry.

Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu. Skip to Step 4. . The Blog module uses Gravatars (Globally Recognized Avatars) as the default option for user avatars. At Show Avatars. For users without a Gravatar. one of three avatars generation tools. 2. Avatars are displayed the beside user comments on the View_Blog module.Example of the Summary field set as optional when adding a new blog entry Related Topics: l See "Configuring Advanced Entry Summary Settings" See "Allowing Bloggers to Upload Files" l Configuring Blog Comment Settings How to enable avatars and manage comment settings on the View_Blog module. For more information. Go to the Comment Settings section. the fallback options are available the "Gray Man" any image URL. icon.com. or you can enter 1. visit http://gravatar. 3. select from these options: l Uncheck the check box to disable avatars.

b. or on their email address if provided. MonsterID As above. At Image Rating. In the Custom Image URL text box. Wavatar: As above. Identicon: Select to generate a unique identifying image based on the IP address of the user's computer.domain.jpg l l l l . Custom: Select to use your own image.g. enter a pixel width for the avatar.com/myimage. select an avatar rating which is suitable for your indented audience. This displays the below fields: a. The default setting of 48 is recommended if you are using the default style of the comments. c. E. i. In the Image Width text box. enter the URL where your image is located. At Default Image URL.l Check the check box to enable avatars. http://www. select the avatar to be used for comments made by users without a Gravatar: l Gray Man: Select to display the Gray Man image as pictured.

strong. At Allow Images in Comments. check the check box to enable images to be included in comments .OR . At Allow Hyperlinks in Comments . . 5. underline . check the check box to enable users to include hyperlinks in comments . check the check box to enable users to use basic HTML tags in their comments such as bold. 6. At Show Title.Uncheck the check box to hide.OR . At Show Website.OR Uncheck the check box to disable. check the check box to enable users to create unique titles for entry comments . At Allow Basic Formatting in Comments.4.OR . 8.Uncheck the check box to disable. check the check box to display a user web site address (as set on their profile) with their comments . 7.Uncheck the check box to disable.OR .Uncheck the check box to disable.

.9. Click the Update link.

.

l 5.. check the check box to display the blog title in the Web browser . Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu.aspx. Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu. Configuring Blog Search Engine Optimization Settings How to configure settings related to Search Engine Optimization for the Blog module. Go to the SEO Settings section. 6. 2. 4. 1. Uncheck the check box to disable. Configuring RSS Settings for Blogs How to configure RSS (really simply syndication) settings for the Blog module. You would typically perform this task after a change has been made to the URL format for a site. 2.Avatars Enabled on the View_Blog module./Blog-Entry-Title.. This URL format can help with search engine optimization. In this scenario. select from these options: l Check the check box to show search engine friendly URL's. At Show Unique Title. Wavatar has been selected as the fallback.aspx with the title of the blog entry as follows: .OR Uncheck the check box to display the page title. This modifies the URL to replace default. 3. At Show SEO Friendly URL. 1. At Manage Entry Links. .OR Uncheck the check box to display the page title. Click the Update link. Go to the RSS Settings section. 3. check the check box to display the blog title in the Web browser . click the Regenerate all Permalinks for this Module link. Note: Syndication must be enabled on individual blogs. At Show Unique Title.

l Uncheck the check box to exclude the body of blog posts regardless of whether they are requested by the RSS feed. 8. This opens the Blog Module Options page. Click the Update link. Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu. The default setting is 10. the check box to disable. Go to the Windows Live Writer Settings section. At Categories in Description. At Include Body. Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling Blog Syndication" See "Limiting Recent RSS Entries" l Windows Live Writer Settings How to configure the Windows Live Writer Settings (WLW) for the View_Blog module. enter the number of minutes until cached RSS feeds are refreshed. 1. At Tags in Description. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to include a text underneath the summary of the post with the tags. l 7. the check box to disable. l 6. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to include a text underneath the summary of the post with the categories.4. 2. In the RSS Cache Time text box. . 5. select from these options: l Check the check box to include the body of blog posts if it requested by the RSS feed.

At Files On Host.com) . check the check box enable users to use WLW (or other remote blogging tools that use the MetaWeblog API) to post and edit blog posts . At Files On Portal. Click the Update link. 5. Any split in the post will be ignored and the excerpt will be used instead. Go to the Load Additional Files section. 4. The listed files are managed under [portal home directory]/Blog/Include. rather than displaying the text as formatted.OR Uncheck the check box to disable. check the check box to enable the jQuery library (http://www.OR . . 2. Loading Additional Blog Files to the Web browser How to enable the Blog module to load additional files to the client (typically your Web browser) when the blog is rendered.css: Check to select a new stylesheet. Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu. js/syntaxHighlighter. At Add jQuery.js: Check to enable this syntax highlighting tool. At Allow Windows Live Writer. check the check box beside one or more of the listed files. This opens the Blog Module Options page.e. 3.3. l 5. check the check box beside one or more of the listed files. This allows you to choose a stylesheet or enable syntax highlighting. not HTML). Syntax highlighting displays any code entered into the body of a blog entry "as is". This is useful if you want to ensure the summaries are text only (I. supplied with the Blog module by default: l css/shCoreDefault. 1. At Use Excerpt in Windows Live Writer. check the check box to enable the user to use the Excerpt text box in WLW at the bottom to create a summary of the post in plain text.Uncheck the check box to disable.jquery. 4.

The toolbar is displayed beneath a blog entry when comments are being viewed. check the check box to force both the auto-generated and actual entry summaries to be truncated based on the value entered in the 'Limit Entry Summary To' setting . At Enable Social Bookmarks.OR . At Personal Blog Page. check the check box enable HTML markup to be used in the summary field .OR . 8.OR .Uncheck the check box to disable HTML markup. See "Creating a Personal Blog Page" 6. At Allow Upload Options.OR Uncheck the check box to hide summary. At Use Drop Down List For Archive. At Enforce Entry Summary Limit.OR . Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu. select the required blog name. Go to the Advanced Settings section. 4.Uncheck the check box to disable DNN Search. Note: Child blogs were superceded by categories from Blog (04. If you enable this option. At Include Summary In Entry. 12. check the check box to include the summary of each blog displays below the blog title when the user clicks View All Recent Entries link on the Blog_List module . 10.00.OR Uncheck the check box to disable them. 1. Click the Update link.Uncheck the check box to disable.Uncheck the check box to disable. At Enable DNN Search. If you enable this option for more than one module search results will be duplicated. 7. check the check box to enable the DNN Search module to index all blog entries .Uncheck the check box to disable child blogs. check the check box to display the list of archived months as .00+). check the check box to enable bloggers to associate posts with more than one category . 9. At Allow Summary HTML. Tip: DNN Search includes both the [SEARCH] skin token and the search module. check the check box to allow child blogs to be created . 11. Warning. check the check box to enable bloggers to upload files such as attachments and images to their blog . At Allow Child Blogs. please ensure you only enable this option on one module (your main blog page).OR . therefore you may choose to disable child blogs and manage blogs solely using categories. check the check box to display the social bookmarks toolbar . At Allow Multiple Categories. 5. 2. 3.Uncheck the check box to disable.6.OR . Configuring Advanced Settings for the Blog Module How to configure the Advanced Settings for the View_Blog module.

bloggers can select a category (E. what was previously a child blog) for the entry. At Manage Child Blogs. Child blogs are succeeded by categories as of Blog module Version 4. Go to the Advanced Settings section. .g. When adding a new blog entry. Related Topics: l See "Limiting Image Upload Width" See "Configuring Blog Entry Summary" l Migrating Child Blogs How to manage child blogs from previous versions of DNN. Click the OK button. Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu. Click the Update link. Note: You can keep working with child blogs as before if you wish. Child blogs are now removed from the Blog_List module and listed in the Blog_Categories module. 1. This displays the message "Are you sure you wish to eliminate all child blogs and move their content to categories instead?" 4. You can migrate existing child blogs to categories here. click the Migrate Child Blogs link.a drop down list instead of the default data list. The number of child blogs which currently exist in this portal is listed at Manage Child Blogs. 2. 13. 3.

Visit http://www. The Blog module uses Gravatars (Globally Recognized Avatars) which enable you to choose avatars suitable for your audience. enter a pixel width for the avatar. or on their email address if provided. At Default Image URL. The default setting of 48 is recommended if you are using the default style of the comments. This displays these optional fields: l a. l l l . 3. a unique identifying image will be created for them based on the IP address of their computer. Comment Settings Managing Comment Avatars How to enable or disable avatars to be displayed next to comments on the View_Blog module.Tip: See "Configuring Advanced Settings for the Blog Module" to disable child blogs to be created once you have migrated existing child blogs. Wavatar: As above. typically suitable for audiences 13 and above R: Intended for audiences 17 and above X: Even more mature than R l l l c.com for more details.gravatar. select from these options to set avatars appropriate for your audience: l G: Suitable for all audiences PG: Possibly offensive. select from these options: l Uncheck Check the check box to disable avatars. This enables all future child blogs to be managed using categories. select the images to be used for comments made by users without a Gravatar: l Gray Man: Displayed as is for all users without a gravatar. 2. Go to the Comment Settings section. MonsterID: As above. At Image Rating. Skip to Step 4. At Show Avatars. Identicon: Gravatar will be displayed for users who have one. as well as configure optional settings. the check box to enable avatars. otherwise. b. In the Image Width text box. 1. Select Module Options from the View_Blog module actions menu.

Click the Update link. In the Custom Image URL. http://www. . 2. enter the URL here.g.com/myimage. 4. Click on an entry title to view an entry in full. Enabling Comment Avatars All Users Viewing All Recent Entries How to view all recent blog entries.domain.l Custom: Enter a complete URL to the image. 1. This displays all recent entries in the Recent_Entries module. Click the View All Recent Entries link on the Blog_List module. E.jpg  i. if Custom was selected at the above field.

Viewing Blog Entries by Tags Viewing Blog Entries for a Month How to view all of the blog entries made during a month on the Blog module. Click on the [Month/Year] link below the calendar. 1. . Any months when a blog entry has been made are listed on the Blog_Archive module in the Monthly list below the calendar. 1. This module displays a list of all of the existing tags with the number of each blog entry associated with each tag. This displays associated blog entries results are displayed in the View_Blog module. 2. Go to the Blog_Tag module. Results are displayed in the View_Blog module. 2.All Recent Blog Entries Displayed Viewing Blog Entries by Tags How to view all of the blog entries that have been associated with a tag. Click on a linked [Tag Name]. Go to the Blog_Archive module.

1. l 3. This displays the related blog entries in the View_Blog module. Locate the required month using the Calendar as follows: l Go to the Previous Month: Click the < button located in the top left corner of the calendar.Viewing entries for the month/year Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date How to view all of the blog entries made on a selected date on the Blog module. 2. . Go to the Blog_Archive module. Select the required date. Tip: Days with blog entries are shaded gray on the calendar. Go to the Next Month: Click the > button located in the top right corner of the calendar. the current day is shaded yellow. Viewing all blog entries for a date Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog How to view the recent blog entries for a single blog in the Blog module.

3. the names of all public child blogs are now displayed. This displays the search results in the Recent_Entries module which is titled Search Results. Click the Search button. rag doll).g. 2. Optional. or select a blog name to restrict the search to that blog. link to read the post. If the blog is a parent blog. . select All Blogs to search all the blogs. Click the [Blog Name] link. 4. Click the Read More. In the text box. 2. 5.g. enter one or more keywords (E. doll toy) or a phrase (E.. 6. Go to the Search_Blog module. 1. In the drop down box. Note: Do not separate keywords by punctuation. Results are displayed in the blog in the View_Blog module. click on the name on a child blog to limit results to that child blog.. Go to the Blog_List module. Select either Keywords or Phrase. Searching Blogs How to search one or all blogs for a phrase or key word using the Blog module. 3.1.

E. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". Click the Comments (1) link to the bottom left corner of the blog entry. This displays the post in full with all related comments displayed below. Comments (0) represents no (0) comments. whilst Comments (8) indicates eight (8) comments. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. Tip: The Comments link beside each blog entries indicates the number of approved comments for that entry. Locate the required blog entry. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". . Note: You may not be authorized to view blog comments.g.Search Results Display In The Recent_Entries module Viewing Blog Comments How to view comments associated with a blog entry on the Blog module. 1.

Viewing Blog Comments Viewing Recent Comments How to view recently added blog comments using the Blog module. Click on the title of a comment to view it in full. Go to the Recent _Comments module. 1. This displays the blog entry associated with the selected comment below. . 2.

Viewing Recent Comments .

Adding a Blog Comment (Authenticated Users) How to add a blog entry comment on the Blog module as an authenticated user. your user name will include a link to this Web site. your username (as set in your profile) is displayed. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. This displays the comment entry section. In the Your Name text box. If the Your Email field is displayed. 5. Click the Comments link in the bottom right corner of the View_Blog module. Optional. 1. You can edit your address if desired. it displays the email address entered on your profile. Optional. 4. Edit your name if desired. You can edit your email address if desired. When your comments display. If the Your Website field is displayed. This email will be used to show your Gravatar. Locate the required blog entry. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". 3. it displays the Web site entered on your profile. . "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". may require approval or may use the CAPTCHA security code. This is the name included on your comments. Note: Comments may be disabled.

If comments require approval a dialog box reading "Your comment MUST be approved by the blog owner BEFORE it is displayed on the web site. . Optional. enter the displayed security code. 7. In the Comment text box. 9. Optional. 8. Note: Editing of this field may be disabled.6. 11. In the Title text box. 10. Click the OK button. If approval isn't required. Do you wish to save your comment now?" is displayed. edit the comment title. the comment is now displayed below the entry. Click the Add Comment link. enter your comment. In the Security Code text box. Optional. Note: Basic HTML formatting may be permitted.

"Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". . Locate the required blog entry. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2.The Approved Comment Displays Below The Post Adding a Blog Comment (Unauthenticated Users) How to add a blog entry comment on the Blog module. Click the Comments link located bottom left corner of the View_Blog module. may require approval or may use the CAPTCHA security code. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". This displays the comment entry section. Note: Comments may be disabled. 1.

enter your comment. 7. enter an email address to be used to show your Gravatar. Optional. Note: This field may not be displayed. 9. Optional. Note: Editing of this field may be disabled. enter your Web site address. your user name will include a link to this web site. In the Your Website text box.3. Note: Basic HTML formatted may be permitted. enter the displayed security code. edit the comment title. Optional. In the Comment text box. In the Security Code text box. If the Your Email text box is displayed. 4. Optional. 6. enter your name. In the Title text box. Click the Add Comment link. . 8. When your comments are published. In the Your Name text box. 5.

If the comment doesn't require approval it will be displayed on the View_Blog module below the related post. Tip: As an unauthenticated user you are unable to delete or edit your comments. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. Locate the required blog entry. Optional. 3. Editing Your Comments How to edit comments you added to a blog entry on the Blog module. 1. this displays the message "Your comment MUST be approved by the blog owner BEFORE it is displayed on the web site. Note: You can only edit your comments if you were logged in when adding them and if you are currently logged in. Do you wish to save your comment now?" 11. Click the Comments link to the bottom left corner of the blog entry. If comments require approval. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". This displays the post in full with all related comments displayed below. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". This displays the comment in the comment entry section below.10. . Click the Edit button or the Edit link beside the comment to be edited. Click the OK button.

. enter the displayed security code. 5. 6.4. Optional. Click the Update Comment link. Edit the comment as required. In the Security Code text box.

Yahoo. Technorati. Digg. and DotNetKicks. The following social web sites are included on the toolbar: Delicious. If comments require approval a dialog box reading "Your comment MUST be approved by the blog owner BEFORE it is displayed on the web site. Click the OK button to confirm. Click the Comments link in the bottom right corner of the View_Blog module. Click the Delete button or the Delete link. This displays the post in full with all related comments displayed below. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". 1. If approval isn't required. StumbleUpon. . Locate the required blog entry. 8. Newsvine. Deleting Your Comments How to delete comments you added to a blog entry on the Blog module. Optional. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". Facebook. Google. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. Note: Social Bookmarks may be disabled. Click the Comments link to the bottom left corner of the blog entry.7. 1. Live Bookmarks. Do you wish to save your comment now?" is displayed. Editing Your Comments Adding Social Bookmarks How to add a social bookmark comment relating to a blog entry on the Blog module. Note: You can only delete your comments if you were logged in when adding them and if you are currently logged in. 3. Locate the required blog entry. the edited comment is displayed below the entry.

3. 4. Your blog is now displayed in the View_Blog module. Click on an icon to go to the related web site where you can login and add your bookmark. Bloggers Blogging Viewing Your Blog How to view your blog on the Blog module. . 1. Click the View My Blog link on the New_Blog module. This displays the Social Bookmark toolbar directly below the blog entry.

Viewing Your Blog Adding an Advanced Blog Entry How to add a blog entry including all optional settings using the Blog module. 4. In the Entry Date (local time) text box. If Child Blogs are disabled or if you prefer using categories for blogs. edit the date and time for this blog post if you want it to display at a date and time other than the current one when this entry is published. This opens the Add Blog Entry page. select which blog this entry will be added to. 2. enter a summary of the blog entry. use the Categories field below. Note: This field may be optional and may allow HTML. . In the Summary Editor/text box.Click on blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Add Blog Entry from the View_Blog module actions menu. Optional. See "Configuring Blog Entry Summary" 6. Click the Add Blog Entry link on the New_Blog module . 3. At Parent Blog. In the Blog Editor.OR . In the Title text box. enter your blog post. enter a title for this blog post. 1. 5.

check the categories related to this blog. Note: This field includes an auto-complete option so when you begin entering a tag. enter one or more tags for this blog separated by a comma ( . buttons with matching tag names appear to the right of the text box enabling you to choose one of those existing tags. At Categories. . 8.toys.7. if all or part of the word being entered already exists as a tag. ) E. dolls. Optional. In the Tags text box.g. Optional.

.

Click the Upload button. At Picture. Go to the Upload Options section. b. Click the Upload button. c. . b. d. button. d.9. l To add an attachment to this blog post: a. Repeat the above 3 steps to add additional attachments.. 10. In the Alt Text text box.. enter the alternative text for this attachment. At Attachment. The attachment is now displayed in the Blog field Editor and is listed in the Linked Files section below.. Click the Upload button. Repeat the above 2 steps to delete additional files.. c. This displays the message "Are you really sure to delete the file?" b. Repeat the above 3 steps to add additional images. Optional. The image is now displayed in the Blog field Editor and is listed in the Linked Files section below. Click the OK button to confirm. l To add an image to this blog post: a. In the Alt Text text box. click the Browse. a. button. Optional. enter the alternative text for this image. click the Browse. c. Click the Delete File button beside any file that should not be included in this post. Maximize the Linked Files section.

11. At Display Copyright notice at the bottom of your entry. Click the Save As Draft link to save this entry for later publication . l c. a. The entry is now displayed to you in the Most Recent Blog Entries module. this will display the default Copyright message "Copyright ©[Current Year] [Username/Display Name]" (E. At Allow users to comment on this entry (overrides Blog Setting).OR .g.OR .Click the Save And Publish link to publish this entry now. In the Trackback URL text box enter the trackback URL of another blog. Copyright 2010 Rose Booth) which you can choose to edit. . Optional. select from these options: l Check the check box to display a copyright notice for this entry. If checked.Uncheck to use the Blog Settings for this blog. It will be visible to others only if it is published and in a public blog. Uncheck the check box for no copyright notice. check the check box to enable authenticated users to add comments to this blog entry . b. Go to the Entry Options section. 12.

3. 4. 2. This opens the Add Blog Entry page. enter a summary of the blog entry. This topic excludes all optional settings.OR . See "Configuring Blog Entry Summary" 5. 1. Note: This field may be optional and may allow HTML. enter a title for this blog post. At Parent Blog. . In the Summary Editor/text box.Adding a Blog Entry Adding a Basic Blog Entry How to add a basic blog entry using the Blog module. use the Categories field below. Click the Add Blog Entry link on the New_Blog module . In the Title text box.Click on blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Add Blog Entry from the View_Blog module actions menu. enter your blog post. In the Blog Editor. select which blog this entry will be added to. If Child Blogs are disabled or if you prefer using categories for blogs.

.

. It will be visible to others only if it is published and in a public blog. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". Adding a Blog Entry Editing a Blog Entry How to edit a blog entry. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. Click the Edit Entry link. This task can be performed by bloggers on their own blogs and by Administrators on all blogs. 1. The entry is now displayed to you in the Most Recent Blog Entries module.Click the Save And Publish link to publish this entry now.6. Click the Save As Draft link to save this entry for later publication .OR . Locate the required blog entry. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date".

Edit one or more fields as required. Click the Save link. See "Adding a Basic Blog Entry" 4.3. .

or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. This task can be performed by bloggers on their own blogs and by Administrators on all blogs. Locate the required blog entry. Click the Edit Entry link. .Saving an Edited Blog Entry Publishing a Blog Entry How to publish a draft blog entry using the Blog module. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". 1.

Click the Save and Publish link. .3.

. Click the Edit Entry link. 1. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". Locate the required blog entry. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". This task can be performed by bloggers on their own blogs and by Administrators on all blogs. This allows the entry to be removed from the web site without deleting it. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2.Saving and Publishing a Draft Blog Entry Unpublishing a Blog Entry How to take a blog entry offline using the Blog module.

This displays the message "This entry is still a draft: it will not be visible to readers until it is published. Click the Save and Take Offline link.3. Other users will not be able to see it any longer. This displays the message "This will save your changes and take the post offline." . Do you wish to continue?" 4. Click the OK button to confirm.

5. . Click the Cancel link to return to the module.

"Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". Click the Edit Entry link. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. 1. Locate the required blog entry.An Unpublished Blog Entry Deleting a Blog Entry How to delete a blog entry from the Blog module. . This task can be performed by bloggers on their own blogs and by Administrators on all blogs.

This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 4. Click the OK button to confirm. Click the Delete link located at the base of this page.3. .

In the Blog Options section. Click the Create My Blog link on the New_Blog module . In the Title text box. This title is displayed in the Blog_List module. This opens the Create New Blog page. b. See "Enabling Users to Create Blogs" 1. complete these settings: a.Deleting a Blog Entry Creating Your Blog Creating a Parent Blog (Create My Blog) How to create your first blog using the New_Blog module. enter a title for the blog. Each of your blogs can be set as either public (can be viewed by others) or private (only you can view private blogs). . In the Description text box. This blog will be a parent blog under which you can create multiple child blogs. enter a description of the content of your blog. 2. Note: Only authorized users can create blogs.Select Create Blog from the Blog_List module actions menu.OR .

The blog name is now listed in the Blog_List module and the blog is displayed in the View Blog module.e. You can now add your first blog entry. . Click the Update link. Uncheck the check box to set this blog as private. At Make This Blog Public. They cannot be viewed by any other user including Page Editors and Administrators. select from these options: l Check the check box to make this blog viewable to all users who are authorized to view this module. Private blogs can only be viewed by the blog owner. l 3. Optional.c. I.

click the Add button. In the Child Blogs section (located at the base of this page). This opens the Edit Blog page. This displays the Create New Child Blog page. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module . 1. Note: A parent blog must first be created before a child blog can be added.The newly created blog Related Topics: l See "Adding a Basic Blog Entry" See "Creating a Child Blog" l Creating a Child Blog How to create a public or a private child blog using the New_Blog module. . 2.OR .Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu. Child blogs may be disabled and replaced with categories.

6. enter a description of the content of your blog. This title is displayed in the Blog_List module. select from these options: l Check the check box to make this blog viewable to all users who are authorized to view this module. Adding a blog. They cannot be viewed by any other user including Page Editors and Administrators. l 4.e. In the Description text box. In the Blog Options section. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. In the Title text box. Private blogs can only be viewed by the blog owner. Uncheck the check box to set this blog as private. This blog is set as public. At Make This Blog Public. I. Optional. This returns you to the Edit Blog where the child blog is now listed in the Child Blogs list. enter a title for the blog. Optional. Click the Update link.3. c. complete these settings: a. . 5. Click on the name of the parent blog on the Blog_List module to view the child blog. b.

. 2.The child blog Related Topics: l See "Creating a Parent Blog (Create My Blog)" See "Enabling/Disabling Child Blogs" l Managing Your Blog Editing Blog Title and Description How to edit the title and description of a single blog on the Blog module. This can be performed by bloggers on their own blog and by Administrators on any blogs. edit the blog title.OR . 3. 1. This opens the Edit Blog page. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module . Click the Update link.Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu. In the Title text box. edit the blog description. 4. In the Description text box.

3. enter an email address.OR . 2.Blog Title and Description displayed on the Blog Enabling/Disabling Blog Syndication How to enable or disable syndication of your blog. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module .OR .Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu.Uncheck the check box to 4. Go to the Syndication Options section. 5. At Syndicate this blog. . Click the Update link. In the Use this email for the "ManagingEditor" RSS text box. This can be performed by bloggers on their own blog and by Administrators on all blogs. check disable it. This opens the Edit Blog page. the check box enable syndication . 1.

This opens the Edit Blog page.OR . Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module . Go to the Twitter Integration section.RSS Button displays on Syndicated Blogs on the View_Blog module RSS Button displays beside Syndicated Blogs on the Blog_List module Related Topics: l See "Configuring RSS Settings for Blogs" Integrating With Twitter How to configure a single blog to tweet when a blogger posts a new entry. 1. 2. This can be performed by bloggers on their own blog and by Administrators on any blogs. .Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu.

Available template tokens: l {title}: Displays the title of the blog entry {url}: Displays a URL link to the blog entry l Twitter Integration Managing Blog Comment Options How to enable/disable and configure blog comments for a single blog on the Blog module. 1.Leave blank to use your standard password. Go to the Comment Options section and set any of these options settings: 3. This can be performed by bloggers on their own blog and by Administrators on any blogs.OR .OR .Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu. edit the template of the tweets.OR . the check box to enable . Optional.3.OR . At Approval for user comments required. In the Tweet Template text box. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module .uncheck the check box to 4. At Tweet When I Post A Blog. This opens the Edit Blog page. enter your new twitter password . The default template is: Blogged: {title} - {url} 7. Optional. check this check box if comments by authenticated users require approval before being published . enter your twitter username. In the Password text box. 2. check disable. 6. Click the Update link.Uncheck to publish these comments without approval. In the Twitter Username text box. 5. .

l l 7. At Comments by Unauthenticated Users. Disallow: Select to disallow unauthenticated users from adding comments.OR . At Comments by Registered Users. select for these options: l Allow: Select to allow registered users to add comments. At Trackback Comments.4. Click the Update link.Uncheck the Managing Blog Comment Options . Comments must be approved by the blog owner or an Administrator before they are displayed. At Send mail notification after comment and trackbacks are posted. l l 6. Comment approval isn't required. Comments must be approved by the blog owner or an Administrator before they are displayed. Disallow: Select to disallow registered users from adding comments.OR . Comment approval isn't required. Comments must be approved by the blog owner or an Administrator before they are displayed. check check box to disable. At Use CAPTCHA for comments. Disallow: Select to disallow trackback comments. Require Approval: Select to allow registered users to add comments. 8. 9. l l 5. select for these options: l Allow: Select to allow trackback comments.Uncheck the check box to disable mail notification. Require Approval: Select to allow unauthenticated users to add comments. check the check box to enable email notification when comments and trackbacks are posted to this blog . select for these options: l Allow: Select to allow unauthenticated users to add comments. Comment approval isn't required. Require Approval: Select to allow trackback comments. the check box enable CAPTCHA .

2. 1. This link can be used after the Friendly URL's setting has been changed for the site.Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu. 4.Uncheck Managing Trackback Options Regenerating Blog Permalinks How to regenerate all permalinks on a single blog using the Blog module.OR . 4. 2. Regenerating Blog Permalinks Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling Use Friendly URL's" . Click the Regenerate Blog Permalinks link. Go to the Trackback Options section. Click the Update link. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module . 3. check the check box to disable. Go to the Regenerate Blog PermaLinks section to view the URL.OR . This opens the Edit Blog page. 1. the check box to enable . This can be performed by bloggers on their own blog and by Administrators on any blogs.Managing Trackback Options How to enable or disable trackback auto discovery for a single blog on the Blog module. At Trackback Auto Discovery (Client Mode). This opens the Edit Blog page.OR . This can be performed by bloggers on their own blog and by Administrators on any blogs. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module . Click the Cancel link to return to the module.Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu. 3.

Go to the Date and Time Options section.Setting Blog Date. 4. select your preferred date or date/time format. culture (language) and date format on a single blog on the Blog module. This opens the Edit Blog page. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module . 2. 6. This can be performed by bloggers on their own blog and by Administrators on any blogs. At Time Zone. 1. select your culture (language).OR . Time and Culture Options How to set the time zone. Blog Date and Time displayed on the View_Blog module . 5. At Culture. 3.Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu. At Date Format. select your time zone. Click the Update link.

uncheck the check A Blog Set as Public .OR . Click the Update link. Public blogs are visible to all users authorized to view the View_Blog module. 3. Go to the Blog Options section. This opens the Edit Blog page. At Make this blog public. Private blogs are only visible to the blog owner. 4. the check box to set this blog as public . check box set it as private. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module .Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling a Language" Setting Blog Visibility (Public or Private) How to set a blog as either private or public. 2. as such they cannot be viewed by either Page Editors or Administrators.Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu.OR . 1.

Rosie Select Full Name to display your first name and last name.Setting a Bloggers Identity How to set a blog to display either the blogger's user name or full name as the blog author using the Blog module. Click the Update link. This opens the Edit Blog page. At When Displaying Your Identity Use. E. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module . E. This can be performed by bloggers on their own blog and by Administrators on any blogs.g. Go to the Blog Options section. 2. This is the default option. Rose Booth l 4. Tip: The name displayed at the Author field at the top of your blog is always your Display Name as set on your profile. 1. 3. select from these options: l Select User Name to display your user name. .Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu.g.OR .

This can be performed by bloggers on their own blog and by Administrators on any blogs. Go to the MetaWeblog Options section to view the URL. 2. Setting MetaWeblog Options .Blog Identity as displayed on the View_Blog module Setting MetaWeblog Options How to view the URL to use to connect to your blog using a MetaWeblog enabled client such as Windows Live Writer or Word 2007. Click the Blog Settings link on the New_Blog module .OR . Change the tabid parameter as needed if this blog appears on a different tab.Click the blog name on the Blog_List module and then select Edit Blog Settings from the View_Blog module actions menu. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. 3. This opens the Edit Blog page. 1.

See "Blog Settings (Bloggers)" for details on enabling comments and comment options. Click the Approve button or the Approve link. Click the Comments (1) link. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". however you can edit or delete it. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. This task can be performed by bloggers on their own blog as well as by the Administrator on all blogs. Locate the required blog entry. .Managing Comments Approving a Blog Comment How to approve blog comments on the Blog module. 3. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". Tip: Bloggers can enable a notification email to be sent when comments are posted which helps you know where to locate comments requiring approval. Note: You cannot undo approval for a comment. 1.

Click the Comments (1) link. 1. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". 3. Locate the required blog entry. The comment is now displayed in the Comment text box below. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. Deleting a Blog Comment How to delete a comment associated with a blog entry in the Blog module. Click the Edit button or the Edit link beside the comment. Click the Update Comment link. This task can be performed by bloggers on their own blog or by the Administrators on all blogs. edit the comment. . "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month".Editing a Blog Comment How to edit a comment associated with a blog entry on the Blog module. 4. In the Comment text box. 5. This task can be performed by bloggers on their own blog or by Administrators on all blogs.

Click the Comments (1) link. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". This task can be performed by bloggers on their own blog or by Administrators on all blogs. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". 3. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. Click the Delete button or the Delete link beside the comment to be deleted. 1. or "Viewing Recent Entries for a Single Blog" 2. Click the Comments (1) link. Repeat Step 3 to delete additional comments from this blog entry. Deleting all Unapproved Comments How to delete all unapproved comments associated with a blog entry in the Blog module.1. Locate the required blog entry. This displays the comments associated with the selected entry. 4. All unapproved comments display the Approve link. Locate the required blog entry. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Single Date". This displays the comments associated with the selected entry. "Viewing Blog Entries for a Month". .

aspx . Module Version: 01. Delete all unapproved comments link located above all the comments associated with this SuperUsers Troubleshooting: Incorrect Blog By Month Results Friendly URL's must be enabled by the Host for this DNN installation to ensure correct results are displayed in the View_Blog module when a user clicks a month/year link on the Blog_Archive module to view the related blogs.dotnetnuke. A range of basic formatting tools are provided which enable chat members to format the text of their messages as well as send Smiley's.01 Minimum DNN Version: 04.com/Products/Development/Forge/ModuleChat/tabid/965/Default.00.3.06. See "Enabling/Disabling Use Friendly URL's" Chat About the Chat Module The Chat module enables multiple users to chat with one another in real time. The module has a unique set of module permissions enabling the Administrator to set the roles and/or users that are permitted to join the chat.02 The Chat Module Project Links l Project Home: http://www. Click the entry.

If you are authorized to join the chat. If the read only message is displayed. try logging in to see if you have role access.com/Community/Forums/tabid/795/forumid/133/scope/threads/Default. Your message will now appear in the chat room. 1. 3. the Chat module will display the message [[username] Joined] inside the chat room when you go to the page where the Chat module is located. 2. Enter your message.codeplex. Click inside the text box below the chat room. .com/workitem/list/basic l Chat Members Chatting in the Chat Room How to join a chat and add your message to the Chat module. 4. If you are not authorized to join the chat the Chat module will instead display the message [[username] Is Reading]. Click the Send button.aspx Issue Tracker: http://dnnchat.dotnetnuke.l Support Forum: http://www.

Formatting your Chat Message How to format your message text before sending it on the Chat module. click the Bold button. l To italicize text. . Click on one of the following buttons to choose your formatting: l To bold text. 1. Note: Formatting can be disabled under module settings. click the Italic button.

l To underline text. l To change text size. click the Subscript button. l To set text as a hyperlink. click the Hyperlink button. . l To add a strike through text. mouse over the Size button and select a text size. click the Strikethrough button. click the Underline button. l To set text as subscript.

Move your cursor to the end of the text box. . 3.Click the Settings button. Click the Send button. check each role that is able to participate in the chat on this Chat module. 4. Go to the Permissions tab. Repeat steps 1-2 to add additional text formatting. In the Username text box.OR . enter the username of a user who is able to participate in the chat. In the Join Chat column. click the Add link and then check the check box beside their username. 3. l To set text as superscript.l To set text color. Select Settings from the module actions menu . mouse over the Color button and select a color. 2. 1. Enter your text. 4. click the Superscript button. Your message will now appear in the chat room. 2. Settings Setting Chat Permissions How to set the roles and users that are authorized to join the chat in the Chat module. 5.

.

11. Select the Chat Settings tab.OR . enter the text to display when a user enters the chat. In the Display Capacity text box. . The default value is [left]. 7. The default class is Normal. Click the Update link.Uncheck the check box 5. 4. enter the text that displays when a user's message is displayed. In the Height text box.Click the Settings button. 9. enter the Css class to be used for messages. enter the text to display when a user enters the chat. In the Sender CSS Class text box. The default class is NormalBold.OR . Select Settings from the module actions menu . enter the Css class to be used for your messages. 10. In the Entered Message text box. check to disable. At Allow Formatting. enter the maximum number of messages to be displayed in the chat room. 1. In the Message CSS Class text box. enter the height of the chat window. 2. Setting Chat Formatting and Styles How to set the formatting and style settings for the Chat module. In the Usertext text box. The default value is [entered]. the check box to enable text formatting . 8. 3. 6. {0} displays the user's username. Click the Update link. In the Exited Message text box.5. The default value is {0} says.

Select the Chat Settings tab. In the Polling Time text box.OR . 5. . enter the time in milliseconds that new messages will be checked for. 1. 4.Click the Settings button. In the History Capacity text box. 3. 2. enter the maximum number of messages to be kept on the server. Select Settings from the module actions menu . Click the Update link.Setting Chat Formatting and Styles Setting Chat Room Speed and History How to set the speed of the chat room and the history of messages.

00 Minimum DNN Version: 06. services and access to content on the site. assign roles. and sell products.00.Setting the Chat Room Speed and History Commerce About the Commerce Module The Commerce module (titled Pro-Commerce) is a lightweight.00 .00. yet extremely powerful module that allows DNN sites to process payments. Only available in DotNetNuke Professional Edition Module Version: 06.

Check the check box for to each payment type you want to enable. 4. Select Control Panel from the module actions menu. If you select either Bank Transfer. you will see the Dashboard.The Commerce Module Configuring the Commerce Module How to configure the commerce module. you will need to configure the Credit Card Payment Provider section below. Once you have entered the control panel. 2. you will need to complete the PayPal details section. If you select one of the four credit card types. . 3. 1. If you select PayPal. Select Options & Settings from the left hand panel. Other and Purchase Order these options all require manual payment processing. Click the Payment Options tab where you can configure the payment options.

net.DE. Required. Click the Products link on the left hand panel to open the Products page. Go to the Credit Card Payment Provider section.dll 6. French . This information will come directly from the PayPal Web site. In the PayPal URL text box. Go to the PayPal Details section.JP. This information will come directly from the PayPal Web site.5. Chinese . 10. enter your PayPal ID.AU. English . In the Language text box.FR. Click the Save button to save these payment options. 8. 9. c. German .EN. Japanese .net/gateway/transact. In the Name text box. Spanish . .ES. enter the two letter language code for the language to be used. Italian .authorize. Now that you can process payments. enter the name of your product. b. enter the PayPal URL you want to use for processing. By default the Assembly.net account. In the Account ID text box. you need something to sell. you will need to enable Test Mode and change the Payment URL to https://test. The PayPal language codes are: Australian .CN. or United Kingdom – GB. Click the Create Product button. 7. a. Class and Payment URL fields are specific to authorize. You will need to enter the Login ID and Password/Key from your authorize. If you are using a sandbox account.IT.

Recommended. The module is ready to process purchases. In the SKU text box. At Active. Recommended. In the Price text box. 12. enter a Stock Keeping Unit which is a brief sequence of letters and numbers to help keep products unique and provide better reporting options. Required. 15. You will now see the Product Display view. 16. check the check box to set this product as available for purchase the check box to set this product as visible. 13. At Visible. Recommended. check 14.11. . Click the Exit button in the left hand panel. Click the Save link. enter a price for this product.

l l l l l Shopping Cart l Delete: Hovering over a product will cause a small gray X icon to display. Note: After clicking Buy Now. Name: The name of the product.Tip: Clicking the Buy Now button will add the “Test Product” to the Shopping Cart and begin the purchase process. If a details page was not entered when the product was created. the customer will need to enter values for any required product properties. Buy Now: Clicking this button will add the product to the shopping cart. the product name will not be a hyperlink. Page Link: Clicking on the name of a product will lead to the details page. Price: The amount the customer has to pay. l Product Group: Large bold letters display the name of the product group. Purchasing a Product An overview of the functionally available when purchasing a product and the purchasing process using the Commerce module. This value may be temporarily reduced with discounts. Clicking the icon will remove the product from the shopping cart. Product Display An overview of the details displayed for each product and how to select a product to purchase. Description: A short description of the product. .

Total: Total price of the product (Price X Qty) Back to Products: Clicking this button will return the customer to the Product Display view. Proceed to Checkout: Clicking this button will continue the purchase process. o l Properties: The values entered for the product's properties will be displayed below the name. after the product has been added to the cart. Email: The customers email. Name: The name of the product. The number can be adjusted by clicking the up and down arrows. l Price: The price of an individual product. Last Name: Entered by the customer. l l l l Billing & Shipping An overview of the Billing and Shipping page and how to complete the required fields: l Your Information: o o o First Name: Entered by the customer.l Qty: The quantity of the product being purchased. . Discount: Any discount that is automatically applied to the product price.

This will only appear if the product requires shipping. .l Billing Address: This will usually need to be the address on file with the customer's credit card company. Street: This must include the numerical address. o o o o Name: Enter the full name. o o l Shipping Address: An alternate address can be supplied if the product requires shipping. If this is left blank it will use the same address as the Billing Address. Region: This may be a state. City: The city where the customer resides. Country: Select a value from the drop-down list. The values in the drop down list will depend on the county selected below. and shipping is also enabled in the Options & Settings. Postal Code: Also known as Zip code. or other region.

l Review & Payment An overview of the Review and Payment page and how to complete the required fields. If additional products need to be added. This is the last chance to change quantities. l l .l Back to Products: Clicking this button will return to the Product Display view. If the customer wishes to cancel the order. Proceed to Payment: Clicking this button will continue the purchase process. they can delete all the products and be redirected to the Product Display view. and then click Apply. or delete products. click Back to Products. Any special instructions or comments?: A text area where the customer adds any additional information regarding the purchase. Apply Discount Code?: Enter any valid discount Coupon Codes. l Shopping Cart: Displays all products included in the order.

Process My Order: Clicking this button will complete the purchase process. l l l l l l Your Billing and Shipping Information: Information regarding the customer. but may not be recommended. Credit Card: Complete these fields: l l l l Name on Card: The name of the credit card holder as it appears on the card. Your Payment Information: Other: If the Other. shipping. and required for the product. This information was entered on the previous step. l l l l PayPal: Clicking Process My Order will redirect the customer to the PayPal website. Clicking the back button in the browser will work as well. Grand Total: The total price after tax. Discount: The total amount the price was reduced. However the seller must contact the customer. discounts and other fees have been calculated. l l .l Total Price: l Sub Total: The total before tax. Bank Transfer or Purchase Order options are selected. click Back to Products and begin again. Shipping: Applied if enabled. in order to get the payment information. Back to Products: Clicking this button will return to the Product Display view. Card Number: The credit card number. no payment information is required. shipping. Misc. discounts and any other miscellaneous fees. to complete the purchase. If there is an error. Expiration Date: Select the expiration date for the card. Tax: Automatically calculated based on Tax Rates defined in the control panel. CCV: The short 3 or 4 digit security code on the back of the credit card.: Miscellaneous fees.

File Downloads: Any files that were attached to a product are shown as hyperlinks below the name of the product. the Invoice numbers it is currently using may be conflicting with invoice numbers stored in the PayPal system from the last time the Commerce module was installed. you may need to download an additional module. If you have reinstalled Commerce at any point.com Q: How do I select a different Credit Card Payment Provider? A: This information will be available in the Wiki on www. This setting is found on the General tab of the Options & Settings page in the control panel. l FAQ's Frequently asked questions regarding the Commerce module. Changing the Order Number to a value higher than any previously used will avoid this issue. when the customer did not log in to PayPal yet? A: PayPal has a setting that prevents charging a customer twice for the same purchase.codeplex.Order Completion l Additional Instructions: The contents of the additional instructions tab in the product details is displayed below the name of the product.dotnetnuke. Q: How do I create a PayPal test account? . Q: Why does PayPal say the payment has already been completed. Q: How do I create a portal specific list for the List type product property? A: To create a portal specific list.com. One such module is available here: http://portallists.

Click the orange Sign Up Now button. so write this down. Add a bank account and a credit card. . Complete the required fields. 6. 3. Click Agree and Submit when finished. so choose something you will remember. You should use a valid email address. The email address is only used in the sandbox test area.com/ 2. Set the Account Type to Seller. 7. Locate the email and click the link to verify your email address. Login with the new account. 4. but not one associated with a live PayPal account.A: Complete the below tutorial: 1. PayPal will send an email to you. to make sure the account is "verified". Navigate to https://developer.paypal. Click Test Accounts. 5. The password will probably change when you reset the test account later. Click New Test Account: Preconfigured 8.

The email address should be different. Click Create Account. 10. This time you will configure the Buyer account. and the account balance should not be zero. click Preconfigured again.9. . After the system finishes creating the account.

. Copy the email address for the buyer account. or change the account balance. It is likely that PayPal added a bunch of numbers and _biz to the address. You should now see the two accounts listed. 12. click the Reset link next to the appropriate account.11. If at any point you need to create a new password.

In another browser tab.FR. English . or United Kingdom – GB. 16. 17. Italian . 23. 20. but do not logout of the Sandbox account. and confirm that the order processed correctly. Enter the control panel. 24. The PayPal language codes are: Australian . 21. Confirm that PayPal is selected as one of the Payment Options then click Save in the control panel.CN. Japanese . You should now see the usual Order Completed step in Commerce. 18. Viewing the Order Details > Post Purchase Log will show information about the transaction. Back on the PayPal site.ES. 25. At the Review & Payment step. . Exit the control panel.JP. Click Return to Your Name’s Test Store. The details of the purchase should be visible on the left side of the screen. 22. German . go to the Orders page.IT. You will need to remain logged in to https://developer. 27. navigate to the Commerce control panel > Options & Settings > Payment Options tab. You will be redirected to the PayPal Sandbox Test Site. select PayPal from the drop-down list. 15. Spanish . and begin a new purchase. The Language is to be entered using the PayPal language code. There should be an IPN Received entry if it processed correctly. Enter a value in the Language box in the Commerce control panel. Chinese .DE. Close the Sandbox Test Site window. 14. 26. check the radio button next to the buyer account and then click the Enter Sandbox Test Site button.EN.AU. Copy the URL then paste it in the PayPal URL box in the Commerce control panel. Click Pay Now. 19. French . Click Process My Order.com/ while doing any PayPal testing. Click Have A PayPal Account? Log in using the Buyer test account email and password. Paste the seller test account email address in the Account Id box in the PayPal Details section.paypal.13.

Create Invoice: opens the order creation page found on the Orders section. Top Products: This section is a running tally of the most successful products for the current month. 2. product name. This is based on the grand total of combined sales for each distinct product. month. This includes date. this section displays information about the customers who made the most recent purchases. 3. 4. showing the most important information.Control Panel Commerce Control Panel . The dashboard is divided into the six sections described below. and a link to the full details for each sale. grand total of the sale. The number of units sold for each product is also displayed. l l 5. quarter and year. . 1. Quick Links: This section allows the administrator to easily access some basic tasks in the control panel. Create Discount: opens the discount creation page found on the Discounts section. Recent Customers: Corresponding to the recent sales. l Add Products: opens the product creation page on the products section. Recent Sales: A snapshot of the most recent products sold processed by DNN Commerce.Dashboard The Dashboard section of the Control Panel of the Commerce module provides a simple heads-up-display regarding the current status of Commerce. Quick Stats: This section shows the total sales figures for the current day. the customer’s email and a link to the full customer details. This information includes date. the customer’s name.

Pending Orders: This section displays orders that have been initiated but not completed. Sort Order: Change the direction that the list is displayed. customer name. Rows: Select how many rows to display at once. l Status Choose to display only paid or only not-paid orders. order number. The order list will instantly display the filtered results of your search as you type. l l l Order Details: Clicking on a single order in the list will display the order’s details. grand total and payment status indicator. A single order has many details associated with it. Clicking on a single order will expand that order’s details. .Orders The Orders section of the Control Panel of the Commerce module provides a comprehensive list of all the order processed by DNN Commerce. time and date of purchase. Each grey box is a single order with an invoice number. Commerce Control Panel . Search: The search box allows you to enter a customer name. Order List: The order list shows the most recent orders processed by DNN Commerce. Sort Column: Change which value is used to sort the list. or grand total amount to filter the list. Search Options: Clicking the small lightning bolt icon to the right of the Search button will expand the search options.6. Purchases that have not received a payment are considered pending.

Date: The date and time of the purchase. l l l l Customer Information . Status: An optional detail. email. Source: The channel used to process the sale. Select one to designate that user as the sales representative responsible for the current order. clicking the down-arrow will show a list of available sales reps. web. (Example: Phone. other) Sales Rep: An optional detail.Order Information l Invoice: The invoice number for the purchase. This value is unique per purchase and can be used to track specific orders. clicking the down arrow will show a list of available statuses.

the New Customer tab can be used to create a new user to attach to the order. Credit Card. Authorization: The authorization code from the payment processor. l Method: The type of currency used. Other. this will show the last four digits of the credit card number Transaction ID: The transaction ID for the purchase. l l l Billing Address: The billing address for the customer. etc. and the option to add a new address. PayPal. If the customer does not exist as a DNN user.l Clicking on the name will lead to the customer’s details view. Clicking the pencil will display the currently available addresses. Clicking edit will display a screen used to select a customer to associate with the purchase. . l l Payment Details: A brief description of the payment information for the order. Last 4: If a credit card was used.

which email template was sent and other specific codes. The information displayed includes the timestamp of when the action occurred. l Clicking the pencil will display the Order Item Details which is used to modify properties of the product in the order. Selecting a product that does not currently exist in the order will add it. per unit price. Clicking the pencil will display the currently available addresses. the type of action. When creating an order it is important to complete as many fields as possible. Clicking the trash can icon will delete a product from the order. in addition to the drop down lists are used to add content. miscellaneous fees and the total price per product. Items Ordered List: Below the header is a list of the products included in the current order. The various Edit buttons and Add Items button. If one of these actions fails it will have a red X icon instead of the green check mark.Shipping Address: The shipping address for the customer. and the option to add a new address. The properties are the same as those listed in the product list. Create Order: Clicking the Create Order button on the order list will display a blank Order Details page. Clicking Add Items will display the Order Item Details. The note field will show error codes from the payment processors. This might be the same as the billing address. quantity purchased. . l l Post Purchase Log: The post purchase log is a list of the actions taken by Commerce after a customer completes a purchase. Listed here is the name of the product. and any additional information regarding the action. if it was successful or failed. with the addition of a notes field.

Products The Products section of the Control Panel of the Commerce module provides a comprehensive list of all the order processed by DNN Commerce. Create Product: Clicking the Create Product button will display a blank Product Details page.Commerce Control Panel . Clicking on an individual product will display the product details. The Products page allows you to view all existing products. Product Details . Click Save when all relevant information is entered. where the information about the new product is entered. the individual product details. Product List: The products page displays a list of all the available products. and create new products.

Shipping Fee: The amount that it costs to ship the item. l l l l l l l l l l . so entering a clear. Details Page: Enter a URL. The name of any product group that currently has products assigned to it will be visible to customers on the Product Display view. The product name on the Product Display view will become a hyperlink that directs the customer to the URL. l Edit Product Group: Enter the desired name of the new product group.) Description: A short summary of the products features. (As opposed to electronic distribution. Product groups are used to categorize similar products.l Group: Available product groups are in the drop down list. Visible: Toggle whether the product will be displayed on the Product Display view or hidden. Cost: The amount that it cost to produce the product. simple. The text you enter here will be displayed in large bold letters on the Product Display view. If there are none available. A product can be active. Requires Shipping: Toggle whether or not the product will need to be physically shipped. Disabled products cannot be sold. Taxable: Toggle whether the product requires a sales tax applied to it. including the protocol (http://). clicking the green + icon will display the Edit Product Group window. In that situation. that contains more information about the product. SKU: A SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) is a short. unique alphanumeric code used to keep track of different products. an alternative method such as a direct link or a custom action must be used to allow customers to purchase the product. concise title is appropriate. Price: The amount that you wish to charge customers who purchase the product. Active: Enabled or disable the product. but not visible. then click Save. This text will be shown on the Product Display view below the name of the product. l Name: The name of the product.

If no roles are added. the customer will be added to any DNN role added here. Any role that is added will be able to purchase the item. Custom Action: Enter the class name and assembly that contains instructions to carry out custom actions after a customer completes a purchase. Product Email Template: Select an email template that will be sent when a customer purchases the product. By default the email template should be Order Shipment Notification. Billing Type l l l l . Add To Roles: Select a role from the drop down list then click Add Role. When a customer purchases the product.Product Options l Allowed Roles: Select a role from the drop down list then click Add Role. it will be available to any user with permission to view the Product Display view.

Product properties are defined in the control panel. then the customer will be billed every 7 days. Properties: Product properties are descriptive attributes. l l Note: The interval. “Medium” and “Large”. units and occurrences work together to control the schedule of recurring payments. and during the purchase process.l One-time Payment: A typical situation where a customer pays once. and “10” are entered. not including the initial purchase. Enter a value between 7 and 365. on the same day of the month as the initial purchase. used to capture values from the customers. Select Months if you want the payment to occur after a specific number of months have passed. An example of a product property when selling a product: The property could be “Size”. then receives the product. Units: The specific length of the interval. the customer selects the value “Medium” from a list of “Small”. Recurring Payment: Used for subscriptions or products that require multiple payments from the customer. starting 7 days after the initial purchase. Example: If the values “Days”. until a total of 10 additional periodic payments are made. Enter a number between 1 and 9999. “7”. Occurrences: The number of times a customer is to be billed. . and then displayed during the purchase process. l l Interval: Select Days if you want the payment to occur after a specific number of days have passed.

Click and drag the small 0-9 icon to change the order of the list. Default Value: The value that will be entered into the property by default. View the FAQs section for information on creating portal specific lists. It may be the same value as the property name. Data Type: l l l Text: Used for a product property where the customer enters a text value. Enabled: Select No if you wish to hide the Profile Property from the customer during the purchase process. Medium. l Property Name: A short name for the product property. Example: Custom inscription on the product. Label: The localized value that will be displayed to the customer during the purchase process. l l l . The customer can delete or change the value during the purchase process. l Required: Choose whether or not the product property requires a value before the purchase can be completed. Input Validation: Use a REGEX value to control the values that are entered by the customer. Useful for less specific properties. List: Used when there is a distinct number of possible values and you only want the customer to select one. l Add Property: Clicking the Add Property button will display the Property Editor. Clicking the name of a property will display the Property Editor. Example: Size (values: Small.Property List: A list of existing properties for the product. Large) l l List Name: Select a portal specific list created previously.

or where to register would be common here. File: Use the file browser to select the file to upload. This name will be displayed to customers who purchase the product. Instructions such as where to download files. l File List: Files that have been previously uploaded are listed here. Clicking the small trash can icon will delete the file. Add File: Clicking Add File will display the Upload File interface. these instructions will be displayed after the customer completes their purchase.l Special Instructions: If enabled. l l . Date of Purchase: The file will only be available for download to customers who purchase after this date. Click Upload File when finished. l l Title: Enter the name of the file. l Downloads: These files are available to the customer after they complete their purchase. where to get support.

Commerce Control Panel . . Default Discounts are temporary price decreases that are automatically applied to specific products. Require Discount Code: l l l If Yes is selected. Discount Code: The alphanumeric code entered by the customer during the purchase process. enter all the information described below then click save. the discount will use a Coupon Code. Discount Details: Clicking on a discount in the list will display the discount details. l Description: A brief statement describing the discount. Create Discount: Clicking Create Discount will display an empty Discount Details page.Discounts The Discounts section of the Commerce module Control Panel includes two types of discounts. Coupon Codes can be applied during the purchase process to reduce the price of a product. The discount will not be applied until the customer enters the discount code in the box during checkout.

If you enter a value here. Add Restriction: Click the Add Restriction button to create a new discount restriction. Percent should be 0 (zero). If you enter a value here. Percent: The percentage value that should be discounted from the price.l If No is selected. End Date: The date when the discount code will no longer work. It will automatically reduce the price of applicable products. Max Use Total: Enter a number indicating how many times the discount code can be used by all customers combined. Start Date: The date when the discount becomes active. the discount will be a Default Discount. Enabled: Discounts that are not enabled will not reduce the price of a product. . A Specific Product Discount Restriction must be added in order to activate a Default Discount. Amount should be 0 (zero). Max Use Per User: Enter a number indicating how many times a particular customer can use the discount code. l Restriction Type: Select a type from the drop-down list. l Amount: The static value of currency that should be discounted from the price. l l l l l l Discount Restrictions Restriction List: Click the red X to delete a restriction.

Select a role from the drop-down list. and to enable/disable it. If a customer purchased the specified product in the time frame between the “After” date and the “Before” date. Sort Order: Change the direction of the sorted list. Click on a single discount to view the details. Specific Role(s): This restriction causes the discount to only be available to members of the specified role. and view their account and order information. Select the name of an existing product from the drop-down list. Multiple restrictions can be created to apply the discount to multiple products. l Search: Enter the name or code of a discount to filter the list. Enter a date range for qualifying purchases (MM/DD/YYYY or DD/MM/YYYY depending on locale). Products Purchased: This restriction causes the discount to only be available to customers who have previously purchased a specified product. l l l Commerce Control Panel .l Specific Product(s): This restriction causes the discount to only be applied to a specified product. l l Discount List: A list of available discounts. . Search Options: l l Active Only: Only display Active Discounts Sort Column: Change how the discounts are sorted. Rows: Specify how many rows to display. Select the name of an existing product. then they will be eligible for the discount.Customers The Customers page allows you to browse for customers.

Grand Total: The total amount they spent on the purchase. Clicking the Up or down arrows will collapse and expand the sections. Clicking an order number will display the order details. l Personal Information l Name: The customers first and last name. l Search: Enter the first few letters of a customer’s first name. The results should be displayed instantly. Date of Purchase: The date the purchases were made. Date Created: The date the customer was recorded in the system. Username: The username the customer chose to represent them.Customer List After searching. Display Name: The customers DNN Display Name. Expiration Date: The date when the user is no longer a member of the role. username or display name. l l l l l l Order History l Order Number: The invoice numbers of the customer’s previous purchases. . a list of customers will be displayed here. Email: The customers email address. User ID: The customer’s User Id. Effective Date: The date the user becomes a member of the role. Click on a single user to display additional details. This is designated by DNN when the user registers and cannot be changed. last name. l l l Security Roles: Roles are defined in DNN. o o o Role Name: The name of the role. Configuring Module Options & Settings How to configure the settings for the Commerce module. Customer Details: Clicking on the name of a customer will display their details. and used to control and group users.

when a purchase is completed. Roles to Notify: Select a role then click add role. Do you collect tax?: Toggle if sales tax needs to be added to purchases Do you charge shipping?: Toggle if a charge needs to be added to ship physical goods. Theme: Select a theme. Sales Reps: Select a role that contains existing users. Different themes affect the colors and styles of the Product Display view. Time Format: How times are displayed. These users can be specified as the sales representatives for orders. The members of any role that is selected will receive the Order Notification template. Date Format: How dates are displayed.l Order Number: The number of the most recent invoice. If no purchases have been made. any number entered will be the starting point for invoice numbers. l l l l l l l l l . Store Email: The email address that appears as the “From” address in outgoing email notifications. Order Sources: Comma separated values are used to define all the possible sources of a sale.

Other: Any type of payment not listed. Pending Payment: Sent to a customer when the purchase has not been completed due to a pending payment. Order Details: Sent to a customer after they complete a purchase. This type of payment requires manual interaction with the customer after the purchase has been completed. check or money order payment. o o o Payment Options l Payment Options Selection: Select one or more payment options that will be available to customers during the purchase process.l Email Templates o Order Notification: Sent to administrators and other specified roles when a purchase is completed. Additional configuration is described below. This option will require manual interaction with the customer to get the details of the bank accounts. Selecting this option will route the customer to the PayPal website after the purchase. This could include a cash. Bank Transfer: Direct electronic funds transfer. Purchase Order: A purchase order is a commercial document issued by a buyer to a seller. indicating types. and agreed prices for products or services the seller will provide to the buyer. l Visa: A common Credit Card MasterCard: A common Credit Card American Express: A common Credit Card Discover: A Common Credit Card PayPal: A popular online payment processor. New Customer: Sent to new customers that register during the purchase process. quantities. l l l l l l l .

net gateway.ES. Transaction Key: The unique key used to perform transactions.CN. authorize. Currency: The currency type used for transactions. PayPal and the other manual options can use the other currencies. or United Kingdom – GB. English . Spanish . By default it uses the authorize. o l l Assembly Name: Enter the name of the assembly that is located in your bin directory that will handle your payment processing. The default class points to authorize.net.net.FR.AU. Provided by the payment processor. The four credit card options processed by the default Credit Card payment provider. Credit Card Payment Provider: Information regarding the entity that will process credit card payments.l Enable SSL: Selecting this option will ensure that purchases are processed using SSL. which will not process actual real money transactions.IT. Language: The language desired for the PayPal page. Italian . German . o o o o o l PayPal Details o o o Account Id: The email address associated with your PayPal store. Japanese . Login ID: The ID used to authenticate with the payment provider. The Language is to be entered using the PayPal language code.EN.JP. Payment URL: The location of the payment provider gateway. Chinese . Test Mode: Set the module into Test Mode. Class Name: Enter the full name of the class that is within the assembly you specified above that will be used to process payments. Tax Rates . The PayPal language codes are: Australian .DE. French . will only process transactions using US Dollars. PayPal URL: The page that the customer will be directed to after the purchase is complete.

When a customer enters a value found in the qualifier column for a matching identifier. or any other parent page. . and Country. Delete: Click the red X to delete and existing option. Shipped. then click Save to create a new option. The values for City. State and Postal Zone must be the full name of the zone (Example San Mateo. State. enabling Administrators and the Host to view icons which link to the various Admin or Host pages respectively. the tax will be applied.00. l l l Order Status Options: These options are potential statuses for a purchase completed by a customer. Qualifier: Used to list a specific instance of the identifier zone. Options include City. Click the red X icon to delete a tax rate. Tax Rate List: A list of previously created tax rates. Module Version: 01. The module can be configured to display links to the child pages of the page it is located on.l Identifier: Used to specify when a specific tax should be applied. If the customer resides in an identifier zone. l l Console About The Console Module The Console module displays a list of icon links to site pages.00. l Edit: Click the pencil and paper icon to change the name of an existing option. The default options available are: Complete. The qualifier and percent rate are displayed. Canada and Japan) If multiple zones need to be taxed. Pending Payment. California. It is also located on the Admin and Host pages in the main menu. and Canceled. New: Enter a name in the text box. multiple tax rate entries must be created for each specific zone. Postal Code. This content module can be deployed on any page by authorized users. the tax will be applied. Rate: Enter the percentage value of the tax rate. CA and JP for United States. Processing. Note: The version number for this module does not update as it forms part of the DNN framework. 94402) The Country qualifier uses the country code (Example US.

select from the following: l Small Icons (16 px): Displays small 16 pixel icons. At Default Icon Size. See "Advanced Settings for New Pages" or "Advanced Settings for Existing Pages" 1. select from these options: l Check the check box to enable users to resize the default icon size. Tip: The default Small and Large Icons can be set for individual pages. Uncheck the check box to disable icon resizing.The Console Module on a Site Page Settings Configuring Console Settings How to configure the module settings which are specific to the Console module. This displays a drop-down box above the icons on the module. l 4. Select the Console Settings tab. 2. Large Icons (32 px): Displays large 32 pixel icons. 3.Click the Settings button. This removes the drop-down control. Select Settings from the module actions menu . At Allow Icon Resize. Leave this field blank to display all child pages for the current page.OR . l . At Show Children Of. select from these options: l Select a page display all child pages for that page. l 5.

In the Width text box. For example. The tooltip is the description which is shown in Detailed View. select from these options: l Enter a pixel width to set the width of this module. l 7. This removes the drop-down control. l 9. l 10. Uncheck the check box to hide this control. This displays a drop-down box above the icons on the module. enter 400 to display 2 columns of icons in the content pane. Click the Update link. page name and page description for each item. At Allow View Change. Uncheck the check box to hide the tooltip. select from these options: l Check the check box to display a tooltip when hovering over icons in Simple View. At Default View. l 8. At Show Tooltip. Detailed View: Displays an icon. select from these options: l Simple View: Displays an icon and page name for each item.6. select from these options: l Check the check box to enable users to change the default view. The Console Settings Page . Leave this field blank to allow the icons to expand horizontally.

thus making it easy for your users to look for and find documents according to areas of interest. and you install Document Library on a child portal.The Console module displayed with Large Icons and Detailed View Document Library About the Document Library Module The Document Library (also referred to as the Open-Document Library module) module enables users manage and share documents in a flexible. If you have child portals. You can however have 100 pages on your site each with an instance of the module.01.04. A wide range of settings allows you to configure each instance to display different information.03 Minimum DNN Version: 05.00 Features: ISearchable. There can be only one Document Library module per portal and only one instance of the module on any given page. it is considered an entirely separate library. The module offers the possibility to organize documents by physical Folder and by logical Categories. offering granular control over Folder and Document access. . intelligent way. Module Version: 04. Upgradable Important.

This displays the Add Folder section. This displays the Folder navigation tree. Important. to use an existing folder structure rather than create a library from scratch. . Multiple sub-folders (child folders) can be added beneath the parent category. Click the Folder 2. Only Administrators can perform this task. Alternatively. Click the icon in the toolbar. Click To Add To Root Folder link in the navigation tree. see "Importing a Library" 1.The Document Library Module Configuration Creating a Library from Scratch (Adding a Parent Folder) How to create a library from scratch by adding the first folder (also called the root folder) to the Document Library module.

3. go to the General tab. See "Configuring General Settings for Folders" 5. 6. See "Configuring Security Settings for Folders" . In the Add Folder section. In the Folder Name text box. Select the Security tab. At Role Security. check the check box beside each role which can access this folder and associated documents. enter the name of your root folder. 4.

Click the Update link. The root folder is now created. Tip: There is no Administrators role in the list of security roles. . Only Administrators can perform this task. Multiple sub-categories (child categories) can be added below the parent category. This is because Administrators and SuperUsers always have full rights to the library. Related Topics: l See "Setting User Security for Folders" Adding the Parent Category to Library How to create the parent category (also called root category) to the Document Library module.7.

just like the folder tree. Click To Add To Root Category link in the navigation tree. enter the name of your root category. icon in the toolbar. In the Category Name text box. In the Add Category section. See "Configuring General Settings for Categories" . Categories work similar to folders except for versioning and user level access rights and that you do not create a "physical" category in order to store a document in a category. Click the tion. Click the Category 2. a document belongs to a single folder.Like in a real library. 1. This displays the Add Category sec- 3. 4. Categories are represented as a hierarchy tree. but can belong to multiple categories. This displays the Category navigation tree. go to the General tab. and can be seen by clicking the Category icon in the toolbar.

Importing a Library How to build a library starting from a pre-existing set of directories and documents using the Document Library module. The root category is now created. 6. Select the Security tab. select the roles which can access categories and associated documents. then the documents in your pre-existing structure will have an extension added to it: for example a . This option allows you to automatically import both your directory/folder structure as well as the documents directly into the library. Tip: There is no Administrators role in the list of security roles. See "Configuring Security Settings for Categories" 7. If you do secure your files.5. At Role Security. Click the Update link. This is because Administrators and SuperUsers always have full rights to the library. Note: You can also opt to secure your files before synchronizing.

doc. especially if you are using the UNC Share option.OR . and the appropriate extension will be reinstated when the document is downloaded. write and modify permissions to the ASP.doc will be renamed document. the default home directory is created under the “<dnn root>/Portals” directory. you should copy or create your folder structure under the Home Directory of your portal. You can basically point the library to any path local to your computer or to a UNC Share. l Now that we know what we want to import. but you should check. the default directory would have the following route: <DNN virtual root>/Portals/0 In a child portal (named child). . or. In a default portal DNN installation.NET or Network Services user.Click the Settings button. here's how to import: 1.xsdl. folders are required to grant read. l Type Portal: When of type Portal. In a typical DNN installation.resx in order to prevent direct download. depending on the operating system you are using. a UNC Share or a local folder. This change is transparent to the user. Remember that in DNN. Note: This version of Document Library module allows the "root" folder of the library to be of type Portal or type UNC Share. as long as the ASP.NET/Network Services user has the appropriate read/write/change rights. To get started. Select Settings from the module actions menu . Your newly created folders will inherit these permissions from the parent folder you place them in (in the example Portals/0). the root directory will be located under the "Default Directory" of your DNN portal or child portal.document. if you choose the UNC Share option. the default directory would have the following route: <DNN virtual root>/Portals/child Type UNC Share: Support for UNC Shares is available through the Global Settings.

Optional. the folder may not have been fully synchronized yet. c. Select the required Root Folder from the drop-down list.2. My Documents. Select either Portal or UNC Share as discussed above. or by looking at the log. and the warning message is removed. the Database and the File System will be automatically Synchronized". a. 3.g. Click the Update link. This returns you to the Document Library main view. . Since the Synchronization process is asynchronous. At Root Folder. This displays the Unlocked button. Click on the Global Settings tab. This displays the message "Clicking this option will allow you to change the Root Folder. Once you update your changes. Click the Locked button to unlock the Root Folder field. b. you will know when the process is done. E. In this case a warning message is displayed. d. Under the folders you will be able to see the documents that have been added to the library. Click the OK button to confirm. Non admin users will get a much more discreet message. 4. set the following: a. By refreshing the page. You are now presented with the list of newly created folders.

See "Adding the Parent Category to Library". Optional. Note: The parent category must first be created by an Administrator. 2.An Imported Folder Structure Contributors Managing Categories Adding a Sub-Category How to add a sub-category (child category) to the selected category in the Open-Document Library module. This displays the Category navigation tree. Click the Category icon in the toolbar. Add Sub-Category. 1. Right-click on the required category and select .

This displays the new category in the category navigation tree. Configure the General and Security tab settings. E. the “Security” tab is not displayed. Adding a Sub-Category Editing Category Settings How to edit category setting such as category name. 4.g. See "Configuring General Settings for Categories" and "Configuring Security Settings for Categories". Note: Security tab is only visible to authorized users. If a user has edit rights but no security rights.3. Note: The available options are controlled by user permissions. Click the Update link. . parent category and security on the Document Library module.

4. Configure the General and Security tab settings. Tip: The parent category of a specific category can be also changed through drag & drop utility.1. Click the Category icon in the toolbar. Edit Category Settings from the drop-down menu. Click the Update link. This displays the Category navigation tree. Right-click on the required category and select 3. See "Configuring General Settings for Categories" and "Configuring Security Settings for Categories". 2. click the left button and drag the category to the chosen parent category. Just select the category you want to move. . Deleting a Category How to delete a category in the Document Library module.

Right-click on the required category and select Delete Category from the drop-down menu. This topic assumes you are currently adding or editing a category. This displays the category details in the Delete Category section. "Editing Category Settings" . 2. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to delete this Category and all of its SubCategories?" 4. Deleting a Category from the Document Library Module Configuring General Settings for Categories How to configure the General settings for categories in the Document Library module.1. This displays the Category navigation tree. Click the Delete link. 3. Click the Category icon in the toolbar. Click the OK button to confirm.

2. At Direct Access Only select from these options: l Check the check box to set this category as hidden from general view. [url format: xsfid=id&xsfk=key] ii. enter a unique key which will be required in order to access this "Direct Access Only” category. Adding this parameter to the URL will achieve the same results as setting the value of 'Restrict List to 1 Category' in the module settings. At Parent Category. this is the parameter to be added to the URL. and you only want to show the contents of this specific category (and all of its sub-categories). then you'll need to place both the xsfid parameter as well as a new key parameter in the URL. Optional. set the follow attributes to determine if and how a category can be accessed directly through a URL or though settings specifications: 4. If the category marked for direct view contains sub-categories. In the Category Access section. all sub-categories will also be visible. i. enter or edit name for the category. and you access the category through the 'Direct URL' method. If linking to this page through an external link. Configuring Category General Settings . At Category Direct URL the direct URL for this category is displayed. unless accessed directly through the 'Direct URL' (as set below) or through setting the value of 'Restrict List to 1 Category' in the module settings. l Uncheck the check box to enable access to all authorized users using the Navigation tree. At Direct Access Key. 3. select the parent category for the current category from the drop-down box. unless those sub-categories have also been marked for direct view as well.1. If you do add a key. then you'll need to place only the new key parameter in the URL. At Category Name. If you access the category through the 'Restrict List to 1 Category' method. Note: This setting is disabled for the parent category.

Configuring Security Settings for Categories How to configure the Security settings for categories in the Document Library module. Add: Enables users to add sub-categories to this category. At Inherit Security. Edit Security: Enables users to view the Security Tab when editing a folder and thereby assign security rights to the various roles. . check missions from its parent folder. The following options are available on the Security tab: 1. Check l the check box to set this category to inherit security per- the check box beside any of the below permissions for each role as required: View: Enables users to view the category in the navigation tree. Edit: Enables users to edit the category. There is no context menu associated with this right. This topic assumes you are currently adding or editing a category. l l l l Configuring Category Security Settings Managing Documents Adding a Document How to add documents to the Document Library module. This topic assumes you have already created a library. 2. Optional. Delete: Enables users to delete the category. This right only allows view access to the category and documents. See "Option 1: Creating a Library from Scratch".

This displays the Folder navigation tree. the corresponding folder structure will be created in the module. At File. 4.1. Click the Update link. the check box if you want to overwrite the file(s) if they 6. Option Two: Click on a folder to select it and then click the select the Upload Document section. Add Document(s) button. Optional. At Overwrite File(s). At Unzip File.. Note: that ASP. If the . See "Modifying Maximum Request Length" . Option One: Right-click on the required folder and then select down menu.NET limits the size of file uploads to 4 Megabytes. 5. it will be removed. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. After unzipping the uploaded . This displays 3. Optional. check already exist.zip file. click the Browse.zip package contains a structure of folders and sub-folders. button and then select the required file from your computer. check the check box if you are uploading a zip (*. Add Document(s) from the drop- 2.zip) file that you want to unzip..

At Expiration Date. c. If this folder is moderated a message reading "Moderated folder upload. . Optional.7. select a date when the document expires. 8. In the Description Editor. select each category this document is associated with. The selected date is highlighted gray. Click the OK button. b. enter a description of the document. In the Document Name text box. At Folder.Complete any of the following fields in the Edit Document section: a. To add document without adding any metadata. e. a. d. click the Cancel link and the document is now uploaded OR . All uploaded documents will be reviewed before being published" is displayed. modify the folder this document is located in. edit the document name if required. At Categories.

.f. the added file is displayed in the list of documents for that folder. Click the Update link. If the folder isn't moderated.

At Categories. 1.i. 3. This displays the Edit Document section where you can edit the following document properties. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. . Click the OK button. ii. If this folder is moderated a message reading "Moderated folder edit. Adding Documents to the Document Library Module Editing a Document How to edit a document which has been uploaded to Document Library module. select the categories you want to associate this document with. 2. Click the Edit button beside the required document. This displays the Folder navigation tree. In the Navigation tree. click on the required folder. Optional. At Folder. 5. select a new folder to store the document in. All edits will be reviewed before being published" is displayed. 4.

Also. i. All edits will be reviewed before being published" is displayed. . In the Description text box. 7. Click the OK button. If this folder is moderated a message reading "Moderated folder edit. enter or edit the document description. ii.6. If the folder isn't moderated. Click the Update link. This description can contain html and images if you want to. the added file is displayed in the list of documents for that folder. you always have the option not to display the description by going to the settings and uncheck the “display description” option for the document grid. Optional.

.Editing a Document Deleting a Document How to delete a document which has been uploaded to Document Library module.

Click the Delete link. 2. . Click the Edit button beside the required document. This displays the Edit Document window where you can edit the following document properties. click on a Folder to select it. 3. Click the OK button to confirm. This displays the Folder navigation tree.1. Tip: If the Delete link is disabled the file may be awaiting moderation. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to delete this Document?" 5. 4. In the Navigation tree. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar.

Deleting a Document Downloading a Document How to download the selected document to your local file system. .

On the toolbar. You’ll be asked to either open the document or to store it in a folder in Downloading a Document Re-Submitting a Document How to re-submit a document using the Document Library module. navigate to Tools > Moderate and then select My Items. 3. In the Filter Options section. apply one or more filters. Optional. 1. Click the Download your local file system. button. click on a Folder to select it. This displays the Folder navigation tree. See "Moderation Filter Options" 3. This is necessary when you receive notification from a moderator requesting you to revise and then re-submit a previously uploaded document for approval. Edit one or more document fields and then click the Update link. Click the Re-Submit link: Select to re-submit the file for moderation. This topic explains how to edit the document properties and re-submit it. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. . Click the Review button beside the required file. 2. 5. This opens the Edit Document section. In the navigating tree. Optional. 2. 4.1.

Re-Submitting a Document Viewing Statistics How to view the comprehensive set of statistics tools using the Document Library module. [by Folder]: Select to view folder statistics. Keep track of folder. category and document access as well as see who is clicking on folders and categories and downloading documents. l . All statistics can be filtered by user profile and access dates. as well as other folder or category specific parameters. but keep in mind that the same principles apply to Folder and Category statistics. 1. Mouse over l Tools > Statistics in the navigation toolbar and select from these options: [by Documents]: Select to view document statistics. Note: In the below examples we will look at Document statistics.

At User Name. At End Date. To select a user. Folder Statistics or Category Statistics pane according to your selection and display a list with a summary of all download activity. In the Filter Options section. click the Calendar button and select the first date statistical information was retrieved. This displays their c. See "Working with the Calendar" e. ii. 3. select which folder you want to restrict results to. At Start Date. Click the View Statistics link to view items matching the selected filters. button to the right of their name. Note: This option is only available when viewing Document Statistics. click the Select User username in the User Name text box.l [by Category]: Select to view category statistics. This opens either the Document Statistics. See "Working with the Calendar" d. Use the A-Z links across the top to filter users by the first letter of their username. click on the User button to select a single user's items to view. apply one or more filters from these options: a. i. click the Calendar button and select the last date statistical information was retrieved. . b. 2. At Folder. Optional. This opens the User Picker window where you can view a list of the existing users.

Enabling Document Tracking How to enable or disable tracking of a document which has been uploaded to Document Library module. button.4. To view more details of any of the items in the list. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. This displays the Viewing Statistics Tip: Quick links to change to Folder. This displays the Folder navigation tree. click the View Details Download Details section. Category or Document statistics is displayed at the base of the page. . 1. In the Navigation tree. click on the required folder. 2.

1. select a folder it you only want to view files within that folder and then click the View Items link. Managing Document Tracking Adding a Document Version How to create a version of a document which has been uploaded to Document Library module.3. Tools > Tracked Items. In the Filter Options section. A complete list of tracked documents is dis- 2. On the toolbar. 3. Optional. Click the Currently Tracking Click the Not Tracking l button to turn tracking on. click the Stop Tracking button. select from these options beside the required document. . navigate to played. Enabling or Disabling Document Tracking Managing Document Tracking How to view a list of tracked documents and disable tracking for one or more documents using the Open-Document module. To disable tracking for one or more documents. In the Tracking l column select from these options beside the required document: button to turn tracking off.

click on the required folder.1. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. Click the Edit button beside the required document. In the Navigation tree. 3. . This displays the Edit Document section where you can edit the following document properties. This displays the Folder navigation tree. 2.

A list of all versions of this document including the newly added version is now displayed. 5.4. At Document Versioning. . click the Add Version button. You may now like to edit this latest version.

In the Navigation tree. this section will be empty. Note: If there are no versions saved. This displays a summary list of each version. 3. permanently delete or download previous versions of the document. click on the required folder. 1. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. The following options are now available: .Creating a Document Version Managing Document Version Info How to view version information and choose to restore. Click the Version Info button. A version is automatically created every time a document is re-uploaded in the same folder and with the same name. 2. This displays the Folder navigation tree.

2. 1. button beside a version to permanently delete it. . This opens and plays the media in a new window. Click the Display Media button. This displays the Folder navigation tree. l l Click the Download 4. click on the required folder. the restored version becomes the current document. Tip: When you restore a document. 3.l Click the Restore Click the Delete button beside a version to restore it. In the Navigation tree. button beside a version to download it. and what was the current document gets added as a new version. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. Viewing Media How to view (play) multimedia which has been uploaded to Document Library module.

2. Note: The parent folder must first be created by an Administrator.Viewing Media Viewing Media How to view (play) multimedia which has been uploaded to Document Library module. Viewing Media Managing Folders Adding a Sub-Folder How to add a sub-folder (child folder) to the selected folder in the Document Library module. 3. This opens and plays the media in a new window. In the Navigation tree. 1. This displays the Folder navigation tree. Click the Display Media button. click on the required folder. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. See "Creating a Library from Scratch (Adding a Parent Folder)" or "Importing a Library" .

Adding a Sub-Folder . 4.1. Configure the General and Security tab settings. This displays the new folder in the navigation tree. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. 2. See "Configuring General Settings for Folders" and See "Configuring Security Settings for Folders". This displays the Folder navigation tree. Click the Update link. Add Sub-Folder. Note: Security tab is only visible to authorized users. Right-click on the required folder and select 3.

Click the Update link. 1. Edit Folder Settings from the drop-down menu. If a user has edit rights but no security rights. This displays the Folder navigation tree. parent folder and security on the Document Library module. 4. Configure the General and Security tab settings. 2. the “Security” tab is not displayed. Note: The available options are controlled by user permissions. 1. Deleting a Folder How to delete a folder in the Document Library module.g. Just select the folder you want to move. See "Configuring General Settings for Folders" and See "Configuring Security Settings for Folders". click the left button and drag the folder to the chosen parent folder. This displays the Folder navigation tree. E. Click the Folder icon in the toolbar.Editing Folder Settings How to edit folder setting such as folder name. . Click the Folder icon in the toolbar. Right-click on the required folder and select 3. This deletes the folder from both the database as well as the file system. Tip: The parent folder of a specific folder can be also changed through drag & drop utility.

2. Deleting a Folder from the Document Library Module Configuring General Settings for Folders How to configure the General settings for folders in the Document Library module. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to delete this Folder and all of its Documents and SubFolders?" 4. Click the OK button to confirm. Right-click on the required folder and select the folder details in the Delete Folder section. Click the Delete link. This displays 3. Delete Folder from the drop-down menu. This topic assumes you are currently adding or editing a folder. "Editing Category Settings" .

[url format: xsfid=id&xsfk=key] ii. In the URL Access section. 2. enter a unique key which will be required in order to access this "Direct Access Only” folder.1. all sub-folders will also be visible. i. At Direct Access Key. unless accessed directly through the 'Direct URL' (as set below) or through setting the value of 'Restrict List to 1 Folder' in the module settings. If linking to this page through an external link. At Direct Access Only select from these options: l Check the check box to set this folder as hidden from general view. and you access the folder through the 'Direct URL' method. enter or edit the name for this folder. 3. At Parent Folder. this is the parameter to be added to the URL. unless those sub-folders have also been marked for direct view as well. set the follow attributes to determine if and how a folder can be accessed directly through a URL or though settings specifications: 4. At Direct URL the direct URL for this folder is displayed. If you do add a key. and you only want to show the contents of this specific folder (and all of its subfolders). then you'll need to place only the new key parameter in the URL. If the folder marked for direct view contains sub-folders. l Uncheck the check box to enable access to all authorized users using the Navigation tree. then you'll need to place both the xsfid parameter as well as a new key parameter in the URL. If you access the folder through the 'Restrict List to 1 Folder' method. The General tab for Folder Settings . At Folder Name. Optional. Note: This setting is disabled for the parent folder. Adding this parameter to the URL will achieve the same results as setting the value of 'Restrict List to 1 Folder' in the module settings. select the parent folder for the current folder.

Edit: Allows users to edit the files in this folder. The following options are available on the Security tab: 1. check from its parent folder. 2. l l l l l l 3. This topic assumes you are currently adding or editing a folder. Permissions related to Documents are those permissions that apply to all documents in the folder. Optional. See "Enabling Document Tracking" l l . Permissions related to Folders are: l the check box to set this folder to inherit security permissions View: Allows users to view the folder in the navigation tree. Delete: Allows users to delete the folder. l Add: Allows users to add new files to this folder.Configuring Security Settings for Folders How to configure the Security settings for folders in the Document Library module. Note: If this option is selected. Edit Security: Allows users to view the Security Tab when editing a folder and thereby assign security rights to the various roles. This right only allows view access to the folder and documents. At Inherit Security. Note: Tracking must still be enabled on individual documents. or "Editing Folder Settings". "Adding a Sub-Folder". Edit: Allows users to edit the folder. Enable Track: Allows users to track this folder. Add: Allows users to add sub-folders to the folder. Enable Track: Allows users to manage tracking of files in this folder. Enable Moderate: Allows users to access the Moderate section under tools where they can moderate and approve documents uploaded to the folder. "Add Folder" permissions is automatically granted to enable zip folder structure uploads. See "Creating a Library from Scratch (Adding a Parent Folder)".

Note: This topic assumes you have already created the folder. 1.The Security tab for Folder Settings Setting User Security for Folders How to give specific users a specific set of access rights to the parent folder (root folder) of the Document Library module. Root Folder Settings (root folder only) or . Right-click on the required folder and then select Edit Folder Settings all other folders.

button. This displays their username 6. Repeat Steps 3-6 to add additional usernames. 3. Select the Security tab. Use the A-Z links above the grid to filter users by the first letter of their username. click the Select User in the User Security text box. Click the Add button. . This opens a window where you can view a list of the 4. 5. button to the right of their name. At User Security. This adds their name to the User Security section and creates a full list of security options that you can select from.2. click on the User existing users. 7. To select a user.

See "Configuring Security Settings for Folders". 2. 9.8. apply one or more filters. See "Moderation Filter Options" . In the Filter Options section. 1. navigate to Tools > Moderate and then select Moderate All Items to view all files in the moderation queue .OR . Select one or more permissions for each user. Optional. Moderation Moderating Uploaded Files How to moderate files uploaded using the Document Library module.Select My Items to see only files you have submitted which are awaiting moderation. On the Document Library module toolbar. Click the Update link.

Click the Review rejected. Optional. button beside the required file to notify the owner that the file has been a. 5. This notifies the owner of the file that it has been accepted. See "Moderation Filter Options" 3. Optional. This notifies the owner of the file that it has been rejected and cannot be re-submitted. button beside the required file to download and view the file. navigate to Tools > Moderate and then select Moderate All Items to view all items in the moderation queue . Edit one or more document fields and then click the Update link.Select My Items to see only items you have submitted which are awaiting moderation. Optional. Click the Reject link. Optional. Click the Review button beside the required file. This notifies the owner of the file that it has been rejected and cannot be re-submitted. apply one or more filters. This notifies the owner requesting they revise the file and then re-submit it for approval. On the toolbar. This opens the Edit Document section. Click the Download 4. The file status is set as Rejected and it remains in the Moderation list. 4. In the Filter Options section. Select one or these options: l Revise: Select to set the file for revision. Accept: Select to accept the file. 1. l l Deleting Unmoderated Files How to permanently delete one or more files from the moderation queue of the Document Library module. 2.OR . The file is status is set as Rejected however the file remains in the moderation queue. . Reject: Select to reject the file.3. The file status is set as Revise and the file remains in the Moderation list. This file is published and removed from the Moderation list.

5. . Click the Delete button beside the file to be deleted. Click the OK button. This display the message "Are you sure you want to delete this item permanently?" 6. 7. Repeat Steps 2-6 to delete additional files.

Click the View Items link to view items matching the selected filters. Revise: Select to view all revised items. At User Name. l l l b. apply one or more filters from these options: a. See button and select the last date items were submitted on. Use the A-Z links across the top to filter users by the first letter of their username. 1. click the Calendar "Working with the Calendar" d. Submitted. This opens the User Picker window where you can view a list of the existing users. click on the User button to select a single user's items to view. select one of the following from the drop-down box: l . i.Status -: Select to view items of all status. Rejected: Select to view all rejected items. At Start Date. This displays their button and select the first date items were submitted on. ii.Deleting Unmoderated Files Moderation Filter Options How to filter files in the moderation queue by one or more criteria on the Document Library module. See e. click the Calendar "Working with the Calendar" button to the right of their name.g. At End Date. E. Revised and Rejected. To select a user. This topic assumes you are currently performing a moderation task. Submitted: Select to view all submitted items that are yet to be moderated. . At Status. c. click the Select User username in the User Name text box. In the Filter Options section.

Click the Settings button. go to the Document Grid Options section. Here you can control what document information is displayed as well as the default sort field and direction. you can opt to show or hide all other fields. select from these options: l Check the check box to display the paging and info navigation bar above and below files in the grid. On the Local tab. 2. which is a required field.OR . Select the Open-Document Library Settings tab. This is the default option. . 1. 4. At Display Navigation. Options selected here only apply to this specific instance of the module.Moderation Queue Filter Options Settings Configuring Local Settings .Document Grid How to configure local settings for the document grid on the Document Library module. 3. Except for Document Name. Select Settings from the module actions menu .

At Items Per Page. l Multiple Columns [Default]: . 50. The default setting is 10. The below images show each layout with all available fields displayed. 25.l Uncheck the check box to remove navigation bar and display all items in the list at once. 5. Available options are: 10. select the layout to be applied to the document grid. 6. select the number of items to be displayed in the grid at once. or 100. At Layout.

l Multimedia: Displays a large Play icon. .l Compact: Displayed here with all fields displayed.

. E.Display Length text box. Modified: Select to view the date and Display Name of the user that modified the metadata of the document." 8. . In the Name . Size: Select to view the size field of the document in the Document grid.OR Uncheck to hide the field: a. enter the maximum number of characters for document name field (including spaces). then the name will display as "Document N.Ascending column. d.. check the Display check box to display the document field in the grid . If a maximum of 10 is entered and the document name exceeds the display length. in the Document Grid.l Thumbnails: Displays a large Play icon.g. Uploaded: Select to view the date and Display Name of the user that uploaded the document in the Document Grid. At the follow fields. b. 7. c. Description: Select to view the description field of the document in the Document grid. In the Default Sort . select the default field documents are sorted by when displayed in ascending order. 9.

4. At Allow Tree Mode Toggle. select from these options: l Folders (the default set- Check the check box to display both the Folder or Category icons in the toolbar. 11. set the default view of the navigation tree as either ting) or Categories. Select the Open-Document Library Settings tab. Select Settings from the module actions menu . On the Local tab.10. This enables users to view the navigation tree organized either by folders or categories and access both the Folder and Category drop-down menus. At Default Tree Mode. select the default field documents are sorted by when displayed in descending order. .OR . 3. 2. Options selected here only apply to this specific instance of the module. This section allows you to control the way users can navigate through the document hierarchies.Click the Settings button. 1. In the Default Sort . Configuring Document Grid Options for the Open-Document Library Module Configuring Local Settings .Descending column. 5. go to the Navigation Tree Options section and set any of the following optional settings. Click the Update link.Navigation Tree How to configure local settings for the Document Library module.

The below image displays the tree restricted to the Instruction Manuals folder. This removes both the Folder or Category icons from the toolbar. A No Toggle message is also displayed to Administrators. At Restrict Tree to 1 Folder. Note: A Restricted message is displayed . users cannot add documents because they cannot access the drop-down menu. Note: Administrators will continue to see the toggle options for administrative purposes. Users can navigate to sub-folders and documents belonging to the selected folder. 6. select a folder to restrict this instance of the module to display only that folder.l Uncheck the check box to disallow toggling. as selected at Default Tree Mode. The navigation tree displays either Folders or Categories. Important. If the Default Tree Mode is set the Categories.

The below image displays the tree restricted to the Indoor Play category. 7.to Administrators. . Users can navigate to subcategories and documents belonging to the selected category. Note: A Restricted message is displayed to Administrators. At Restrict Tree to 1 Category select a category name from the drop-down box to restrict this instance of the module to that category.

This displays all the documents within the selected folder ( as selected at "Restrict Tree to 1 Folder" ) or category (as selected at "Restrict Tree to 1 Category" ). select the style for the navigation tree from these options: l Plus-Minus Signs (Default) l Up-Down Arrows 9. At Hide Tree [Flat View]. including documents within the sub-folders/sub-categories. Important. Tree must be restricted by folder or category to use this setting. . At Tree Style. Note: Administrators continue to see the navigation tree for administrative purposes. select from these options: l Check the check box hide the navigation tree.8.

This is the default option. . This displays a scroll bar below the tree enabling users to scroll to the right or left. Click the Update link. 11. l Uncheck the check box to enable the navigation tree grows in size (horizontally and vertically) according to the number of folders that are open at any one time. Allow Tree Horizontal Scroll select from these options: l Check the check box to prevent the tree from growing in width.l Uncheck the check box to display the navigation tree. in order to see the folders. 10.

If you do choose a folder that is not under the Portal option. 2.Configuring Local Setting for the Document Library Module Configuring Global Settings How to configure global settings for the Document Library module.OR . At Root Folder. . the Database and the File System are automatically synchronized [see File System Options/Synchronize]. When a folder is selected from the list. button review the results in the Syn- c. You will have the option to use the default DNN home directory/subdirectory by selecting the “Portal” option. then you should make sure that the ASP.Click the Settings button. b. click on the Synchronize the Database and the File System button to perform synchronization. Synchronization adds folders/documents that were added directly to the file system to the database and removes folders/documents from the database that were removed from the file system manually. Click the Display The Last Synchronization Log chronization Log. The process is asynchronous. 3. or to simply choose any folder either local or in a UNC share. Select the Open-Document Library Settings tab. Note: All settings on the Global tab apply to all instances of the module in the given portal. At Synchronize.NET user or Network Services user has the appropriate access rights to the folder (read/write/modify). Click on the Global tab. In the File System Options section update any of the following settings: a. See "Importing a Library" which details how to select a new root folder in which to store the folders and documents in the physical drive. 1. 4. Select Settings from the module actions menu .

a folder will be created in the root folder of the application.config and the folder in the root folder will be eliminated. select from these options: l Check the check box to allow uploads up to 2 Gigabytes. Uncheck the check box to disable WebDav.g. At Enable WebDav.e. 3600 Important. Note 1: The folder must be a WebDav folder [you will need to configure the server]. Notice that the web. and this option is selected. Uncheck the check box to allow documents to be downloaded directly from a Web browser or to be referenced by links as long as they are in a virtual directory or under the DNN Home Directory. next to the 'download\' button. l f. Note 2: In web. l . Clicking on the 'open on server' button will open the document in its client environment (MS Word or MS Excel). select from these options: l Check the check box to display an alternative 'open on server' button in the documents grid. As a result. I. In a UNC share or local folder that does not have any of the above prerequisites. To check if the current root folder is correctly setup as a WebDav folder. but the [save] and [save as] options will only save the document in a local [to your PC] folder. select from these options: l Check the check box to protect your documents from direct download by renaming them to a type of extension that is not directly served by a Web Server [xsdl. direct access will not be possible. Uncheck the check box to disallow large uploads. Changes to the web. A shared server cannot be used. Note 1: Full trust must be enabled for this setting to work.config increase execution timeout. At Secure Files.d.config will be automatically modified (a backup of the actual configuration file will be created on the same folder). by changing the corresponding Zone Security Options. And also. Note 3: You must enable ActiveX controls to run on your client PC. At Huge Uploads. E. Huge uploads must be uncheck before uninstalling this module. Note 2: If WebDav is not correctly setup on the server. the document will still open in its corresponding application. the only possible way to access the document will be through the document library interface. l e.resx]. click the Check If WebDav Is Enabled On The Server button.

This will override the site wide settings set by the Host.5. select from these options: l Check the check box to enable versioning. by editing the document. set the following: i. c. At Box Size. update any of the following settings: a. .doc button. d. button for media files (audio. Note: You can also save a version of your document any time you want to. select the size of the box that displays the media content of the documents. At Media Content. At Confirm Download [pop-up]. set the following: i. At Versioning.OR . l To Remove An Extension: Select the file extension and then click the Delete b.OR . the previous version is saved and can be restored on demand. check the check box to display a Play images and video) .Uncheck the check box to set the download to start directly. At Allowed Extensions you can limit the types of files that can be uploaded to Document Library modules in this portal. At Versioning Enabled. all extensions will be allowed. l To Add An Extension: Enter a file extension and then click the Add button. E. . ii. Check the check box to show a pop-up window with additional information before a download is started .g. and clicking on the Add Version button. If there is no extension specified. In the Document Options section. Versioning allows you to save a specified number of copies of the documents you upload. Every time you re-upload a new version of the same document. At Display Media.Uncheck the check box to disable.

Also. In the Stats Log History [Days] text box. l Uncheck the check box to disable. category and document statistics information will be kept for. unauthorized users may see descriptions for documents they may not have access to.DNN Search Enabled. select from these options: l Check the check box to enable the documents to be included in the default DNN Search. The searchable fields are the Name and the Description of the document. Therefore. .i. Uncheck the check box to disable. In the Statistics Options section update the following setting: a. l 6. it does not implement any kind of security. e. At Search . In the Versioning Max Number text box. Such documents will still be download protected. enter the number of days that folder. Note: The default DNN Search does not index document content. enter the maximum number of versions which can be saved for each document.

In the Module Options section update the following setting: a. Open-Document Module Styles A pictorial overview of the styles available for the Document Library module. you may need to hard refresh your Web browser a couple of times [Ctrl + F5] in order to replace the cached version of the style with the new one. Click the Update link.css style sheet found in the module’s specific directories.7. 8. At Style. select a style to change the look of the module. Tip: All styles can be changed through the module. See "Configuring Global Settings" Default Style: White: . Note: Once the style has been changed.

Gray: White Web 2.0: .

Link tracking and logging are also available.Gray Web 2.01.00 . Module Version: 05. All document records Title and a link to view (depending on a user's file associations) or download the document.00 Minimum DNN Version: 05.0: Documents About the Documents Module The Documents module displays a list of documents which can optionally be set as downloadable.00.

l l l The follow data is automatically recorded for each document and can be optionally displayed: l Modified Date: The date when the document record was last modified Size (Kb): The file size of portal documents. This is the only mandatory field. Download: A link to download the document Created By: The name of the person who first created the document record Created Date: The date when the document record was created Modified By: The name of the person who last modified the document record Clicks: The number of times the document record has been clicked l l l l l l Additional Settings: l Use a drop-down categories list Set the document title to function as a link to download the document Set the visibility and order of each field Set the sort order of documents l l l The Documents Module (default settings) . This field can be optionally managed by a dropdown category list created by the Host. By default this is the name of the user who added the document however any user can be selected.Features: ISearchable The follow data can be added for each document record and can be optionally displayed: l Title: The title given to the document. Description: The description of the document Category: The category name given to the document.g. Note: The size of documents located on external resources (E. Owner: The Display Name of the document owner. other web sites) is not displayed.

1.com/workitem/list/basic l l All Users Viewing a Document How to view a document listed in the Documents module. Note: The Title column must be visible and the Title Link enabled to perform this task. or it may be available for download. This will depend on your Web browser settings.com/Community/Forums/tabid/795/forumid/18/scope/threads/Default.com/Products/Development/Forge/ModuleDocuments/tabid/826/Default. The document is now viewable in either the current Web browser.dotnetnuke.dotnetnuke.aspx Issue Tracker: http://dnndocuments. Note: The Download column must be visible to perform this task.Project Links l Project Home: http://www.codeplex. Related Topics: l See "Setting the Visibility of Document Columns" See "Enabling/Disabling the Title Link" l Downloading a Document How to download a document from the Documents module to your computer. 2. Click the Download link located beside the required document. . click on the linked document title. In the Title column. 1. a new Web browser.aspx Support Forum: http://www.

The Sort Index setting is overridden by automatic sorting.2. however you should also set the Link field. Select Add New Document from the module actions menu . This opens the Edit Documents page. In the Title text box. enter a title for the document. See "Adding Document Sorting by Column Name" 1. then the file listed in the File Name field is used. Open or save the document to your computer as desired. Note: As the size of external documents is not known by the portal. .Click the link. Unknown is displayed for this field. Module Editors Adding a Document How to add a document record to the Documents module. Note 1. Add New Document 2. Note: This is the only field required by this page.OR . If you update this document now without setting the Link.

4. select from these options: l Click the Change Owner link and select a different user to be listed as the owner of this document Select None Specified to leave the owner field blank. At Link. Tip: The default folder for files can be modified.OR .3. At Owner. If the clicks are recorded. See "Setting the Default Folder for Documents" a. the number of the clicks will not recorded. Optional. At Track Number Of Times This Link Is Clicked? check the check box to track clicking. Optional. enter or select a category for the document. l 6. set the link to this document ( See "Setting a URL Link" or "Setting a File Link" ) . See "Setting the Visibility of Document Columns" . If this field is unchecked. At Category. Recommended.Select None for no link. In the Description text box. you have the option of displaying this information in the optional Clicks column. Optional. enter a description of the document. Recommended. 5.

Click the Edit button located to the left of the document record to be edited. Click the Update link. Click the Edit button located to the left of the document to be modified. Changing the Document Owner How to change the name of the document owner or leave the owner field blank on the Documents module. 8. 3. The Newly Added Document Editing a Document How to edit the details of document or the file associated with a document record on the Documents module. Leave blank to use zero (0) and display documents alphabetically. In the Sort Index text box. Click the Update link.7. 2. At Owner. 1. 1. . Optional. enter a number to set the order of this document. Edit the document fields as required. click the Change Owner link. 2.

l 4. Select from these options: l Select the new owner from the drop-down box. Select None Specified to leave the owner name blank for this record. This opens the Edit Documents 2. button located to the left of the document to be deleted. Click the Edit page. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" . Click the Delete link.3. Click the Update link. 1. Deleting a Document How to permanently delete a document from the Documents module.

For users who are not members of a role that can view the file. but the file does not. this document row will not be displayed.3. Troubleshooting: Security Permissions Warning The following security permissions warning may be displayed when you attempt to add or edit a document using the Documents module: "Warning: The security permissions for the selected file do not match this module's configured view roles. You can adjust security settings using the File Manager in the admin menu." . The module is configured to allow viewing by role 'All Users'. Click the OK button to confirm deletion.

Here are the options to fix this problem: Option One: Using the Selected File If you use the file you have already selected. 2. Click the Update Anyway link. Note 2: You will no longer need to confirm Update Anyway for this document. Note 1: The warning message continues to display on the Edit Documents page. If you are editing a document. 1. click the Update link. the document will only display to users with the correct permissions to browse or view the file. Option Two: Modifying the File Location . This link isn't displayed when adding a document.

. The Warning message is now removed. If not. Troubleshooting: The File Been Deleted The following warning message may display at the top of the Edit Documents page when you begin to edit a document in the Documents module: "The file that was selected for this document has been deleted. See "Uploading and Linking to a File" 3. You must have permission to upload files to the folder where you will be uploading the file. Click the Update link. Important. 2. HTTP 404) is displayed to users when they attempt to view or download the deleted document. select the file. a Server Error message (The resource cannot be found." To fix this problem either select an existing file.How to allow all roles authorized to view the module to access the document. At Link. See "Assigning Folder Permissions by Role"or "Assigning Folder Permissions to a User" 1. This topic assumes you are currently located on the Edit Documents page and are adding or editing the required document. If you don't update the document link. select a new File Location which is accessible to all users which are authorized to view this module. To update permissions. 4. The uploaded file should now be displayed. Upload the file to the selected folder. or upload and select a new file.

Important: Categories can only be created and maintained by SuperUsers therefore you should organize with your host to create the required categories prior to enablingthem. Select Settings from the module actions menu . .OR .Click the Settings button. Categories are disabled by default. 1. Select the Documents Module Settings tab.Settings Enabling/Disabling the Categories List How to enable or disable the categories list on the Documents module. 2. Selecting this option displays a drop-down list beside the Category field on the Edit Documents page.

1. E. select a folder name from the drop-down list.Click the Settings button. At Default Folder. In DNN Professional Edition. Module Editors can be granted either 'Browse Folder'.Uncheck the 4. This setting pre-populates the Link . 3. Select the Documents Module Settings tab.g. At Use Categories List?. select the category list name from the drop-down list. . the check box to enable the categories list . 2.OR . 'Browse Files in Folder' or 'Write To Folder' permissions depending on your requirements. The default option is typically the Root folder. users who can view the module must be granted 'Open Files in Folder' permission to the folder. Setting the Default Folder for Documents How to set the default folder for documents being added to the Documents module. Click the Update link. Module Editors can be granted either 'Open Files in Folder'.3. check check box disable it. This setting does not restrict users selecting other folders. At Categories List Name. Documents. See "Overview of Folder Security Settings" In DNN Community Edition. users who can view the module must be granted 'View' permission to the folder. Permissions. The default folder must have the correct Folder Security Settings granted in the File Manager. Select Settings from the module actions menu .g.OR .File Location field on the Edit Documents page with the selected folder. Documents 5. 'View' or 'Add' permissions depending on your requirements. E.

At Display Columns .OR . Select Settings from the module actions menu .4. 2. 3. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to set the title as a link. Documents cannot be downloaded if the 'Show Title Link' field is disabled and the 'Download Link' is not Visible. Click the Update link. the document titles and visible columns are displayed as static text to all users who can view the module. At Show Title Link?. the check box to disable the link. This setting is enabled by default. Select the Documents Module Settings tab. Click the Update link. 5. Important. . Enabling/Disabling the Title Link How to enable or disable the document title to function as a download link to the associated document for the Documents module. 1. In this scenario. Recommended.Click the Settings button. check download links. the Visible check box to display l 4.Download Links.

Select Settings from the module actions menu . 3. Note: The Clicks column only displays the number of clicks for documents which have link tracking enabled. Size (Kb) and Download Link columns are visible by default. The Title.Uncheck check box to set a column as not visible. 2. At Display Columns. Owner. 1. check the Visible check box to set a column as visible . In this scenario. the . Important. Modified Date.Title Link disabled and the alternative Download Link enabled Setting the Visibility of Document Columns How to set which columns of document information are displayed in the Documents module.e. Select the Documents Module Settings tab.Click the Settings button.OR . Documents cannot be downloaded if the 'Show Title Link' field is disabled and the 'Download Link' is hidden. the document titles and visible columns are displayed as static text to all users who can view the module.OR . I. Category. The "Track Number Of Times This Link Is Clicked?" field is checked.

.4. Documents Module with Visible Columns Modified Setting the Order of Document Columns How to set the order of columns in the Documents module. Click the Update link.

Click the Update link. button to move a column one position up (i. 2.e.1. 3. Click the Down the module). A Documents Module with Re-ordered Columns .e.Click the Settings button. Select Settings from the module actions menu . one position to the right on 4. Select the Documents Module Settings tab. At Display Columns.OR . perform the following as required: a. one position to the left on the modbutton to move a column one position down (i. Click the Up ule) b.

Click the Add Sort Order link. 7. click the Delete Sort Order link beside each one to delete them. 4. Click the Update link. At Sorting. 6. 3.Click the Settings button. This displays the Sort Index text box on the Edit Documents page where Module Editors can enter a number to order each document. 1.Enabling Manual Document Sorting How to enable module editors to manually set the sorting of documents displayed in the Documents module. select Sort Index from the left drop-down box. Select the Documents Module Settings tab. This may be pre-selected for you.OR . 2. If any other sorting orders are displayed. 5. This may occur if sorting has been previously set. . Tip: Manual Sorting is the default setting for new modules. Select Settings from the module actions menu . This displays a new row of headings and the Delete Sort Order link.

Select the Documents Module Settings tab. Select Settings from the module actions menu .The Sort Index field displayed on the Edit Documents page Adding Document Sorting by Column Name How to set cascading sorting of documents for this instance of the Documents module. 1. This setting overrides the Sort Order field on the Edit Documents page. 2. 3. .Click the Settings button. At Sorting.OR . click the Delete Sort Order link. if Sort Index sorting option is displayed.

The sort order is now listed below.4. 1. ) order using the right drop-down box.3.OR . Enabling/Disabling Users to Sort Documents How to enable or disable document sorting by users on the Documents module.g. Title 5. select the first column name to sort documents by from the left drop-down box. Click the Update link. At Allow Users To Sort?. At Sorting.x. Click the Add Sort Order link.a.7. 8.c.Uncheck the check . select to display documents in either Ascending ( alpha-numerical 1. ) or Descending ( alpha-numerical z. 4. check box to disable it. Select Settings from the module actions menu ... Repeat Steps 4-6 to add additional columns to this sort order. Click the Update link. Optional. E.8.2. The default option is Ascending. 3. the check box to enable user sorting .y. Select the Documents Module Settings tab.Click the Settings button.b. Tip: You can click the Delete Sort Order link beside any column name to delete it from sorting order. 7. If this setting is enabled. 2. At Sorting.OR . the column names become links which enables users to sort documents in ascending or descending order by any column title.. 6. Optional.9..

Each event includes a title.The Documents Module with User Sorting Enabled Administrators Formatting the Documents Module The documents module contains CLASS elements to allow you to use cascading style sheets (CSS) to control the display of the Documents module. See "Adding a Parent List" Events About the Events Module The Events module displays a list of upcoming events. 3. the module renders using the same CSS styles as in previous versions. Each data cell has a CLASS attribute of [Name]Item. 1. weeks. months or years. The documents module renders an "outside" DIV tag with a CLASS attribute of "DNN_Documents". Events can be displayed in chronological order as list or in a monthly or weekly calendar. where [Name] is the column name . Note. "SizeHeader". This opens the Host > Lists page. start and end date/time. "SizeItem". width: 50px} "Default" class names are assigned for the DataGrid .DNN_Documents . use the following CSS to render the size column in red and set the column width to 50 pixels: .Click the Settings button. Events can be set to automatically expire on a particular date. You can also navigate directly to the Lists page. for example "TitleItem". a description and an optional image. Event moderation is also provided.CssClass="Normal" and HeaderStyle-CssClass="SubHead" so that if no additional CSS elements are defined. Click the List Editor link. "CategoryItem".OR . This allows skin developers to control the CSS style of individual columns.SizeItem {color: red. 2. or to recur by any specified number of days. SuperUsers Adding Document Categories How to create the categories list for the Documents module. . "CategoryHeader". Add a parent list and one or more list entries. For example. Each header cell has a CLASS attribute of [Name]Header. Select Settings from the module actions menu .for example "TitleHeader".

05 Minimum DNN Version: 05.00 Features: ISearchable The Events Module Project Links . Module Version: 05.01.Event notification and enrolments can be enabled.02.

aspx Issue Tracker: http://dnnevents. 1.com/Community/Forums/tabid/795/forumid/20/scope/threads/Default.com/workitem/list/basic l l Configuration Configuring the Events Module How to quickly configure the Events module. If one or more events exist in the module you will be unable to edit this field.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This will enable events to be scheduled at 10:00 AM. If the Icon Bar has been disabled. This topic shows how to configure the Events module by only setting Edit Time Interval field and then accepting all of the default settings. Go to the General Settings section. 10:45 AM. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . At Edit Time Interval. select the time interval in minutes at which events can be scheduled. All Users Changing the Event View How to change the way events are displayed in the Events module. Important: This setting must be set before any events are added. Note: The design and fields for views displayed in the below images will vary depending on settings.g. 10:15 AM. Important. 10:30 AM.aspx Support Forum: http://www. E.com/Products/Development/Forge/ModuleEvents/tabid/833/Default. etc. 3. 2.l Project Home: http://www. Click the Update Settings link.codeplex. This displays the Event Module Settings page. . The default setting is 30.OR .dotnetnuke. unauthenticated are unable to change the view as access to the module actions menu is restricted to authenticated users only. Select 15 to set 15 minute intervals. button (only vis- 4.dotnetnuke.

Links to the previous month and the next month enable you view other months. . Select one of the following options from either the module actions menu or the Event module Icon Bar: l Month View: Displays events in a monthly calendar.1. By default the current date is highlighted.

The current date is highlighted. l .l Week View: Displays events for the current week. Note: Some options may not be available. l List View: Displays events in a list. Click the double arrow links ( << and >> ) located to scroll back and forward one week at a time. To return to the current month: Click the Today link. Navigating to Events (Month View) How to navigate to events when they are displayed in the monthly calendar view. Click the Month View l button and choose from these options: To view another month: Click the linked name of the [Previous Month] or the [Next Month] ( displayed in the top left and top right corners of the Calendar respectively ) to scroll back and forward one month at a time. 1.

To view any week: Click the View Date link and select a date from the calendar .OR . select a category name from the drop-down box. select a category name from the drop-down box.OR . To view events for a single category: At Categories.Enter the date into the text box and then click the Go button. To view events for a single category: At Categories. Click the Week View l button and choose from these options: To go to the previous or next week: Click on the Previous << or Next >> links. To return to the current week: Click the Today link.l To view any month: Click the View Date link and select a date from the calendar . l Navigating to Events in Month View Navigating to Events (Week View) How to navigate to an event when they are displayed in week view.Enter the date into the text box and then click the Go button. The current date is highlighted. 1. l l l .

Tip: Event details may be displayed when you position your mouse over the event title. Click the Return link to return to the list. 1. . Viewing Event Details in List View Viewing Event Details (Month View) How to view the full details of an event when events are displayed in a monthly calendar.Navigating Events in Week View Viewing Event Details (List View) How to view the full details of an event when events are displayed in a list. Click the List View button. 2. Click on the [Title] link to view event details in full. Tip: Event details may be displayed when you position your mouse over the event title. 3.

l 2. Tip: Event details may be displayed when you hover your mouse over the event title. If event titles are displayed in calendar cells: Click the linked [Event Title].1. Viewing Event Details in Month View Viewing Event Details (Week View) How to view the full details of an event when events are displayed in a weekly list. 2. If event titles are not displayed in calendar cells: Mouse over the date in the date cell and click on the date. 3. Click the Return link to return to the previous page. Click the [Event Title] link. 1. . Click the Return link to return to the previous page. The event details page provides access to other options such as event enrollment. Click the Week View button and navigate to the event. Click the Month View l button and navigate to the required date.

At Export Event to Desktop Event.Viewing Event Details in Week View Exporting an Event to your Desktop How to export an event to your computer and save it to your Microsoft Outlook calendar. Click the Series link to export the full series of a recurring event. l . 1. This option is only displayed for recurring events. Go to the event details page of the required event. "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". select from these options: l Click the Single link to export a single instance of this event.

Tip: Events which allow notifications typically display the Reminder icon. l 3. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". Day(s). Set the number of Minute(s). click the Save button and then save the file to your preferred location. complete the following: l Enter your email address. In the Remind me about this Event @ text box. If you are logged in. Go to the event details page of the required event. Optional. 4. click the Open button and then click Save and Close. Note: Reminders may not be available on some or all events. Perform one of these actions: l To save the file to your computer. l Requesting Event Reminder How to request notification of an event on the Events module. "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2.3.Uncheck the check box if you only want to be notified of this instance of this event. 1. This option is only displayed for recurring event. To save the event to your Outlook calendar. or Hour(s) Before Event Starts that you want to be notified. Click the Remind me about this Event @ link. your email address is automatically displayed.OR . This displays the message "Are You Sure You Want To Be Reminded?" . At Remind about all Events in this series? check the check box to be reminded of all events in this series .

At Notify Me select from the following options: l Check the check box to subscribe to notifications. "You will be reminder about this event on [selected date and time]" Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder" Subscribing to New Event Notifications How to subscribe to receive notifications when a new event is added to the Events module.5. 1. E. 6.g. Note: This option may not be available. This display a message detailing when you will be notified. l . Click the OK button to confirm. Uncheck the check box to unsubscribe from notifications.

At Enrolled Users. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2. the Display Name of enrolled users and the quantity of attendees enrolled against this person is displayed in a table.Notification of new events enabled Related Topics: l See "Configuring the Event Email Settings" Viewing Enrolled Users How to view details of users who are enrolled to an event on the Events module. 1. Go to the event details page of the required event. The Display Name is a link to the enrollee's user profile. . Note: This option may not be available to all users.

"Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Want To Enroll?" 3. Viewing Enrolled Users as an Administrator Enrolling for a Free Event How to enroll to attend a free event using the Events module. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". Click the Enroll for this Event? link. . 1. and whether the enrollment is approved. Go to the event details page of the required event.A more detailed table is displayed to Administrators which displays the enrollee's email address. Tip: Events which allow enrollment may display the Enroll icon. Click the OK button.

Once it is approved the below message is displayed. but not yet approved! If this message is displayed.One of the following messages is now displayed advising of your enrollment status: n You are enrolled for this event. You are enrolled and approved for this event! n Completed Event Enrollment . you will be typically be informed by email once your enrollment is approved.

This takes you to the PayPal web site.Enrolling for a Paid Event How to enroll for a paid event using the Events module. 4. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Want To Enroll?" 3. Tip: Events which allow enrollment may display the Enroll icon. Go to the event details page of the required event. On the Paypal Event Enrollment page. Click the OK button. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". review the event information and then click the Purchase link. . Click the Enroll for the Event? link. "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2. 1.

Complete the secure payment process. 1. button The following details are displayed for each event you have enrolled for: .OR . but not yet approved! If this message is displayed. Select My Enrollments from the module actions menu .Click the My Enrollments in the Event module icon bar ( if displayed ).5. You are enrolled and approved for this event! n Viewing Your Event Enrollments How to view details your event enrollments using the Events module. One of the following messages is now displayed advising of your enrollment status: n You are enrolled for this event. you will be typically be informed by email once your enrollment is approved. Once it is approved the below message is displayed. You will then be returned to the web site.

Total: Total amount for this enrolment. Approved: Displays if your enrollment has been approved ( checked ). Click the OK button to confirm. 3. l l Viewing your Enrollments Canceling an Event Enrollment How to cancel an enrollment to an event using the Events module. The selected enrollments are now removed from the list. Canceling an Event Enrollment . 1. View your enrollments. See "Viewing Your Event Enrollments" 2. ) or is unapproved ( unchecked l l l l Amount: Displays the amount ( if any ) that has been paid to attend the event. End: The end date and time of the event. Note: You cannot cancel from paid events.l Start: The start date and time of the event. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Cancel the SELECTED Enrolments?" 4. check the check box beside each enrollment you want to cancel. Click the Cancel Selected Enrolments link. In the Select column. Quantity: The number of attendees you have enrolled for this event. Event: The title of the event which links to more event details.

Optional. At Start Date/Time. This topic covers the main settings.Module Editors Adding an Event How to add an event to the Events module. See "Adding Event Categories" 10. At Importance. 4. At End Date/Time. Click the Calendar endar" button and select the start date of the event. See "Working with the Cal- b. however you should also update the Notes field to remove/edit the default text. Normal or High from the drop-down box to set the importance of the event. l 8. select the end time for the event. 2. set the following: a. If the time drop-down box is displayed. Select Add Event from the Events module actions menu . No location is the default setting. If you choose to create an event using the default settings. l 5. This removes the time fields from the next two the check box if the event has a start and end time. 9.Click the top right corner of the module. Optional. the check box to hide the end date in all views. At Category. No category is the default setting. l Check Uncheck the check box to display the end date in all views. select from these options. Newly added events are sorted in the order they are entered within date/time. In the Title text box. At All Day Event. enter a title for this event. The default setting is Normal. This updates the End Date/Time field so it displays the Start Date you selected. set the following: a. Click the Copy to End Date link. 1. the event start date and end date will be the current date. select Low. Uncheck the check box if the event lasts all day. At Location. 6. b. Optional. This opens the Edit Event page. See related topics below for additional settings. select the event category. See "Adding Event Locations" . At Display End Date. Click the Calendar button and select the end date for the event. Note: Although this is the only mandatory field.OR . 7. Go to the Event Settings section. select from these options: l Add Event button at the Check fields. select the event location. 3.

select a new owner for this event. In the Notes Editor. Click the Update link. . If the event requires moderation you will be notified when moderation has occurred and whether the event was accepted.11. 13. Optional. Once moderated events are accepted they are displayed in the module. enter any notes about the event. At Owner. Optional. 12.

.

Adding an Event The New Event displayed in the Month View Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder" See "Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Image" See "Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events" Allow Enrollment Section: See "Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment" l l l Editing an Event How to edit an event in the Events module. . Note: You may only be able to edit your own events.

See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". 4. 5. .1. select a new owner for this event. Click the Update link. At Owner. Optional. Edit the event details as required. Select from these options: l Click the Click the Edit link to edit one time events. Edit Series link to edit all instances of a recurring event. Go to the event details page of the required event. on to edit only this instance of a recurring event. l 3. "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2.

.

. Optional. 3. 5. 1. select a new owner for this event. "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2.Editing an Event Copying an Existing Event as a New Event How to copy an existing event and save it as a new event using the Events module. At Owner. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". Go to the event details page of the required event. This displays the message "Have you set all the correct details for the new Event?" 6. Once moderated events are accepted they are displayed in the module. Click the Copy As New Event link. Click the Edit link. Edit the event details for the new event. Click the OK button to confirm. If the event requires moderation you will be notified when moderation has occurred and whether the event was accepted. 4.

.

In the Email Message text box. Go to the Send Reminder section below the Notes Editor. 4.* d. Note: Event Reminders must be enabled. Click the Update link. In the Time Before Event text box. In the Email From text box. See "Configuring Event Reminder Settings" 1. This displays the associated settings. modify the email message including any of the available replacement tokens*.OR . Commence adding a new event ( "Adding an Event" ) but don't click the Update link until completing the below steps . l Uncheck the check box to disable reminders. 3. Optional. At Send Reminder. modify the email address to be displayed in the From field of in message.Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Reminder How to enable or disable a reminder email to be sent for an event on the Events module. In the Email Subject text box. * Replacement Tokens for the Email Subject and Email Message fields: l [event:title] = Title [event:startdate] = Start Date and Start Time [event:timezone] = Time Zone l l . select from these options: l Check the check box to enable reminders. Note: This disables the reminder but any saved reminder settings are retained for future use. a.Optional. c.Edit an existing event ( "Editing an Event" 2. Optional. modify the email subject including any of the available replacement tokens. Minutes or Hours before the event start time to send the notification. enter and select the number of Days. b.

.Enabling and Setting Event Reminders Enabling/Disabling and Configuring an Event Image How to show or hide an image for an event in the Events module.Edit an existing event ( "Editing an Event" 2. Tip: See Manage Settings section for more on managing images. c. select from these options: l Check the check box to display an image for this event. At Image URL select or enter the link to the image.Leave this field blank for the original image size. In the Width text box. enter the pixel width for this image . In the Height text box. The image is typically displayed in both the event calendar/list and in the detailed event view. a. See "About the Link Control" b. At Display Image. Commence adding a new event ( "Adding an Event" ) but don't click the Update link until completing the below steps . Go to the Display Image section below the Editor. l Uncheck the check box for no image. however any saved image settings are retained for future use.OR . Optional. 3.OR . 1.OR .Leave this field blank for the original image size. enter the pixel height for this image . Note: This removes the image from the event listing.

4. . If the event requires moderation you will be notified when moderation has occurred whether the event was accepted. Click the Update link. Accepted events are displayed following moderation.

An Event with an Image .

Month(s). The default setting is First. At Repeated on select the week in which the event reoccurs in the month. . enter the frequency of the reoccurrence into the text box. enter how frequently the event occurs each week. iii. Second. or Year(s) to set the period of the recurrence. l To set the event to reoccur weekly: i. The default setting is Sunday. Weeks(s). Check the check box for each of the day the event reoccurs. At Recurring Event. and then select either Day(s). Fourth and Last. Commence adding a new event ( "Adding an Event" ) but don't click the Update link until completing the below steps . ii. Select Weekly Event. Third. Select and set one of the following reoccurrence schedules: l To set the event to reoccur periodically: i. Select Periodic Event. Go to the Recurring Event section. iii. See "Working with the Calendar" Note: Event Start Date must occur before the recurrence end date in order for the event to occur at least once b. Note: Recurrences days are localized. select from these options: l Check the check box to set the event as recurring. 1. l To set the event to reoccur once each month: i. At Recurrence End Date. ii. In the Repetition Frequency (Weeks) text box. At the Repeated every field. Select the day of the month when the event reoccurs.Edit an existing event ( "Editing an Event" 2. Select Monthly Event.OR .Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Recurring Events How to enable or disable recurring events and configure the optional settings for the Events module. ii. a. The default setting is every 1 day. Options are First. 3. click the Calendar button and select the last date when the event will reoccur.

Click the Update link.l To set the event to reoccur on a specific date of each month: i. Select Annual Event. See l Uncheck the check box to set the event as a one time event. select the date of the month when the event is repeated. enter the number of months that the event reoccurs for. . l To set the event to reoccur annually: i. Tip: Recurring events display the Recurring Event over it. ii. Setting Recurring Events Copying an Existing Event Series as a New Event Series How to copy an existing recurring event series and save it as a new event series using the Events module. ii. 4. Enter 1 for an event which reoccur each month. E. icon which displays recurrence details when you hover Tip: You can either edit individual instances of recurring events or the full event series. At Repeat On Date. Select Monthly Event.g. or 2 for an event which reoccur every second month. click the Calendar "Working with the Calendar" button and select the date. The default setting is 1st. In the Repetition Frequency (Months) text box. At Repeated On Day. Note: Saved settings are retained for future use. iii.

Click the Edit Series link. Click the Copy As New Event Series link. If the event requires moderation you will be notified when moderation has occurred and whether the event was accepted. 4. 3. Go to the event details page of the required event. Edit the event details as required. "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)".1. . Once moderated events are accepted they are displayed in the module.

.

At Allow Enrollment. l 4. or edit an existing event. the check box to disable enrollment. "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 3. Note: Enrollment must be enabled by a Page Editor on the Settings page of this module. Select from these options: l Click the Click the Edit link to edit one time events. l ."Configuring the Enrollment Settings" 1. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". on to edit only this instance of a recurring event. Skip to Step 9. "Adding an Event" or "Editing an Event" 2.Copying an Existing Event Series as a New Event Series Enabling/Disabling and Configuring Event Enrollment How to enable or disable users to enroll for a paid event and configure the related settings on the Events module. Add a new event. Go to the event details page of the required event. Edit Series link to edit all instances of a recurring event. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to allow enrollment.

enter the fee amount. enter 0. Note: This restriction also applies to the Admin role. edit the PayPal account email address if required. select from these options: l Free (Moderated)Paid Fee Paid Fee a.OR . Note: The currency type is set by the Administrator. b. select one of the following: l Select None to permit all registered users to enroll for the event. l 9. Update link for a single event . enter the maximum number of enrollments that can be accepted for this event. In the PayPal Account text box. Enrollment text box.Uncheck the check box to disable and display on the Edit Event page only displayed at the Enrolled Users field. At Enroll List on Detail View. In the Max. At Type of Enrollment.OR . l 6. At Enrollee Role. 8. check the check box to display the list of enrolled users on the detailed event view . Optional. Click the Enabling and Configuring Event Enrollment .5. The default setting is 0 (unlimited enrollments) 7. Optional. Optional. This is the default setting.Click the Update Series link for an event series. If an unlimited number of enrollments can be accepted. In the Paid Fee text box. Select a role to limit enrollment to members of that role.

Event Enrollment Enabled on an Event Related Topics: l "Configuring the Enrollment Settings" Enrolling User to an Event How to enroll one or more users to an event on the Events module. Go to the Allow Enrollment section. 5. At Enroll User To Event. Go to the event details page of the required event. 4. Repeat Steps 4-5 to enroll additional users. 6. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". See "Configuring the Enrollment Settings" 1. 3. Note: Event enrollment must be enabled. Click the Edit link. select the user from the drop-down box. Click the Enroll User link. "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2. The user will be added to the Enrolled Users list below. .

3. At Allow Enrollment. check l the check box beside the required users to perform any of the following tasks: Click the Email Selected Enrolled Users link to email these users.Enrolling Users to Events Managing Existing User Enrollments How to delete one or more enrolled users from an event on the Events module. Note: Module and Page Editors may only be able to delete their own events. "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". Click the Edit link. 1. This depends on the moderation settings configured by a Page Editor on the Settings . Click the Delete Selected Enrolled Users link to email these users. details of current enrollments are listed at Enrolled Users. Go to the event details page of the required event. 4. l Managing Existing User Enrollments Deleting an Event or Event Series How to permanently delete an event from the Events module. At Select.

l Click the Delete Series link to delete all instances of this recurring event. This displays the message "Are you sure you wish to Delete ALL recurrences?" a. Go to the event details page of the required event. Select from these options: l Click the Delete link to delete a one time event or this instance of a recurring event. Click the OK button to confirm. See "Viewing Event Details (List View)". "Viewing Event Details (Month View)" or "Viewing Event Details (Week View)" 2. 1. . This displays the message "Are you sure you wish to Delete this entry?" a. Click the OK button to confirm.page of this module.

E. Click the . l Enter a web safe hexadecimal color value into the background color. l 5. skip to Step 5. 2. In the Category text box. At Background Color. perform one of the following to set the background color: l Click the Color Picker button and select a color. l 4. Optional. This lists the category in the Category Name list to the right.Global Category Editor Adding Event Categories How to add one or more categories to the Events module. Note: The preview field updates whenever the color selections are modified. E. #99d9ea Leave this field blank to use the color associated with the applied stylesheet.g. l Enter a web safe hexadecimal color value into the background color. enter a category name. To use the colors shown at the Preview field below. 3. Select Edit Categories from the module actions menu. Optional. This opens the Edit Categories page. 1. perform one of the following to set the font color: l Click the Color Picker button and select a color. At Font Color.g. Add link. #99d9ea Leave this field blank for no background color.

8. Select Edit Categories from the Events module actions menu. Repeat Steps 2-6 to add additional categories. Click the Return link to return to the module. Adding an Event Category Editing Event Categories How to edit one or more categories on the Events module. 4.7. This displays the category details in the Category and Color fields. . 2. Edit fields as required. 1. Click the Update link. 3. click on the linked [Category Name]. In the Category Name list.

enter the location name. . 2. 3. 1. Select Edit Categories from the Events module actions menu. Click the OK button to confirm. click the Delete button beside the category to be deleted. 1. Deleting Event Categories How to delete one or more categories from the Events module. 4. 5. Repeat Steps 2-3 to delete additional categories. This displays the message "Are you sure you wish to delete this entry?" 3. Repeat Steps 2-4 to edit additional categories. In the Location text box. Click the Add link. enter the URL which will link to a map of the location. Select Edit Locations from the module actions menu.5. 2. This displays the location in the Location Name list. Click the Return link to return to the module. In the Category Name list. Click the Return link to return to the module. Optional. 6. In the Map URL text box. 4. Global Location Editor Adding Event Locations How to add one or more locations to the Events module.

Select Edit Locations from the module actions menu. Click the Return link to return to the module. In the Location Name list. Repeat Steps 2-4 to add additional locations. Editing an Event Location Deleting Event Locations How to delete one or more locations from the Events module. 3.6. This displays the location details in the edit fields to the left. click on linked [Location Name] to be edited. Click the Update link. Click the Return link to return to the module. Repeat Steps 2-4 to add additional locations. 4. 1. 2. 7. Adding an Event Location Editing Event Locations How to edit one or more locations on the Events module. Edit the Location and/or Map URL fields as required. 6. . 5.

5. Select Edit Locations from the module actions menu. Click the OK button to confirm. This displays the list of enrollments awaiting moderation.Events page.OR . Moderation can be required for all event/enrollment changes or only for new items. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu . In the Location Name list.Click the Moderate Events button. 1. 4. 2. Repeat Steps 2-3 to delete additional locations. Approving All Moderated Enrollments How to approve all event enrollments awaiting moderation on the Events module. select Enrollment. 2. Moderator About Moderating Events and Enrollments The Events module can be configured to require moderation of events and enrollments. This displays the message "Are you sure you wish to delete this entry?" 3. This opens the Moderate Enrollment . click the Delete button beside the location to be deleted. Click the Return link to return to the module. One or more moderators will be sent email notification when items require moderation. .1. At Select View to Moderate.

Click the Moderate Events button. Optional. 4. This displays the list of events awaiting moderation. Optional. In the Email Message text box. edit the message of the email. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the users who created the events. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the users who submitted the enrollments. b.OR . Click the Approve All link. At Email Action Notification to User?. 3. In the Email Subject text box. edit the subject of the email. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu . edit the subject of the email. a. In the Email Subject text box. 1. edit the message of the email. In the Email Message text box. . b. Optional. At Email Action Notification to User?. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notifications. select Events. 2. At Select View to Moderate. Optional. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page.3. a. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notifications. Approving all Moderated Enrollments Approving All Moderated Events How to approve all events awaiting moderation on the Events module.

1. . Click the Update link. select Approve beside each enrollment to be approved. a. select Enrollment. edit the subject of the email. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page. Tip: Click the Unmark All link to deselect the Approve and Deny action for all enrollments. In the Email Subject text box. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu . In the Action column. 2. b. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notifications. edit the message of the email. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the users who created the events. In the Email Message text box. Optional.4.Click the Moderate Events button. Approving all Moderated Events Approving Moderated Enrollments How to approve one or more enrollments awaiting moderation in the Events module. This displays the list of enrollments awaiting moderation. 3. 5.OR . Click the Approve All link. At Email Action Notification to User?. Optional. 4. At Select View to Moderate.

1. 2. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu . In the Email Message text box. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page. At Email Action Notification to User?. .Click the Moderate Events button. select Approve beside each event to be approved. In the Email Subject text box. This displays the list of events awaiting moderation. 3. Optional. a. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the user or users who created the event(s). b. edit the message of the email. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notification. Click the Update link. At Select View to Moderate. Tip: Click the Unmark All link to deselect the Approve and Deny action for all events. edit the subject of the email. In the Action column. 4. 5.Approving Moderated Enrollments Approving Moderated Events How to approve one or more events awaiting moderation in the Events module.OR . select Events. Optional.

edit the message of the email. At Select View to Moderate. 2. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu .Click the Moderate Events button. b. 1. In the Email Message text box. Click the Deny All link. . This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page. Note: Denying enrollments permanently deletes all details of the enrollment. 4.OR . 3. select Enrollment.Approving Moderated Events Denying All Moderated Enrollments How to deny all enrollments awaiting moderation on the Events module. a. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the users who submitted the enrollments. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notifications. In the Email Subject text box. This displays the list of enrollments awaiting moderation. Optional. At Email Action Notification to User?. Optional. edit the subject of the email.

edit the message of the email. In the Email Subject text box. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notifications. This displays the list of events awaiting moderation. Note: Denying events permanently deletes all details of the events. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page. Optional.Click the Moderate Events button. Optional. At Email Action Notification to User?. In the Email Message text box. b. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu . Click the Deny All link. 4. select Events. edit the subject of the email.Denying all Moderated Enrollments Denying All Moderated Events How to deny all events awaiting moderation on the Events module. a. 3. 2. 1. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the users who created the events.OR . . At Select View to Moderate.

At Email Action Notification to User?. edit the subject of the email. Click the Update link. . a. 3.Click the Moderate Events button. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu . In the Email Subject text box.Denying all Moderated Events Denying Moderated Enrollments How to deny one or more enrollments awaiting moderation on the Events module.OR . l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notification. 5. At Select View to Moderate. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the users who submitted the enrollments. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page. This displays the list of enrollments awaiting moderation. select Deny for each enrollment to be denied and deleted. Note: Denying enrollments permanently deletes all details of the events. 1. 4. In the Email Message text box. Optional. In the Action column. Optional. b. 2. select Enrollment. edit the message of the email.

select Deny for each event to be denied and deleted. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the user or users who created the event(s). Optional. In the Action column. Note: Denying events permanently deletes all details of the events. In the Email Subject text box. 3. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notification. a. At Email Action Notification to User?. edit the subject of the email.Denying Moderated Enrollments Denying Moderated Events How to deny one or more events awaiting moderation on the Events module. Optional. 4. In the Email Message text box. At Select View to Moderate. . 2. Click the Update link. 1. select Events. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu. This displays the list of events awaiting moderation. 5. edit the message of the email. b.

1.OR . This displays the list of events awaiting moderation. 2. b.Denying Moderated Events Editing and Approving a Moderated Event How to review. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the user or users who submitted the event. 6. 3. In the Event column. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu . select the Approve. Optional. edit and approve an event requiring moderation in the Events module. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page. At Select View to Moderate. click the linked [Event Title]. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notification. At Email Action Notification to User?. . In the Action column. Click the Update link. 7. select Events. 4.Click the Moderate Events button. edit the message of the email. Review and edit the event details as required. In the Email Message text box. a. Optional. In the Email Subject text box. 5. edit the subject of the email. Moderating Multiple Enrollments How to approve and deny multiple event enrollments on the Events module.

In the Email Message text box.1. In the Email Subject text box. Optional. This displays the list of enrollments awaiting moderation. Click the Update link. select Enrollments. b. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu . edit the subject of the email. 3. At Select View to Moderate. 2. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notification. .OR . 5.Click the Moderate Events button. select one of these options: l Check ments. Moderating Multiple Enrollments Moderating Multiple Events How to approve and deny multiple events on the Events module. edit the message of the email. Optional. Tip: Click the Unmark All link to deselect the Approve and Deny action for all enrollments. At Email Action Notification to User?. 4. the check box to send email notification to the user or users who submitted the enroll- a. In the Action column. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page. select the Approve or Deny beside one or more enrollments as required.

Optional. l Uncheck the check box if you don't want to send email notification. 5. edit the message of the email. Optional. select the Approve or Deny beside one or more events as required. In the Email Subject text box. This displays the list of events awaiting moderation. edit the subject of the email. b. 4. At Email Action Notification to User?. 3. Select Moderate Events from the Events module actions menu . Tip: Click the Unmark All link to deselect the Approve and Deny action for all events. In the Action column. select one of these options: l Check the check box to send email notification to the user who created the event. At Select View to Moderate. Moderating Multiple Events Edit Settings Configuring Event General Settings How to configure the General Settings of the Events module.Click the Moderate Events button. select Events. This opens the Moderate Enrollment-Events page. Click the Update link. 2.1. In the Email Message text box.OR . a. .

check the check box to check for a location conflict when checking date conflicts . This displays the Event Module Settings page.OR .1. Leave blank for unlimited. select from the following options: l Check the check box to prevent the adding of events within the same date and time period. The default setting is 30. Until date is set to last occurrence if limit reached.OR . 8. 12.OR . enter a message to be displayed to anonymous users instead of event title/details. In the Private Calendar Message text box. select from the following options: l Check the check box to enable the adding of recurring events. At Enable DNN Search. select the default time zone to be used for all events. the Recurring Settings section is displayed on the Edit Events page. If this option is selected. At Allow Subscriptions. Moderators/Administrators can see all event details. If events exist in the module you will be unable to edit this field. In the Max Generated Occurrences. check the check box to enable site wide searches conducted using the Search modules and the Search skin token to search events .OR . a "Conflict with existing Event! Change Date/Time" message is displayed to users when they attempt to add a conflicting event. Note: Administrators can always change the event owner .Uncheck the check box to disable. check the check box to enable users to subscribe to receive notification of new events .g. 13. At Edit Time Interval. button (only vis- 3. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . At Check for Location Conflict. select the time interval in minutes at which events can be scheduled. Go to the General Settings section.Uncheck the check box to disable.OR . In the Delete Events Older Than text box. Important: This setting must be set before any events are added. 4. At Owner Change Allowed. At Permit Recurring Events.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed). . E. 2. Uncheck the check box to disable recurring events from being added. At Event Time Zone. l 9. 10. Authenticated event editors can only see event title/details of their own events. If checked. enter the number of Days to set expiration of old events. check the check box to enable moderators to change the event owner. 11. l 6. edit the Maximum number of occurrences of an event generated on save. 7.Uncheck the check box to exclude events from DNN searches. Select 15 to set 15 minute intervals. Leave this field blank for no expiration. At Prevent Schedule Conflict. 5. Uncheck the check box to enable events to be scheduled at the same time.Uncheck the check box to disable.

Note: To enable custom theme's. select one or more of the following options: l Month: Check Week: Check List: Check the check box to enable the month view. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . Configuring Event General Settings Configuring Event Look and Feel Settings How to configure the Look and Feel Settings of the Events module. Click the Update Settings link. l l . the check box to enable the list view. and disables if from being unchecked.OR . 2.14.OR . button (only vis- 3.Select a Custom Theme. This automatically checks the related check box on the next field.Select the category to only display events within that category.OR . place stylesheet files into the Portals\[portalid]\DNNEvents\Themes folder. At Module Views Allowed. Month. 15.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed). 1. select either List. select a Standard Theme (also called skin) for this events module from the drop-down list . Week as the default view for the module. At Theme/Skin. At Default Module View. At Filter Events by Category. select All to display events from all categories in this module . Maximize the Look & Feel Settings section. This displays the Event Module Settings page. 5. the check box to enable the week view. 4.

At Icon Bar. 10. l l 12. 9. At Enable Event Image. the check box to enable the date navigation controls l 8.OR . Select Bottom Center to display the icon bar below events Select None to hide the icon bar. At Enable Category Select. At Enable Date Navigation Controls. 11. the Image Settings section is displayed on the Edit Events page . Click the Configuring Event Look and Feel Settings . At Use Module Container & Skin.uncheck to enable users to switch between the different views. Update Settings link.6. 7.OR . At Display TimeZone. check the check box to enable the TimeZone to be displayed on the Detail Event .Uncheck the check box to hide the TimeZone. check the check box to use the module container and page skin for views that would normally default to the portal default container and skin .Uncheck the check box to disable images on events. check (links).OR . If checked. check the check box to enable images to be displayed on events. select from these options: l Select Top Right to display the icon bar above events. to disable users from selecting categories on all view forms. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable category selection.

select from the following options l Check enroll. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . the check box to display event details on the same page. Maximize the Detail View Settings section. Uncheck the check box to enable a message box which required the user to confirm they want to the check box to disable popup box.Uncheck the check box to hide event details in the monthly calendar. At Enable Month View Cell Events. button (only vis- 3.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed). This displays the Event Module Settings page.OR . 2. At Set Event Detail Page Allowed. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to display event detail on a new page.OR . l 6.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed). l 5. To view event details users must click on the date in the calendar. At Enable Enroll Validation Popup.Configuring Detail View Settings How to configure the Detail View Settings of the Events module. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . 2. 1. the check box to disable. Maximize the Month View Settings section. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to allow event editors to set a specific page as event detail page. Configuring Detail View Settings Configuring Event Month View Settings How to configure the month view settings of the Events module. l 4. At Event Detail New Page. .OR . check the check box to display event details in the monthly calendar . This displays the Event Module Settings page. 1. button (only vis- 3. Click the Update Settings link.

check the check box to enable a day to always be selectable when Enable Month View Cell Events is enabled .g. check the check box to hide them.Uncheck the check box to hide the event start time. check the check box beside each event icon to be displayed next to the event title in the month view.OR .OR . the l 5. Check the check box to display events which occur in the month before or after the displayed month in the monthly calendar.4. 7.Uncheck the check box to disable. Click the Update Settings link. If the displayed month is July and July 31st falls on a Monday. check the check box display the event start time to be displayed on the link to the event . 8.Uncheck check box to use Sat/Sun as the weekend 6. 9. check the check box to enable Event Day to be shown in new Page (not embedded) when Enable Month View Cell Events unchecked . the check box to display the event image in month view . 11. At Show Events Start Time in Title. At Show Event Image. At Weekend Starts Friday. At Event Day New Page. E.OR .OR . All icons are checked by default. check the check box to use Fri/Sat as the weekend . 10.Uncheck the check box to disable. At Show Events in Next/Prev Month.OR . At Show Event Icons. any events which occur at the start of August will be displayed in the cells for August.Uncheck Configuring Event Month View Settings . At Enable Selectable Day. select from the following options: l Uncheck the check box to hide events which fall on the previous or the next month from being displayed in the selected month view.

Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed). check the check box to disable. Maximize the Week View Settings section. check the check box to display the end time of the event in the week view OR . Maximize the Event List Settings section.OR . All icons are checked by default. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . 4. At Full Time Scale. 1.OR . button (only vis- 3. At Show Value Marks.Uncheck button (only vis- 3. l 6.Uncheck the check box to hide the end time. .Configuring Week View Settings How to configure the General Settings of the Events module. check the check box beside each icon to be displayed beside the event title in week view. To use the list view. 1. This displays the Event Module Settings page.Select No to hide the header. At Show Table Header. 5. Uncheck the check box to hide grid lines. 2. 7. Configuring Week View Settings Configuring the Event List Settings How to configure the list view of the Events module. Do not enable List mode on the first module. you must place two Events modules on the page. Note: The Include End Value field above must be unchecked to enable this option. At Show Event Icons. Click the Update Settings link. the check box to display the full time scale in the week view . At Include End Value. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . only in the second events module. This displays the Event Module Settings page. 2. select Yes to display a header above the event list .OR . select from these options: l Check the check box to display the grid lines against each time in the week view when the above field is unchecked.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed).OR .

click the Add All >> link. At Collapse Recurring. the check box to collapse recurring events to one row . select the number of events to be displayed on each page of the Event List. check the check box beside each icon to be displayed beside the event title in list view. c. b. The default settings is Ascending. 9. select the column by which events in list view will be sorted by default. l l l 6. 8. To Remove All Field. set the fields to be displayed on each event: l To Add a Field. 5. At Default Sorting. 7. Select Select Events By Number. c. At Page Size. click on the field name in the Selected box and then click the Remove < link.OR . click the Remove All << link. All icons are checked by default. At Default Sort Column.4. Enter the [number of] days before current date to be displayed.g. b. Entering Next 10 events from current date within the next 14 days will display a maximum of 10 events and will not display events more than 2 weeks in advance. To set the number of events displayed in the list. check the check box disable. At Show Event Icons. . To Add All Fields. At Event Fields to Display. Enter the Next [number of] events to be displayed from the current date. E. click on the name of the field in the Available box and then click the Add > link. To Remove a Field. Select Select Events By Days. select from the following options: l To display the number of events displayed by the number of days: a.Uncheck 10. Enter the within the next [number of] days. Enter the [number of] days after current date to be displayed. l To display the number of events displayed by the number of events: a. select to sort events either Ascending or Descending by their start date.

OR . Maximize the Event Email Settings section. At Send New Event Emails.11.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed). 2. Configuring the Event Email Settings How to configure the email settings of the Events module. This displays the Event Module Settings page. select a radio button to set if and to whom emails are sent to when a new event is added: . button (only vis- 3. 1. Click the Update Settings link. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu .

OR . Users in the selected role will receive email notification when a new event is created. 6.OR . Note: The Event Module Scheduler must be enabled by the Host to enable reminders. At Allow Email Send by Event Editor. This displays the Event Module Settings page.OR . In the Remind Email From text box.e.l Never: Select to disable email messages.OR . l l 4. .OR . Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . At Allow Event Reminder. 5. 4. enter the default email address to be displayed in the From field for reminders. At Send Reminder Default Value. Maximize the Reminder Settings section. check the check box to allow editors to send an event email to a role . Role: Select the radio button and then select a role from the drop-down box. button (only vis- 3. check to enable anonymous users (i. Configuring Event Reminder Settings How to enable and configure reminder settings for the Events module.Uncheck the check box to disable reminders. check the check box to enable automated event reminders to be send to enrolled users . Click the Update Settings link. 2. check to set the Send Reminder field on the Edit Event page as checked by default .Uncheck the check box to disallow.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed).Uncheck the check box to set as unchecked by default. 5. Subscribers: Select to enable users to subscribe for notification through the check box in the icon bar. This email address can be modified for each event on the Edit Event page.Uncheck the check box to disable reminders. 1. At Reminder Anonymous. unauthenticated users) to request event reminders .

In the Allow Multiple Enrollees text box. 10.OR . . check the check box to enable authorized users to sign up for events OR . Configuring the Enrollment Settings How to configure enrollment settings including PayPal account details for paid events on the Events module.com 6. Note: The event owner and moderators always can see the event . This displays the Event Module Settings page. At Select the User Fields to Display. At Display Enroll List by Default. Click the Update Settings link.paypal. The default setting is https://www. Note: Cancellations are only allowed for unpaid events. enter https://www.com .Uncheck the check box if it isn't displayed by default. check the check box to hide an event once the maximum number of enrollees is reached. In the PayPal Account text box.paypal. At Permit Event Enrollment.OR .7. enter your PayPal account number if you are collecting fees to paid events.paypal. 8.Uncheck the check box to disable event enrollment. 7.Uncheck the check box to keep displaying the event. enter the number of people that a single user can enroll for an event. Maximize the Enrollment Settings section. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . Optional. 2. 4.com to test this setting. check the check box to display the enrollment list on the Event Detail Page by default . "Configuring Moderation Settings" 1. The Host email address is entered by default. The default value is one ( 1 ) enrollment per user.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed).OR . enter the number of days before an event a user is able to cancel their enrollment.sandbox.OR . At Hide Full Enrolled Events. Optional. select each of the user fields to be displayed on the Event Detail Page and who is able to view these fields. 9. 5. button (only vis- 3. In the Cancel Before Days text box.enter https://www. At PayPal URL.

Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed).11. button (only vis- 3. enter the email address of the moderator who will receive notification when an event of enrollment required moderation.OR . This displays the Event Module Settings page. 4. Newly added events and event changes will be automatically displayed on the module. The email address of the Host is entered by default. In the Moderator Emails text box. To send emails to multiple moderators. At Moderate Event/Enrollment Changes. 2. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . Click the Update Settings link. Maximize the Moderation Settings section. enter one or more emails separated by a semi-colon. . Configuring Moderation Settings How to enable or disable the moderation of events and enrollments and configure the related settings on the Events module. 1. l Uncheck the check box disable moderation. select from these option: l Check the check box to enable moderation of all changes to events and enrollments.

At Add/Remove Sub-Calendars.Uncheck the check box to disable. c. At Include Other Site Event Modules?.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed).OR . button (only vis- 3.OR . select one or more of the other event modules to be included in this module. A SubCalendar is an Events module which is located on another page. select from these options: l Check the check box to include events from other Events modules on this Events module a. check the check box you want the View permissions applied to the SubCalendar to be observed in the master calendar . 2. in the Available list. b. Maximize the SubCalendars Settings section. Configuring the SubCalendar Settings How to display events from one or more events modules (SubCalendars) in an Events module. 1. A maximum of 1000 SubCalendars can be added.Uncheck the check box to hide the name of other Events modules in the title of events. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . l To Add a Calendar. This displays the Event Module Settings page.5. click on the name of the calendar in the Available box and then click the Add > link. At Add Sub-Calendar Name. check the check box to include the name of the other Events modules (SubCalendars) in the title of an event when it displays in this Events module OR . At Enforce Permissions. . Click the Update Settings link.

The field name can then be managed using the Languages module. Configuring Custom Field Settings How to enable and configure custom fields on the Events module. select from the following options: l Check the Set name in Admin/Languages check box to enable Custom Field 2 to be displayed. To Remove all Calendars. select from the following options: l Check the Set name in Admin/Languages check box to enable Custom Field 1 to be displayed. To Remove a Calendar.l To Add all Calendars. l .Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed). 2. This displays the Event Module Settings page. The field name can then be managed using the Languages module. At Display Custom Field 1. click the Add All >> link. click the Remove All << link. At Display Custom Field 2. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . l 4. Uncheck the check box to disable this custom field.OR . Click the Update Settings link. 1. Maximize the Custom Fields section. the check box to only display events added using this Events module. button (only vis- 3. Uncheck the check box to disable this custom field. click on the calendar name in the Selected box and then click the Remove < link. l l l Uncheck 4.

Uncheck the check box to hide tool tip. At Display Day View Tooltip. 4.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed). Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu .OR .OR . button (only vis- 3.Uncheck the check box to hide tool tip. This displays the Event Module Settings page. Configuring RSS Settings How to enable and configure RSS Settings for the Events module. In the Tooltip Length text box. 7.OR . Configuring Tooltip Settings How to configure the Tooltip settings of the Events module. 1.OR . . At Display Week View Tooltip. At Display Month View Tooltip. enter the maximum number of characters included in the tool tip. 6.5. Click the Update Settings link. Maximize the Tooltip Settings section. and the event cell in week view. check the check box to display the event description as a tool tip in the week view . Click the Update Settings link. check the check box to display the event description as a tool tip in the day view . The default setting is 10000. check the check box to display the event description as a tool tip in the month view . 2. 5.Uncheck the check box to hide tool tip. Tool tip show when hovering over whole row in list and day views.

c. 1. 4. check the check box to include the email address of the event owner when an unregistered user exports an event . l Uncheck the check box to disable RSS. At Enable RSS. In the Days To Include text box. b.OR . 2. Maximize the Calendar Export Settings section. Click the Update Settings link. At Owner Email For Unregistered User. Click the Update Settings link. Maximize the RSS Settings section.Click the Edit Settings Icon Bar is displayed. a. 2. 5. In the Feed Description text box. button (only vis- 3. In the Feed Title text box.Uncheck the check box for no email. This displays the Event Module Settings page. enter the number of Days to include in the RSS from today. .OR . select which date to use as the Publish Date in the RSS feed. edit the title to be displayed in the RSS feed if desired. button if the 3. 4. Configuring Calendar Export Settings How to configure the export settings for events on the Events module. This displays the Event Module Settings page. At Owner Email Address Export.OR .Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed).Uncheck the check box for no email.1. edit the title to be displayed in the RSS feed if desired.OR . select from these options: l Check the check box to enable RSS. d. check the check box to include the email address of the event owner when a user exports an event . Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu . At Date To Use.

This displays the Event Module Settings page 2. . 4. Optional. Maximize the Template Settings section.Configuring Calendar Export Settings for the Events Module Configuring Template Settings How to modify the default event templates used in the Events module. button (only vis- 3. 1. select the template to be viewed/modified. Modify the template in the text box. 5. Select Edit Settings from the module actions menu .OR . At Event Template. Click the Template Help link to view a full list of replacement tokens.Click the Edit Settings ible if the Icon Bar is displayed).

At Permissions. Global Category Editors: Users authorized to create and manage event categories. 2. Select the Permissions tab.OR . l l 4. Global Category Editors (users who can manage categories) or/and Global Location Editors (users who can manage locations) on the Events module. These permissions are in addition to the usual module permissions. Click the Update link. Tip: You can click the Troubleshooting: Unable to Add New Events to the Events Module If you are unable to add new events or edit existing events to the Events module this may be cause by Friendly URL's being disabled on your web site. set these unique Event module permissions: l Event Moderators: Users authorized to moderate events. Click the Update Template link to save your changes. . Reset Template link to reset to the default template as any time. 1. 3. Select Settings from the module actions menu . Global Location Editors: Users authorized to create and manage event categories.6. Host level access is required to modify this setting. Contact your Administrator or Host to request enabling of friendly URL's. Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling Use Friendly URL's" Settings Setting Unique Event Permissions How to assign role members and users as Event Moderators.Click the Settings button.

Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling Scheduled Tasks" Troubleshooting: Cannot Add New Events Friendly URL's must be enabled on the Events module.Assigning roles and users as Events Moderators Related Topics: l "Setting Module Permissions" SuperUsers Troubleshooting: Event Notifications Not Sending The Event Notification schedule must be enabled on the Host > Schedule for event/enrollment notifications to be sent. The question is displayed as a link. Failure to do so will prevent new events being added and existing events from being edited on the Events module. FAQ's can . Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling Use Friendly URL's" FAQ About the FAQs Module The FAQs module enables authorized users to manage a list of questions and corresponding answers. requiring the user to click on a question to view the corresponding answer.

com/workitem/list/basic l l All Users Viewing an FAQ Answer How to view the answer to a frequently asked question. date created.com/Products/Development/Forge/ModuleFAQ/tabid/892/Default. This displays the answer below that question. ISearchable The FAQ Module Project Links l Project Home: http://www.dotnetnuke.06.codeplex. answer. 1. category name. and the question number.01 Features: IPortable.aspx Support Forum: http://www.05.com/Community/Forums/tabid/795/forumid/27/scope/threads/Default. Click the Question which is a link. number of times viewed.dotnetnuke. The module settings page enables authorized users to set the default sorting order and modify the styles templates allowing you to display the question. Module Version: 04. .aspx Issue Tracker: http://dnnfaq.be managed using your own categories. date modified.01 Minimum DNN Version: 05. category description.

2. enter the answer. etc. 3. or another editor to return later to complete it. Module Editors Adding an FAQ How to add a frequently asked question to the FAQs module. Add New FAQ link. enter the question. Optional. Note: You cannot include movies. select a category from the drop-down box. Optional. In the Question text box. At Category. Optional. 1. 4. Tip: You can add a question without entering an answer. In the Answer text box. Click the link again to hide the answer. Only basic HTML is permitted. This allows you. A maximum of 400 characters is permitted. sound files. Select Add New FAQ from the module actions menu .Click the opens the "Edit This FAQ Entry" page.2. This .OR .

5. . Click the Edit button associated with the FAQ to be edited. Editing an FAQ How to edit a frequently asked question on the FAQs module. The newly added FAQ is now displayed in the module. 1. Click the Update link.

. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 3. Edit the one or more fields as required. Click the Edit 2. 3. 1. FAQ's can only be associated with one category. Click the Add New link. Click the OK button to confirm.OR . Click the Update link. Delete link. See "Editing the FAQ Templates" 1. Click the button associated with the FAQ to be deleted. 2. Manage Categories link.Click the This displays the Manage Categories page.2. Deleting an FAQ How to permanently delete a frequently asked question from the FAQs module. The category name and description can optionally be displayed in the module by editing the Item Template under Module Settings. Adding an FAQ Category How to add one or more categories to the FAQs module. Select Manage Categories from the module actions menu .

7. 4. Editing an FAQ Category How to edit a category in the FAQs module. enter a name for the category. Manage Categories link.Click the This displays the Manage Categories page. 4. 1. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. Repeat Steps 2-5 to add additional categories.3. 3. 2.OR . In the Category Description text box. In the Category Name text box. Click the Edit button beside the category to be edited. enter a description for the category. 5. Click the Update link. Edit the Category Name and/or Category Description information as required. Click the Update link. . Select Manage Categories from the module actions menu . 6.

l l l . Select the FAQs Settings tab. 3. Popularity (lowest first): Sorts FAQ's from the least popular to the most popular. select from the following sorting options: l Modified Date (newest first): Select to sort FAQ's according to the date they were last modified from newest to oldest. At Default Sorting. Repeat Steps 2-3 to delete additional FAQ's. Click the Delete button beside the category to be deleted. Modified Date (oldest first): Select to sort FAQ's according to the date they were last modified from oldest to newest.click the Manage Categories link. 5. Select Manage Categories from the module actions menu . Repeat Steps 2-4 to edit additional categories. Settings Setting the Default Sorting Order of FAQ's How to set the default sort order for FAQ's in the FAQs module. 6.Click the Settings button. 1. Click the OK button to confirm deletion. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 3.OR . Popularity (highest first): Sorts FAQ's from the most popular to least popular. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. 1. 2.OR . Popularity is rated by the number of times the FAQ has been clicked. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. Select Settings from the module actions menu . Deleting an FAQ Category How to permanently delete a category from the FAQs module.5. 2. Popularity is rated by the number of times the FAQ has been clicked. 4.

At Question Template.l Creation Date (newest first): Select to sort FAQ's according to the date they were first created from newest to oldest. the question. etc. the date the FAQ was created. Select the FAQs Settings tab. Editing the FAQ Templates How to edit the templates which control the layout of FAQ's in the FAQs module. Select Settings from the module actions menu . number of times an item has been viewed. as well as a loading template to be display while AJAX is loading the question. 3. A template is provided for the answer. 2. A full list of tokens is listed below this topic and on the Settings page. 5. Click the Update link. At Loading Template. Nine different tokens can be added to these templates to display information such as the related category. edit the default loading template which is displayed when the user clicks on a Question until the Answer is fully loaded and displayed. l 4. 4. At Answer Template. 1. edit the default template for the answer. . Creation Date (oldest first): Select to sort FAQ's according to the date they were first created from oldest to newest.OR . edit the default template for the question.Click the Settings button.

the Question template has been modified to include the category name and changes to the color and alignment. Note: In the below image.6. . Click the Update link.

Module Version: 01. Sections below Tabs. . [FAQ:CATEGORYDESC] Displays the information entered into the Category Description field. The standard content layout displays Tabs across the top of the module. add a new module and copy and paste the template from the new module into the module you have edited. Feed Explorer About the Feed Explorer Module The Feed Explorer module allows users to browse RSS feeds using a tabbed user interface. The module displays DNN information by default however it can be configured to aggregate multiple RSS feeds from different sources into one easy to use module. This token can only be added into the Answer template. Displays the first name last name of the user who last updated the FAQ.00. Displays the number times the item has been viewed. [FAQ:DATEMODIFIED] Displays the date when the FAQ was last modified.00. [FAQ:DATECREATED] [FAQ:INDEX] Displays the date when the FAQ was created. [FAQ:CATEGORYNAME] Displays the information entered into the Category Name field. and Items down the left hand side of the module and then displays the related content to the right of the Items. Displays the order number of the FAQ. FAQ Token List [FAQ:QUESTION] [FAQ:ANSWER] [FAQ:USER] [FAQ:VIEWCOUNT] Displays the information entered into the question field. Displays the information entered into the answer field.Tip: To restore an original template. Note: The version number for this module does not update as it forms part of the DNN framework.

skins.many of which have been verified as fully compatible with DNN. user manuals. video training and other DNN solutions . Information is grouped using the following tabs: l Marketplace: This tab provides access to the DNN Marketplace (Snowcovered. Skins: Skins and containers sale. This enables users to obtain DNN modules.The Feed Explorer module displaying Yahoo! news Settings Displaying DNN Solutions in the Feed Explorer How to display DNN Solutions using the Feed Explorer module.com) which sells extensions for DNN. . Many of these extensions have all been reviewed by DNN Corporation so you can be confident that they will not break or cause errors on your site. This tab is divided into three sections: o o Modules: DNN modules for sale.

4.o Other: Other DNN products for sale including components.Click the Settings button. providers (including authentication systems and language packages) and DNN services (including DNN Sponsorship). . l DNN: This tab displays a list of the current DNN core projects. At the time of writing only the Modules section was completed.OR . Click the Update link.com. 2. l How to display DNN Solutions using the Feed Explore module: 1. select DotNetNuke Solutions Explorer. At Content Source. Core and Components which are developed and maintained by the core team and are available for free. Utility. 3. Select Settings from the module actions menu . Select the Feed Explorer Settings tab. Projects include Modules. About: Provides information about the Solutions Explorer and Snowcovered. You can visit the project page of a module by clicking on module name on the Modules tab. eBooks. Providers.

video. This displays news from Yahoo!. . Google and BBC news. images. maps and more.Displaying DNN Solutions in the Feed Explorer Displaying News in the Feed Explorer How to display news using the Feed Explorer module.

Select the Feed Explorer Settings tab. 1. select Custom OPML URL/File. Select Settings from the module actions menu . At Content Source. Select the Feed Explorer Settings tab. Google and BBC News are a preset Content Source option Displaying Custom OPML using a Custom URL or File How to set the Feed Explorer to display any custom data by entering a URL to an OPML (Outline Processor Markup Language) file or by uploading an OPML File. At Content Source.OR .Click the Settings button. 2. 2.1.OR . 3. Yahoo. . Select Settings from the module actions menu . 3. 4. An OPML file is an XML file which contains markup describing multiple RSS feeds. Click the Update link.Click the Settings button. select DotNetNuke Solutions Explorer.

enter an absolute URL or file path. Displaying Custom OPML using Custom Text How to display any custom RSS feed data by entering OPML (Outline Processor Markup Language) that is customized for the Feed Explorer module. Click the Update link. Select the Feed Explorer Settings tab. 3. 5. Sections and items in the Feed Explorer.xml 5.OR .Click the Settings button.google. You can add as many Tabs. select the Custom OPML Text radio button. Edit the existing text in the Custom OPML Text text box .google.Delete the existing text and paste in your own text. http://www.domain. The sample below shows how to create the Tabs.OR .com/?output=rss" /> . E. 2.com/portals/0/myopmlfile.google.com/?output=rss" /> http://news. At Content Source.com/?output=rss" /> http://news. 1. Click the Update link. In the Custom OPML URL/File text box.com/?output=rss" /> http://news. Select Settings from the module actions menu .google. 4.4. Sections and Items as you like.g. http://news.

Click the Settings button. 1. At Theme. select a theme from the drop-down box. .This OPML produces the below output in the Feed Explorer Setting the Feed Explorer Theme You can change the skin design applied to the Feed Explorer module. Select the Feed Explorer Settings tab. 2. 3. Select Settings from the module actions menu .OR . Two skins or themes are supplied by default.

02 Minimum DNN Version: 05. and telephone Optional CAPTCHA security code l l l l l l .02. Feedback About the Feedback Module The Feedback module allows users to send messages to the site Administrator.4. Click the Update link. The Feedback Comments module is a companion module which is also added to the page when the Feedback module is added. postal code.00.03 Features: ISearchable Features: l Subject and category list management Hide or display multiple form fields Optional moderation for one or more feedback categories Templates enable editors to change the module's look and feel Set unique permissions to manage moderation and lists Set validation rules for email. See "About the Feedback Comments Module" Module Version: 05.

The Feedback Module Project Links .

com/Products/Development/Forge/ModuleFeedback/tabid/841/Default. the following defaults are used: l The primary site Administrator (See "Setting the Primary Administrator") will receive email notification when feedback is sent.com/workitem/list/basic l l Configuration Configuring the Feedback Module The Feedback module can be used as soon as it is added to a page. In the Street text box. c. Note: Some fields listed in this topic may not be displayed on the Feedback module. l See the Manage Settings section for both the Feedback and Feedback Comments modules to modify these defaults and set a wide range of optional settings. Optional. Feedback messages will be displayed in the Feedback Comments module to all users who have access to view that module. In the Name text box. Go to the Your Contact Information section.dotnetnuke. Log in to your account (See "Logging into a Site"). 2.l Project Home: http://www. enter your email address. enter your name. 1. a. Authenticated users can either skip all fields in the Your Contact Information section (which are pre-populated from their user account). Required fields can differ depending on the settings for each module.codeplex. In the City text box.com/Community/Forums/tabid/795/forumid/30/scope/threads/Default.aspx Support Forum: http://www. enter your city.aspx Issue Tracker: http://dnnfeedback. b. Required fields display the Required icon. d. In the Email text box. or they can optionally choose to edit the information. All Users Sending Feedback How to send feedback using the Feedback module.dotnetnuke. See "Configuring Cache Settings for a Module" If you choose to use the Feedback module now. . however it is recommended the following settings are configured: l Disable Caching: It is recommended that caching is disabled to prevent stale data being displayed in the module. enter your street address.

l b. enter the code displayed on the picture above. Click the Send Feedback link. At Subject. 7. In the Country text box. g. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to have a copy of the message emailed to you. enter your country. The following optional fields may also be available: a. In the Security Code text box.e. In the Postal Code text box. enter or select the subject of your message. Note: If the image is difficult to read. enter your region/state. select a category from the drop down list. enter your telephone number. f. At Send Copy?. In the Telephone text box. the check box if you do not wish to receive a copy of your message. h. enter your postal code. 4. 5. At Category. The following optional fields may also be available: a. This typically displays the message "Your feedback has been sent to the site owner. In the Region or State text box. 6. enter your message. click the Refresh button to be presented with an alternative image. . b. In the Message text box. Go to the Your Feedback section. 3. however you may be redirected to another page. Thank you!".

.

3. At Feedback Modules.OR . select from these options: l Check the check box to enable paging (I. Select Settings from the module actions menu . This displays a list of the Feedback modules on this site. Go to the Feedback Comments module. check the check box beside each module to be included.Sending Feedback Feedback Comments Settings Configuring Comments View Settings How to configure the module settings of the Feedback Comments module.e. a. Restrict the number of comments displayed on the page and enable users to page through each page). In the Default Page Size text box.Click the Settings button. l Uncheck the check box to remove paging and display all published comments. 2. select which Feedback modules comments are displayed for: l Selected Modules Only: Select to choose which Feedback modules to display feedback from. 4. 5. l Portal (from all Feedback Modules): Select to display published feedback from all modules. .Leave all categories unchecked to display feedback from all categories. 6. Go to the Comments View Settings section. i. enter the number of comments to be displayed on each page. At Allow Paging. At Categories. At Scope. 1. select one or more categories to restrict the feedback displayed to only those categories OR .

Click the Update link. 2. 5. Display Feedback for All Categories Configuring Comments View Settings How to modify the various templates which control the appearance of the Feedback Comments module. Displaying Feedback for all Categories How to display feedback for all categories using the Feedback Comments module. This is the default option. . Tip: Categories are managed under Feedback Lists on the Feedback module. Go to the Comment View Settings section. Select Settings from the module actions menu .OR . Go to the Comments View Settings section.Click the Settings button. 4. 2. Go to the Feedback Comments module. select the None Selected. Click the Update link. At Category.7. Note: A list of the available replacement tokens is displayed on this page at the Available Tokens field.Click the Settings button. Go to the Feedback Comments module. 1. 3. Select Settings from the module actions menu . These tokens are also included below this topic for convenience. 3.OR . 1.

the item template is used for both odd and even numbered comments. This template specifies what is displayed for each even numbered comment. 7. In the Footer Template text box. In the Item Template text box. 8. In the Header Template text box. This template specifies what is displayed for each odd numbered comment. edit the template as required. edit the template as required. In the Alternating Item Template text box. If an alternating item template is not specified. . edit the template as required. This template specifies what is displayed below comments. edit the template as required. edit the template as required. 5. In the Separator Template text box. This template specifies what is displayed at the top of the comments. 6. This template specifies what displays between each comment.4.

Click the Update link. . Tip: You can reset any of the default templates by clicking the Load Default button to the right of each template field.9.

[Feedback:FeedbackID]. [Feedback:CreatedOnDate]. Displaying Feedback for a Single Category Displaying/Hiding Feedback Email How to hide or display a person’s email address on feedback comments that are published on the Feedback Comments module.List of Available Tokens [Feedback:CategoryID]. [Feedback:SenderCity]. 3. 5. Select Settings from the module actions menu . [Feedback:SenderRemoteAddr].OR . 2. [Feedback:Category]. [Feedback:SenderRegion]. Click the Update link.Click the Settings button. [Feedback:SenderStreet]. [Feedback:SenderTelephone]. 3. select the category name. [Feedback:SenderCountry]. You may like to have a different Feedback Comments module to display feedback for each category or feedback for different categories as visible to different roles and users. [Feedback:TotalRecords] Displaying Feedback for a Single Category How to display feedback for a single category only using the Feedback Comments module. [Feedback:PublishedOnDate]. At Category. Tip: Categories are managed under Feedback Lists on the Feedback module. . Select Settings from the module actions menu . Go to the Comment View Settings section. 4. 2.Click the Settings button. 1. Go to the Feedback Comments module. Go to the Feedback Comments module. [Feedback:Message]. [Feedback:SenderName]. Go to the Comment View Settings section. [Feedback:SenderPostalCode]. 1. [Feedback:Subject]. [Feedback:SenderEmail]. [Feedback:CategoryName].OR .

Click the Update link. the check box to hide names . Select Settings from the Feedback Comments module actions menu. 3. 1. check 4.4. Go to the Comment View Settings section.Uncheck the check box to display Email Addresses are Hidden on this Feedback Comments Module Displaying/Hiding Feedback Name How to hide or display a person’s name on feedback comments that are published on the Feedback Comments module. 2.OR . At Hide Name. 5. At Hide Email.OR . the check box to hide names .Uncheck the check box to display names. Click the Update link. check names. .

5. At Hide Subject.Names are hidden on this Feedback Comments module Displaying/Hiding Feedback Subject How to hide or display the subject list value beside feedback comments that are published on the Feedback Comments module. Go to the Feedback Comments module. Select Settings from the module actions menu . check names.OR . 1. Click the Update link. the check box to hide names .Click the Settings button. 4.Uncheck the check box to display . 2.OR . 3. Go to the Comment View Settings section.

The Feedback Subject List Value is Hidden on this Feedback Comments Module About the Feedback Comments Module The Feedback Comments module is a companion of the Feedback module. as well as enabling fields to be hidden or displayed. . It displays published comments which have been submitted using one or more Feedback modules. In addition. the use of templates enable the look and feel of the comments to be designed as required. The module can be set to display all feedback comments or feedback comments from selected feedback categories.

5. select Categories. In the Value text box. enter a value for this category.g.g.The Feedback Comments Module Manage Feedback Lists Adding Feedback Categories How to add basic categories to the Feedback module. This value will be displayed in the Feedback Comments module beside any feedback within this category. 3. The category is now displayed to the left. In the Name text box. Note: For details on how to associate a category with one or more email addresses. E. 6. Select Feedback Category/Subject Lists from the Feedback module actions menu. enter a name for this category. Click the Save link. At Is Active. 1. 2. or uncheck the check box if this category will show up in the category list on the Feedback if this category is currently inactive. Marketing 4. At List Type. E. . Marketing. See "Adding Feedback Categories with Email Values" Tip: The Feedback Comments module can also be set to display feedback for all categories or just one category. check module.

This value will be displayed in the Feedback Comments module beside any feedback within this category. 5.g. 2. E. 1. 1. enter a name for this category. 8. At List Type.com. The category is now displayed to the left. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. 8. 2. Select Feedback Category/Subject Lists from the Feedback module actions menu. Adding Feedback Categories with Email Values How to add feedback categories that are associated with one or more email addresses using the Feedback module.OR .sales@domain. enter one or more email values for this category separated by a semi-colon (. salesmanager@domain. Marketing 4. 3.). In the Name text box.g. 7. Repeat Steps 3-6 to add additional categories. At Is Active.com. 6. select Categories. check the check box if this category will show up in the category list on the Feedback module . At List Type. This sends a notification message to those email addresses whenever feedback is submitted to that category. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. Select Feedback Category/Subject Lists from the Feedback module actions menu.7. Repeat Steps 3-6 to add additional categories. select Categories. In the Value text box. Click the Save link. E. Editing Feedback Categories How to edit categories in the Feedback module. .Uncheck the check box if this category is currently inactive.

4.3. Select Feedback Category/Subject Lists from the Feedback module actions menu. 6. 5. Click the Edit button beside the category to be edited. 3. Feedback module categories are listed in the order in which they are created. The properties of this category are now displayed in the fields to the right. Re-ordering Feedback Categories How to re-order categories on the Feedback module. select Categories. 7. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. 5. 1. Repeat Steps 3-5 to edit additional categories. 2. . Repeat Step 3 to re-order additional categories. 4. Click the Up or Down button beside a category to move it up or down one position in the list. Edit the category details as required. At List Type. The new details for this category are now displayed to the left. Click the Save link. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module.

you can deactivate it. Click the OK button. At Is Active. 2. check tivate it. 3. As an alternative to deleting a feedback category. Repeat Steps 3-5 to modify additional categories. 1. Active categories are listed on the Settings page. At List Type. Select Feedback Category/Subject Lists from the Feedback module actions menu. Select Feedback Category/Subject Lists from the Feedback module actions menu. select Categories. Click the Save link. 1.Uncheck the check box to deac- 4. Click the Edit button beside the category to be activated or deactivated. At List Type. Click the Delete button beside the category to be deleted. Deleting Feedback Categories How to permanently delete categories from the Feedback module. 2. 7. whereas deactivated categories are not listed on the settings page and are only visible to Administrators on the Feedback Lists page. select Categories. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 4. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module.OR . 6. 3.Activating/Deactivating Feedback Categories How to activate or deactivate a category on the Feedback module. the check box to activate the category . 5. .

Click the Save link. check the check box if this category will show up in the category list on the Feedback module .5. Feedback 4. Feedback. 3. 1. enter the subject name. select Subjects. . or users can be enabled to select a subject from a list when sending their feedback. Repeat Steps 3-4 to delete additional categories.Uncheck if this category is currently inactive. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. 2. At List Type. Adding Feedback Subjects How to add subjects to a Feedback module. E. This value can optionally be displayed in the Feedback Comments module beside any feedback associated with this subject. Select Feedback Category/Subject Lists from the Feedback module actions menu. In the Value text box.OR .g. 5. 6. The saved subject will be displayed to the left. E. Once you have created subjects they can either be associated with one or more instances of a Feedback module. enter a value for this subject. In the Name text box. At Is Active. 6.g.

Click the Edit button beside the subject to be edited. 1. Click the Up or Down button beside a subject to move it up or down one position in the list. 5. 2. select Subjects. At List Type. 1. Select Feedback Lists from the Feedback module actions menu. 3. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. Select Feedback Category/Subject Lists from the Feedback module actions menu. Editing Feedback Subjects How to edit subjects on the Feedback module. 7. select Subjects. Repeat Steps 3-5 to edit additional subjects. Repeat Steps 3-6 to add additional subjects. Feedback subjects are listed in the order in which they are created. . Click the Save link.7. 4. The edited subject is displayed to the left. Re-ordering Feedback Subjects How to re-order subjects on the Feedback module. 2. 8. 6. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. 3. At List Type. Edit the subject fields as required.

Repeat Steps 3 to re-order additional subjects.4. whereas deactivated subjects are not listed on the settings page and are only visible to Administrators on the Feedback Lists page. the check box to deactivate the subject. 3. 1. Click the Save link. . 2. Activating/Deactivating Feedback Subjects Feedback subjects can be set as active or inactive. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. Select Feedback Lists from the Feedback module actions menu. 4. At Is Active. Active subjects are listed on the Settings page. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to activate the subject. l 5. At List Type. select Subjects. 5. Click the Edit button beside the subject to be activated or deactivated.

5. Click the OK button. Note: Posts which are displayed in the Pending Feedback section of the Moderate/Manage Feedback Posts page can consist of these feedback posts: l When all categories are moderated. Repeat Steps 3-5 to activate or deactivate additional subjects. 3. Select Feedback Lists from the module actions menu. As an alternative to deleting a feedback subject.6. Click the Delete button beside the subject to be deleted. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. Repeat Steps 3-4 to delete additional subjects. 6. 7. When one or more categories are unmoderated. then all unmoderated posts are added to the Pending Feedback section of the Moderate/Manage Feedback Posts page. At List Type. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. Moderate Feedback Posts Moderating Pending Feedback Posts How to moderate and edit feedback submitted using the Feedback module. you can deactivate it. posts from these categories can be set to appear in any section as desired. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 4. This means that newly submitted posts which are not associated with a moderated category l . 2. select Subjects. Deleting Feedback Subjects How to permanently delete subjects from the Feedback module. 1. This enables you control which feedback comments are displayed in the Feedback Comments module.

3. In the Subject text box. . Click the Edit button beside a feedback post to edit the subject or message. In the Message text box. Click the Delete button to permanently delete this feedback. Click the Return to Module link to return to the module. l l l 5. 4. b. Private feedback is not published on the Feedback Comments module and is only viewable in the Private Feedback section of this page. In the Pending Feedback section. You can then select the print option on your Web browser to print a hard copy. c. Click the OK button to confirm deletion. 6. 2. a. Select Feedback Moderation/Management from the Feedback module actions menu. click the Print button beside a feedback post to view a print friendly version of this post. The feedback will be viewable by all users authorized to view the associated Feedback Comments module.may never appear in the Pending Feedback section. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" i. a. Click the Set Private link to set feedback as private. Optional. edit the subject as required. Repeat Steps 2-4 to moderate additional feedback. In the Pending Feedback section. Click the Archive link to archive feedback. edit the message as required. Optional. click on one of the following links beside the feedback to be moderated: l Click the Publish link to publish feedback on the Feedback Comments module. Archived feedback is not published on the Feedback Comments module and is only viewable in the Archived Feedback section of this page. See "Configuring Moderation and Feedback Management Settings" Here's how to moderate posts: 1. Click the Return button to return. Click the Update button to save and return.

Click the Set Private link to set feedback as private. Select Feedback Moderation from the Feedback module actions menu. 2. This is useful if you wish to check the integrity of unmoderated categories. Archived feedback is not published on the Feedback Comments module and is only viewable in the Archived Feedback section of this page. l l . Locate the feedback post to be reclassified and click one of these links: l Click the Publish link to publish the feedback on the Feedback Comments module. This enables you to set any feedback comments that have already been moderated as visible or not visible in the Feedback Comments module. Check the Show feedback only in unmoderated categories check box to limit feedback displayed to unmoderated categories only.Moderating pending feedback Reclassifying Moderated Feedback How to reclassify feedback submitted using the Feedback module. Private feedback is not published on the Feedback Comments module and is only viewable in the Private Feedback section of this page. Optional. 1. 3. Click the Archive link to archive feedback.

Select the Permissions tab. In the Moderate Feedback Posts column. 2. 4. 1. Settings Setting Feedback Permissions How to set the roles and users who are able to manage subject and category lists. check to manage feedback lists. 3. In the Manage Feedback Lists column.4. check ized to moderate feedback. and or moderate post for the Feedback module. Click the Return to module link to return to the module.OR .Click the Settings button. the check box for each role and each user author- the check box for each role and each user authorized . Select Settings from the module actions menu .

This value is not displayed to users. Click the Update link. . Select the Feedback Settings tab. In the Send From text box. enter the email address to be used as the default From email address. 5. Go to the Email Addresses and Options Settings section. 1. check ients of the feedback. At Send To User Roles. the check box beside each security roles whose users are to be recip- 6. This setting is useful if you find feedback is being blocked by Spam filters.5. 2. Select Settings from the module actions menu . In the Send To text box. as well as other email options using the Feedback module. enter the email address of the recipient of feedback sent from this module.OR . 4. Related Topics: l See "About Module Permissions" Configuring Email Addresses and Options Settings How to configure the optional email addresses and user roles who will receive feedback. 3.Click the Settings button. The email address set at this field overrides the one entered by the user in the Email field on the feedback form.

3. l 10. See "Adding Feedback Categories" 1.OR .Uncheck the check box to remove the opt out option and automatically send a copy to the sender. Tip: One or more categories must be created prior to configuring these settings. If this option is unchecked.Uncheck check box to disable this feature. 2. select from these options: l Check the check box to send email asynchronously. Configuring Feedback Category Settings How to configure the option category settings for the Feedback module. Maximize the Feedback Category Settings section. This can be useful it feedback is emailed to a large number of recipients. . At Send Copy. At Can Opt Out. Uncheck the check box to send emails immediately. Select Settings from the module actions menu .7.OR . 9.OR . Select the Feedback Settings tab. check the check box to display the Send Copy? check box on the Feedback module that enables users to opt out of receiving a copy of their message by email . the 8. check the check box to send a copy of the message to the sender . skip to Step 9. At Send Email Asynchronously. Click the Update link.Click the Settings button. Emails are sent as a background task.

Note: You can enter either a pixel value (E. At Category List Visible. At Subject Field Type.g. l 5. 2.Uncheck the check box to disable. select the category associated with this module. Configuring Form and Fields Settings How to configure the form and field settings for the Feedback module. The default setting is 100%. .4. 4. At Field Label Position. In the Form Width text box. select the position of field names on the form from these options l Same Line As Field Above Field: This option is useful when the Feedback module is located in a narrow pane on the page.Click the Settings button. At Subject.g. At Category.Select None Selected if you don't want to associate this module with a subject. 7. select from these options: l Drop-Down List: Select to display a drop-down of the active subjects on the form.OR . 6. Select Settings from the module actions menu . 5. Maximize the Form and Fields Settings section. Click the Update link. At Use Category Value as Send To. 3.OR . enter a value to set the width of the message window. Select the Feedback Settings tab. This displays the selected category name on the module. select the subject to be associated with feedback sent from this module . Select one of the following options: 7. then the "Send To" value is used . 1. This enables users to select a subject from the list you have created on the Feedback Lists page.Uncheck the check box to disable category selection.OR . 100) or you can set a percentage value by including the percentage sign (E. Where no email address exists in the category value. 6. 100%). check the check box to use the category value as the email address of the recipient of this message. check the check box to enable users to select an alternative category OR .

9. See "Configuring the Request Filter" 16. enter a .NET regular expression to validate telephone numbers. choose to set the city field as either Required. or Hidden. enter a . or Hidden. Optional. Optional. At City Field. or Hidden. Optional. In the Message Rows text box. 17. choose to set the name field as either Required. 15. In the Telephone Validation text box. choose to set the country field as either Required. Optional. Leave blank to disable telephone number validation. At Name Field. At Telephone Field.NET regular expression to validate email addresses. enter a . Optional. choose to set the telephone field as either Required. or Hidden. At Region or State Field. 14. or Hidden. choose to set the street field as either Required. 10. Note: Subject will be an optional form field. choose to set the postal code field as either Required. enter a value to set the number of rows for the message window. 18. 11. or Hidden. Hidden: Select to hide the subject list. 13.NET regular expression to validate postal codes. . 12. In the Postal Code Validation text box. Leave blank to disable postal code validation. Optional. At Street Field. l 8. The default is 20 rows. In the Email Validation text box. Users can neither select a subject nor enter their own subject.l Editable Text Box: Select to display a text box where users can edit the subject. At Country Field. or Hidden. At Postal Code Field. choose to set the region or state field as either Required. Optional.

Maximize the Submission and Security Settings section. 1. Select the Feedback Settings tab. set when or if the Security Code field is displayed on the Feedback module (as shown in the below image). Tip: You can reset default value for any of the validation fields by clicking the Reset Default button. 4. CAPTCHA requires users to enter the displayed code in order the submit feedback.OR .19. 3. l l . At Captcha Visibility. 2. Select Settings from the module actions menu . Configuring Submission and Security Settings How to submission settings and optionally enable CAPTCHA security on the Feedback module.Click the Settings button. Anonymous Users Only: CAPTCHA is displayed to anonymous users only. Select from these options: l All Users: CAPTCHA is displayed to all users. Click the Update link. Disabled: CAPTCHA is disabled.

OR . . At Redirect To Page.5. Select Settings from the module actions menu . At Repeat Submission Filter. 1. DotNetNuke User ID: Do not filter by DotNetNuke UserID if anonymous users are allowed to submit feedback.OR . Configuring Moderation and Feedback Management Settings How to configure the moderation and feedback management settings of the Feedback module. User IP Address User Email Address l l l 6. select the page users are redirected to upon submitting feedback. Click the Update link. Maximize the Moderation and Feedback Management Settings section. 2.Click the Settings button. select the type of filtering used to limit repeat submissions by the same user. Filtering by User IP Address may block legitimate uses behind proxy or firewall sharing same IP. In the Minimum Submission Interval text box. 3. enter the time (in minutes) the same user must wait before submitting additional feedback. 7. The default setting is 0. This allows you to create a custom experience for your users . 8.Select <None Specified> for no redirect page. Select the Feedback Settings tab. The following options are available: l No Filtering: Skip to Step 7.

6. Portal (across all Feedback modules of portal): Feedback moderators can view and manage feedback for all instances of the Feedback module on this site. For example. The available options are: Archived. At Unmoderated Category Status. At Print Action. Private. ii. Select one or more categories to limit moderation to those categories. select from these options: l Check the check box to enable moderation.4. This setting relates to the Print button which can be selected when moderating feedback. Published. This option should be used with caution. At Scope. i. l 5. Optional. select the status for unmoderated posts when not all categories are moderated. Note: You can reset the default template by clicking the Reset Default button. If no categories are selected. then all categories are moderated. You may use the same field value tokens as those available in the guest book settings. Pending. view and/or edit the HTML template used for printing a single feedback item from the moderation/management control. or Deleted. At Moderated. l Uncheck the check box to disable moderation. the token [Feedback:Subject] will be replaced with the feedback Subject field value. . select the scope of moderation from these options: l Instance (for this Feedback module only): Feedback moderators can only view and manage feedback associated with this instance of the Feedback module. 7. This displays the list of the current categories for this module. select to display print results either In-Line (Existing Page) or in a Popup (New Window). In the Print Template text box.

and synchronize the file upload directory. Host Tip: The File Manager module located on the Host page provides the host with access to all files across all portals within this DNN application. This administration module can be added to any site page. To check the mail settings for this site. download files. and is also displayed on the Admin and Host menus. See "Setting the SMTP Server and Port" File Manager About the File Manager Module The File Manager Module enables the management of files on this site. It also provides information on the amount of disk space used and available.8. This module allows authorized users to upload new files. SuperUsers Troubleshooting: Feedback Doesn't Send If feedback submitted using the Feedback module doesn't send successfully you will receive a Warning message. . Click the Update link. delete files.

The File Manager Module .Community Edition .

this toolbar enables the management of folders.Professional Edition Getting Familiar with the File Manager Module Here's an overview of the different areas of the File Manager: Folders Toolbar: Located at the very top of the File Manager. as well as file synchronization. The Folders Toolbar includes the following tools: l Add Folder: See "Adding a New Folder" Delete Folder: See "Deleting a Folder" l .The File Manager Module .

or See "Setting the Archiving and Indexing Property of a File" Delete File: See "Deleting a File" Select All: Click to select all files. or UnSelect All: Click to unselect all files. See "Setting the Read Only Property of a File". Unzip File: See "Unzipping Compressed Files" l . The File Toolbar includes the following tools: l Refresh: See "Refreshing All Files within a Folder" Copy Files: See "Copying Files" Move Files: See "Moving Files" Upload: See "Uploading Files" or "Uploading Multiple Files" Delete Files: See "Deleting Multiple Files" Filter: See "Filtering Files" l l l l l Folder Explorer: Located on the left of the File Manager. This section provides the following options: l Rename File: See "Renaming a File" as well as editing file properties. See "Setting the Hidden Property of a File". Files Window: This central window lists files within the selected folder. the Folder Explorer enables users to navigate to folders using a hierarchical structure (See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" as well as folder synchronization (See "Synchronizing Folders"). this toolbar enable management of files within the selected folder. l l l Select File: Select one or more individual files to perform any of the above tasks on the Files Toolbar.l Synchronize Files / Recursive: See "Synchronizing Files within a Folder" Files Toolbar: Located below the Folders toolbar. Note: Use the Files Navigation bar to access files not displayed (See "Navigating to Files").

DNN Professional Edition provides seven types of permission (Browse. and Write to Folder). Delete. Browse Files in Folder. Three basic levels of permission are available in DNN Community Edition (Open Files in Folder.Files Navigation Bar: This bar provides navigation and file display tools. Add. l l Folder Security Settings: This section enables Administrators to control security role access to each folder.g. Page 1 of 5. The default setting is ten (10) and this setting defaults back to ten (10) when the page is refreshed. It displays the Page [Page Number] of [Number of Pages]: enables the user to scroll through files when there are more items than displayed on one page. Other options are: 15. 40. and 50. The following information is displayed from left to right: l Folder Address Used and Available Space Items Per Page: Select the number of Items (files) displayed in the Files Window. 20. View. and Full Control) . Copy. Folder Information Bar: This information bar is located below the Folder Explorer and provides details related to the File Manager. E. Manage Settings. Folder. 30.

Folder Security Settings .Professional Edition All Users Navigating to and Selecting Folders How to navigate to and select a folder with the File Manager module.Community Edition Folder Security Settings . .

Click the Synchronize Folders button located in the title bar of the Folder Explorer. File Manager 2. Synchronizing Folders Navigating to Files By default the File Manager displays the first ten (10) files within the selected folder inside the Files Window. l l Select Folder: Click on a folder name to select it. Use this feature when folders are uploaded using FTP directly to the database. Synchronizing ensures the folders listed match the folder structure within the database. The Folder Explorer is minimized when synchronization is completed. the number of pages and the page number of the current page will be displayed along with the Items Per Page tool.OR .Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. Synchronizing Folders How to synchronize the folders of the File Manager module. l Page 1 of 4: If there is more than one page of files associated with the selected folder. the following options are displayed enabling you to navigate to the additional files as well as change the default number of files displayed. Go to a File Manager module .l View Child Folders: Click the Maximize Hide Child Folders: Click the Minimize button beside a folder to view its child folders.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . This highlight the selected folder name and displays the associated files in the Files Window. When there are more than ten (10) files. button beside a folder to close it and hide its child folders. 1. .OR .

Go to a File Manager module . Move Previous: Displays the previous page of files.OR . l l l l Items Per Page: Select a number to change the number of files displayed in the Files Window. Do this by deleting the filter criteria from the text box and clicking the Filter button. 1. l Move First: Displays the first page of files. This setting will default to ten (10) whenever the File Manager is refreshed. The filter is applied to both the file name and the file extension. This will display only files which match the entered criteria and which are in the selected folder.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. When performing a task against multiple files.l Page Navigation: The following navigation buttons are displayed. Selecting Items Per Page Filtering Files How to filter the files using the File Manager module.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . Tip: You must remove the filter to view all files again. Important. use this feature to enable you to select up to 50 items at one time. File Manager .OR . Move Last: Displays the last page of files. Move Next: Displays the next page of files. rather than the 10 items which are displayed by default.

File Manager Refreshing Files .2. This may be required if files have been uploaded via FTP. Navigate to and select the required folder. Navigate to and select the required folder. 4. This task refreshes the file information in the database to match the files on the server.OR .Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. Click the Filter button. Go to the Files Toolbar and enter the filter criteria into the text box. 1. This filters the files displayed in the Files Window so only files containing the filter criteria are displayed. See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3.OR .Navigate to Admin > File Manager . See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3. 2. Filtering Files Refreshing All Files within a Folder How to refresh the files within a selected folder of the File Manager module. Go to a File Manager module . Click the Refresh button to refresh files.

Click the same column title again to a second time to reorder files in descending order. Date. File Manager 2. click on a column title (I. .OR . Navigate to and select the folder containing the file to be downloaded. File Name.Reordering Files How to reorder the files displayed in the Files Window of the File Manager module.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . Date or Size columns. Ordering Files by Size Downloading a File How to download a single file from the File Manager.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. or Size) to order files in ascending order by that field. Go to a File Manager module . 2. 1.e. Files can be ordered in either ascending or descending order by the File Name. Click the linked file name. Optional. 1. In the Title Bar of the Files Window.OR . See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3.

Navigate to Admin > File Manager .4.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. To view the Folder Types: 1. File Manager . Select Manage Folder Types from the module actions menu.OR .OR . The DNN Professional Edition and DNN Enterprise Editions also allow you to add Cloud based folder types located on Amazon's S3 service and Microsoft's Azure Service. Save the file to your computer. 2. These folder types come as standard with DNN Community Edition. Module Editors Overview of Folder Types There are three (3) folder types which are included with DNN by default. Go to a File Manager module .

amazon. Prerequisites. This enables you to store your files on Amazon cloud using the Amazon S3 service. go to http://aws. You must have an Amazon S3 account. 1. For details and to sign up. Go to the General Settings section. Select Manage Folder Types from the module actions menu. 2. File Manager 3.OR .Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. . Go to a File Manager module . 4.Navigate to Admin > File Manager .The Folder Type Definitions Page Adding an Amazon S3 Folder Type How to add an Amazon Simple Storage Service folder type to the File Manager.com/s3.OR . Click the Add New Type button.

.5. 9. 8. This name will show up in the File Manager as a Folder Type when you add new folders. 7. select <Refresh> from the drop-down list. Go to the Folder Provider Settings section. This returns to the Folder Types list and displays the new Amazon S3 Folder Provider. 6. 10. In the SecretAccessKey text box. enter the key for your service. 11. At Folder Provider. select the bucket you want to store the files in. enter the secret key for your service. In the AccessKeyID text box. At Bucket Name. select AmazonS3FolderProvider from the drop-down list. This displays the Folder Provider Settings section. In the Name text box. enter a name for the new provider. 12. Click the Update button. This populates the list with the bucket available for you to store files in. At Bucket Name.

OR . For details and to sign up. Go to the General Settings section. Select Manage Folder Types from the module actions menu. 1.OR . 4. Prerequisites.com/en-us/cloud/developer/default. Click the Add New Type button. You must create a Windows Azure account. This enables you to store your files on the Windows Azure cloud using the Amazon S3 service.microsoft.aspx?fbid=u_aAUR4Zrw6. . File Manager 3. 2.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. go to http://www. Go to a File Manager module .Navigate to Admin > File Manager .Adding a Windows Azure Folder Type How to add a Windows Azure folder type to the File Manager.

7. At Container Name. 8. enter a name for the new provider. This displays the Folder Provider Settings section. This will now take you back to the Folder Types list and show the new Azure Folder Provider. select <Refresh> from the drop-down list. In the Account Key text box. At Container Name.5. At Folder Provider. 10. enter the account key for your service. In the Name text box. 9. select AzureFolderProvider from the drop-down list. select the container you want to store the files in. In the Account Name text box. . enter your account name. 11. Click the Add New Type button. 6. This name will show up in the File Manager as a Folder Type when you add new folders. Click the Update button. 12. This populates the list with the bucket available for you to store files in.

select from the following options if you are uploading a zip file that you wish to decompress (unzip) during upload. These files can then be viewed using various modules such as Links. button and select a file from your computer. At the drop-down box. Navigate to and select a folder that you are authorized to upload files to. Optional. Click the Browse. 4. DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Add permission for the folder where the file will be uploaded to.OR . 1.Folder Editors Uploading Files How to upload one or more individual files or a zipped (compressed) file to the File Manager module. etc. File Manager 2. Media. This adds both the ZIP file and all the individual files to the selected folder. HTML/HTML Pro.. This opens the File Upload page. l Check the check box to decompress the files while uploading them. Optional. Click the Upload button located on the Files toolbar. The default selection is the folder you chose at Step 1.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. change the folder which the file will be uploaded to. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file will be uploaded to.. . 5. At Decompress ZIP Files?.OR .Navigate to Admin > File Manager . Go to a File Manager module . 6. See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3.

Click the played. If upload is successful. Repeat Steps 4-7 to upload additional files . the [FileName] Uploaded Successfully message is dis- 8. You can unzip the files at a later time if required.Click the Related Topics: l Return link to return to the module. See "Unzipping Compressed Files" 7. See "Uploading Multiple Files" Unzipping Compressed Files How to decompress a zipped folder of files (compressed files) within the File Manager module. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: . Upload File link.l Uncheck the check box to upload the file as a zipped folder.OR .

OR . See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3. This displays the message asking "UnZip Files(s): [FileName]?" 4. Navigate to and select the Folder containing the file to be unzipped. File Manager 2.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel.OR . . Go to a File Manager module . Click the Unzip File button beside the file to be decompressed. Click the OK button to confirm. 1.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Add permission for the folder where the file is located as well as the destination folder.DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file is located as well as the destination folder. This displays a message asking you to select the destination folder from the Folder Explorer.

the check to synchronize all child folders of the selected folder. DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content or Full Control permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Manage Settings permission to the required folder. The Folder Explorer is minimized when synchronization is com- . Synchronize Files button. or when you wish to refresh the file within multiple folders. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission to the required folder. Go to a File Manager module . At Recursive. The original zip file is still located in the original folder.OR . Note: If you wish to unzip the files into the folder where they currently reside. Synchronizing ensures the files listed match the files within the database. Click the OK button to confirm. 6. then you must click the folder name twice. Optional. Synchronizing Files within a Folder How to synchronize the files inside one or more folders of the File Manager module.OR .Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. check 4.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . File Manager 2. The files are now unzipped in the selected folder. Navigate to and select the folder you want to unzip the files to. 1. Click the pleted. This displays the Unzip Select Files To message. Use this feature when files are uploaded using FTP directly to the database. See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3.5. Navigate to and select the folder to be synchronized.

Additional permissions are required to perform specific tasks. Note: These permissions enable users to select files and perform file refreshing and filtering. .Synchronizing Files within the Selected Folders Selecting Files How to select one or more files in the File Manager module. Users require the following minimum permissions select files: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and View DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions"). Here are the options for selecting files: Select a File: Check the check box to the right of the file to select it. Selecting files enables you to perform file management tasks such as copying and moving files. Deselect a File: Uncheck the check box to the right of the file to deselect it.

Use the Items Per Page tool if you want to select more files at one time. . See "Modifying Items Per Page" Deselect All Files: Uncheck files. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file is located as well as the destination folder. This enables you to select up to 50 files at one time.Select All Files: Check the check box in the title bar of the Files Window to select all of the displayed files. the check box in the title bar of the Files Window to deselect all of the displayed Copying Files How to copy one or more files from one folder to another folder of the File Manager module. Important.

This displays the Copy Selected Files To message which displays the name of the selected folder. 1. . 5. Go to a File Manager module .OR . Click the Copy Files button. In the Files Window. Click the Ok button to confirm. Click the Ok button. Note: Files cannot be copied to the same folder.OR .Navigate to Admin > File Manager . File Manager 2. This displays the Copying Files message which lists the names of the files to be copied and requests that you select the destination folder. 6. Navigate to and select the folder where the files to be copied are located. This displays the "Copy Checked Files?" message.OR . 7. See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel.DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Copy permission for the folder where the file is located as well as the destination folder. Navigate to and select the folder you want to copy the files to. Tip: See "Navigating to Files" to select different or additional files within this folder. check the check box beside each of the files to be copied . 4.Click the Select All button to select all of the files displayed in the Files Window.

Moving Files How to move one or more selected files from one folder into another folder within the File Manager module. In the Files Window.OR . Navigate to and select the folder where the files to be moved are located.OR . File Manager 2. This displays the Moving Files message which lists the names of the files to be moved and requests that you select the destination folder. Click the Move Files button. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file is located as well as the destination folder. Click the Ok button to confirm. 5. Tip: See "Navigating to Files" to select different or additional files within this folder.Click the Select All button to select all of the files displayed in the Files Window.OR .Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Copy permission for the folder where the file is located as well as the destination folder.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . 4. This displays the "Move Checked Files?" message. Go to a File Manager module . check the check box beside each of the files to be moved . See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3. 1. .

Deleting a File How to permanently delete a single file from the File Manager module. This displays the Moving Selected Files To message which displays the name of the selected folder. Click OK to confirm deletion. 5. See "Navigating to Files" 4. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file is located. Note: Files cannot be moved to the same folder.6. DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Manage Settings permission for the folder where the file is located. In the Files Window. . Click the Ok button. 1. navigate to the required file. Go to a File Manager module .Navigate to Admin > File Manager . See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel.OR . 7. Navigate to and select the folder you want to move the files to. Click the Delete File button beside the file to be deleted. A message asking "Are You Sure You Wish to Delete The File [ FileName ]?" is displayed.OR . File Manager 2. Navigate to and select the folder containing the file to be deleted.

OR . 1. Tip: See "Navigating to Files" to select different or additional files within this folder. Go to a File Manager module . Delete Files button. See "Navigating to Files" 4. DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Full Control permission for the folder where the file is located. This displays the Delete Files message which lists the files selected for . 5. Navigate to and select the folder containing the files to be deleted. display the required files.Click the Select All button to select all of the files currently displayed in the File Window. File Manager 2.Navigate to Admin > File Manager .Deleting a File Deleting Multiple Files How to permanently delete multiple files from the File Manager module. Check the check box beside each of the files to be deleted . In the Files Window.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file is located.OR .OR . Click the deletion. See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3.

Navigate to Admin > File Manager .OR . Edit Content permission for the module and Write to Folder permission for the folder which will be the parent of the new folder. Go to a File Manager module . 1.OR . Adding a New Folder How to add a new folder to the File Manager module. Edit Content permission for the module and Add permission for the folder which will be the parent of the new folder. See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" . The new folder will inherit the permissions assigned to its parent folder. Users require these minimum permissions: In DNN Community Edition. Navigate to and select the folder which will be the parent for the new folder.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. In DNN Professional Edition.6. Click the OK button to confirm. Permissions. File Manager 2.

In the Folders text box.3. This displays the new folder in the Folder Explorer. Secure . enter a name for the new folder. Click the Add Folder button. Amazon Folder Provider:Stores files on the Amazon service. The Newly Added Folder displayed in the Folder Explorer . On the Folders Toolbar. This is the default option. Secure . AzureFolder Provider: Stores files on the Azure service. Only available in Professional and Enterprise Editions.File System: Select this option to store most of your files.Database: Stores files as a byte array in the database rather than in the usual file system. Only available in Professional and Enterprise Editions. 5. l l l l 4. select one of the following options from the Foldersdrop-down list: l Standard .File System: Select this option if you want to encrypt the file name to prevent direct linking to this file.

Tip: A folder cannot be deleted if it has any child folders. Deleting a Folder from the File Manager Renaming a File How to rename a file in the File Manager module. 2.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . Go to a File Manager module . or if it contains any files. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder to be deleted. Click the Name]?" Delete Folder button. 1. DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Delete permission for the folder to be deleted. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: .Deleting a Folder How to permanently delete empty folders from the File Manager.OR .Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel.OR . Navigate to and select the folder to be deleted. Click the OK button to confirm deletion. If you wish to keep files which are located within a folder which you are about to delete. you can move them to another folder. See "Navigating to and Selecting Folders" 3. This displays the message "Delete Folder: [Folder Location:Folder File Manager 4.

2. enter a new name for the file. 4. Click the Save Changes button to save your changes. DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Manage Settings permission for the folder where the file is located.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . As such. Click the Rename File button beside the file to be renamed. Tip: Setting a file as Read Only does not prevent it from being deleting. See "Navigating to Files" 3.DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file is located. File Manager 3.OR . DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Manage Settings permission for the folder where the file is located. Go to a File Manager module . Click the Rename File button beside the file to be edited. Renaming a File Setting the Read Only Property of a File How to set the read only property of a file in the File Manager module. Go to a File Manager module . Warning.g. 1. it is recommended that you only rename a file when it is first uploaded and has yet to be used on the site.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. E. Renaming a file does not update any other references to this file across your site. In the File Name text box.OR . If the file is an image displayed in the HTML / HTML Pro module. 1.OR .Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. 2. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file is located.OR . then the path to the image will be broken and you are required to manually update the image. Locate the required file.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . File Manager .

nor are they displayed for selection on RTE galleries. An Image Set as Hidden isn't displayed in the HTML module . Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file is located.OR . they are also not displayed on vendor banners. Hidden files don't display on your site in modules such as the Media and HTML / HTML Pro modules. Setting a file as read only Tip: The letter R is displayed beside files set as Read Only.Click the Cancel Rename button to l 5. Setting the Hidden Property of a File How to set the hidden property of a file in the File Manager module. DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Manage Settings permission for the folder where the file is located. the check box to remove the read only property from the file. At the R check box. select one of the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to set the file as read only. button to save your changes .4. Click the Save Changes cancel.

2. select one of the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to set the file as hidden.OR . Click the Rename File button beside the file to be edited.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . File Manager 4. l . Go to a File Manager module .The Image displays once the Hidden property is removed 1. Locate the required file.OR .Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. See "Navigating to Files" 3. the check box to remove the hidden property from the file. At the H check box.

Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. Users require the following minimum permissions to complete this task: DNN Community Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Write to Folder permission for the folder where the file is located.5.OR .OR . DNN Professional Edition: Edit Content permission for the module (See "Setting Module Permissions") and Manage Settings permission for the folder where the file is located. 2. 1. Click the Save Changes cancel.Navigate to Admin > File Manager .Click the Cancel Rename button to Tip: The letter H is displayed beside files set as Hidden. button to save your changes . Setting the Archiving and Indexing Property of a File How to set the archiving and indexing properties of a file within the File Manager. Go to a File Manager module . See "Navigating to Files" File Manager . Locate the required file.OR .

select from these options: l Check the check box to disable hidden option in file properties (Windows). This is the default the check box to remove this file property. For fast searching. Uncheck the check box to remove this file property. Click the Rename File button beside the file to be edited./or Administrators Overview of Folder Security Settings The File Manager module enables authorized users to manage access to one or more folders within the File Manager by setting Folder Security Settings. l l . Write to Folder: Enables authorized users to perform all file management tasks for files within this folder. Click the Save Changes cancel. At the S check box. select from these options: l Check option.OR . Here's a description of the different permissions which can be set: Community Edition Permissions l Open Files in Folder: Enables authorized users to view the files within this folder which are displayed or linked to on the site. l 5. Browse Files in Folder: Enables authorized users to browse and select the files within this folder.Click the Cancel Rename button to l 6. 4. At the A check box. This enables them to manage their profile image. Uncheck the check box to allow file to be archived by the operating system. button to save your changes . allow Indexing Service to index this file. All Users are granted this permission by default. Set archiving and indexing for a file Tip: The letters S and A are displayed beside the selected files if these options are set. etc.3. Users are granted permission to their personal folder only by default.

This enables them to manage their profile image. Full Control: Provides authorized users with full control to perform all file and folder management task within the selected folder. Add: Enables authorized users to add folders and documents beneath (as child folders) this folder. l l l l l l . Delete: Enables authorized users to delete a folder and/or its child folders. All Users are granted this permission by default. Users are granted permission to their personal folder only by default.Professional Edition Permissions l Browse Folder: Enables authorized users to browse and select the files within this folder. View: Enables authorized users to view the files within this folder which are displayed or linked to on the site. Copy: Enables authorized users to copy files to and from this folder. etc. Manage Settings: Enables authorized users to manage folder settings.

Go to the Folder Security Settings section. 5.Related Topics: l See "Adding a New Folder" See "Assigning Folder Permissions to a User" See "Assigning Folder Permissions by Role" l l Assigning Folder Permissions by Role How to assign permissions to manage a folder of the File Manager to users with one or more roles.OR . Navigate to and select the folder to have permissions assigned. The current permission settings are displayed. Go to a File Manager module . File Manager 2. See "Overview of Folder Security Settings" 6. At Permissions. Click the Update link. Check the check box in one or more columns to grant permissions to that role. select < All Roles > from the Filter By Group drop-down box (if displayed) to view all available roles.OR . . 3. The name of the selected folder is displayed in the Folders Information Bar.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. Optional. Assigning Folder Permissions to a User How to assign access to view folders and upload to folders of the File Manager module.Navigate to Admin > File Manager . 1. 4.

5. At Permissions. Navigate to and select the folder to have permissions assigned. as visible to all users or visible to Administrators only. select < All Roles > at the Filter By Group drop-down box (if displayed) to display all of the roles. Uncheck the check box beside in one or more columns to remove that permission.Navigate to Admin > File Manager .03 Minimum DNN Version: 05.Navigate to Admin > File Manager .01. List columns can be set as required (must be completed to save the row). The current permission settings are displayed. The current permission settings are displayed. File Manager 2. and User Profile Link. Date and Time. Time. The module can also display a form with results displayed in a list on the same page. Decimal. 8.OR . See "Overview of Folder Security Settings" 7. Download. 6. At Permissions. Go to the Folder Security Settings section. Calculated Column. Click the Update link.1. Currency. Form And List About the Form And List Module The Form And List module enables the creation of a list or a form which can be populated with data. Repeat Step 4-6 for to assign folder permission to additional users. and as searchable.OR .03 . 5. Navigate to and select the folder to have permissions assigned. This adds the user's name to the Permission role list. Optional. Go to a File Manager module . Image. Go to a File Manager module . 3. 1.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel.Select from the Admin section of the Control Panel. See "Overview of Folder Security Settings" 6.OR .OR . True/False. File Manager 2. Go to the Folder Security Settings section. 4. Removing Folder Permissions How to remove permission to view files within a folder and/or to write to a folder of the File Manager module. Rich Text (HTML).01. Email. Click the Update link. Check the check box in one or more columns beside this user's name to grant them folder permissions. URL. Click the Add link. enter the username of the user into the Username text box. Look-Up. 3. 4. Integer. Date. The name of the selected folder is displayed in the Folders Information Bar. Module Version: 05. The name of the selected folder is displayed in the Folders Information Bar. Data types are: Text.

aspx Support Forum: http://www.Features: IPortable.com/Community/Forums/tabid/795/forumid/56/scope/threads/Default.com/Products/Development/Forge/ModuleUserDefinedTable/tabid/877/Default.dotnetnuke.aspx l .dotnetnuke. ISearchable The Form & List Module configured to display as a Form The Form & List Module configured to display as a List Project Links l Project Home: http://www.

OR . See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1. In the Expression text box. At Show on Edit Form?. the check box to display to all users when editing . See MSDN Library for more on expressions. At Data Type select the result type from one of the following options: l Date and Time Decimal Integer Text (This is the default setting) True/False l l l l 3. In the Output Format text box. 4.com/workitem/list/basic Advanced User Documentation: http://dnnfnl. "###.Uncheck . This topic assumes you are currently adding or editing a calculated column.codeplex.g. enter an expression formula (appropriate for the data type) which will be evaluated at runtime.codeplex.###". 5. E.com/releases/view/38489 l Configuration Advanced Column Options Advanced Calculated Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for calculated columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. See "Creating a List".l Issue Tracker: http://dnnfnl. check to disable. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. enter an output format string suitable for this data type.

the columns of this list have been set so that users enter the Product Number and the Product Category data into separate fields.Setting a Calculated column Tip: In the above image. however the information is displayed as a truncated code on the list by using a Calculated Column. The Calculated Column is displayed on the Edit Record page once it has been updated .

E. In the Validation Rule text box.50 . E. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a currency column. 5. At List of Values set the following: a. 10. In the Currency Symbol text box. Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. USD. In the Default Value text box. E. In the List of Values text box. enter one or more values separated by a semi-colon ( . When creating a new row this value will automatically be selected or entered. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2.30.10. b. This is useful when there are a lot of values. l l 3.OR . See "Creating a List".g.Leave this field blank to display a text box in which any value can be entered. enter the currency symbol that you want to display in the Table. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1. 4.The Calculated Column Displayed in a List Advanced Currency Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for currency columns for a form or list in the Form & List module.20.20.30. $. enter the default currency value for this field. Leave this field blank to display the currency as set under Site Settings. ).g. .g.50.50. See MSDN Library for more on expressions. enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language.

enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule. E.g. In the Help Text text box. width:300px 8. 7. In the Validation Message text box. In the CSS Style text box. enter a help message to assist users when they add and manage data for this column.6. enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form. Setting the Advanced Options for a Currency column .

Adding a currency record to a list on the Edit Record page The currency column with the currency symbol set as displayed in a list Advanced Date and Time Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for date and time columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" . This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a date and time column. See "Creating a List".

Uncheck the check box to display date/time according to the users' time zone as set in their user prothe check box to use default site time zone. In the Validation Rule text box. In the Validation Message text box. l 4.OR .g. In the Output Format text box.Leave blank to use default format. E. When creating a new row this value will automatically populate the field. In the Help Text text box.g. February 21. . In the CSS Style text box. Thursday.g. Thursday.g. See MSDN Library for more on expressions. 5. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column. width:300px 8. 2011 8:00:00 AM g: Enter to display short date and short time. enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form.1. select one of the following options: l Check file. enter the format to set how the column data will be displayed in the table . however it can be changed. 2011 l l l l 3. enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule. E. E.g. The following options are available: l f: Enter to display long date and short time. 6.g. E. E. 2011 8:00 AM F: Enter to display long date and long time. At Convert TimeZone?. In the Default Value text box. E. February. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. February 21. 2/21/2011 8:00 AM G: Enter to display short date and long time. enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. 7. enter the default value for this field. 2/21/2011 8:00:00 AM Y: Enter to display year and month.

See "Creating a List". This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a date column.Setting the Advanced Options for a Date And Time column Adding a date and time record to a list on the Edit Record page The Date and Time field displayed in a List Advanced Date Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for date columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" .

2008 l l l 4.2008-01-15. 6. enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form. enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.2008-01-31 . In the Validation Message text box.g. The following options are available: l d: Enter to display a short date. b. When creating a new row this value will automatically populate the field. February 21 Y: Enter to display year and month. . This is useful when there are a lot of values. In the Validation Rule text box.g.g. In the Output Format text box. enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. Thursday.Leave this field blank to display the Calendar link. enter the default value for this field. In the List of Values text box. E. February. 2/21/2008 D: Enter to display a long date. enter a list of dates that can be selected from a drop-down box. If no value is selected the default setting is used. however it can be changed. width:300px 8. At List of Values set the following: a.g. E. 5.OR . February 21. E.g.g. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. E. Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. E.1. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column. 2008 M: Enter to display the month and day. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons. 2008-01-01. In the CSS Style text box. In the Help Text text box. E. In the Default Value text box.g. enter the format to set how the column data will be displayed in the table. 2000-01-01. E. 7. See MSDN Library for more on expressions. l l 3.

See "Creating a List". See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" .Setting the Advanced Options for a Date column Adding a date record to a list on the Edit Record page The Date field displayed in a List Advanced Decimal Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for decimal columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a decimal column.

E. however it can be changed. enter a list of values that can be selected for this field. 5. In the Output Format text box. See MSDN Library for more on expressions. enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language.10. enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule. enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form.20. In the Default Value text box. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list.1. At List of Values set the following: a. 0. In the List of Values text box.g. In the CSS Style text box. b.333. When creating a new row this value will automatically populate the field.25. . This is useful when there are a lot of values. l l 3.OR Leave this field blank to enter any decimal values into a text box. In the Help Text text box. 6. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. In the Validation Rule text box. In this case they will display as entered in the dropdown list on the Edit Record page however they will display as decimal values in the list . width:300px 8.00 4.15. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons. In the Validation Message text box.g. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column.30 Note: You can enter values that are not decimals such as 1 or 2. E. 5. enter the default value for this field. 7. Setting this field will remove the user's ability to enter other values.g. E. enter a format for this number.

Setting the Advanced Options for a Decimal column The decimal column as displayed on the Edit Record page The Decimal Column displayed in a List .

l l 3. 6. In the Help Text text box. See "Creating a List".com/toys. In the Link Caption text box.g. Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list. enter a list of URL's separated by a semi-colon ( .pdf . In the List of Values text box. Download this brochure.pdf. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. l 5.com/brochures/toys. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field. This is useful when there are a lot of values. http://www.http://www.pdf. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column. enter the default value for this field.g. ). When creating a new record this value will automatically be selected or entered. E. This text will display and be a link to the download. . b. 4.OR . select from these options: l Check the check box to display only the file or page name.Leave this field blank to display the Link Control which enables a file to be selected (and uploaded if permissions allow) from the File Manager.g.com/dolls. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" Error: An error occurs when a List Of Values is entered for download columns. http://www.Advanced Download Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for download columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. At List of Values set the following: a. E. 1.pdf would then display as toys.ecozany. Uncheck the check box if to display the complete URL.ecozany.domain. In the Default Value text box. enter the text that you want to display instead of the Download URL in the table. It is recommended that Advanced Options are not used. At Abbreviated URL. E. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a download column.

enter one or more values for this field separated by a semi-colon ( . ).Setting the Advanced Options for a Download column A download column with a Link Caption as displayed in a list Advanced Email Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for email columns for a form or list in the Form & List module.com.com .marketing@domain.Leave this field blank to display a text box into which any email address can be entered. . Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. At List of Values set the following: a. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1. In the List of Values text box.g. admin@domain.com.sales@domain.OR . See "Creating a List". This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing an email column. E.

E. In the CSS Style text box. 4. In the Help Text text box. E. 8.g. This text displays as a mailto link.b. enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form.OR . 7. At Disable Hyperlink?. This email is pre-selected/entered when a new record is created. In the Validation Rule text box. enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule. 6. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons. enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. l l 3. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. In the Validation Message text box. check the check box to disable the mailto hyperlink and display the email address as static text . Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list. enter the default value for this field. In the Default Value text box. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column.Uncheck to enable the mailto hyperlink. This is useful when there are a lot of values. In the Link Caption text box. enter the text that you want to display instead of the email address in the Table. Contact this person. Setting the Advanced Options for an Email column .g. See MSDN Library for more on expressions. 5. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field and the hyperlink will be enabled. width:300px 9.

gif . . 4. enter a list of image URL's separated by a semi-colon ( .Uncheck the check box to display the full sized image in the table. enter the text that displays when the user places their mouse over this text. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.OR . The user can then click on the thumbnail to view the full sized image.domain.domain. This is useful when there are a lot of values.Adding an email record to a list on the Edit Record page The email column with a Link Caption in a list Advanced Image Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for image columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. ).Leave this field blank to display the Link Control to enable the user to select an image from the File Manager. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1.gif.com/massage. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2.g. check the check box to display a thumbnail of the image. At List of Values set the following: a.http://www.OR . In the List of Values text box. In the ALT Tag text box. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. l l 3. At Hyperlink.com/acupuncture. Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing an Image column. b. http://www. E. See "Creating a List".

In the Help Text text box. Related Topics: "Configuring Image Column Settings" to configure additional setting for this column type. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column. In the Default Value text box. Setting the Advanced Options for an Image column Setting an image to a list on the Edit Record page The Image Column displayed in a List .5. When creating a new row this value will automatically be selected or entered. enter the default value for this field. 6.

00 4. In the Validation Rule text box. 5. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons.15. At List of Values set the following: a. b. enter a list of integers that can be selected for this field. E. width:300px 8. See MSDN Library for more on expressions.g.30. Setting this field will remove the user's ability to enter any integer. enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form. In the List of Values text box. In the Default Value text box. In the Validation Message text box.g. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1. . enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule. l l 3. In the Help Text text box. 0.10.Advanced Integer Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for integer columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. E.25. enter the default value for this field. enter a format for this number. When creating a new row this value will automatically populate the field. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing an Integer column. 5. See "Creating a List". however it can be changed. 6. Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. This is useful when there are a lot of values. E. 7. In the CSS Style text box.20.g. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column. Leave this field blank to display a text box in which any integer can be entered rather than a drop-down box. In the Output Format text box.

This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a Look-Up column. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" .Setting the Advanced Options for an Integer column The Integer column on the Edit Record page of a list The Integer Column displayed in a List Advanced Look-Up Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for look-up columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. See "Creating a List".

enter the name of the column containing a ref to a user or local file. See "Creating a List". In the Token Value text box. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. At Plain Text Box select from the following options: l Check the check box to display the plain text box only.OR . Tip: In the below example. 3. Setting the Advanced Options for a Look-Up column The Look-Up Column displayed in a List Advanced Rich Text (Html) Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for Rich Text (Html) columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. At Source Column. enter the token text to query the User or File object. the Look-Up column is set to display the size of the file selected in the Brochure column.1. . At Show on Edit Form?.Uncheck the check box to hide the field on the Edit Form. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. check the check box if this value will be displayed to all users when editing . This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a Rich Text (Html) column. The Plain text box will still be multiple lines deep. 4.

however it can be edited. In the Help Text text box. 4. 3. 6. See MSDN Library for more on expressions. enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule. 5. Setting the Advanced Options for a Rich Text (Html) column Adding Basic Text/Rich Text to a list on the Edit Record page . In the Validation Message text box.l Uncheck the check box to display the RTE as well as the option to switch to the Basic Text Box. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column. In the Validation Rule text box. In the Default Value text box. When creating a new row this value will automatically populate the field. enter the default value for this field.

l Setting the Advanced Options for a Separator . This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a separator column. This creates a fieldset element around the form and uses the title of the field as the fieldset legend. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. Uncheck the check box to disable. At Acts as Fieldset (applies only to CSS based layout select from the following options: l Check the check box for greater page accessibility.The Rich Text Column displayed in a List Advanced Separator Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for Separators on a form or list in the Form & List module. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1. See "Creating a List".

Mr. In the List of Values text box. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a text column. b. Leave this field blank to display a text box in which any data can be entered. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1.Mrs. At List of Values set the following: a. See "Creating a List". E.Separators displayed on a Form Advanced Text Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for Text columns for a form or list in the Form & List module.g.Dr.Ms. Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. enter one or more values for this field separated by a semi-colon ( . . This is useful when there are a lot of values. ).Miss.

In the CSS Style text box. When creating a new row this value will automatically be selected or entered. enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form. In the Validation Message text box. enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons. enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule. In the Help Text text box. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column. Setting the Advanced Options for a Text column Setting text value to a list on the Edit Record page . E. In the Default Value text box. width:300px 7. 6. l 3. 5.g. 4. enter the default value for this field.l Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. In the Validation Rule text box.

Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list.g.g.12:00:01. E. 8:00 AM. In the Output Format text box. This is useful when there are a lot of values. enter a list of times that can be selected. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a time column. When creating a new row this value will automatically populate the field. It is recommended that Advanced Options are not used. E. T: Enter to display standard format long time . See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" Error: An error occurs when a List Of Values is entered for Time columns. enter the format to set how the column data will be displayed in the table.Text displayed on a Form Advanced Time Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for Time columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons. ii. 1.Leave this field blank. . however it can be changed.OR . See "Creating a List". Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. 12:00:00. 8:00:00 AM. At List of Values set the following: i. In the List of Values text box. l 4. In the Default Value text box. E.g. l l 3. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. The following options are available: l t: Enter to display a short time. enter the default value for this field.

Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. Setting the Advanced Options for a Time column Adding a time record to a list on the Edit Record page Advanced True/False Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for True/False columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a True/False column. See MSDN Library for more on expressions. In the Help Text text box. In the Validation Rule text box. width:300px 8. enter the required input pattern using the "Regular Expression" language. 6. enter a help message to assist users when they add and manage data for this column. enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form. See "Creating a List". 7. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1. enter the message to be displayed if the value entered is incorrect for the validation rule.g. In the CSS Style text box.5. In the Validation Message text box. In the Right Label Text text box. . E. enter a label to be displayed to the right of the True/False check box on the form or list.

enter the Style which is applied on text box or list control in form. In the Default Value text box. 4.g. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a URL column. In the CSS Style text box. width:300px 5. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" . Setting the Advanced Options for a True/False column Adding a True/False record to a list on the Edit Record page The True/False Column displayed in a List Advanced URL Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for URL columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. enter a help message to assist users when they add and manage data for this column. When creating a new row this value will automatically be selected or entered. enter the default value for this field.3. In the Help Text text box. See "Creating a List". E.

This is useful when there are a lot of values. Visit this website.com/home. "Configuring URL Column Settings" to configure additional settings for this column type. leave this field blank to display the Link Control which enables any URL. At Abbreviated URL. When creating a new row this value will automatically be selected or entered.http://www. Note: If the Link Caption field is used it will override this field. In the Help Text text box. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons. l l 3. http://www. E.htm would then display as home.htm. At List of Values set the following: a.g. In the Default Value text box.OR .htm. 6.1.domain.Uncheck the check box if to display the complete URL.com/services.g. E.domain. enter a help message to assist users when entering data for this column. b. This text will then display as a mailto link. check the check box to display only the file or page name. In the List of Values text box. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. 5. In the Link Caption text box. Page or File to be selected. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. Setting the Advanced Options for a URL column . Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list. Alternatively. s/home. enter a list of URL's separated by a semi-colon ( . enter the text that you want to display instead of the URL in the table. ).g. E. enter the default URL value for this field. 4.htm .

Tip: Click the Available Tokens Help link for more. At Show User's Username Instead of his Displayname. This is useful when you have a lot of values. l l 3.Jack:Julie. ). Select how the list options are displayed: l Drop Down List: Display values in a drop-down selection list. See "Creating a Form" or See "Editing List or Form Columns" 1. Go to the Advanced Column Options section and set any of the following optional fields: 2. 4.Adding a URL record to a list on the Edit Record page The URL column displayed in a List Advanced User Profile Link Column Options How to configure the optional Advanced Column Options for Link To User's Profile columns for a form or list in the Form & List module. Leave this field blank to display a text box into which any username can be entered. HTML formatting is permitted. RBL (Horizontal): Display values in a horizontal list with radio buttons. the check box to display user- 5. Radio Button List (Vertical): Display values in a vertical list with radio buttons. See "Creating a List". At List of Values set the following: a. enter the default value for this field. When creating a new row this value will automatically be selected or entered. Leave this field blank to display the user's name. Admin. E. This tutorial assumes you are currently adding or editing a User Profile Link column. b. check name . . enter the text to be displayed as the link for this user on the UDT. Where a non-existent username is entered it will not be displayed as an option. In the List of Values text box. enter one or more usernames separated by a semi-colon ( . In the Default Value text box.Uncheck to display the user's display name.OR .g. In the Caption Options text box..

Setting the Advanced Options for a User Profile Link column The Link to User's Profile column as displayed on the Edit Record page The User Profile field displayed in a List Column Settings Configuring Image Column Settings How to set the width or height of images displayed in the image columns of a list created using the Form & List module.6. "Configuring User Profile Link Settings" to configure additional settings for this column type. . In the Help Text text box. enter a help message to assist users when they add and manage data for this column.

. At Settings for Image Columns set one of the following options: l In the Image Width text box. At Force Download. enter the height that images are displayed in image column. Configuring Image Column Settings Configuring URL Column Settings How to set URL columns in the Form & Lists module to display in the same or a new Web browser window. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . At Settings for URL Columns.1. This is the default option. Maximize the Column Settings section. enter the width that images are displayed in image column. Click the Save Settings and Return link to save this setting and return to the module.Uncheck the check box to display in the same window. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to save this setting and return to the module. 3.Click the Form and List Configuration button.OR . In the Image Height text box. 2.OR . At Url Optimization. b. check the check box to force the download of the resource .Click the Form and List Configuration button. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly. Larger or smaller images will be scaled accordingly. 2. Note: Tracking numbers only apply for new or updated URL's. l 4. If the Image Width field is set it will override this field rather than both dimensions being used.OR Uncheck the check box for optional download. At Show "Open Link in new Browser Window"? check the check box open URL links in a new Web browser window . 1. c. set the following: a. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . l 4. 3. Maximize the Column Settings section. Search Engine Friendly: Select to use search engine friendly URL's. select from these options: l Track Number Of Times URL's Are Clicked: Select to enable the Link Click log for URL's.OR .

1. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to save these settings and return to the module. b. check the check box to add a link to the user's profile on both the Created By and Updated By columns . Configuring User Profile Link Settings Email Settings Setting Email Settings How to set the email settings for forms or lists on the Form & List module.Uncheck the check box to open the profile in the same window. 3.Click the Form and List Configuration button.Configuring URL Column Settings for the Form & List Module Configuring User Profile Link Settings How to configure the optional setting for user profile links in a list on the Form & List module. At Open in New Window. 4.OR .OR . At User Link Caption select from the following options to set which name to display as the link to User Profile: l Display Name User Name l c. Maximize the Column Settings section. At Add to CreatedBy/UpdatedBy?. 2.Uncheck the check box for no link. check the check box to open the profile in a new Web browser window . Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . At Settings for User Profile Links set the following options: a.OR . Note: .

check created. enter the email address to be displayed in the From field of the notification message." or enclosed in [brackets].g. This displays the Email Settings section at the bot- the Email Settings section. See "Setting the Primary Administrator" 9. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . At Trigger. Changed By. the check box if you want to send a notification email when a new record is a. 12. enter the message to display in the body of the notification email. In the From (Overrides Default)text box. the check box if you want to send a notification email when an existing record a. 8. Optional. Created By. the check box if you want to send a notification email when an existing record . In the On New Text text box. Optional. l On Delete check is deleted. 3. 7. check is updated.[Created By]. enter the email address that you want any replies to the notification messages to be sent to. In the Reply To (Overrides Default)text box. In the On Update Text text box.com. Leave this field blank to use the Portal Administrator email address. 5. l On Update.Click the Form and List Configuration button. At Enable Email Settings. 10. enter each email address to be sent a 'blind carbon copy' of this message. check tom of this page. In the Tracking Message Editor.OR . See To field for more details. Maximize the check box. 6. select one or more of the following options to set which actions will trigger a notification email. You may enter the column Title name for column types Email. enter one or more email addresses. enter the subject for the notification email.1. 11. In the Email Subject text box. enter the body of the notification email message. In the BCC text box. In the To text box. In the CC text box. admin@domain. See To field for more details. enter the message to display in the body of the notification email. Leave this field blank to use the Portal Administrator email address. enter each email address to be sent a 'carbon copy' of this message. E. Go to the Page Related Settings section. 2. separated by semicolon ". 4.[Secondary Email]. Optional. l On New. or User Link.

i. At Tracking XSL Script. . 13. Optional. At Tracking XSL Script. upload a new file or generate a new XSL Script. set the link to your XSL file. select from these options: l Auto: Create the email body on the fly. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module. In the On Delete Text text box. l 14. upload a new file or generate a new XSL Script. set the link to your XSL file. At Email Body Creation.a. enter the message to display in the body of the notification email. XSL-Script: Email body is created using an XSL script you have created.

Setting Tracking and Notification Settings Form Settings Configuring Form Settings How to configure the optional settings for forms on the Form and List module.Click the Form and List Configuration button. . "Configuring a Form" 1.OR . Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . This tutorial assumes you have already configured the module as a form.

Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module. 4. Configuring Form Settings . i. This option on not require if Redirect To Another Page is selected.2. a. Redirect to another page: Redirects the user to any internal or external page. See "Setting a Page Link""Setting a URL Link" or "Selecting an Existing URL Link" l l 3. Show Text only: Displays the text (as entered into the below Editor) on the page. At Action Upon Submit select from these options to set what happens once the form is submitted: l Show Form and Text: Displays both the form and the text (as entered into the below Editor) on the page. In the Displayed text after form post Editor. enter the text to be displayed on form after is has been submitted. At Redirect Upon Submit. set the redirection link. If these settings are not configured the default options are applied. Maximize the Form Settings section and complete these optional settings.

To insert a column: a. iii. E. Select a UDT field from the drop-down list.g. E. Division: Renders each record inside its own div tag. b.) l l l l l ii. This tutorial assumes you have created a stylesheet and set it for this module. 2. view/edit the characters or tags used as a column delimiter. . insert one or more fields or columns as follows: 1. At Available Fields and Context. At List Type. This opens the Token Based XSLT Generator and Editor page. < li > Unordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag. Edit HTML Template section to edit the HTML template for this a. c. Select Edit Current XSL Script from the Form and List module actions menu. select the layout for the content.g. Click the Insert link.g. In the Delimiter text box. To insert a field: a. < div > Paragraph: Renders each record inside its own paragraph tag. The following options are available: l Table: Renders all records inside a single table. E. Select a UDT field from the drop-down list. < p > Ordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag. 2. Maximize the List View section to view the HTML of the XSL file you are editing. The default value is a semi-colon ( . Optional. ).g. E.List Settings Editing Current XSL Script How to edit the XSL Transformation file of a self-made stylesheet for a list on the Form & List module. Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field. Complete the following to edit the file: i. Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field. < li > Nothing: Renders all records separated by the delimiter (as selected at Delimiter below. Maximize XSL file. b. "Rendering a List using Self Made Stylesheets" 1. This is the only option when Table is selected as the List Type. the 1.

select the field you wish to insert. In the File Name text box. To insert a new field: i. This option is only enabled when Table is selected as the List Type. Optional. At Add Detail View. 3. Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field. check the check box to sort displayed records according to sort column and direction specified on the Form & List Configuration page. 4. check the check box to add a pager for the displayed list. showing the columns of the current record only. Save File section. b. To restore the default Detail View template: i. 5. a. In the 2. iv. Optional. enter a new file name if you want to create a new file rather than editing this one. Click the Insert Column link. where users can enter a text to search for in the records. If you didn't change the File Name you will be asked to confirm that you want to override the existing file. Select from these options: . Optional. a. Go to the 3. Click the Insert link. 6.c. iii. This displays the current layout of the Detail View page. At Add Paging Support to the Style Sheet. check the check box to add a text box above the displayed list. Click the Rebuild link to the left. Click the Save File and Return link. 7. Page size is specified on the Form & List Configuration page. 2. Click the Generate from HTML Template button. Optional. b. Optional. At Available Fields and Content. check the check box to add a link to an additional Detail View. Maximize the Options section. ii. view and edit the XSLT script if required. At Add Sorting Support to the Style Sheet. complete the following optional settings: 1. Optional. Edit XSLT Script section. At Add Search Box to the Style Sheet. You can manually edit the information or perform the following edit tasks: a.

This tutorial assumes you have created a stylesheet and set it for this module. view/edit the characters or tags used as a column delimiter. "Rendering a List using Self Made Stylesheets" 1. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . Maximize file. E. Click the Back link to return to the module. At XSL Script. This displays the Token Based XSLT Generator and Editor page. In the File Name text box. ). This is the only option when Table is selected as the List Type. E.l Yes: Select to override the existing file.) l l l l l ii. The default value is a semi-colon ( . In the Delimiter text box. No: Select to return to the page to create a new file as follows: 1. To insert a field: .Click the Form and List Configuration button.g. E. <li> Nothing: Renders all records separated by the delimiter (as selected at Delimiter below. E. click the Edit link. At Available Fields and Context.OR . select the layout for the content. 3.g. <p> Ordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag. the 1. Tip: Click the Rebuilt link located in the 1. enter a new file name.g. Editing the XSLT of a Self-Made Stylesheet How to edit the XSL Transformation file of a self-made stylesheet for a list on the Form & List module. Optional. Go to the List Settings section. The following options are available: l Table: Renders all records inside a single table. Edit HTML Template section to edit the HTML template for this XSL a. iii. Division: Renders each record inside its own div tag. 4. Complete the following to edit the file: i. <div> Paragraph: Renders each record inside its own paragraph tag. At List Type. 2. Edit HTML Template section to rebuild the HTML template if required. Note: All changes will be lost.g. <li> Unordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag. Maximize the List View section to view the HTML of the XSL file you are editing. insert one or more fields or columns as follows: 1. l b.

b. 2. iv. At Add Sorting Support to the Style Sheet. complete the following optional settings: 1. You can manually edit the information or perform the following edit tasks: a. To restore the default Detail View template: i. Click the Insert link. To insert a new field: i. To insert a column: a. b. Click the Insert link. This option is only enabled when Table is selected as the List Type. showing the columns of the current record only. where users can enter a text to search for in the records. Click the Rebuild link to the left. check the check box to add a text box above the displayed list. check the check box to add a link to an additional Detail View. select the field you wish to insert. 4. Select a UDT field from the drop-down list. check the check box to sort displayed records according to sort column and direction specified on the Form & List Configuration page. Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field. Select a UDT field from the drop-down list. . At Add Search Box to the Style Sheet. ii. c. At Available Fields and Content. At Add Detail View.a. Maximize the Options section. b. Click the Insert Column link. 3. Optional. Optional. b. At Add Paging Support to the Style Sheet. Optional. c. Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field. Optional. Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field. 2. Click the Generate from HTML Template button. iii. Page size is specified on the Form & List Configuration page. check the check box to add a pager for the displayed list. This displays the current layout of the Detail View page.

If you didn't change the File Name you will be asked to confirm that you want to override the existing file. enter a new file name. 1. Note: All changes will be lost. Generating a New XSL Transformation for a self made stylesheet How to generate a new User Defined XSL Transformation file for a self made stylesheet for the Form & List module. a. In the File Name text box. 7. 4. Go to the 3. click the Generate New link. In the File Name text box. In the 2. Click the Save File and Return link. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to continue. enter a new file name if you want to create a new file rather than editing this one. No: Select to return to the page to create a new file as follows: 1. Save File section. Edit XSLT Script section. .OR . Edit HTML Template section to rebuild the HTML template if required. 2. 6. 3. Go to the List Settings section. Select from these options: l Yes: Select to override the existing file. Tip: Click the Rebuilt link located in the 1.Click the Form and List Configuration button. select XSLT using self made stylesheets. At Rendering Method. At XSL Script. Optional.5. This opens the Token Based XSLT Generator and Editor page. Optional. a. view and edit the XSLT script if required. l b. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu .

Division: Renders each record inside its own div tag. E. < div > l .5. select the layout for the content. At List Type. The text box displays the HTML for a table which includes an Edit Link and each of the columns which have added to the table. Go to the 1.g. complete the following to edit the displayed HTML to create your custom XSL transformation: a. The following options are available: l Table: Renders all records inside a single table. 6. Edit HTML Template section. In the List View section.

E. 2.l Paragraph: Renders each record inside its own paragraph tag. complete the following optional settings: . < li > Nothing: Renders all records separated by the delimiter (as selected at Delimiter below. Select a UDT field from the drop-down list. At Available Fields and Context. The default value is a semi-colon ( . ). insert one or more fields or columns as follows: i. 2. To insert a field: 1. Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field. < p > Ordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag. Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field.g.) l l l b. 7. E. < li > Unordered List: Renders each record inside its own list item tag. E. This option is only enabled when Table is selected as the List Type. c. Optional. In the Delimiter text box.g. To insert a column: 1. 3. This is the only option when Table is selected as the List Type. Select a UDT field from the drop-down list. Maximize the Options section. 3.g. ii. view/edit the characters or tags used as a column delimiter. Click the Insert link. Click the Insert Column link.

showing the columns of the current record only. d. Page size is specified in Manage User Defined Table. . c. 2. b. Optional. To restore the default Detail View template: 1. You can manually edit the information or perform the following: i. To insert a new field: 1. where users can enter a text to search for in the records. At Add Search Box to the Style Sheet. Optional. Optional. Click the Rebuild link to the left. select the field you wish to insert. At Add Detail View. ii. Click the Insert link. This displays the current layout of the Detail View page. check the check box to add a link to an additional Detail View. At Add Paging Support to the Style Sheet. 3. check the check box to sort displayed records according to sort column and direction specified in Manage User Defined Table. At Add Sorting Support to the Style Sheet. Optional. Click inside the Text Box where you want to insert the field. check the check box to add a text box above the displayed list. At Available Fields and Content. check the check box to add a pager for the displayed list.a.

.8. Click the Generate from HTML Template button.

Edit XSLT Script section. view and edit the XSLT script if required. Note: All changes will be lost. 10. Tip: Click the Rebuilt link in the 1. b.9. Save File section. . Edit HTML Template section to rebuild the HTML template if required. 11. enter a file name. Optional. Go to the 3. Click the Save File and Return link. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module. a. In the 2. In the File Name text box.

Click the Form and List Configuration button. At XSL Script.OR . Select Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu . and Image Two shows the detailed view accessed when clicking on the View button) . 4. Maximize the List Settings section. select one of the following designs: l Advanced Table: Includes search box and detailed view. 1.The new user defined XSL transformation Rendering a List using built-in Stylesheets How to render list using one of the built-in stylesheets on the Forms & Lists module. 3. 2. select XSLT using built-in stylesheets. (Image One below shows the Advanced Table. At Rendering Method.

l Card View (pictured below): Records displayed in cards.l Basic Table (pictured below): Similar to the default grid table however this table does not have column sorting or paging. .

6.l Only Own Items (pictured below): Users can only see their own items. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to update these settings and return to the module. 5. Optional. l Transpose (pictured below): Columns are displayed down the page. Click the Show XSL source code link to view the source code for the selected file. Setting the rendering method . Column sorting or paging are disabled.

YUI DataTable Styled: This table displays borders. l l 5. Maximize the Grid Table Settings section and set any of these optional settings: a. 3. Two options are provided: l "Normal UDT_Table*": This is the default table layout. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . This displays the CSS Classes field. 3.Rendering a List using Self Made Stylesheets How to render a list using a stylesheet you have created on the Forms & Lists module. 2.OR .Click the Form and List Configuration button. 1. Optional. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to update these settings and return to the module. Select Form and List Configuration from the module actions menu . At CSS Classes. 4.OR . Click the Save Configuration and Return link. See "Setting a File Link" 5. select XSLT using self made or generated stylesheets. select Default Grid Table. At XSL Script. At Rendering Method. 4. "DataGrid_*": This table uses a smaller font and row color alternates from black to red. Maximize the List Settings section.Click the Form and List Configuration button. 2. At Rendering Method. set the link to your XSLT file. . select the CSS classes to be used. Rendering a List using Self Made Stylesheets Rendering a List using the Default Grid Table How to set the layout and design of a list using one of the included designs on the Forms & Lists module 1. Maximize the List Settings section.

check the check box to use a simple search box . surround the field name with [brackets].OR . Go to the Search and Filter Options section. Optional. Optional. 2. At Show Search Box. If your column name has spaces or special characters in it. .Setting the List Design using Default Grids Setting List Search and Filter Options How to set the list searching and filtering options for the Forms & Lists module.OR . Searches can be made on all or one column and can be set to Contain. At Show No Records Until Search.Uncheck the check box to disable. l Uncheck the check box to disable the search box. Use SQL syntax with WHERE clauses. enter a Boolean filter expression which a record must match to be displayed. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu .OR Uncheck the check box to use the standard Search Box. 4. Optional. At Search URL Paths. Tip: Click the Available Tokens Help or Hidden Columns Help links for a current list of available tokens or hidden column details. or Equal the search criteria. Checking this option enables the following optional settings: a. 3. Maximize the List Settings section.Uncheck the check box to display records by default. c. Start With. At Simple Search. End With. check the check box to include URL paths in search results . In the Filter Statement text box. check the check box to hide all records until a successful search has been made . 1. b.Click the Form and List Configuration button.OR . select from these options: l Check the check box display a search box which enables users to search the data within any searchable column. 5.

Click the Save Configuration and Return link. Leave this field blank to return an unlimited number of records. enter a number between 1 and 1000 to set the maximum number of records displayed according to the sorting applied. In the Records Returned text box.6. . Enabling the list search box List with Simple Search Setting List Sorting Options How to set the default sort order and direction of list records in the Forms & Lists module. 7.

button button l 5. Maximize the List Settings section.g. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . Z-A.1. At Paging.OR . E. A-Z.50: Select the number of records to be displayed per page. l 6. 4. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to update these settings and return to the module. select a column title from the drop-down box to set the column list record are sorted by . At Sort Direction. E. 3. At Sort Column. All records will be displayed on one page. 2. select from these options from the drop-down box: l <no paging>: Select to disable paging. 5 . Descending: Sorts records in ascending order.Click the Form and List Configuration button.Select Not Specified to sort records in the order they are entered.g. Setting column sorting and direction . This displays the Ascending beside the title of the sort column.OR . select from these options: l Ascending: Sorts records in ascending order. This displays the Descending beside the title of the sort column.

Email: Enter and display a valid email address.g. 8. 8 Link to User's Profile: Enter a username of a member of the site to display their name and a link to their user profile. Integer: Enter and display a whole number.g. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . 6/30/2006 9:00 AM Decimal: Enter and display a decimal number. See "Configuring a Form" 1.00 GBP. The following options are available: l Calculated Column: Requires an expression to be entered. 3.g. select the type of data that can be entered into and displayed for the field. Text: Enter and display any keyboard characters. 6/30/2006 Date and Time: Displays a selected date and an entered time. Look-Up Rich Text (Html): Enter and display any keyboard characters into the RTE. See "Advanced Calculated Column Options" Currency: Enter and display a currency amount. Note: Column titles are listed across the top of the table.g.Click the Form and List Configuration button.OR . john. E. 9.Creating a Form How to add one or more fields to create a form on the Form & List module. Separator: Displays a separator line. E.doe@domain. E. 4. enter a title for the column. Click the Add New Column link to add a new column. 5. This is the default option Time: Display an entered time. E.g. 2. In the Title text box.25 Download: Select and display a file for download. E. This field was not working at the time of writing. Go to the Data Table Setup section. 12:30 PM l l l l l l l l l l l l l l .com Image: Displays an image that has been uploaded to the web site. See "Setting the Payment Processor for Portal Hosting" Date: Display a selected date. E.g.g. At Type. E. This topic assumes you have already configured the module as a form.

At Display on List.domain. E. False. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box if this column is visible on the list.l True/False: Enter and display a true or false statement. "Setting Form Permissions" 8. Tip: See the Advanced Column Options section for this module for more column options. .com l 5. the check box to set the field as optional. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to set the field as mandatory. At Required. Optional. Click the Save Settings and Return link to return to the module. the check box if the column is only visible to Administrators. E. At Restricted Form Field. This is the default setting. This is the default setting. Optional. At Searchable. Repeat Steps 3-9 to add additional columns. l 9. http://www. select from the following options: (Note: This option is only available for some data types) l Check Uncheck the check box if this column searchable. button to the left of these details. the check box if the column is not searchable. Optional. l Uncheck the check box if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. select from the following options: l Check the check box if this column is visible to all users.g. This is the default setting. Click the Save 10. This is the default setting. l 6.g. 11. Optional. URL: Enter and display a valid URL. l 7.

select the type of data that can be entered into and displayed for the field. Click the Add New Column link to add a new column. See "Setting the Payment Processor for Portal Hosting" Date: Display a selected date. In the Title text box. "Configuring a List" 1.00 GBP.Click the Form and List Configuration button. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . 5. 4. 6/30/2006 l l .g. E.OR . Go to the Schema Definition . 9. The following options are available: l Calculated Column: Requires an expression to be entered.Data Table Setup section.Creating a Form Creating a List How to add one or more list columns to the Form & List module. See "Advanced Calculated Column Options" Currency: Enter and display a currency amount. enter a title for the column.g. This topic assumes you have already configured the module as a list. 3. Note: Column titles are listed across the top of the table. At Type. E. 2.

l Date and Time: Displays a selected date and an entered time. l . 12:30 PM True/False: Enter and display a true or false statement.g. Time: Display an entered time. Email: Enter and display a valid email address. E. E.g.g.g.domain. This is the default setting. At Display on List. l l l l l l l l l l l l l 5. False. E. E. E. the check box to set the field as optional.com. 8 Link to User's Profile: Enter a username of a member of the site to display their name and a link to their user profile.g. http://www.g.com Image: Displays an image that has been uploaded to the web site. Optional. This is the default setting. Note: Link tracking for Download links can be enabled on the Edit Record page. E. l 6. Note: Link tracking for URL's can be enabled on the Edit Record page. 8. john.g. URL: Enter and display a valid URL.doe@domain. Text: Enter and display any keyboard characters. This field was not working at the time of writing. Separator: This is a read only field which display the title above a horizontal line. Integer: Enter and display a whole number.50 Download: Select and display a file for download. the check box if the column is only visible to Administrators. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box if this column is visible on the list. E. 6/30/2006 9:00 AM Decimal: Enter and display a decimal number. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to set the field as mandatory. This is the default option. Use this type to separate data and format the layout of your list. Look-Up: Rich Text (Html): Enter and display any keyboard characters into the RTE. At Required.

This is the default setting. At Restricted Form Field. l 9. Click the Apply link beside the required template. l Uncheck the check box if the column is only visible to users/roles for Restricted fields as set in permissions. This is the default setting. Repeat Steps 3-9 to add additional columns. select from the following options: (Note: This option is only available for some data types) l Check Uncheck the check box if this column searchable. This topic assumes one or more form or list templates have been created. This will refresh the templates list to show any newly created templates. At Searchable. . View the available list of forms/lists. Optional. 11. select Scan For New Module Templates from the module actions menu. 3. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module. Add a Form & List module . button to the left of these details. Creating a list Applying a Template How to apply a form or list template to a Form & List module which has not yet been configured. "Saving a Template" 1. 2.Go to a Form & List module hasn't been configured. Tip: See the Advanced Column Options section for this module for more column options. Note: If no templates are listed.7. Optional.OR . Click the Save 10. the check box if the column is not searchable. select from the following options: l Check the check box if this column is visible to all users. "Setting List Permissions" 8.

Click the Form and List Configuration button. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module. Click the Up button to move a column one position up in the list or form .OR . Repeat Step 3 until all columns are ordered as desired. 2. .Click the Down button to move a column one position down in the list or form. 4. Go to the Data Table Setup section. 1. 5.Applying a Template Re-ordering List or Form Columns How to modify the order of columns in either form or a list created using the Form & List module. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . 3.OR .

Click the Edit button beside the column to be edited.OR . Warning.Click the Form and List Configuration button. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module. 2. Repeat Steps 2-4 to edit additional columns. 3. . 6. 4. Click the Save button. This enables editing of the column including any advanced column options. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . Do not modify the Type field of any column once data has been entered into a list it may cause an error. Edit columns as required.Re-ordering list or form columns Editing List or Form Columns How to edit one or more columns in a list or form created using the Form & List module. 1. 5.

deleting a column permanently deletes both the column and any data entered for that column. Click the Delete button beside the column to be deleted.Editing list or form columns Deleting List or Form Columns How to delete one or more columns in a list or form created using the Form & List module. 5.Click the Form and List Configuration button.OR . Click the OK button to confirm deletion. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Column?" 3. When this module is configured as a list. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . . Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module. 2. 4. Repeat Steps 2-3 to delete additional columns. 1.

the module displays the message: "No templates available.OR . Create a new Form or List based on a template from the list above. See "Viewing Form Records" This displays the following messages: "Please apply also "Create Record/Submit Form" permissions in Module Settings!"." Skip to Step 2C. Go to the Page Related Settings section. select from these options: l Form: Select to display a form.OR . 2. Records entered into the form can be viewed using the Show Records option.Deleting a column Configuring a Form How to configure the Form and List module as a form. At Appearance. you should also exclude its data from system wide search.Click the Form and List Configuration link on the module . a. . and "If the module is collecting confidential data. or design your own in Form and List Configuration" 1. Note: Before configuration. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu .Click the Form and List Configuration button.

l e. check the check box to restrict the viewing of the list by Permissions .l Form Above List: Select to display a form with a list below. "Setting Form Permissions" l .Uncheck for no notification. See "Setting Form Permissions" c. check to enable email notifications . l b. Records created using the form are displayed as a list below the form. l f. At Send Buttons. The module now displays Submit and Cancel options. Optional. Note: This setting can be overridden. select from these options: l Links: Select to use Text Links. select from these options: l Html Table: Select to use HTML tables. Form Below List: Select to display a form with a list below. At Form Layout. At List View. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module. l 3. d. "Creating a Form" Set which roles/users can submit the form and view form results. Full (100%): Displays edit controls as 100% width. select from these options: l Classic: Displays edit controls as a fixed value. HTML Buttons (Requires No JavaScript): Select to display HTML buttons for "Submit/Cancel". "Configuring Form Settings" 4.OR uncheck if all users who can see the Form can view the list. Records created using the form are displayed as a list above the form.OR . If these settings are not configured the default options are applied. Maximize the Form Settings section and modify settings as required. You must now complete the following: l Add one or more fields to your form. At Width of Edit Controls. DIV and Custom CSS: Select to use a CSS based edit form. At Email.

check the check box to enable email notifications .Click the Form and List Configuration button. l . a. 2.Configuring a Form Configuring a List How to configure the Form and List module as a list.Uncheck for no notification.OR . At Email.Click the Form and List Configuration link on the module . Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . Go to the Page Related Settings section. At Form Layout. DIV and Custom CSS: Select to use a CSS based layout.OR . At Appearance. Note: Before the Form & List module is configured it displays message: "Create a new Form or List based on a template from the list above. c. select from these options: l the check box Html Table: Select to use HTML tables. select List. or design your own in Form and List Configuration.OR . b." 1.

"Configuring Form Settings" 4. The module now displays the yellow warning " There are no columns defined." You must now complete the following: l Set the roles and users who can add and manage list records. Maximize the List Settings section and modify settings as required.d. l e. At Width of Edit Controls. select from these options: l Classic: Displays edit controls as a fixed value. Optional. HTML Buttons (Requires No JavaScript): Select to display HTML buttons for "Submit/Cancel". . select from these options: l Links: Select to use Text Links. "Setting List Permissions" Define the columns for this list. At Send Buttons. l 3. If these settings are not configured the default options are applied. Click the Save Configuration and Return link to return to the module. "Creating a List" l The following additional options are available for configuring a list: l See the "List Settings" section for full details of the optional settings available for configuring the layout of a list. Full (100%): Displays edit controls as 100% width. Setup the module inside the Form and List Configuration.

If you apply a template. Click the OK button. 1. the stored settings are applied.Click the Form and List Configuration button. Select Reset To Default Configuration from the Forms & Lists module actions menu. add a copy of the Form or List module to a new page. See "Adding an Existing Module (Iconbar)" "Adding an Existing Module (RibbonBar)" Resetting to the Default Configuration How to reset the configuration of a form or list to the default configuration on the Forms & Lists module. If you add the module also on a second page.Saving Configuration As Default How to save the configuration of a form or list which you have created as the default configuration the Forms & Lists module. All Users Re-ordering List Records How to re-order list records by column on the Form & List module.OR . Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . The configuration is now saved as the default. as it allows you to store two setups in one template. the tab module settings are still empty and the saved default wins. 2. This displays the message "Are You Sure Wish To Reset All Page Related Settings For This Module?" 3. Click on the linked [Column Name] to reorder list records by that column. Select Save Configuration As Default from the Forms & Lists module actions menu. 1. Select Form and List Configuration from the Form and List module actions menu . It has no influence on new modules. It is also helpful for templates. Tip: To use this. though the tabmodulesettings win. . "Save Configuration as Default" simply copies all TabModuleSettings to ModuleSettings. 2. Note: This option may not be available for some lists.Click the Form and List Configuration button. 1. Form and List enables its real power if you place the (existing) module on several pages.OR .

Click the [Column Name] link a second time to reverse the order. Select 2.Tip: An Up (ascending) or Down (descending) arrow is displayed beside the selected sort column and indicates the sorting order. 1. Show Form link to return to the module. Select Show Records from the Form & List module actions menu. Form Editors Viewing Form Records How to view records which have been submitted to a form created using the Form & List module. Viewing Form Records Editing Form Records How to view and edit records which have been submitted to a form created using the Form & List module. . Click the Show Records from the Form & List module actions menu. 1.

Click the Submit link. The currency type is displayed to the right of the text box. This displays the "Your submission was successful.NET developer to write code to display data that is calculated. The currency type is set under Admin > Site Settings. 2004 2/12/2004 Any of the below time formats are acceptable and will display as 11:00 PM: l l l l l . Date and Time. Any of the below date formats are also acceptable. Editing a form record List Editors Overview of Data Types There are a number of different types of data that can be entered into a field when adding a record to a list created using the Form & List module. Edit the record as required.2. Currency: Enter an amount into the text box. Click the Edit button beside the record to be edited. Date. however I recommend using the Calendar link to avoid confusion: l n n 12 February 2004 12 Feb 2004 Feb 12 2004 Feb 12. 4. 3. Here is an overview of these types of data: n Calculated Column: This field permits an ASP." message. or Time: Date fields display the Calendar link to select a date and time field display a text box to enter the time.

Integer: Only whole numbers can be entered into an integer field. negative or zero amounts.o o o n 11pm 11:00pm 23:00 Decimal: Whole numbers and numbers with a decimal point can be entered.g. The ability to add rows may be restricted. E. Email: Any a valid email address can be entered. True/False: Check the check box to display the True the False icon. icon . Enter or select your data. Admin n Adding a List Record How to add a record to a list using the Forms & Lists module. Numbers containing a decimal point will be rounded up to the nearest two decimal point value.click the opens the Edit Record page. E. 1.458 will be displayed as 8.OR . 8. E.46 on the module however it will display as 8. User Profile: Enter the user's username. Any valid URL can be entered or a Page or File selected. Select Add New Record from the module actions menu . Use the UDT settings under Manage User Defined Table to set whether http:// is displayed for URL's.Uncheck the check box to display n n n n n n URL: Select or enter a URL using the Link tool. -8. 2. Numbers can be positive. Click the Update link.g.g. Numbers can be positive. Image: Select or upload an image using the Link tool for files. 0 Text: Any keyboard characters can be entered into a text field. 8.OR . negative or zero. 3.458 in edit mode. Add New Record link. Required fields are denoted by an asterisk ( * ). This .

3. Click the Update link. 4.click the opens the Edit Record page. enter the code displayed above the text box. strike the F5 key on your keyboard to view a new code. This . Note: The ability to add records may be restricted. Select Add New Record from the module actions menu . You should be this before entering your data. In the Security Code text box. as all data will be lost if you strike F5. Add New Record link.Adding a record to a list Adding a List Record when a Security Code is Required How to add a record to a list when a security code is required using the Forms & Lists module . Tip: If you cannot read the Security Code. Required fields are denoted by an asterisk ( * ). 1.OR . 2. Enter or select your data.

Click the Edit button beside the record. .Adding a record to a list when a security code is required Editing a List Record How to edit a record in a list in the Form & List module. Edit data as required. Click the Update link. 2. Note: The ability to edit rows may be restricted by users/roles or you may only be able to edit your own records. 3. 1.

2. This displays the XML data in a new Web browser window. Click the Back button on your Web browser to return to the page.Editing a list record Showing All Data as XML How to view the data of a list created using the Form & List module in XML format. This data can be saved and used as required. Show all list data as XML . 1. Select Show All Data As XML from the Form & List module actions menu.

This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 3. Click the Edit button beside the record to be deleted. 4. Note: The ability to delete rows may be restricted by users/roles or you may only be able to delete your own records. Select Delete All Records from the Forms & Lists module actions menu. Click the OK button. 1. 1.Deleting a List Record How to permanently delete a record from a list on a Form & List module. 3. Tip: This task can also be performed from the module actions menu on the Form And List Configuration page. This displays the message "Are You Sure Wish To Delete All Records Stored In This Table?" 2.OR .F5 key on your keyboard. . Repeat Steps 1-3 to delete additional records. Click the Refresh button . Click the OK button. Deleting a list record Deleting All List Records How to permanently delete all records from a list in the Forms & Lists module. 2. Optional. Click the Delete link.

1. Select Settings from the module actions menu .Deleting all rows Settings Enabling/Disabling CAPTCHA for Anonymous Users How to enable the CAPTCHA security field for unauthenticated user who are permitted to manage list records or submit a form on the Form & List module. 3. 2. l 4. select from the following options: l Check Uncheck the check box to enable CAPTCHA.OR . Select the Form and List Settings tab. At Force CAPTCHA control during edit for Anonymous users.Click the Settings button. the check box to remove CAPTCHA. . Click the Update link.

Enabling CAPTCHA for anonymous users CAPTCHA enabled .

Click the Settings button.Click the Settings button.Enabling/Disabling Entry of Markup Code Scripts How to enable filtering of data that contains markup code or scripts that is entered into a form or list on the Form & List module. Select Settings from the module actions menu . At Filter entry for markup code or script input. Select the Form and List Settings tab. 3. Select the Form and List Settings tab. 1.OR . Select Settings from the module actions menu .. At Hide System Fields even if "Display All Columns" permission is set.Uncheck the check box to remove filtering. 2. Click the Update link. Note: Filtering is always enabled for Anonymous users.OR . 4. . select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box to hide system fields. Click the Update link. 3.OR . the check box to display system fields. Enabling data filtering for lists and forms Hiding/Displaying System Fields How to hide or display system fields even if "Display All Columns" permissions are set for a form or list created using the Form & List module. Note: filtering is always enabled for Anonymous users. 2. 1. check the check box to enable filtering . l 4.

3.OR .Click the Settings button. At Negate permission/feature "Edit Also Restricted Columns" for Administrators. Select Settings from the module actions menu .Hiding System Fields Negating Unique Column Permissions for Administrators How to negate the "Display All Columns" and "Edit Private Columns" permission settings for a list created using the Form & List module. At Negate permission/feature "Display All Columns" for Administrators. Select the Form and List Settings tab. the check box to apply "Edit Also Restricted Columns" as set. the check box to apply "Display All Columns" as set. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box if to negate "Edit Also Restricted Columns" settings for Administrators. 1. l 4. select from these options: l Check Uncheck the check box if to negate "Display All Columns" settings for Administrators. Click the Update link. For more on setting and modifying these permissions "Setting List Permissions" and "Setting Form Permissions" . l 5. 2.

4. or 1 to add a sample record.Negating Permissions Saving a Template How to save a template of a form or a list which has been created using the Form & List module. In the Max Records text box. Select Save as Template from the Form & List module actions menu. enter the maximum number of records to be including in the template. Typically you will enter 0 for no records.Module Template link. enter a name for the template. In the Description text box. 1. 2. Saving a List as a Template . Click the Save as Form and List . This opens the Form and List . 3. The template is now saved into the Templates folder of the site's File Manager.Module Template page. Saved templates will be listed on Form & List modules which are yet to be configured. enter a description for the template. 5. In the Name text box.

See "Setting List Permissions" 4. l . Edit Record. Role members/usernames are unable to edit form records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission. l l b. 2.OR . set the following for each role/username: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting. Permission Granted: Permission to delete form records is granted to role members/username. or if their username has been granted permission. This setting is in addition to the usual module editing permissions for all modules. Role members/usernames are unable to delete form records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission. or if their username has been granted permission. Permission Denied: Permission to submit the form is denied to role members/username. set the following for each role/username: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Permission Granted: Permission to submit the form is granted to role members/username.Setting Form Permissions How to set permissions to manage form columns and submit a form created using the Form & List module. or if their username has been granted permission. Create Record/Submit Form. At Permissions. "Negating Unique Column Permissions for Administrators" 1. complete these additional role and/or username permissions: a. Select the Permissions tab. l l c. At Permissions.Click the Settings button. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting. Select Settings from the module actions menu . Delete Record. Role members/usernames are unable to submit the form unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission. 3. set the following for each role/username: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Permission Denied: Permission to edit all form records is denied to role members/username. Permission Granted: Permission to edit all form record is granted to role members/username. set the typical DNN module permissions as usual.

l l e. set the following for each role/username: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. l l 5. Private columns is an Advanced Column Option for most column types. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting. Role members/usernames cannot view all columns (including those not checked as Visible) unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission. set the following for each role/username: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Edit Also Restricted Columns. or if their username has been granted permission. Permission Denied: Permission to view all columns (including those not checked as Display On List) is denied to role members/username. Role members/usernames cannot edit restricted columns unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission. Permission Granted: Permission to edit restricted columns is granted to role members/username. See "Negating Unique Column . Click the Update link. This setting is in addition to the usual module editing permissions for all modules. Permission Denied: Permission to edit restricted columns is denied to role members/username. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting. Permission Granted: Permission to view all columns (including those not checked as Display On List) is granted to role members/username. d. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting. Setting Form Permissions Setting List Permissions How to set permissions to manage records and columns for lists created using the Form & List module. or if their username has been granted permission. Display All Columns.l Permission Denied: Permission to delete form records is denied to role members/username.

Display All Columns. Permission Denied: Permission to add a new record is denied to role members/username. Select Settings from the module actions menu . Edit Record. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting. set the following for each role/username: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. complete these additional role and/or username permissions: a. Permission Denied: Permission to delete list records is denied to role members/username. or if their username has been granted permission. set the following for each role/username: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting. Role members/usernames are unable to add new records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission.Permissions for Administrators" Tip: You may need to select <All Roles> at Filter By Group to view the correct permissions. set the following for each role/username: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Permission Granted: Permission to delete list records is granted to role members/username. Permission Granted: Permission to add a new record to the list is granted to role members/username. set the following for each role/username: . Select the Permissions tab. 2. Permission Granted: Permission to edit all list record is granted to role members/username. See "Setting Module Permissions" 4. At Permissions. l l c. Role members/usernames are unable to edit list records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission. Role members/usernames are unable to delete list records unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting. or if their username has been granted permission. Delete Record.OR . Create Record/Submit Form. 1. 3. l l b. set the typical DNN module permissions as usual. At Permissions.Click the Settings button. l l d. or if their username has been granted permission. Permission Denied: Permission to edit all list records is denied to role members/username.

OR . 2. Click the Update link. Select the Form and List Settings tab. Permission Denied: Permission to edit private/restricted columns is denied to role members/username. Role members/usernames cannot view all records (including those not checked as Display On List) unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission. Select Settings from the module actions menu .l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Permission Granted: Permission to edit private/restricted columns is granted to role members/username. 1. Permission Granted: Permission to view all list records (including those not checked as Display On List) is granted to role members/username. l l e. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting. or if their username has been granted permission. l l 5. set the following for each role/username: l Not Specified: Permissions are not specified. Edit Also Restricted Columns. Private columns is an Advanced Column Option for most column types. . or if their username has been granted permission. Role members/usernames cannot edit private/restricted columns unless they belong to another role which has been granted permission. Managing Additional List Permissions on the Form & List Module Enabling/Disabling Users to Only Manage Their Own Records How to limit users to only managing their own records in lists on the Forms & Lists module. Permission Denied: Permission to view all list records (including those not checked as Display On List) is denied to role members/username.Click the Settings button. This setting overrides the Permission Granted setting.

"Setting Form Permissions" 4. enter the maximum number of records each user can add to the list. Click the Update link. Select the Form and List Settings tab. . In the Max. l Uncheck the check box to allow users to manipulate all items as set under permission. 2. Leave the field blank if no limit is set. 3. Records per User text box. Users can only modifying their own list records Setting Maximum Records Per User How to set the maximum records each user can create on a list using the Form & List module.3. select from these options: l Check the check box if users can only manipulate their own items.Click the Settings button.OR . Select Settings from the module actions menu . 1. At Users are only allowed to manipulate their own items. 4. Click the Update link.

Optional settings include the ability to quote an existing post. pinning a post.03 Minimum DNN Version: 06.00. notification of replies posts. as well as manage user settings and a wide range of Administration options.00 Features: ISearchable . lock posts.Setting Maximum Records Per User Forum About the Forum Module The Forum module manages multiple discussion groups and forums. Module Version: 05.00. enable post attachments. Each forum post includes a subject title and content.

com/Products/Development/Forge/ModuleForums/tabid/820/Default.aspx Issue Tracker: http://dnnforum. . 1.com/Community/Forums/tabid/795/forumid/7/scope/threads/Default.Click the Home link located top center above all forum groups.com/workitem/list/basic l l All Users Go to Forum Home Page How to go to the home page of the Forum module.codeplex.dotnetnuke.OR . Click the Home link located in the top left corner of the breadcrumb .The Forum Module Project Links l Project Home: http://www.dotnetnuke.aspx Support Forum: http://www.

forums. Optional. Click the Show No Replies or Show With Replies link (located under the Search box in the top right-hand corner of the module) to modify the threads are displayed. Optional. 2. Go to a Forum Group 1. . Change the order of threads from Oldest To Newest or Newest To Oldest by selecting either option from the drop-down box located in the bottom right corner of the page. 3. Click on the [Forum Group Name] link. Go to a Forum 1. threads and posts from the Home page of the Forum module. Click on the [Forum Name] link.Go to Forum Home Navigating to Forums & Forum Groups How to navigate to forum groups.

.Navigating Forums Navigating Using Breadcrumbs Breadcrumbing of forum names enables you to quickly view other forums without returning to the Forum Home.

Previous.Breadcrumbs enable users to quickly navigate Forums Navigating Threads How to navigate to threads which are not displayed in the Forum module 1. Navigate to the required Forum. Use the First. . See "Navigating to Forums & Forum Groups" 2. Next and Last links to navigate to threads not currently displayed.

3.Navigating Threads Searching One or More Forums How to search for posts within one or more forums using the Forum module. Skip to Step 4. In the Subject Contains text box. To change this date range: a. This default setting is for the previous one month. This opens the Search Forum page. At End. . Click the Search link located in the top center of the module. If this range is suitable and you don't wish to set any further criteria. click the Calendar b. 1. The following additional search criteria is available: a. phrase or number to limit the search to posts that contain the entered criteria in the subject. At Start. button and select a new end date. 2. click the Calendar button and select a new start date. At Post Dates set the dates you want to search through. enter a word.

g. At Threads Status. If a forum doesn't have a thread status set then this field is ignored. The search results are now displayed and the search phrases. Click the Search link. enter a word. . phrase3) c. (phrase1. At Search In.b. 4. E. d. select a thread status to limit your search to threads of that status. by separating them with a comma. phrase or number to limit the search to posts that contain the entered criteria in the body of the post. phrase2. Resolved. click the Maximize button beside a forum group to view the related forums and check the check box against one or more individual forums. Options are: Any Status. If no results are displayed then no results were found. words are highlighted in yellow. You can search for individual phrases. In the Body Contains text box. or Informative. Unresolved.

2. The search results are now displayed and the search phrases. 3. enter your search criteria. . words are highlighted in yellow. Navigate to the required forum. 1. In the Search text box. If no results are displayed then no results were found.Search Results Displayed in Forum Module Searching a Single Forum How to search for a post within a single forum. Click the Search button.

See "Navigating to Forums & Forum Groups" 2. . Click on the [Thread Name] link to open the thread and view the related posts. Navigate to the Forum where the post has been added.Searching a Single Forum Viewing any Post How to view a post that has been posted to a Forum. 1.

See "Go to Forum Home Page" 2. . or 48 hours. 12. select to view posts added within either the last 6. 24. 1. Go to the Forum Home page.Viewing any post Viewing Latest Posts How to view only the latest posts to all forums within the Forum module. At View Latest. Viewing Latest Posts Filtering Threads from a Single Forum How to filter the threads which are displayed for a single forum.

Filtering Threads from a Single Forum Viewing a Forum as an RSS Feed How to view a forum as an RSS feed using the Forum module. All Days. Past Two Weeks. Navigate to the required forum. This displays all matching threads. Past Month. At Display Thread From (located in the bottom right corner of the module). See "Navigating to Forums & Forum Groups" 2. select a timeframe to filter thread by from these options: Today. Past Three Days. Past Year. Past Week.1. Past Three Months. Navigate to the required Forum. See "Navigating to Forums & Forum Groups" . 1.

. This displays the RSS feed. Click the RSS button located at the bottom right of the module.1.

or restricted to authenticated user. 1. Note: Attachment download may be disabled. 3. The attachment is displayed below the body of the post. Click on the Attachment as required. icon or the [Attachment Name] link and then save or open the attachment . 2. Navigate to the required post. enabled for all users.Downloading a Post Attachment How to download an attachment associated with a post on the Forum module. If the message "Login to download attachment" is displayed. anonymous download is not permitted. In this case you must login to download the attachment.

Select My Posts from the module actions menu . . Click on the [Post Title] link to view the associated thread. 1. 2. This displays a list of your posts.Click the My Posts link in the top center of the Forum module.OR .Downloading an Attachment Forum Members Viewing your Posts How a forum member can view all of their posts to the Forum module. Optional.

This tutorial covers the basic options which are available when the default settings are applied to the Forum module. Adding a Forum Post (Basic) How to add an entry (commonly known as a post) to a forum in the Forums module. Navigate to the forum where you want to add the new post.Viewing Your Posts Tip: When viewing a thread. Click the New Thread link. . you can order it from Oldest To Newest or Newest To Oldest by selecting either option from the drop-down box located in the bottom right corner of the page. 1. See "Navigating to Forums & Forum Groups" 2.

check response. Typically this option is only selected when an existing post is answered. Informative: Select if the post provides information. therefore choose a subject that best describes the purpose and content of the post. select one of the following options: l (None Specified): Select for no status to be displayed. 4. . select one or more terms associated with this thread. l l l 7. enter the subject of this post. the check box if you wish to receive an email when the post has a 6. Click the Preview link to preview the post. Optional. Optional. Optional. 8. click the Return To Edit link. In the Subject text box. If you wish to edit it further. See "About the Editor" 5. enter the body of the post. At Thread Status. At Notification.3. This becomes the title of this post as it appears in the forum. In the Editor. Resolved: Select if the post is resolved or resolves a question. Unresolved: Select if the post asks a question requiring resolution. This is the default option. At Terms.

click the Return To Forum link. If the post requires moderation a message is displayed explaining the moderation process. Click the Submit link. In this case. . If the post does not require moderation it is immediately added to the forum and is now displayed to you.9.

enter the body of the post. enter the subject of the thread. 3. select from these options: l To attach an attachment upload which was completed for this session or previously terminated sessions. Note: You can . 5. select it from the Uploaded Attachments window. In the Editor. This tutorial covers the optional fields which can be enabled by Forum Administrators (See "Setting Forum Options" and "Setting Forum Permissions") 1.The Newly Added Post Adding a Forum Post (Advanced) How to add an entry (commonly known as a post) to a forum in the Forums module. 4. This will be the title of the post as it appears in the forum so choose a subject that best describes the purpose and content of the post. Navigate to the forum that you want to add the a new post to. Click the New Thread link. The following optional settings may also be available: a. In the Subject text box. See "Navigating to Forums & Forum Groups" 2. At Attachments.

l l l f. At Terms click the drop-down box and then check the check box beside a term which relates to this post. d. c. If the post does not require moderation it is immediately added to the forum and is now displayed to you. If you wish to edit it further. Repeat the above step to associate additional terms. At Notification. Typically this option is only selected when an existing post is answered. To upload a new attachment. If the post requires moderation a message is displayed explaining the moderation process. At Pinned. . by selecting it from the list and then clicking the Delete l button. check the check box to 'pin' this post above existing posts in this forum. 6. This is the default option. check the check box to prevent others from replying to this post or uncheck check box to permit replies. At Locked. At Thread Status. click the Browse button and select the file to be attached from your computer and then click the Upload link. or uncheck the check box to have the post appear in date/time order as is typical. click the Return To Forum link. click the Return To Edit link. Optional. Click the Submit link. Informative: select if the post provides information. i. Click the Preview link to preview the post. 7. Resolved: select if the post is resolved or resolves a question. check the check box to be notified when a reply is made to this post or uncheck the check box to disable notification. Unresolved: select if the post asks a question requiring resolution.delete an uploaded file. select one of the following options: l the (None Specified): select for no status to be displayed. b. In this case. e.

. Note: Post editing may be restricted to a number of minutes following the original posting. See "Viewing your Threads" 2. View your threads. This opens the Add/Edit Post page. 1.Adding a Post Including Attachments and Optional Settings Editing your Forum Posts How a forum member can edit their own posts on the Forum module. Locate the required post and then open it by clicking on the [post title] link. 3. Click the Edit link located to the right of the post title.

The post is immediately added to the forum and displayed to you. Editing Your Post Related Topics: l See "Editing Global User Settings" Quoting a Post How to quote an existing forum post when replying it on the Forum module. Click the Submit link. 1. See "Viewing any Post" . See "Adding a Forum Post (Advanced)" 5.4. Locate and open the required post. Edit the subject or body or attach files as required. Quoting adds the name of the poster and the content of the post to the post you are adding.

2. check response. Optional. This opens the Add/Edit Post page which displays the quoted post in the Editor. In the Editor. Click the Quote link located to the right of the post title. the check box if you wish to receive an email when the post has a . At Notification. add your post in reference to the quote. 3. 4.

5. If the post requires moderation a message is displayed explaining the moderation process. Click the Submit link. If the post does not require moderation it is immediately added to the forum and is now displayed to you. .

1.The Quoted Post Replying to a Post How to reply to a post in the Forum module. Locate and open the required post. See "Viewing any Post" .

Navigate to the post. See "Viewing any Post" . enter your post. any attachments and set optional fields as required See "Adding a Forum Post (Advanced)" 4. Optional. In the Editor.2. Click the Submit link. This opens the Add/Edit Post page which displays the post in the Editor. Note: This option may be disabled. 5. At Notification. Click the Reply link located top right above the post. 1. This sends a report email to the associated Forum Moderators/Administrators. 3. the check box if you wish to receive an email when the post has a Replying to a Post Reporting a Post How to report an inappropriate post on the Forum module. check response.

Click the Report Post link.2. 3. At Email Template. select the reason for reporting the post from these options: l Post is Duplicate Post is Against Policy Post is Spam l l . This opens the Report Post page.

Mouse over the . Click the OK button to confirm. Optional. 4. icon. This displays the message "Are you sure you want to report this post?" 5. Click the Report Post link. The post now displays the Report Warning icon to view the number of reports against this post. In the Emailed Response text box. edit email message.l Post Off Topic Post Contains Profanity Post Contains Excessive Advertising l l 4.

Locate and open the required post. Click the Delete link located to the right of the post title.A Reported Post Deleting a Forum Post How authorized users can permanently delete a post from the Forum module. 1. . See "Viewing any Post" 2.

b. In the Emailed Response. At Email Template. check the check box to email the poster. . Optional.3. c. select the reason why the post is being deleted. Optional. At Email User. edit the message to be emailed to the poster. Complete this step to send email notification to the poster that this post has been deleted: a.

1. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 5.Click the My Threads link in the top center of the Forum module. Select My Threads from the module actions menu .4.OR . Click the OK button to confirm. . Deleting a Post Viewing your Threads How a forum member can view all of their threads to the Forum module. Click the Delete link.

Optional. Threads with a bookmark are listed in your User Settings Control Panel. Adding a Bookmark to a Thread How to add a bookmark to a thread in the Forum module. . Click on the title of a thread to view it in full. Tip: When viewing a thread. you can order it from Oldest To Newest or Newest To Oldest by selecting either option from the drop-down box located in the bottom right corner of the page.2.

Locate and open the required thread.1.Click the Remove From Bookmarks button to remove the bookmark. In the top right-hand corner of the module. Click the Add To Bookmarks button to add a bookmark . See "Viewing any Post" 2. Note: Ratings may be disabled on some or all forums. Locate and open the required thread. . 1. Rating a Thread How to add a rating to a thread in the Forum module. See "Viewing any Post" 2. a series of Stars are displayed.OR .

3. Moderators require moderate permissions on the particular forum to move a thread. "Viewing any Post" . See "Setting Forum Permissions" 1. The Rated Thread Moving a Thread How to move a thread to a new forum in the Forum module. This adds your rating to all existing ratings and displays the average rating on the thread. Click on the star rating that you want to give. Locate and open the required thread.

check the check box associated with the new forum for this new thread. 3.Uncheck the check box for no email notification. check the check box to notify all users participating in this thread that this thread has been moved . At New Forum. Optional.OR . 5. Click the Move Thread link. See "Setting Forum Permissions" 1. At Email Users of Thread Move. Splitting a Thread How to split a post from its current thread and start it as a new thread in the Forum module. This opens the Move Thread page. Locate and open the required post. 4. Moderators require moderate permissions on the particular forum to split a thread. Click the Move link beside the post. See "Viewing any Post" .2.

g.2. Optional.OR .Uncheck the check box to only include the post selected for splitting. 3. . check the check box associated with the new forum for this split thread. At Include Post In New Thread. At Email Post Authors. Optional. At New Forum. The first post listed here.OR . At Splitting Post. 5. 6. Click the Split link beside the post.Uncheck the check box for no email notification. E. check the check box to notify all users participating in this thread that this thread has been moved . This displays the Split Thread page. you can view the title of the first post of the new thread being created by splitting this existing one 4. check the check box to include other posts in this thread .

or Informative. Click the OK button to confirm. Locate and open the required post. At the (None Specified) drop-down box. Note: This option may be disabled. select either None Specified. Splitting a Thread Setting Thread Status How to set the status of a thread in the Forum module. Unresolved. Click the Split Thread link. This setting can be a useful housekeeping tool which helps users quickly identify when a post is informative or when a question is or isn't answered. See "Viewing any Post" 2.7. . This displays the message "All Posts which are not approved and are being split into the new thread will be approved during the split!" 8. 1. Resolved.

Click the My Settings link. The Control Panel > Overview window is displayed. In the right-hand panel. This displays your User Profile for this site. 2. In the right-hand panel. 1. 2. select Profile > Edit Signature. . Where an alternate non-core module is used. Note: This tutorial explains how to manage your user profile when the Forum module uses the core DNN User Profile. select Profile > Edit Profile. This displays the Edit Signature page. Select My Settings from the module actions menu . 3. Select My Settings from the module actions menu .Setting Thread Status Editing your Forum Profile How to edit your user profile via the Forum module. you must follow instructions provided by your module developer from Step 2.OR . The Control Panel > Overview window is displayed. This opens the User Settings page. Modify your profile as required.OR . 1."Managing your User Credentials" or "Managing your Profile Photo" Editing your Forum Signature How to edit your forum signature using the Forum module. This opens the User Settings page. See "Managing your User Profile".Click the My Settings link.

select HTML or Text. Optional. enter the number of threads to be displayed on one page at one time. Click the Preview link to preview the signature. At Moderator Emails.OR . Editing Your Signature (This image displays Signature in Preview mode) Editing your Forum Settings How to manage your forum settings using the Forum module. check the check box if the users will receive email notification of new posts awaiting moderation . 3. Go to the Forum Administration page. 8. a.Uncheck the check box disable. check the check box if the users will receive email notification of their own posts . 5. At Enable "My Post" Notify. select Forum > Edit Settings. Basic HTML formatting may be disabled.OR .3. This displays the User Forum Settings window. 1. Click the Edit link to edit this signature. 4. 4. In the Signature text box. 6. In the Threads Per Page text box. Note: Authenticated Users can override this setting for themselves on the My Settings page. At Notify on Reply. check the check box if the users will receive notification of replies in threads they have posted in. add/edit your signature. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. 7. Note: Authenticated Users can override this setting for themselves on the My Settings page. The default setting is 5. This displays a preview of the signature on this page. Note: They can opt-out of notifications when they post . . Click the Update link.Uncheck the check box disable. 5. In the Posts Per Page text box. The default setting is 10. In the left-hand panel. enter the number of posts to be displayed on one page at one time.OR .Uncheck the check box disable. At Email Format.

click on the [Forum Name] link to go to that forum.9. At Clear All Read Status. l Go to Forum: In the Forum column. select Control Panel > Notifications. 1.Click the My Settings link. you can perform the following: l Remove Tracking: Click on the Delete button beside a thread to stop tracking it. This opens the User Settings page. Editing Your Forum User Settings Manage Notifications How to manage your notifications for forums and threads which you have chosen to track using the Forum module. This displays the Tracked Forums and Threads window with the Forums tab selected. click the Clear Read Status link to clear all read status for all forums and threads for this user.OR . The Control Panel > Overview window is displayed. In the right-hand panel. On the Threads tab you can perform the following: Managing Forum Bookmarks How to manage your thread bookmarks which you have chosen to track using the Forum module. l 4. On the Forums tab. 2. Select My Settings from the module actions menu . . 3. click on the [Date/Time] link to view the last post. 10. Click the Update link. View Last Post: In the Last Post column.

1. select Control Panel > Bookmarks. . 2. This displays Bookmarks window. click on the [Thread Name] link View Last Post: In the Last Post column. This opens the Moderator Control Panel. In the right-hand panel.Click the Moderate link. 3.Click the My Settings link. Select My Settings from the module actions menu . Select Moderate from the module actions menu . You can perform these options: l Remove Bookmark: Click on the Delete button beside a bookmark l Go to Thread: In the Subject column. The Control Panel > Overview window is displayed.OR .OR . click on the [Date/Time] link l Related Topics: l See "Adding a Bookmark to a Thread" Forum Moderators Navigating to the Moderator Post Queue 1. This opens the User Settings page.

Click the Approve link beside the post to be approved. select Post Queue. This displays a summary list of forums with posts awaiting approval. In the left-hand panel. 3. Approving a Post How forum moderators and Administrators can approve a post to a moderated forum. See "Navigating to the Moderator Post Queue" 2. In the Forum column. . Go to the moderator post queue. 1. click on a [Forum Name] link to view posts requiring moderation in that forum.2.

1. 5. click on a [Forum Name] link to view posts requiring moderation in that forum. Edit the post in the Editor. Click the Edit link beside the required post. 1. Spelling or grammatical errors. Approving and Editing a Post How forum moderators and administrators can approve a post and edit the content of the post. In the Forum column. Go to the moderator post queue. 2.g.4. This opens the Add/Edit Post page. E. Click the Cancel link to return to the module. . Repeat Step 3 to approve additional posts. See "Navigating to the Moderator Post Queue" 2.

E. the check box beside a term which relates to i. Click the Submit link. c. check group. 4. update the status as required. . the check box to set this post to always appear at the top of the related forum the check box if you wish to be notified of replies to this post. Click the Preview link to preview the edited post. check d.3. b.g. Optional. Repeat the above step to associate additional terms. At Terms. At Pinned. Optional. At Attachments. e. Edit one or more of these settings: a. Informative f. modify the attachments if required. At Thread Status. click the drop-down box and then check this post. At Locked check the check box to disable replies to this post. 5. At Notification.

Approving and Editing a Moderated Post Approving and Replying to a Post How to approve a post and add reply to the post. See "Navigating to the Moderator Post Queue" . Go to the moderator post queue. 1.

2. Optional. 7. c. Click the Reply link beside the required post. This opens the Add/Edit Post page. At Pinned. 5. In the Forum column. Enter your reply in the Editor. b. modify the attachments if required. 6. the check box to set this post to always appear at the top of the related forum the check box if you wish to be notified of replies to this post. click on a [Forum Name] link to view posts requiring moderation in that forum. Add/set one or more of these settings: a. check group. At Notification. At Locked. . At Attachments. check d. check the check box to disable replies to this post. Click the Submit link. 3. Click the Preview link to preview the edited post. 4. Optional.

In the Forum column. click on a [Forum Name] link to view posts requiring moderation in that forum. 1. Go to the moderator post queue.Approving a Moderated Post and adding a Reply Approving and Splitting a Post awaiting Moderation How to split a post in the moderation queue from its current thread and start it as a new thread in the Forum module. See "Navigating to the Moderator Post Queue" 2. .

At Notification. Optional. These posts never appear on the site. the check box to set this post to always appear at the top of the related forum the check box if you wish to be notified of replies to this post. Go to the moderator post queue. Click the Submit link. c. Deleting a Post awaiting Moderation How a forum moderator or an Administrator can delete a forum post in the moderation queue. This opens the Add/Edit Post page. Click the Preview link to preview the edited post. At Locked. Click the Split link beside the required post. 6. At Pinned. modify the attachments if required. See "Navigating to the Moderator Post Queue" 2. . Enter your reply in the Editor. A response explaining the reason for the deletion is emailed to the poster. check e. check d. 5. Add/set one or more of these settings: a. b. At Notification. click on a [Forum Name] link to view posts requiring moderation in that forum.3. Optional. the check box if you wish to be notified of replies to this post. In the Forum column. At Attachments. 7. check group. 1. 4. check the check box to disable replies to this post.

edit the text of the email if required. 5. At Emailed Response. At Email User. Optional. Click the OK button to confirm. At Email Template.3. the check box to email the poster . Click the Delete link. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 8. 4. 6. This populates the Emailed Response text box below with a standard message for the selected reason. check if no email is required.OR . Click the Delete button. Optional. .Uncheck the check box 7. This opens the Delete Post page where you can edit and/or view the email template sent to the poster. select the reason why the post is being deleted.

select Reported Posts. Select Moderate from the module actions menu . 2. In the left-hand panel. . click on a post title link to view the post in full. This opens the Moderator Control Panel.OR . 3. 1.Deleting a post awaiting moderation Managing Reported Posts How to manage posts that have been reported. This displays a summary list of reported posts. In the Post column.Click the Moderate link.

. In the left-hand panel. click on a user name link to view the users profile. Optional. select Users > Banned. 2.4. This displays the Viewing Banned Users How to view a list of users who are been banned from the Forum module. Click the Click To Address Report This Report Has Been Addressed icon. 3. 1. Select Moderate from the module actions menu .Click the Moderate link. 5. In the User column. Related Topics: l See "Editing Global User Settings" Viewing Reported Users How to view the profile of users who are been reported on the Forum module. Address the reported post as required. button to address this reported post. This displays a summary list of banned users. This opens the Moderator Control Panel.OR .

1. 3.OR Uncheck the check box to disable. . skip to Step 5. Select Moderate from the module actions menu . In the User column. check the check box to enable word filtering in post body . check the check box to enable word filtering in the subject of posts . 4. 3. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. In the left-hand panel. 5. This opens the Moderator Control Panel.Click the Moderate link.OR . select Users > Reported. click on a user name link to view the users profile. select Content > Filter Settings. In the left-hand panel. At Filter Subjects. Forum Administrators Content Enabling/Disabling Word Filtering How to enable or disable the filtering of words in the body of posts. including an option to also filter the subject of posts.OR . At Enable Word Filter.Uncheck the check box to disable. 2. This displays the Filter Management window. Go to the Forum Administration page. If this option is unchecked. 1. Click the Update link. This displays a summary list of reported users.

Leave blank to remove the filter word without replacing it. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2.Enabling Word Filtering Adding a Filtered Word How to set words to be filtered from posts and either removed from the post or replaced with an alternate word in forum posts. 4. This displays the Filtered Word Management window. Go to the Forum Administration page. 1. In the left-hand panel. enter the word to be filtered. In the Replacement text box. enter the replacement word . . In the Filter text box. select Content > Filter Words.OR . 3.

In the Filter column. In the left-hand panel. The newly added filtered word is now displayed in the Filtered Word List on this Tip: You can filter any content such as numbers and phrases. button. Click the Add page. Editing Filtered Words How to edit a filtered word and/or its replacement word in the Forum module. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. . Click the Edit button. locate the filtered word to be edited.5. 3. 1. This displays the Filtered Word Management window. Go to the Forum Administration page. select Content > Filter Words. See "Filtering Filter Words" 4.

Select the first letter of the filtered word. Note: Use the linked page numbers to navigate to words displayed on another page. This displays the Filtered Word Management window. Edit the Filter and/or the optional Replacement word as required.1. 3. . At the Filter Words drop-down list. 2. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. Editing Filtered Words Filtering Filter Words How to view all filtered words or filter them by the first letter of the filtered word for the Forum module.OR . Click the Update button. select Content > Filter Words. This displays matching results in alphabetical order. 1. select All to view all words. Go to the Forum Administration page. In the left-hand panel.

See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. In the left-hand panel. In the Filter column. . locate the word to be deleted.Filtering Filtered Words Tip: The filter will continue to be applied until you either click the All link or navigate to another section and then return to the Filtered Word Management section. Click the OK button to confirm. select Content > Filter Words. Deleting a Filtered Word How to delete a filtered word from the Forum module. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 5. 3. Click the Delete button. See "Filtering Filter Words" 4. 1. Go to the Forum Administration page. This displays the Filtered Word Management window.

In the Rating Scale text box.Uncheck the check box to dis- 4. The default is 5. This sets the maximum number of stars.Deleting a Filtered Word Managing Rating of Threads How to enable or disable the users to rate threads and optionally replace the star Note: Rating must be enabled on individual forums. . Go to the Forum Administration page. select Content > Rating.OR . At Enable. Note: Changing this will not update existing post ratings. the check box to enable users to rate a thread . This displays the Rating Management window. 3. See "Setting Forum Options" icon(s) with text. enter a number that represents the highest rating for a thread. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. Click the Update link. In the left-hand panel. 1. check able. 5.

In the Count text box (left). If the field is left blank then the title of "1st Level Poster" is displayed. enter a title to be displayed for users without any ranking. .OR . Note: If the Enable Images check box above is checked. the ranking images will display in the user posts avatar area. check the check box to enable ranking . 8. enter/edit a title to be displayed for this level of ranking. Go to the Forum Administration page. Repeat Steps 5 to manage 2nd-10th ranking fields. In the Title text box (right).OR . If this option is checked then the images displayed on this page will be used. This displays the Ranking Management window. Optional. 3. Note: If the Enable Images check box above is checked then this option is not used. At Enable. In the No Ranking text box. In the left-hand panel. select Content > Ranking. At Enable Images. edit the number of posts required for a poster to rank as 1st. If enabled. Click the Update link. then this option is not used.Uncheck the check box to display ranking as text. 7.Uncheck the check box to disable. 1. 5.Enabling Thread Rating and Setting Maximum Number of Stars Managing Forum User Ranking How to enable or disable ranking of forum users and set the number of posts required to achieve ranking positions in the Forum module. 4. At 1st Rank complete the following: a. 6. b. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. check the check box to display ranking as images .

Configuring Post Ranking Settings Managing Popular Thread Status How to set the number of times a thread must be viewed and replied to be marked as a popular thread in the Forum module.leave blank if the number of views is not taken into account. The default setting is 200. Click the Update link. Go to the Forum Administration page. 4. . 5. enter the number of views required before a thread is marked as popular . In the Active Within text box. 6. This displays the Popular Status Management window. enter the number of days since the last post for a thread to be marked as popular.OR . 1. In the Reply Count text box.leave blank if the number of replies not taken into account. The default setting is 10. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. 3. enter the number of replies required before a thread is marked as popular OR . In the View Count text box. The default setting is 7. In the left-hand panel. select Content > Popular Status.

Setting thread status is optional. 1. check Administrators . Click the Update link. the date and time when the Forum content was last indexed (added to DNN search) is displayed. fortnightly or monthly task.Uncheck the check box to disable. 8. 4. Go to the Forum Administration page. At Enable Thread Status. This displays the General Configuration window.OR . If enabled. thread status can be set as Unresolved. Resolved or Informative. select Control Panel > General. check the check box to use a plain text box to enter posts . At Disable HTML Posting. 7. 5.OR . .Uncheck the check box to enable user to report any post to moderators and/or the check box to disable. In the left-hand panel. At Enable Post Abuse. check the check box to enable users to set the status of any posts they began . To re-index forum content click the Reset link.Uncheck the check box to use the Rich Text Editor and enable HTML posts. At Aggregated Forums.OR . At Date Last Indexed. 6. This will re-index all forum content again and the new date will be displayed. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. 3. Depending on how busy your Forum is you may like to make this a weekly.Managing Popular Thread Status Control Panel Configuring General Forum Settings How to configure the general settings of the Forums module such as the forum name and enable other basic setting. check the check box to enable an aggregated view of threads in all public forums .Uncheck the check box to disable.OR .

4. Note: This is not necessary for most installs. 7. select Control Panel > Community. 6. This parameter is required by the non-core module. enter a value to be passed in combination with Parameter Name for the non-core module.OR . This exposes additional settings . 8. 5. Go to the Forum Administration page. Click the Update link. In the Profile Parameter Value text box. In the Profile Parameter Name text box. This displays the Community Management window. At Enable External Profile. 3.General Configuration Settings for the Forum Configuring the Forum Community Management Settings How to enable the use of an external non-core module to display profile information. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. enter the extra URL property for the non-core module. . In the left-hand panel. In the Profile User Parameter text box. enter the URL parameter associated with the UserID necessary for user profiles. At Profile Page. The URL parameter name will be passed in combination with the value for external profile pages. 1. select the page that contains your profile module. check the check box to enable use of a non-core module for user profiles.Uncheck the check box to disable external profile and skip to Step 8.

check the check box to enable files to be downloaded by unauthorized users . 1. the 4. 7. check the check box to enable attachments . See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2.config. domain. 3.OR . edit the location where attachments are stored in the root directory of this portal's File Manager. the size set here should be no larger than what is permitted in the web.Forum Community Management Settings Enabling/Disabling Attachments How to enable or disable the attaching of files to forum posts. In the Attachments Path text box.Uncheck the check box to disable. Go to the Forum Administration page. Note: File permissions also control access to files. Note: Additionally. At Anonymous Downloads.com/Portals/0/ 6. . Click the Update link. 5. In the left-hand panel. In the Max Attachment Size text box. I.Uncheck check box to disable file attachment and skip to Step 7.OR . edit the maximum size for attachments in KB. At Enable File Attachment. This displays the Attachment Management window. as well as configure additional attachment settings on the Forums module. select Control Panel > Attachments.e.

4. Click the Update link. 6. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. In the Time To Live text box. The default value is 30 minutes. . 3. check the check box to enable RSS feeds for all public forums . 5. At Enable RSS Feeds. enter the frequency in minutes that the RSS is cached before refreshing. 1. enter the number of post threads to be displayed in the feed. This displays the RSS Management window. The default value is 20 threads.Managing forum post attachments Managing RSS Feeds How to enable or disable an RSS Feed being created for all public forums. In the left-hand panel. as well as configure related settings.Uncheck the check box to disable and skip to Step 6. select Control Panel > RSS. Go to the Forum Administration page.OR . In the Threads Per Feed text box.

12. check the check box to override the page keywords with ones pulled from within the module – OR .24. 5.Uncheck the check box to disable. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. view latest threads) typically seen when first viewing a page with the forum module placed on it . In the left-hand panel.OR . 3. check the check box to indicate to search engines that links entered in user posts should be indexed as part of this web site . select Control Panel > SEO. . check the check box to disable.Uncheck the check box to disable. 7.Manage RSS Feeds for Forums Configuring the Forum Search Engine Optimization How to configure Search Engine Optimization (SEO) settings on the Forum module. check the check box to override the page name with the forum name or thread name . 4. search engines).g.OR .48. the check box to override the page description – OR .Uncheck the check box to indicate that search engines should index these links as relevant to the site content and ranking. 1. Note: This applies to the links in initial group view (6. At Override Keywords. At Override Page Description.Uncheck the check box to disable. At Override Page Title. At User's Website No Follow.OR . At Latest Threads No Follow. Go to the Forum Administration page. check the check box to indicate that the destination hyperlinks in the initial group view SHOULD NOT be afforded any additional weight or ranking by user agents which perform link analysis upon web pages (E.Uncheck 6. This displays the SEO Management window. This option relates to both user posts and user profile.

4. This displays the Email Management section.Uncheck the check box to disable and use the address set in Step 3 above for all forums. In the Sitemap Priority text box. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2.8.Uncheck the check box to disable. 3. Configuring the Forum Search Engine Optimization Settings Email Managing Email Settings How to enable or disable email notifications for the Forum module as well as configure notification settings. In the Email Display Name text box.0 and 1. Click the Update link. See "Setting Forum Email" . check the check box to enable the From address to be set on individual forums. At Email Notifications. .OR . In the right-hand panel. 6.0). 9. enter the from email address for all outgoing forum emails. enter the friendly name to be used for outgoing email notifications from this forum. Go to the Forum Administration page. In the From Address text box. enter the SEO Sitemap priority per thread (this number must be between 0. check the check box to enable email notification for this module. skip to Step 9.OR . At Enable From Address Per Forum. The default is 0. This displays 3 additional settings.5. select Email > Email Settings. 5. If unchecked. 1. Note: This will only be enabled if the Forum SEO Sitemap provider is installed.

to send notifications using the schedule . At Email Template.OR - Managing email notifications from the Forum module Related Topics: l See "Enabling/Disabling Scheduled Tasks" Managing Email Templates How to modify the subject and body of the email notifications sent from the Forum module.OR . See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. 3. Click the Update link. check the check box to send a notification email to users when posts are edited . select Email > Templates. 8. At Enable Edit Emails. 6. 4. This displays the Email Template Management window. 9. 7. In the Text Email Body text box. Note: The following replacement tokens are available to use in the subject and body of emails: . In the HTML Email Body text box. select the template to be edited. 1. Go to the Forum Administration page.7. Click the Update link. In the left-hand panel.Uncheck the check box to disable. edit the text version of the email. edit the HTML version of the email. check box is checked Uncheck the check box this feature is disabled. 5. In the Email Subject text box. At Enable Email Queue. edit the name of the email subject.

[FORUMNAME] Name of the forum [POSTSUBJECT] Subject of the post [DATEPOSTED] Date of the post [POSTAUTHOR] Post Author [POSTBODY] Post Body [POSTURL] URL to view the post [GROUPNAME] Name of forum group [PROFILELINK] Link to users profile .

Managing Email Notification Templates Viewing Email Subscribers Report How to view the email subscriber report for the Forum module. .

In the left-hand panel. enter a name for the forum group. select Email > Subscribers. . See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. select Forums > Forum Manager. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. This displays details in the table below. one or more forums must be added to it. Users cannot actually post to a forum group. This displays the Forum & Group Management window. Select a report type for the drop-down box. In the left-hand panel. 1. Click the Add button. In the Group Name text box. Viewing Email Subscribers Report Forums Adding a Forum Group How to add a new forum group to the Forum module. Go to the Forum Administration page. 3. Once you have created a forum group. but rather to the forums within that group. 4. A forum group called Discussions which contains a forum called General is created by default. 3. A forum group is like a category which enable you to organize forums into one or more groups. This displays the Email Subscribers Report window. Go to the Forum Administration page.1.

5. 3. 4. . Edit the forum group name in the exposed text box. Click the Edit Group button beside the required forum group. Go to the Forum Administration page. 1. select Forums > Forum Manager.Adding a Forum Group Editing a Forum Group How to edit the name of a forum group. In the left-hand panel. This displays the Forum & Group Management window. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. Click the Update button.

This displays the Forum & Group Management window. In the left-hand panel. including all related forums and posts. or Move Down button beside a forum group to move it up or down one Reordering Forum Groups Deleting a Forum Group How to permanently delete a forum group. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. . 3. 1. Go to the Forum Administration page. select Forums > Forum Manager.Editing a Forum Group Re-Ordering Forum Groups How to modify the view order of forum groups on the Forum module. Click the Move Up position respectively.

In the left-hand panel. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. Ensure the Forum Group is minimized 4. In the left-hand panel. Maximize the Forum Group to which the forum will be added. 3. button. This displays the message "Are You Sure You Wish To Delete This Item?" 5. 3. Go to the Forum Administration page. Go to the Forum Administration page. See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. . Click the OK button to confirm. This displays the Forum & Group Management window. Deleting a Forum Group Adding a Forum How to add a new forum to the Forum module. Click the Delete as this exposes the Delete button. 1. This displays the Forum & Group Management section. select Forums > Forum Manager.1. select Forums > Forum Manager.

5. Optional. The new forum is now added to the selected group. Optional. 6. 12. Click the Add Forum button located in the title bar of the selected group. At Group. In the Description text box. The group selected at step 3 will be preselected. This displays the General Settings tab of the Edit Forum window. enter a name for the new forum. 10. 9. Optional.OR Uncheck the check box if the forum is disabled. 7. . At Parent Forum. Optional. See "Setting Forum Permissions". In the Forum Name text box. 8. re-select the Forum Group if required. "Setting Forum Options" or "Setting Forum Email" 11. Optional. At Forum is Enabled. check the check box if the forum to be displayed and allowing posting . Maximize the Forum Group to view the new forum. Click the Add link.4. enter a short description of the purpose of this forum and the intended content. select a parent for this forum.

Date Created.The Newly Added Forum Note: The Created By. Details of the Newly Added Forum on the Edit Forum page . Updated By User and Date Updated fields on the Edit Forum page are automatically populated when the forum is added.

1. 3. At Forum is Enabled.OR . Complete Steps 1-4 of "Editing a Forum" tutorial to access the Edit Forum page. Click the Edit Forum 5. 2. Editing a Forum Enabling/Disabling a Forum How to enable or disable a forum. the check box to enable this forum . 6. Disabled forums cannot be viewed and posted to. Note: An Enabled or Disabled icon to the right of the forum name indicates its current enabled or disabled status. In the left-hand panel. 1. select Forums > Forum Manager. Enabled forums are open for viewing to all those who can see it and posting for all those who are permitted to post to it. Maximize the Forum Group associated with the forum to be edited.Uncheck the check box to . See "Navigating to the Forum Admin Page" 2. Click the Update link. Edit any genera